Complete Product Catalog - Norman Equipment Co.
Complete Product Catalog - Norman Equipment Co.
Complete Product Catalog - Norman Equipment Co.
You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles
YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.
GK-1<br />
CATALOG-HANDBOOK<br />
TENTH EDITION<br />
Stocked &<br />
Distributed by<br />
NORMAN<br />
EQUIPMENT<br />
COMPANY<br />
800-323-2710<br />
-COMPLIANT<br />
MACHINE GUARDING<br />
SAFETY PRODUCTS<br />
• Programmable Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntroller<br />
• Safe Speed Monitors<br />
• Safety Interlock Switches<br />
• Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Sensors<br />
• Emergency Cable-Pull Switches<br />
• Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers<br />
• Safety Light Curtains<br />
• Electronic Safety Sensors<br />
• Serial Diagnostic Gateways<br />
• Hinged Safety Interlocks<br />
• Safety Edges/Bumpers<br />
• Safety-Rated Limit Switches<br />
• Safety Foot Switches<br />
• Safety Pressure Mats<br />
Turning Workplaces Into Safe Places ®
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design<br />
Stocked & Distributed by NORMAN EQUIPMENT COMPANY<br />
800-323-2710
TABLE OF CONTENTS<br />
Topic<br />
Page<br />
Alphanumeric <strong>Product</strong> Index<br />
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii<br />
About Schmersal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii<br />
Man-Machine Safeguarding <strong>Product</strong>s Selection Guides<br />
Section 1<br />
Keyed Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1<br />
Section 2<br />
Keyed Interlock Switches with Solenoid Latching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43<br />
Section 3<br />
Application Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75<br />
Section 4<br />
Emergency Cable-Pull Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95<br />
Section 5<br />
Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113<br />
AES Series Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147<br />
Section 6<br />
Pulse-Echo Based Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165<br />
Section 7<br />
Hinged Safety Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207<br />
Safety Rated Limit Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223<br />
Section 8<br />
Safety Light Curtains & Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259<br />
Section 9<br />
Safety Category 3 Pressure Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301<br />
Fail-To-Safe Safety Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309<br />
Section 10<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319<br />
Safety PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355<br />
Safe Speed <strong>Co</strong>ntrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363<br />
Appendices<br />
Selected Machine Safeguarding Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388<br />
Machine Safety Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393<br />
Selected <strong>Co</strong>nversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397<br />
NEMA, UL, CSA & IEC Ingress Protection Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398<br />
<strong>Co</strong>pyright © 2011 by SCHMERSAL All Rights Reserved.<br />
SCHMERSAL is continuously working to improve our product designs. Therefore we reserve the right to change product specifications/ratings<br />
and other information contained in this catalog without notice. Proper installation and use of our products remains the customer’s responsibility.<br />
Stocked & Distributed by NORMAN EQUIPMENT COMPANY<br />
800-323-2710<br />
i
ALPHANUMERIC PRODUCT INDEX<br />
<strong>Product</strong><br />
Series<br />
Page<br />
<strong>Product</strong><br />
Series<br />
Page<br />
AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147<br />
AZ15/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12<br />
AZ16zi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18<br />
AZ17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4<br />
AZ17zi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8<br />
AZ200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 166<br />
AZ3350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32<br />
AZ415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38<br />
AZM161 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50<br />
AZM170 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44<br />
AZM200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 172<br />
AZM415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70<br />
AZR31S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384<br />
AZS2305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368<br />
B25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82<br />
BNS16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132<br />
BNS33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118<br />
BNS33S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122<br />
BNS36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124<br />
BNS250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114<br />
BNS260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116<br />
BNS30 & BNS300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128<br />
BNS303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126<br />
BNS333 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130<br />
BNS-B20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136<br />
BZ16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134<br />
C50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256<br />
CSS16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144, 198<br />
CSS30S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 194<br />
CSS 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 188<br />
CSS 180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 182<br />
ES95 SB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214<br />
FWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370–380<br />
MZM100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 178<br />
PDMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364<br />
Protect PSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355<br />
S900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111<br />
SDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28<br />
SHGV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36<br />
SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309<br />
SEPK(G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92<br />
SLC, SLG & SLB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259<br />
SMS4, SMS5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301<br />
SRB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320<br />
SSW301HV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382<br />
ST14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2<br />
STS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76<br />
T.C 235/236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218<br />
TESF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208<br />
TESZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212<br />
TFA/TFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81<br />
TFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90<br />
TG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84<br />
TKF/TKM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62<br />
TVS335 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216<br />
TZF/TZM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58<br />
TZG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24<br />
TZKF/TZKM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66<br />
Z332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252<br />
Z/T235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224<br />
Z/T236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232<br />
Z/T335 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240<br />
Z/T336 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246<br />
ZQ700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96<br />
ZQ900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98<br />
ZS71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100<br />
ZS75S (Bidirectional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108<br />
ZS80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104<br />
ZSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88<br />
ii<br />
Stocked & Distributed by NORMAN EQUIPMENT COMPANY<br />
800-323-2710
ABOUT SCHMERSAL<br />
K.A. SCHMERSAL GmbH & <strong>Co</strong>. was founded as a family<br />
business in 1945. The firm initially focused on the design<br />
and manufacture of electromechanical switches for<br />
industrial applications.<br />
Our first products included heavy-duty, cast-encapsulated<br />
limit switches for (post-war) civil engineering and construction<br />
applications. This program quickly expanded to<br />
include:<br />
• grey cast iron limit switches<br />
• light metal limit switches<br />
• robust precision limit switches<br />
• spindle limit switches<br />
• gear motor switches<br />
• elevator switch gears<br />
• CENELEC position switches<br />
• miniature snap-acting switches, and<br />
• command devices for machine and crane control<br />
systems.<br />
With this early post-war product program, the firm quickly<br />
established itself as a specialist in monitoring, switching,<br />
and controlling elevators, material handling systems,<br />
machine tools, and other industrial equipment.<br />
Many of these initial products satisfied unique requirements<br />
for safety switches. Such products included:<br />
• explosion-proof switches for gasoline pumps<br />
• door contacts and locks for personnel/freight<br />
elevators<br />
• cable monitoring switches for mountain cablecar<br />
systems, and<br />
• snap-acting limit switches featuring positive-opening<br />
contacts for lignite diggers, construction cranes, and<br />
other machinery.<br />
Today the Schmersal Group has grown to include 5<br />
manufacturing facilities around the world, producing over<br />
20,000 different switching and control devices – making<br />
Schmersal one of the largest machine safety suppliers.<br />
The Schmersal product family has developed to include<br />
the latest designs in Electro-Mechanical Interlocks,<br />
Electronic Safety Sensors, Programmable Safety<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrollers, and Optoelectronic Safety devices.<br />
Headquartered in Wuppertal, Germany, the Schmersal<br />
Group of companies has direct operations in 17 countries<br />
employing over 1200 people around the world. A<br />
global reach, combined with our focus on Man-Machine<br />
Safety, enables Schmersal to remain committed to<br />
customer’s safety application requirements.<br />
This customer driven approach has given Schmersal the<br />
ability to continually develop products to meet the latest<br />
application needs and market trends around the world.<br />
SYSTEM SAFETY: PROTECTION<br />
FOR MAN AND MACHINE<br />
Safety requirements for workers in almost all industries<br />
have evolved to insure that safety in the workplace is<br />
no longer an option. Government organizations around<br />
the world have made worker safety a priority for companies<br />
which has drawn even greater attention to the topic<br />
of safety. The latest product developments from the<br />
Schmersal Group have focused on advanced safety<br />
systems designed to satisfy the most current safety<br />
standards and regulations.<br />
GLOBAL COVERAGE:<br />
Technical support and<br />
inventory in more than<br />
22 countries.<br />
iii
MAN-MACHINE SAFETY<br />
THE SCHMERSAL SYSTEM:<br />
A 360° APPROACH<br />
For over 60 years the SCHMERSAL group of companies<br />
has been dedicated to understanding machine safety. We<br />
have made it our mission to continuously develop safety<br />
controls utilizing the latest technologies to keep<br />
pace with the evolution in the world of<br />
machinery safety. This safety controls catalog<br />
is a compilation of information that<br />
addresses the latest and most stringent<br />
safety standards from around<br />
the world aimed to meet a multitude<br />
of industry applications.<br />
The day-to-day study of modern<br />
workplace safety is filled with<br />
the minutiae of industry regulations<br />
and standards. But philosophically<br />
we look to a higher<br />
standard in the work of one of<br />
the world’s greatest engineers,<br />
Leonardo da Vinci. A true Renaissance<br />
genius, he was a man<br />
whose fascination for the human body<br />
and the principles of physics resulted in<br />
his meticulous anatomical drawings, numerous<br />
intricate machines, and even a robotic knight<br />
that consisted of a system of cables and pulleys that controlled<br />
the movement of articulated limbs. Arguably the<br />
world’s first ergonomic engineer, Leonardo truly understood<br />
man and his physiological relationship to machinery.<br />
Like Leonardo, we at SCHMERSAL take a 360-<br />
degree approach to safety. We evaluate from<br />
every angle the potential for accidents<br />
and their prevention. We recognize the<br />
wide differences in each work<br />
station. We take into account<br />
specific guard design, as well as<br />
the environmental and physical<br />
considerations necessary to support<br />
machinery operation and<br />
provide maintenance. We even<br />
understand the frustrations and<br />
all-too-human temptation some<br />
machine operators feel to override<br />
(bypass) the safety system.<br />
As a world-wide leader in the manufacturing<br />
and supply of reliable and flexible<br />
safety solutions, we are well aware that<br />
different markets are subject to different<br />
regulations. Great consideration is given so<br />
that our products are designed to comply with<br />
safety standards around the globe.<br />
iv<br />
International<br />
symbol for<br />
Positive-Break<br />
contacts<br />
CHANGING MAN-MACHINE<br />
SAFEGUARDING RULES<br />
In today’s industrial world, worker safety has become a<br />
priority with manufacturers from all industries as well as<br />
government’s around the world. In North America there<br />
are several government organizations with formal<br />
safety guidelines such as OSHA, ANSI,<br />
MOL and CSA. In addition to the North<br />
American regulations there are<br />
developing European and international<br />
safety standards which<br />
have been adopted in the USA<br />
and Canada.<br />
Specific industry standards<br />
and guidelines developed to<br />
achieve a greater level of<br />
safety can be found at<br />
www.schmersalusa.com or by<br />
ordering our MAN-MACHINE<br />
SAFERGUARDING REQUIRE-<br />
MENTS & TECHNIQUES handbook.<br />
There you will find information<br />
you need to help determine<br />
what level of safety you may require to<br />
comply with today’s safety standards.<br />
NEW SAFETY CONCEPTS<br />
AND TECHNIQUES<br />
The common goal of the latest safety standards<br />
and regulations is to provide a heightened<br />
level of protection to machine operators,<br />
maintenance personnel and any other<br />
person who may come in contact<br />
with a machine. In order to reach<br />
this goal there have been several<br />
new safety concepts developed<br />
to help minimize the risk of<br />
injury as well as integrate the<br />
safety components into the<br />
machine automation controls.<br />
These concepts include:<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nnectivity<br />
• Safety System Performance<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mponent Reliability<br />
• Safety System Structure<br />
Due to the potential complexity of machine<br />
safety, these latest concepts are considered<br />
when designing a safety system to help simplify<br />
the process. In addition other “classic”<br />
safety concepts are utilized such as positive
eak, tamper resistant and fault detection to help construct<br />
a safety system which suits an application best.<br />
“SAFETY-SPECIFIC” COMPONENTS<br />
New switches, sensors and controls have been designed<br />
specifically for safety applications. Each is intended to<br />
overcome one or more of the limitations of conventional<br />
“non-safety” components…and to satisfy one or more of<br />
the current safety requirements inherent in the latest<br />
industry standards and guidelines.<br />
These safety-specific components are the subject of this<br />
catalog. They include:<br />
• programmable safety controller<br />
• electronic safety sensors<br />
• safe speed monitors<br />
• serial diagnostic gateways<br />
• keyed interlock switches<br />
• keyed interlock switches with solenoid latching<br />
• sealed non-contact safety sensors<br />
• safety foot switches<br />
• push/pull operated emergency cable-pull switches<br />
• two-hand controls<br />
• positive-break hinged safety switches<br />
• safety light curtains/beams<br />
• fail-to-safe safety edges<br />
• safety pressure mats<br />
• safety-rated limit switches<br />
• safety controllers<br />
Each of these components is designed to help the safety<br />
specialist and equipment designers to better address<br />
their responsibility…to ensure that machinery, built or<br />
purchased, does not expose the operators, helpers or<br />
maintenance personnel to hazards.<br />
GUIDE TO APPLICATION SYMBOLS USED<br />
THROUGHOUT THE CATALOG<br />
Sliding Guard Applications<br />
Hinged Guard Applications<br />
SATISFYING YOUR NEEDS<br />
We trust that this <strong>Catalog</strong>-Handbook, its companion catalogs,<br />
and our tutorial Manual and videos, will be useful<br />
tools in the selection of suitable components to satisfy<br />
your unique application requirements.Your needs are our<br />
most important concern.<br />
Lift-off Guard Applications<br />
v
Optional M12<br />
quick-connect<br />
termination<br />
Up to 3 contacts,<br />
for dual-channel<br />
reliability with<br />
signalling<br />
AZ16<br />
Anatomy of the world’s<br />
best-selling interlock switch<br />
normally-closed<br />
contacts (ensure circuit interruption)<br />
Self-lifting terminal clamps (for<br />
speedy installation)<br />
3 threaded<br />
knock-out<br />
conduit entry<br />
points for easy<br />
installation<br />
Electricallyinsulated<br />
contacts<br />
for added safety (no<br />
potential for crossover)<br />
Molded-in, easy-to-read terminal<br />
markings (help ensure proper wiring)<br />
IP67 sealed housing<br />
(tolerant to hostile environments)<br />
Difficult-to-defeat<br />
multiple-cam<br />
actuating mechanism<br />
(mechanical life: 10 million)<br />
Integral, non-removable<br />
actuating head resists bypassing<br />
by preventing access to operating<br />
plunger<br />
Internationally accepted<br />
(CE, UL, CSA, BG, SUVA,<br />
SA, NEMKO, TUV, and<br />
others)<br />
High-strength, corrosion-resistant<br />
polymeric housing (no ground<br />
connector required)<br />
7 lbs. of built-in key holding<br />
force resists guard opening<br />
due to shock or vibration<br />
(other holding force<br />
options)<br />
4 actuator-key<br />
entry points,<br />
for ease of<br />
mounting<br />
And the industry's broadest<br />
range of optional features &<br />
accessories…<br />
• Adjustable ball latch<br />
• Magnetic door latch<br />
• Flex-mounted actuator keys<br />
• Individually-coded actuator keys<br />
• Solenoid-locking (Model AZM161)<br />
• Gold contacts<br />
• Signal lamps (Pilot light or built-in LED)<br />
• Explosion-proof models (ATEX-compliant)<br />
• Key entry closure caps<br />
• Optional funnel entry<br />
• Optional M12 connector<br />
vi<br />
Rugged, tamperresistant,<br />
stainless<br />
steel coded actuator<br />
key (Individuallycoded<br />
keys available)<br />
Optional “maintained” or<br />
“ejecting” actuator key<br />
(for application<br />
versatility)
KEYED INTERLOCK SWITCHES<br />
1<br />
Switch<br />
Series<br />
SELECTION GUIDE<br />
Housing<br />
Material<br />
Envelope<br />
Dimensions<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfigurations<br />
<strong>Catalog</strong><br />
Page<br />
ST14<br />
Glass-fiber,<br />
reinforced thermoplastic<br />
3<br />
⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄4" × 2"<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
2<br />
AZ17<br />
AZ17zi<br />
Glass-fiber,<br />
reinforced thermoplastic<br />
1 1 ⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄4" × 2 1 ⁄2"<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
4<br />
8<br />
AZ15/16<br />
AZ16zi<br />
Glass-fiber,<br />
reinforced thermoplastic<br />
1 1 ⁄4" × 2" × 3"<br />
1 NC<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
3 NC<br />
12<br />
18<br />
AZ200<br />
Glass-fiber,<br />
reinforced thermoplastic<br />
2 PNP Safety Outputs<br />
1 1 ⁄2" × 8 3 ⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄2" 22<br />
1 Diagnostic Output<br />
TZG<br />
Glass-fiber,<br />
reinforced thermoplastic<br />
1 3 ⁄4" × 2" × 3 3 ⁄4"<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
SDG Die-cast aluminum 1 3 ⁄4" × 2" × 6" 2 NO & 1 NC<br />
28<br />
3 NC<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
AZ3350 Die-cast aluminum 1 1 ⁄2" × 1 3 ⁄4" × 4 1 ⁄2"<br />
2 NC<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
32<br />
3 NC<br />
SHGV<br />
(Key Transfer)<br />
Die-cast aluminum 1 3 ⁄4" × 1 3 ⁄4" × 4" 1 NO & 1 NC 36<br />
AZ415 Die-cast aluminum 1 3 ⁄4" × 3 1 ⁄2" × 4" 2 NO & 2 NC 38<br />
24<br />
1
SERIES AZ17<br />
<strong>Co</strong>mpact Tamper-Resistant Movable<br />
Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mpact design … only 1 1 ⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄4" × 3". Ideal where space<br />
is limited.<br />
• Insulation Displacement <strong>Co</strong>nnector (IDC) … facilitates<br />
fast, easy installation.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.<br />
• Eight optional key entry locations … depending upon<br />
mounting arrangement.<br />
• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple<br />
tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.<br />
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure interruption of<br />
safety circuit upon actuator key removal.<br />
• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerant to<br />
mechanical abuse without damage.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant, high-impact glass-fibre<br />
reinforced housing … tolerates the most hostile<br />
environments.<br />
• “Padlockable” key for added security during<br />
maintenance.<br />
• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
• Several styles of actuator key … accommodates a wide<br />
variety of movable guards.<br />
Description<br />
The compact Series AZ17 is designed for use with movable<br />
machine guards/access gates which must be closed for<br />
operator safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a<br />
significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven<br />
switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. And<br />
their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple<br />
tools, bent wires or other readily available means. Their IP67<br />
rating makes them ideal for interlocking safety guards in<br />
hostile environments.<br />
Operation<br />
The AZ17 electromechanical safety interlock switch consists<br />
of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometrically-unique<br />
actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable guard. Upon<br />
opening of the guard the NC contact(s) are forced to open<br />
through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical linkage with the<br />
actuating key. These positive-break NC contacts assure circuit<br />
interruption (and machine stoppage) upon removal of the<br />
actuator key. (The NO contact closes upon key removal.)<br />
When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC<br />
contacts to close and the NO contacts to re-open.<br />
Note: Available with optional M12x1 quick-connect.<br />
SPACE-SAVING<br />
IDC CONTACTS<br />
& CONNECTOR<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The AZ17 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch on<br />
movable machine guards which, when open, expose the<br />
operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical<br />
applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, access<br />
doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels and other movable<br />
guards.<br />
4<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
AZ17 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(Actuator key must be ordered separately)<br />
Part Number <strong>Co</strong>ntacts <strong>Co</strong>nnection<br />
AZ17-11ZK<br />
AZ17-11ZRK<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
AZ17-02ZK<br />
AZ17-02ZRK<br />
2 NC<br />
IDC <strong>Co</strong>nnection<br />
AZ17-11ZK-ST<br />
AZ17-11ZRK-ST<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
AZ17-02ZK-ST<br />
AZ17-02ZRK-ST<br />
2 NC<br />
M12x1 Quick <strong>Co</strong>nnect<br />
Solenoid-latching models available. (Model AZM170) See page 44<br />
Individually-coded key models available (Model AZ17zi)<br />
(For extra security in “high-risk” applications) See page 8.<br />
Notes: Pre-wired (5 meter length) cable entry models available. Add<br />
suffix “2243” for front of unit cable entry or suffix “2243-1” for<br />
rear cable entry.<br />
“ST” models use M12, 4 pin connections. Order connection<br />
cable A-K4P-M12-S-G-5M-1-X-A-1, or please see page 94<br />
for connector cable descriptions.<br />
ACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIES<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
AZ17/170-B1<br />
AZ17/170-B5<br />
AZ17-B6<br />
AZ17/170-B11<br />
AZ17/170-B15<br />
AZ17/170-B1-2245<br />
AZ17-B25-L-G1<br />
AZ17-B25-L-G2<br />
AZ17-B25-R-G1<br />
AZ17-B25-R-G2<br />
MS AZ 17-P<br />
MS AZ 17-R/P<br />
Standard key (7.87" minimum closing radius)<br />
Right-angle key<br />
(7.87" minimum closing radius)<br />
Flexible, close-radius key<br />
(1.97" minimum closing radius)<br />
Elongated standard straight key<br />
(7.87" minimum closing radius)<br />
Elongated right-angle key<br />
(7.87" minimum closing radius)<br />
Standard straight key with vibration-resistant<br />
mounting (7.87" minimum closing radius)<br />
B25 door handle actuator with star grip for<br />
left hand hinged guard<br />
B25 door handle actuator with T grip for<br />
left hand hinged guard<br />
B25 door handle actuator with star grip for<br />
right hand hinged guard<br />
B25 door handle actuator with T grip for<br />
right hand hinged guard<br />
Adjustable mounting kit for parallel mounting.<br />
AZ17-B6 key required. See page 6.<br />
Adjustable mounting kit for parallel or<br />
perpendicular mounting. AZ17-B6 key<br />
required of units with B6 keys.<br />
1<br />
SELECTED ACTUATOR KEYS (See page 7 for more details)<br />
AZ17/170-B1<br />
AZ17/170-B5<br />
AZ17-B6<br />
B25 DOOR HANDLE ACTUATORS<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
Note: For detailed information on the B25 Door Handle Actuator, see page 82.<br />
5
AZ17 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Glass-fibre reinforced,<br />
self-extinguishing thermoplastic<br />
Actuator Key Stainless steel, 1.4301<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Holding Force<br />
zk models: 1.2 pounds<br />
zrk models: 7 pounds<br />
Travel for Positive-Break 8 mm (0.315 inches)<br />
Closing Force<br />
Approx. 12N (2.7 pounds)<br />
Operating Temperature –22°F to +175°F<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
> 10 6 operations<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 CE<br />
EN 60947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-15<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 UL<br />
EN 954-1<br />
CSA<br />
Minimum Closing Radius 1.97" (with AZ17-B6 actuator key)<br />
7.87" (with B1, B5, B11 and B15<br />
actuator key)<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
Fine silver<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically separated contact bridges<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
4A/230VAC<br />
2.5A/230VA (with “ST” quick-connect)<br />
Switching Action<br />
Slow-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts<br />
Short Circuit Protection 6A (time-delay)<br />
Rated Isolation Voltage 250V<br />
Type Terminals<br />
Insulation displacement contacts &<br />
connector for 18AWG flexible<br />
stranded wire (0.75 mm 2 )<br />
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS<br />
AZ17-11z<br />
AZ17-02z<br />
13<br />
21<br />
14<br />
22<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
0<br />
4,2<br />
7,6<br />
8<br />
11<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
0<br />
4,2<br />
8<br />
8<br />
11<br />
11<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
MS AZ 17 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT<br />
MS AZ17-P<br />
AZ17-B6 key only<br />
MS AZ17-R/P<br />
AZ17-B6 key only<br />
6
AZ17 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
24<br />
.94<br />
Switching Symbols (<strong>Co</strong>lors identify -2243 factory prewired models)<br />
1<br />
23<br />
.91<br />
ø 4,2<br />
.17<br />
31<br />
1.22<br />
22<br />
.87<br />
8,2<br />
.32<br />
22<br />
.87<br />
60<br />
2.36<br />
BLACK<br />
BLACK<br />
BLUE<br />
BROWN<br />
BROWN<br />
BLUE<br />
BLACK<br />
BLACK<br />
ø19<br />
.75<br />
AZ17-02z<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnections<br />
AZ17-11z<br />
Pg M169<br />
5<br />
.2<br />
8<br />
.31<br />
20<br />
.79<br />
AZ17-02z<br />
AZ17-11z<br />
same polarity; type four enclosure<br />
22<br />
.87<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
ø 4-8<br />
.16-.31<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
0.670"<br />
(17)<br />
(Remove outer sleeve<br />
from cable)<br />
ACTUATOR KEYS<br />
AZ17/170-B1<br />
AZ17/170-B5<br />
AZ17/170-B11<br />
30<br />
1.18 22<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
22<br />
30<br />
1.18 22<br />
5,5<br />
.27<br />
.87<br />
20<br />
.79<br />
4,3<br />
.17<br />
7,5<br />
.30<br />
.87<br />
20<br />
.79<br />
4,3<br />
.17<br />
12<br />
.47<br />
.87<br />
20<br />
.79<br />
33<br />
1.30<br />
10<br />
.40<br />
23<br />
.91<br />
2<br />
.08<br />
AZ17/170-B15<br />
30<br />
16<br />
1.18<br />
.63<br />
25<br />
.98<br />
8<br />
.31<br />
36<br />
1.41<br />
13<br />
.51<br />
23<br />
.91<br />
2<br />
.08<br />
23<br />
.91<br />
2<br />
.08<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
22<br />
.87<br />
20<br />
.79<br />
AZ17-B6<br />
4,2<br />
.18<br />
48<br />
1.89<br />
24<br />
.94<br />
12<br />
.47<br />
23<br />
.91<br />
2<br />
.08<br />
11<br />
.43<br />
6<br />
.24<br />
12<br />
.47<br />
4,3<br />
.17<br />
7<br />
.28<br />
8<br />
.31<br />
60,5<br />
2.38<br />
33<br />
1.30<br />
37,5<br />
1.48<br />
4,3<br />
.17<br />
AZ17/170-B1-2245<br />
8<br />
.31<br />
ø11<br />
.43<br />
ø4,2<br />
.17<br />
18<br />
.71<br />
b<br />
a<br />
13<br />
.51<br />
36<br />
1.42<br />
a<br />
b<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
20<br />
.79<br />
22<br />
.87<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
28<br />
1.10<br />
23<br />
.91<br />
23<br />
.91<br />
7
SERIES AZ17zi<br />
INDIVIDUALLY-CODED<br />
ACTUATOR KEYS<br />
Individually-<strong>Co</strong>ded Movable<br />
Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficult<br />
to defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces<br />
liability exposure.<br />
• Individually-coded actuator key … provides extra security<br />
in high-risk applications.<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mpact design … only 1 1 ⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄4" × 3". Ideal where space<br />
is limited.<br />
• Non-removable actuating head … heightens tamperresistance.<br />
• Four optional key entry locations … provide installation<br />
flexibility.<br />
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuit<br />
interruption upon actuator key removal.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.<br />
• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerates<br />
mechanical abuse without damage.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the<br />
most hostile environments.<br />
• Wide selection of accessories … to meet diverse<br />
application requirements.<br />
• Padlockable key … for added security during equipment<br />
maintenance.<br />
• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
Description<br />
The compact Series AZ17zi are designed for use with<br />
movable machine guards which must be closed for operator<br />
safety. Their tamper-resistant design, and positive-opening NC<br />
contacts, provide a significantly higher level of safety than<br />
conventional spring-driven switches whose contacts can<br />
weld/stick shut. Their IP67 rating makes them ideal for<br />
interlocking safety guards in hostile environments.<br />
Operation<br />
The AZ17zi is a two-piece, electromechanical safety interlock<br />
switch. It consists of a rugged switch mechanism and an<br />
individually-coded, geometrically-unique actuating key. The<br />
key must be directly hard-mounted to the movable guard.<br />
Upon opening of the guard, the normally-closed (NC)<br />
contact(s) are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)<br />
mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The positive-break<br />
NC contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine<br />
stoppage) upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO<br />
contacts close upon key removal.)<br />
When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC<br />
contacts to re-close, and any NO contacts to re-open. The<br />
tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple tools,<br />
bent wires or other readily available means.<br />
SPACE-SAVING<br />
IDC CONTACTS<br />
& CONNECTOR<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The AZ17zi is intended for use as a safety interlock on<br />
movable machine guards which, when open, expose the<br />
operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical<br />
applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, hinged<br />
covers, access panels and other movable guards.<br />
8<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
AZ17zi AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
(Includes Individually-<strong>Co</strong>ded Actuator Key)<br />
Part Number Actuator Key Type <strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
Units with 1.2 lbs key retention force:<br />
AZ17-11Zi-B1 Straight key<br />
AZ17-11Zi-B5 Right Angle key<br />
AZ17-11Zi-B6R Flexible mounting – right<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
AZ17-11Zi-B6L Flexible mounting – left<br />
AZ17-02Zi-B1 Straight key<br />
AZ17-02Zi-B5 Right Angle key<br />
AZ17-02Zi-B6R Flexible mounting – right<br />
2 NC<br />
AZ17-02Zi-B6L Flexible mounting – left<br />
Units with 7 lbs key retention force:<br />
AZ17-11ZRi-B1 Straight key<br />
AZ17-11ZRi-B5 Right Angle key<br />
AZ17-11ZRi-B6R Flexible mounting – right<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
AZ17-11ZRi-B6L Flexible mounting – left<br />
AZ17-02ZRi-B1 Straight key<br />
AZ17-02ZRi-B5 Right Angle key<br />
AZ17-02ZRi-B6R Flexible mounting – right<br />
2 NC<br />
AZ17-02ZRi-B6L Flexible mounting – left<br />
Note: Models also available with M12x1 Quick connect, add "-ST" to<br />
part number before key type (AZ17-02Zi-ST-B1)<br />
Part Number<br />
MS AZ 17-P<br />
MS AZ 17-R/P<br />
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES<br />
Mounting kits require use of the -B6 key<br />
Description<br />
Adjustable mounting kit for parallel<br />
mounting of units with B6 keys.<br />
(See installation on Page 10)<br />
Adjustable mounting kit for parallel or<br />
perpendicular mounting of units with<br />
B6 keys. (See installation on Page 10)<br />
1<br />
IDC CONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS<br />
9
AZ17zi TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Glass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishing<br />
thermoplastic<br />
Actuator Key Stainless steel, 1.4301<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Key Retention Force zi models: 1.2 pounds<br />
zir models: 7 pounds<br />
Travel for Positive-Break 8 mm (0.315 inches)<br />
Closing Force<br />
Approx. 12N (2.7 pounds)<br />
Operating Temperature –22°F to +175°F<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
> 10 6 operations<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 EN 954-1<br />
EN 60947-5-1 CE<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 UL<br />
BG-GS-ET-15 CSA<br />
Minimum Closing Radius 1.97" (with B6L or B6R actuator key)<br />
7.87" (with B1 or B5 actuator key)<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
Switching Action<br />
Short Circuit Protection<br />
Rated Isolation Voltage<br />
Type Terminals<br />
Fine silver<br />
Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
4A/230VAC<br />
Slow-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts<br />
6A (time-delay)<br />
250V<br />
Insulation displacement contacts<br />
& connector for 18AWG flexible<br />
stranded wire (0.75 mm 2 )<br />
Note: Pre-wired (5 meter length) cable entry models available. See<br />
optional accessories.<br />
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS<br />
AZ17-11zi<br />
13<br />
21<br />
14<br />
22<br />
0<br />
4,2<br />
7,6<br />
8<br />
11<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
AZ17-02zi<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
0<br />
4,2<br />
8<br />
8<br />
11<br />
11<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
MS AZ 17 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT<br />
(Eases installation and facilitates<br />
adjustments due to guard misalignment)<br />
MS AZ17-P<br />
(for parallel<br />
mounting)<br />
MS AZ17-R/P<br />
(for parallel or<br />
perpendicular mounting)<br />
10
AZ17zi TECHNICAL DATA<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
B1 Actuator Key<br />
0.177"<br />
(4.5)<br />
R min. 7.87" (200)<br />
0.59"<br />
(15) 0.314"<br />
(8)<br />
R min. 5.51" (140)<br />
0.393"<br />
(10)<br />
1.18"(30)<br />
0.866"(22)<br />
0.787"(20)<br />
0.078"<br />
(2)<br />
1.30" (33)<br />
0.216"<br />
(5.5)<br />
0.169"<br />
(4.3)<br />
0.905"<br />
(23)<br />
B5 Actuator Key<br />
0.177"<br />
(4.5)<br />
0.59"<br />
(15)<br />
R min. 7.87" (200)<br />
0.314"<br />
(8)<br />
R min. 5.51" (140)<br />
1.42" (36)<br />
0.511<br />
(13)<br />
0.216"<br />
(5.5)<br />
1.18"(30)<br />
0.866"(22)<br />
0.787"(20)<br />
0.169"<br />
(4.3)<br />
0.472"<br />
(12)<br />
22<br />
.87<br />
0.905"<br />
(23)<br />
0.078"<br />
(2)<br />
0.314"<br />
(8)<br />
0.787"(20)<br />
0.866"(22)<br />
1.18"(30)<br />
0.169"<br />
(4.3)<br />
Switching Symbols (<strong>Co</strong>lors identify -2243 factory prewired models)<br />
B6L Actuator Key<br />
B6R Actuator Key<br />
1.18" (30)<br />
0.866"(22)<br />
0.944"(21)<br />
0.472" (12)<br />
0.165"<br />
(4.2)<br />
8<br />
5<br />
1<br />
24<br />
.94<br />
23<br />
.91<br />
ø 4,2<br />
.17<br />
8,2<br />
.32<br />
Pg M169<br />
.31<br />
60<br />
2.36<br />
31<br />
1.22<br />
22<br />
.87<br />
22<br />
.89<br />
.20<br />
ø19<br />
.75<br />
20<br />
.79<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
ø 4-8<br />
.16-.31<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
0.787"(20)<br />
RED<br />
WHT<br />
GRN<br />
BLK<br />
GRN<br />
WHT<br />
RED<br />
BLK<br />
0.314"<br />
(8)<br />
0.433"<br />
(11)<br />
0.157"<br />
(4)<br />
0.944" (24)<br />
0.236"<br />
(6)<br />
AZ17-02zi<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnections<br />
AZ17-11zi<br />
0.078"<br />
(2)<br />
0.905"<br />
(23)<br />
0.433"<br />
(11)<br />
R min. 1.97" (50)<br />
0.590"<br />
(15)<br />
R min. 1.97" (50)<br />
0.590"<br />
(15)<br />
R min. 1.97" (50)<br />
0.314"<br />
(8)<br />
R min. 1.97" (50)<br />
AZ17-02zi<br />
AZ17-11zi<br />
0.314"(8)<br />
same polarity; type four enclosure<br />
(Minimum radius: 50mm)<br />
0.670"<br />
(17)<br />
(Remove outer sleeve<br />
from cable)<br />
All dimensions in<br />
inches (mm)<br />
11
SERIES AZ15/16<br />
Description<br />
The Series AZ15/16 is designed for use with movable<br />
machine guards/access gates which must be closed for<br />
operator safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a<br />
significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven<br />
switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. And<br />
their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple<br />
tools, bent wires or other readily available means. Their IP67<br />
rating makes them ideal for interlocking safety guards in<br />
hostile environments.<br />
Tamper-Resistant Movable<br />
Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficult<br />
to defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces<br />
liability exposure.<br />
• Non-removable actuating head … heightens tamperresistance.<br />
• Four optional key entry locations … provide installation<br />
flexibility.<br />
• Individually-coded actuator key option … provides extra<br />
security in high-risk applications. See AZ16zi on page 18.<br />
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuit<br />
interruption upon actuator key removal.<br />
• High key-retention force (7 pounds) … eliminates<br />
inadvertent opening of guard due to shock/vibration.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.<br />
• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerates<br />
mechanical abuse without damage.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the<br />
most hostile environments.<br />
• Wide selection of accessories … to meet diverse<br />
application requirements.<br />
• Padlockable key … for added security during equipment<br />
maintenance.<br />
• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
• Explosion-proof model and M12x1 quick-connect (“ST”)<br />
available (Please consult factory).<br />
Optional Safety<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntroller.<br />
See Page 320.<br />
Operation<br />
The AZ15/16 electromechanical safety interlock switch<br />
consists of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometricallyunique<br />
actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable<br />
guard. Upon opening of the guard the NC contact(s) are<br />
forced to open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical<br />
linkage with the actuating key. These positive-break NC<br />
contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine stoppage)<br />
upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO contact closes<br />
upon key removal.)<br />
When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC<br />
contacts to close and the NO contacts to re-open.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The AZ15/16 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch<br />
on movable machine guards which, when open, expose the<br />
operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical<br />
applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, access<br />
doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels and other movable<br />
guards.<br />
12<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
AZ15/16 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Plastic Adapter**<br />
Actuator Key Sold Separately)<br />
Part Number<br />
AZ15ZVK (key spring returned)<br />
AZ15ZVRK (key maintained upon insertion)*<br />
AZ16ZVK (key spring returned)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts (with<br />
actuator key inserted)<br />
1 NC<br />
1 NC<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
AZ16ZVRK (key maintained upon insertion)* 1 NO & 1 NC<br />
AZ16-02ZVK (key spring returned)<br />
2 NC<br />
AZ16-02ZVRK (key maintained upon insertion)* 2 NC<br />
AZ16-12ZVK (key spring returned)<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
AZ16-12ZVRK (key maintained upon insertion)* 1 NO & 2 NC<br />
AZ16-03ZVK (key spring returned)<br />
3 NC<br />
AZ16-03ZVRK (key maintained upon insertion)* 3 NC<br />
*Feature 7 pound key retention force. For lighter key retention force<br />
(1-2 pounds) add suffix "2254".<br />
**To order unit with cordgrip instead of 1 ⁄2" NPT adapter, add suffix<br />
"CG" to part number...eg. AZ15-zvk-CG.<br />
Add suffix -1637 to basic part number for Gold contacts<br />
Add suffix “-ST” to part number for M12x1, 4 pin quick-connect and<br />
order connection cable A-K4P-M12-S-G-5M-1-X-A-1, or see page 94<br />
for connector cable descriptions.<br />
Part Number<br />
AZ15/16-B1<br />
AZ15/16-B2<br />
AZ15/16-B3<br />
AZ15/16-B6<br />
AZ15/16-B1-2177<br />
AZ15/16-B6-2177<br />
AZ15/16-B1-KRH<br />
AZ15/16-B1-2024<br />
AZ15/16-B1-1747<br />
AZ15/16-B2-1747<br />
AZ15/16-B3-1747<br />
AZ15/16-B1-2053<br />
ACTUATOR KEYS<br />
Description<br />
Standard Key (5.9" minimum closing radius)<br />
Small radius actuating key (1.8" minimum<br />
closing radius)<br />
Small radius actuating key (1.3" minimum<br />
closing radius)<br />
Flexible-movement actuating key<br />
Funnel entry adapter with elongated<br />
straight actuating key<br />
Funnel entry adapter with elongated<br />
flexible-movement actuating key<br />
Key Removal Hand-Grip Assembly with Key<br />
Retention Chain (for use with AZ15...zvrk<br />
and AZ16...zvrk)<br />
Actuator key with gasketed key caps<br />
Actuator key with door holding magnet kit<br />
(7 pound holding force)<br />
(for use with AZ16…zvr-2254 models)<br />
Actuator key with ball latch kit<br />
(Adjustable holding force up to 22 pounds)<br />
(For use with AZ16...zvrk)<br />
1<br />
ACCESSORIES<br />
for AZ15/16 Keyed-Interlock Switches<br />
AZ16-STS30-01<br />
AZ16-STS30-02<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
AZ15/16-1476 Key entry closure caps (for unused entry slots)<br />
M20-CG<br />
<strong>Co</strong>rd grip (cable gland)<br />
M20- 1 ⁄2"NPT-P Plastic 1 /2" NPT adapter<br />
M20- 1 ⁄2" Metal 1 /2" NPT adapter<br />
PL-M20-24V 24VAC/DC pilot light kit<br />
AZ16-STS30-03<br />
AZ16-STS30-04<br />
AZ16-STS30-05<br />
AZ16-STS30-06<br />
AZ16-STS30-07<br />
AZ16-STS30-08<br />
STS Door Handle kits for use with AZ16<br />
switches. (See page 77 for details.)<br />
PL-M20-120V<br />
120VAC/DC pilot light kit<br />
SZ16/335<br />
Actuator Key Lockout Device<br />
(Accepts up to 6 padlocks)<br />
AZ15/16-AP Alignment Pins (Set of 2)<br />
MS AZ 15/16-P<br />
MS AZ 15/16-R/P<br />
Adjustable mounting kit for parallel mounting<br />
(See illustration Page 16)<br />
Adjustable mounting kit for parallel and<br />
perpendicular mounting<br />
(See illustration Page 16)<br />
MS mounting kits require the use of the -B6 key<br />
ST PIN CONNECTIONS<br />
Actuator Key Removal Handle<br />
AZ15/16-B1-KRH<br />
Lockout Device SZ16/335<br />
(padlock not included)<br />
AZ15/16-2053 with ball catch<br />
Holding force up to<br />
22 pounds<br />
AZ15/16-1747<br />
with holding magnet<br />
Holding force 7 pounds<br />
13
AZ15/16 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Glass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishing<br />
thermoplastic<br />
Actuator Key<br />
Stainless steel (defeat-resistant<br />
design)<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Travel for Positive-Break 8 mm (0.315 inches)<br />
Key Ejection Force "-zv" models: 3N ( 0.7 pounds)<br />
Key Retention Force "-zvr-2254 models: 5N (1.2 pounds)<br />
"-zvr" models: 30N (7 pounds)<br />
Closing Force<br />
Approx. 15N (3.4 pounds)<br />
Operating Temperature –22°F to +175°F<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
> 1 million operations<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-15<br />
EN 60947-5-1 UL<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 CSA<br />
EN 954-1<br />
TUV<br />
CE<br />
Minimum Closing Radius 1.3" (with B3 actuator key)<br />
1.8" (with B2 actuator key)<br />
5.9" (with B1 actuator key)<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Gap<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
Switching Action<br />
Short Circuit Protection<br />
Rated Isolation Voltage<br />
Rated Impulse Withstand<br />
Voltage<br />
Type Terminals*<br />
* Units available with M12x1 quick-connect.<br />
(Please consult factory).<br />
Fine silver<br />
Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
2×2mm (minimum)<br />
4A/230VAC (A600)<br />
2.5A/230VAC (with M12x1 quickconnect)<br />
Slow-action, positive-break<br />
NC contacts<br />
Fuse 6A (time-delay)<br />
500VAC<br />
6kV<br />
Screw terminals with self-lifting<br />
clamps for up to 13 AWG flexible<br />
stranded wire (2.5mm 2 )<br />
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS<br />
13<br />
21<br />
14<br />
22<br />
AZ16z<br />
0<br />
2,3 5,2<br />
5,5<br />
8<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
“Make before<br />
break”<br />
AZ16-02z<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
0<br />
2,3<br />
5,5<br />
5,5<br />
8<br />
8<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
AZ16-12z<br />
13<br />
21<br />
31<br />
14<br />
22<br />
32<br />
0 2,3 5,2<br />
5,5 8<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
31-32<br />
11<br />
21<br />
31<br />
12<br />
22<br />
32<br />
AZ16-03z<br />
0 2,3<br />
5,5 8<br />
5,5 8<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
31-32<br />
AZ15/16-2053 Ball Latch Kit<br />
AZ15/16-2024 Gasketed Key Caps<br />
14
AZ15/16 ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS<br />
AZ15/16-B1 Actuator Key<br />
AZ15/16-B1 Actuator Key<br />
with AZ15/16-1747<br />
Holding Magnet Kit<br />
1<br />
Minimum<br />
actuating radius<br />
with actuator B1/B1-1747<br />
5<br />
1<br />
AZ15/16-B1-2177 Actuator Key<br />
40<br />
1.58<br />
ø5,5<br />
.22<br />
5<br />
.2<br />
34,3<br />
1.37<br />
2<br />
0.08<br />
11<br />
.43<br />
56<br />
2.24<br />
16<br />
.64<br />
Minimum<br />
actuating radius<br />
with actuator<br />
B1/B1-1747<br />
23,3<br />
0.93<br />
27<br />
1.08<br />
Actuator B1 is standard for AZ15/16; it allows a<br />
minimum actuating radius of 150 mm. Please note<br />
that the center of rotation must be in the same<br />
plane as the upper edge of the safety switch.<br />
4<br />
Ordering example:<br />
Switch, holding magnet and<br />
actuator: AZ16-zv/B1-1747<br />
AZ15/16-B2 Actuator Key<br />
AZ15/16-B2 Actuator Key<br />
with AZ15/16-1747<br />
Holding Magnet Kit<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
Minimum<br />
actuating<br />
radius with<br />
actuator<br />
B2/B2-1747<br />
Actuator B2 is particularly suitable for small<br />
actuating radii over the wide edge of the<br />
actuator (R=45 to 150mm). The basic setting<br />
(angle 15°) provides a minimum radius of<br />
45mm=1.8 in. For larger radii, the angle has<br />
to be adjusted correspondingly by turning the<br />
set screw counter-clockwise.<br />
AZ15/16-B3 Actuator Key<br />
AZ15/16-B3 Actuator Key<br />
with AZ15/16-1747<br />
Holding Magnet Kit<br />
Minimum actuating<br />
radius with actuator<br />
B3/B3-1747<br />
Actuator B3 is particularly suitable<br />
for small actuating radii over the narrow<br />
edge of the actuator (R=32 to<br />
150mm). The basic setting (angle<br />
10°) provides a minimum radius of<br />
32mm=1.3in. For larger radii, the<br />
angle has to be adjusted correspondingly<br />
by turning the set screw<br />
clockwise.<br />
15
AZ15/16 ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS<br />
AZ15/16-B1-2177 Funnel Entry Adapter<br />
(with straight actuating key)<br />
AZ15/16-B6 Flex Actuator Key<br />
a<br />
56<br />
2.24<br />
ø5,5<br />
.22<br />
56<br />
2.2 40<br />
1.6<br />
7<br />
0.28<br />
16<br />
0.63<br />
11<br />
.43<br />
10<br />
.4<br />
16<br />
.64<br />
40<br />
1.58<br />
ø5,5<br />
.22<br />
5<br />
.2<br />
b<br />
34,3<br />
1.37<br />
11<br />
.43<br />
16<br />
.64<br />
2<br />
0.08<br />
75° 79°<br />
23,3<br />
0.93<br />
27<br />
1.08<br />
27<br />
1.08<br />
27,3<br />
1.09<br />
16<br />
64<br />
10,9<br />
.44<br />
6<br />
.24<br />
52<br />
208<br />
31,4<br />
1.26<br />
28<br />
1.12<br />
MS AZ 15/16 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT<br />
(Eases installation and facilitates<br />
adjustments due to guard misalignment)<br />
8<br />
.32<br />
14<br />
.56<br />
MS AZ 15/16-R/P<br />
(for parallel or<br />
perpendicular mounting)<br />
MS AZ 15/16-P<br />
(for parallel mounting)<br />
16
1<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design<br />
17
SERIES AZ16zi<br />
Description<br />
The Series AZ16zi are designed for use with movable<br />
machine guards which must be closed for operator safety.<br />
Their tamper-resistant design, and positive-opening NC<br />
contacts, provide a significantly higher level of safety than<br />
conventional spring-driven switches whose contacts can<br />
weld/stick shut. Their IP67 rating makes them ideal for<br />
interlocking safety guards in hostile environments.<br />
Operation<br />
The AZ16zi is a two-piece, electromechanical safety interlock<br />
switch. It consists of a rugged switch mechanism and an<br />
individually-coded, geometrically-unique actuating key. The<br />
key must be directly hard-mounted to the movable guard.<br />
Upon opening of the guard, the normally-closed (NC)<br />
contact(s) are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)<br />
mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The positive-break<br />
NC contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine<br />
stoppage) upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO<br />
contacts close upon key removal.)<br />
When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC<br />
contacts to re-close, and any NO contacts to re-open. The<br />
tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple tools,<br />
bent wires or other readily available means.<br />
Individually-<strong>Co</strong>ded Movable<br />
Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficult<br />
to defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces<br />
liability exposure.<br />
• Individually-coded actuator key … provides extra security<br />
in high-risk applications.<br />
• Non-removable actuating head … heightens tamperresistance.<br />
• Four optional key entry locations … provide installation<br />
flexibility.<br />
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuit<br />
interruption upon actuator key removal.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.<br />
• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerates<br />
mechanical abuse without damage.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the<br />
most hostile environments.<br />
• Tamper-resistant key mounting screws … deter<br />
bypassing.<br />
• Wide selection of accessories … to meet diverse<br />
application requirements.<br />
• Padlockable key … for added security during equipment<br />
maintenance.<br />
• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
Patented geometrically-unique tumbler<br />
configuration<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The AZ16zi is intended for use as a safety interlock on<br />
movable machine guards which, when open, expose the<br />
operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical<br />
applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, hinged<br />
covers, access panels and other movable guards.<br />
18<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
AZ16zi AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
(Includes Individually-<strong>Co</strong>ded Actuator Key and<br />
1<br />
⁄2" NPT Plastic Adapter)<br />
Part Number<br />
AZ16-12zi-B1<br />
AZ16-03zi-B1<br />
AZ16-12zi-B1-1747<br />
AZ16-03zi-B1-1747<br />
AZ16-12zi-B1-2024<br />
AZ16-03zi-B1-2024<br />
AZ16-12zi-B1-2053<br />
AZ16-03zi-B1-2053<br />
AZ16-12zi-B1-2177<br />
AZ16-03zi-B1-2177<br />
Description<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts (with<br />
actuator key inserted)<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
Standard unit<br />
3 NC<br />
Standard unit with<br />
built-in key actuator<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
magnet latch<br />
3 NC<br />
Standard unit with<br />
built-in slot rubber<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
seals on key actuator 3 NC<br />
Standard unit with<br />
built-in ball-latched<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
key actuator<br />
3 NC<br />
Standard unit with<br />
funnel entry adaptor<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
3 NC<br />
Part Number<br />
M20-CG<br />
M20- 1 ⁄2"P<br />
M20- 1 ⁄2"M<br />
AZ15/16-1476<br />
SZ16/335<br />
PL-M20-24V<br />
PL-M20-120V<br />
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES<br />
Description<br />
<strong>Co</strong>rd grip (cable gland)<br />
Spare Plastic 1 ⁄2" NPT adapter<br />
(One supplied with each unit)<br />
Metal 1 ⁄2" NPT adapter (optional)<br />
Key entry closure caps<br />
(for unused entry slots)<br />
Lockout Device<br />
(accepts up to 6 padlocks)<br />
24VAC/DC LED Pilot Light Kit<br />
110VAC/DC Pilot Light Kit<br />
1<br />
EXAMPLE OF INDIVIDUALLY-CODED KEYS<br />
provide extra security in high-risk applications<br />
19
AZ16zi TECHNICAL DATA<br />
Housing<br />
Glass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishing<br />
plastic<br />
Actuator Key<br />
Stainless steel<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Travel for Positive-Break 0.315 inches (8 mm)<br />
Key Ejection Force 3 N (0.7 pounds)<br />
Insertion Force<br />
Approx. 15N (3.3 pounds)<br />
Operating Temperature –22°F to +175°F<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
1 million operations<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards UL EN 954-1<br />
CSA<br />
BG-GS-ET-15<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 CE<br />
Key Withdrawal Speed 2 meters/second (maximum)<br />
Minimum Closing Radius 9.8" (250mm)<br />
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS<br />
13<br />
21<br />
31<br />
14<br />
22<br />
32<br />
AZ16-12zi<br />
0<br />
5,5<br />
5,6<br />
8<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
31-32<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Gap<br />
Switching Action<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage<br />
Thermal Current Rating<br />
Current Rating<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Short Circuit Protection<br />
Type Terminals<br />
Fine silver<br />
Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically-separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
2 × 2 mm<br />
Slow-action, positive-break<br />
NC contacts<br />
A600<br />
500VAC<br />
10A (300VAC)<br />
6A @ 120VAC<br />
4A @ 230VAC<br />
2.5V/230VAC (with M12x1 quickconnect)<br />
6kV<br />
Fuse 6A (slow-blow)<br />
Screw terminals with self-lifting<br />
clamps for up to 2.5 mm 2<br />
(AWG13) wire<br />
AZ16-03zi<br />
11<br />
21<br />
31<br />
12<br />
22<br />
32<br />
0<br />
5,5<br />
5,5<br />
8<br />
8<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
31-32<br />
“-2177” Funnel Entry Adapter<br />
(Order as part of base switch…<br />
e.g. AZ16-02Zi-B1-2177)<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
5,5<br />
.22<br />
11<br />
.43<br />
10<br />
.4<br />
5<br />
.2<br />
40,7<br />
1.63<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
23<br />
.9<br />
40<br />
1.58<br />
56<br />
2.24<br />
16<br />
64<br />
10,9<br />
.44<br />
52<br />
208<br />
31,4<br />
1.26<br />
28<br />
1.12<br />
14<br />
.56<br />
8<br />
.32<br />
6<br />
.24<br />
20
AZ16zi INDIVIDUALLY-CODED ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS<br />
1<br />
Applications: harsh environments<br />
(coarse dirt, chips, flour…)<br />
For holding light to medium-weight guards closed<br />
21
SERIES AZ 200<br />
Pulse-Echo Based<br />
Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Interlock Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Tamper resistant … frequency-matched switch and<br />
actuator required for operation.<br />
• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.<br />
• Dual purpose handle … modern, ergonomic design—no<br />
additional door handles are needed.<br />
• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states<br />
• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …<br />
satisfy requirements of Safety PL e to EN ISO 13849-1,<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 to EN 954-1. *See Note on next page.<br />
• One-hand emergency release … hazardous area can be<br />
left quickly and safely.<br />
• Switch and actuator do not protrude into door<br />
opening … no risk of injury or damage from a protruding<br />
actuator.<br />
• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application<br />
versatility.<br />
• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices,<br />
max 200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to<br />
safety performance level.<br />
Description<br />
The AZ 200 pulse-echo based non-contact safety interlock is<br />
designed for use with movable machine guards/access gates<br />
which must be closed for operator safety.<br />
The AZ 200 consists of an interlock switch and actuator unit<br />
with door handle and optional emergency exit handle. The<br />
actuator is always inserted into its housing, protecting the<br />
actuator and the operator against damage and injury. Utilizing<br />
pulse-echo sensor technology, the actuator and interlock can<br />
have an offset of ±5 mm and the actuator still engages the<br />
interlock. A sensor stimulates a coil in the actuator, which in<br />
turns sends a signal back to the sensor. The pulse-echo<br />
technology provides diagnostic information and detects and<br />
indicates any misalignment at an early stage. Two different<br />
actuator designs accommodate both sliding or hinged guards.<br />
The AZ 200 interlock is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit<br />
proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up<br />
to 250 mA. It features one electronic diagnostic output that<br />
can signal errors before the safety outputs are switched off,<br />
thus enabling a controlled shutdown of the machine.<br />
With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring of<br />
the safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors,<br />
up to 31 AZ 200 safety interlocks with one diagnostic<br />
output can be wired in series without detriment to the safety<br />
performance level/control category (PL e to EN ISO 13849-1/<br />
Category 4 to EN 954-1).<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The AZ 200 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch<br />
on movable machine guards which, when open, expose the<br />
operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical<br />
applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, access<br />
panels and other movable guards. The AZ 200 is suitable for<br />
both sliding guards and hinged guards.<br />
22<br />
AVAILABLE AZ200 MODELS<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
Screw Terminals<br />
AZ200SK-T1P2P<br />
Door detection sensor, diagnostic<br />
output, 2 PNP safety outputs<br />
AZ200SK-TSD2P<br />
Door detection sensor, serial diagnostic<br />
output*, 2 PNP safety outputs<br />
M23 x1 quick connect, 8+1 pin<br />
AZ200ST1-T1P2P Door detection sensor, diagnostic<br />
output, 2 PNP safety outputs<br />
AZ200ST1-TSD2P Door detection sensor, serial diagnostic<br />
output*, 2 PNP safety outputs<br />
M12x1 quick connect, 8 pin<br />
AZ200ST2-T1P2P Door detection sensor, diagnostic<br />
output, 2 PNP safety outputs<br />
AZ200ST2-TSD2P Door detection sensor, serial diagnostic<br />
output*, 2 PNP safety outputs<br />
* Sensors with Serial Diagnostic output are for use with<br />
various field bus protocols, see page 204 for SD Gateways.<br />
ACTUATORS<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
AZ/AZM200-B1-LT Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from<br />
left<br />
AZ/AZM200-B1-LTP0 Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from<br />
left with inside emergency door<br />
release<br />
AZ/AZM200-B1-RT Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from<br />
right<br />
AZ/AZM200-B1-RTP0 Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from<br />
right with inside emergency door<br />
release<br />
AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on left<br />
AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1P1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on left<br />
with inside emergency door release<br />
AZ/AZM200-B30-RTAG1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on right<br />
AZ/AZM200-B30-RTAG1P1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on right<br />
with inside emergency door release<br />
Note: For appropriate connector cable for ST models, please<br />
see page 94.<br />
For ST1 models, order cable starting with A-K8+1-M23...<br />
For ST2 models, order cable staring with A-K8P-M12...
SERIES AZ 200 AVAILABLE KEYS AND DIMENSIONS<br />
Part number: SZ200<br />
Description:<br />
Lockout tag,<br />
up to 5 padlocks<br />
1<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Module Requirements<br />
Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP<br />
semiconductor outputs. See page 320 for<br />
recommended SCHMERSAL safety control<br />
modules.<br />
*Note: A safety control module may be required<br />
for reset function and/or feedback monitoring<br />
functions, as well as increased output current<br />
requirements.<br />
NOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please see<br />
page 166 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Sensors” section.<br />
23
SERIES TZG<br />
Description<br />
The Series TZG is designed for use with movable machine<br />
guards/access gates which must be closed for operator<br />
safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a<br />
significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven<br />
switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. And<br />
their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple<br />
tools, bent wires or other readily available means. Their IP67<br />
rating makes them ideal for interlocking safety guards in<br />
hostile environments.<br />
Operation<br />
The Series TZG electromechanical safety interlock switch<br />
consists of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometricallyunique<br />
actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable<br />
guard. Upon opening of the guard the NC contact(s) are<br />
forced to open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical<br />
linkage with the actuating key. These positive-break NC<br />
contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine stoppage)<br />
upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO contact closes<br />
upon key removal.)<br />
When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC<br />
contacts to close and the NO contact to re-open.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The Series TZG is intended for use as a safety interlock<br />
switch on movable machine guards which, when open,<br />
expose the operator/maintenance personnel to machine<br />
hazards. Typical applications are the interlocking of protective<br />
gratings, access doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels<br />
and other movable guards.<br />
Movable Machine Guard<br />
Safety Interlock Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficult<br />
to defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces<br />
liability exposure.<br />
• Four optional key entry locations … rotatable actuator<br />
head provides installation versatility.<br />
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuit<br />
interruption upon actuator key removal.<br />
• High key retention force (5 pounds) … eliminates<br />
inadvertent opening of guard due to shock/vibration.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.<br />
• High-strength, galvanized-steel actuator key … tolerates<br />
mechanical abuse without damage.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the<br />
most hostile environments.<br />
• Wide selection of actuating keys … to meet diverse<br />
application requirements.<br />
• Padlockable key … for added security during equipment<br />
maintenance.<br />
• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
• Funnel-shaped key entry … forgiving of key misalignment.<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Plastic <strong>Co</strong>nduit Adapter.<br />
Actuator Keys Sold Separately)<br />
Part Number <strong>Co</strong>ntacts Description*<br />
TZG01.103<br />
TZG01.110<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
Keyed interlock switch<br />
with front* key entry and<br />
slow action contacts.<br />
*Field-rotatable actuator head for key entry from right, left or rear.<br />
Part Number<br />
TZ/CO<br />
TZ/CW<br />
TZ/COR<br />
TZ/CK<br />
TZ/CWR<br />
TZ/COF/HIS.1<br />
TZ/COF/HIS.2<br />
OPTIONAL ACTUATOR KEYS<br />
Description<br />
Standard straight actuator key<br />
(13" minimum closing radius)<br />
Right-angled straight actuator key<br />
(11.8" minimum closing radius)<br />
Radial entry actuator key<br />
(11.8" minimum closing radius)<br />
Short straight actuator key<br />
(6.3" minimum closing radius)<br />
Right-angled bent actuator key<br />
(11.8" minimum closing radius)<br />
Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)<br />
(13.8" minimum closing radius)<br />
Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)<br />
(13.8" minimum closing radius)<br />
TZ/CORF/HIS.1<br />
TZ/CORF/HIS.2<br />
Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)<br />
(7.1" minimum closing radius)<br />
Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)<br />
(5.9" minimum closing radius)<br />
24
TZG TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Glass-fibre reinforced selfextinguishing<br />
thermoplastic<br />
Actuator Key<br />
Galvanized steel<br />
(defeat-resistant design)<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Holding Force<br />
20N (4.8 pounds)<br />
Travel for Positive-Break 12.5mm<br />
Force to Reach<br />
Approx. 20N (4.8 pounds)<br />
Positive-Break<br />
Closing Force<br />
Approx. 10 N (2.4 pounds)<br />
Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
1 million operations (minimum)<br />
Shock Resistance >30g / 18ms<br />
Vibration Resistance >15g / 10…200Hz<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 CE<br />
EN 60947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-15<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 UL<br />
EN 954-1 CSA<br />
Minimum Closing Radius Dependent upon actuator key<br />
used. Please see actuator key<br />
selection chart.<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Gap<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
Switching Action<br />
Short Circuit Protection<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Type Terminals<br />
Fine silver<br />
Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
2 × 3.5 mm<br />
8A (250VAC)<br />
Slow-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts (TZG models)<br />
Snap-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts (TZGP models)<br />
10A (slow-blow) – TZG models<br />
6A (slow-blow) – TZGP models<br />
250VAC<br />
4kV<br />
Screw terminals with self-lifting<br />
clamps for up to 13 AWG solid<br />
wire (2.5mm 2 ) or 13 AWG<br />
stranded (1.5mm 2 ) wire<br />
1<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
CONTACT CONFIGURATIONS<br />
Dimensional base for actuator<br />
1NO/1NC<br />
2NC<br />
25
SERIES TZG ACTUATORS<br />
ACTUATOR KEYS<br />
TZ/CO TZ/CW TZ/COR<br />
TZ/CWR TZ/COF/HIS.1 TZ/COF/HIS.2<br />
TZ/CORF/HIS.1 TZ/CORF/HIS.2 TZ/CK<br />
26
1<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design<br />
27
SERIES SDG<br />
Description<br />
The Series SDG is designed for use with movable machine<br />
guards/access gates which must be closed for operator<br />
safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a<br />
significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven<br />
switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. And<br />
their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple<br />
tools, bent wires or other readily available means. Their IP67<br />
rating makes them ideal for interlocking safety guards in<br />
hostile environments.<br />
Operation<br />
The Series SDG electromechanical safety interlock switch<br />
consists of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometricallyunique<br />
actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable<br />
guard. Upon opening of the guard the NC contact(s) are<br />
forced to open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical<br />
linkage with the actuating key. These positive-break NC<br />
contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine stoppage)<br />
upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO contact closes<br />
upon key removal.)<br />
When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC<br />
contacts to close and the NO contact to re-open.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The Series SDG is intended for use as a safety interlock<br />
switch on movable machine guards which, when open,<br />
expose the operator/maintenance personnel to machine<br />
hazards. Typical applications are the interlocking of protective<br />
gratings, access doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels<br />
and other movable guards.<br />
Movable Machine Guard<br />
Safety Interlock Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficult<br />
to defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces<br />
liability exposure.<br />
• Four optional key entry locations … rotatable actuator<br />
head provides installation versatility.<br />
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuit<br />
interruption upon actuator key removal.<br />
• Built-in retention force (1.2 pounds) … eliminates<br />
inadvertent opening of guard due to shock/vibration.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.<br />
• High-strength steel actuator key … tolerates mechanical<br />
abuse without damage.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant metal housing … tolerates<br />
the most hostile environments.<br />
• Wide selection of actuating keys … to meet diverse<br />
application requirements.<br />
• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
• Funnel-shaped key entry … forgiving of key misalignment.<br />
• Other 2-contact configurations available … please<br />
consult factory.<br />
Part Number <strong>Co</strong>ntacts Description*<br />
SDG01.1044<br />
SDG01.1103<br />
SDG01.1110<br />
Part Number<br />
BO<br />
BOW<br />
BOR<br />
BOWR<br />
BOF/HIS.1<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT <strong>Co</strong>nduit Adapter.<br />
Actuator Keys Sold Separately)<br />
2 NO & 1 NC<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
3 NC<br />
AVAILABLE ACTUATOR KEYS<br />
Description<br />
Standard straight actuator key<br />
(20" minimum closing radius)<br />
Right-angled straight actuator key<br />
(20" minimum closing radius)<br />
Radial entry actuator key<br />
(10" minimum closing radius)<br />
Right-angled bent actuator key<br />
(10" minimum closing radius)<br />
Keyed interlock switch<br />
with front* key entry and<br />
slow action contacts.<br />
*Field-rotatable for key entry from right, left or rear. Units are supplied<br />
with tamper-resistant (one-way) screws to replace the standard<br />
screws after rotating the actuator head for desired direction<br />
of key entry.<br />
Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)<br />
(13.8" Minimum closing radius)<br />
BOF/HIS.2<br />
Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)<br />
(13.8" Minimum closing radius)<br />
28
SDG AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Cast aluminum with enamel paint<br />
Actuator Key<br />
Steel (chromated)<br />
(defeat-resistant design)<br />
Degree of Protection IP67 (Switch housing)<br />
IP00 (Reversing and locking head)<br />
Holding Force<br />
5N (1.2 pounds)<br />
Travel for Positive-Break 12.5mm<br />
Force to Reach<br />
Approx. 5N (1.2 pounds)<br />
Positive-Break<br />
Closing Force<br />
Approx. 5N (1.2 pounds)<br />
Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
1 million operations (minimum)<br />
Shock Resistance >30g / 18ms<br />
Vibration Resistance >15g / 10…200Hz<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 CE<br />
EN 60947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-15<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 UL<br />
EN 954-1 CSA<br />
Minimum Closing Radius Dependent upon actuator key<br />
used. Please see actuator key<br />
selection chart.<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Gap<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
Switching Action<br />
Short Circuit Protection<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Type Terminals<br />
Fine silver<br />
Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
2 × 3.5 mm<br />
8A (250VAC)<br />
Slow-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts<br />
10A (slow-blow)<br />
250VAC<br />
4kV<br />
Screw terminals with self-lifting<br />
clamps for up to 13 AWG solid<br />
wire (2.5mm 2 ) or 13 AWG<br />
stranded (1.5mm 2 ) wire<br />
1<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
M20x1<br />
M20x1<br />
5.5mm<br />
M20x1<br />
29
SDG TECHNICAL DATA<br />
CONTACT CONFIGURATIONS<br />
SDG01.1044 SDG01.1103 SDG01.1110<br />
ACTUATOR KEYS<br />
BO<br />
BOW<br />
BOR<br />
BOWR<br />
BOF/HIS.1<br />
BOF/HIS.2<br />
30
1<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design<br />
31
SERIES AZ3350<br />
Tamper-Resistant Movable<br />
Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant die-cast aluminum housing<br />
… tolerates the most hostile environments.<br />
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption<br />
upon actuator key removal.<br />
• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple<br />
tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.<br />
• Four optional key entry locations … depending upon<br />
orientation of rotatable actuator head.<br />
• High-strength actuator key … tolerant to mechanical<br />
abuse without damage.<br />
• Funnel shaped key entry … forgiving of key misalignment.<br />
• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
• Wide selection of actuator keys … to meet diverse<br />
application requirements.<br />
• Optional M12x1 quick-connect … please consult factory.<br />
Description<br />
The AZ3350 Series is designed for use with movable machine<br />
guards/access gates which must be closed for operator<br />
safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a<br />
significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven<br />
switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. And<br />
the switch’s tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with<br />
simple tools, bent wires or other readily available means.<br />
Their rugged metal housing and IP67 rating make them ideal<br />
for interlocking safety guards in industrial and hostile<br />
environments.<br />
Operation<br />
The AZ3350 electromechanical safety interlock switch<br />
consists of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometricallyunique<br />
actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable<br />
guard. Upon opening of the guard, the NC contact(s) are<br />
forced to open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical<br />
linkage with the actuating key. These positive-break NC<br />
contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine stoppage)<br />
upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO contacts close<br />
upon key removal.)<br />
When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC<br />
contact(s) to close, and the NO contacts to re-open.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The AZ3350 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch<br />
on movable machine guards which, when open, expose the<br />
operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical<br />
applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, access<br />
doors/panels, perimeter access gates, hinged covers and<br />
other movable guards on textile machinery, packaging<br />
equipment, machine tools, assembly machinery, robot work<br />
cells and food/chemical processing equipment.<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Adapter. Actuator keys sold separately)<br />
Part Number <strong>Co</strong>ntacts (with key inserted)<br />
AZ3350-12ZUEK 1 NO & 2 NC<br />
AZ3350-03ZK 3 NC<br />
Please note: Standard models have the actuator head facing forward.<br />
See page 78 for units with the actuator head rotated to the left (U90)<br />
or right (U270) for use with STS door handles.<br />
Part Number<br />
AZ3350-B1<br />
AZ3350-B1R<br />
AZ3350-B5<br />
AZ3350-B5R<br />
AZ3350-B6<br />
AZ3350-B6H<br />
AZ3350-STS30-01<br />
AZ3350-STS30-02<br />
AZ3350-STS30-03<br />
AZ3350-STS30-04<br />
AZ3350-STS30-05<br />
AZ3350-STS30-06<br />
AZ3350-STS30-07<br />
AZ3350-STS30-08<br />
ACTUATOR KEYS<br />
Description<br />
Straight actuator key<br />
Bent radius actuating key<br />
Straight actuator key, right angle mounting<br />
Bent radius actuating key, right angle mounting<br />
Pivoting straight actuator key, rear mounting<br />
Pivoting straight actuator key, top mounting<br />
STS Door Handle kits for use with AZ3350<br />
switches. (See page 77 for details.)<br />
32<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
AZ3350 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Diecast light alloy with baked<br />
enamel finish<br />
Actuator Key<br />
Chromated steel<br />
(defeat-resistant design)<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Travel for Positive-Break 10.7 mm (0.4 inches)<br />
Closing Force<br />
Approx. 15 N (3.4 pounds)<br />
Operating Temperature –30°C to +90°C<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
> 10 7 operations<br />
Key Holding Force 30 N (7 pounds) (“R” models only)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards EN ISO 13849-1 BG-GS-ET-15<br />
EN 60947-5-1 UL<br />
EN 954-1<br />
CSA<br />
CE<br />
Minimum Closing Radius B1 & B5 keys: 150mm<br />
B6, B5-Flex & B6-Flex keys: 100mm<br />
Actuating Speed<br />
Max 0.2 m/s<br />
Actuating Frequency Max 1200 operations per hour<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
Fine silver<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration Type Zb double-break contact or<br />
3 NC contacts with galvanically<br />
separated contact bridges.<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Gap<br />
2 × 1.25mm (minimum)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
4A (230VAC)<br />
4A (24VDC)<br />
Switching Action<br />
Slow-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts<br />
Short Circuit Protection Fuse 6A (time-delay)<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage 250VAC<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
4kV<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Type Terminals Screw terminals (min 0.75mm 2 ,<br />
max 2.5mm 2 – including<br />
conductor ferrules)<br />
1<br />
DIMENSIONS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS<br />
31 16 24<br />
29 12.5<br />
AZ3350-12ZUEK<br />
60<br />
2.36<br />
30,5<br />
1.20<br />
13<br />
21<br />
31<br />
14<br />
22<br />
32<br />
5,3<br />
0.21<br />
7,3<br />
0.29<br />
17<br />
0.67<br />
AZ3350-03ZK<br />
11<br />
12<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
40,5<br />
1.59<br />
M20<br />
38<br />
1.50<br />
21<br />
31<br />
22<br />
32<br />
33
AZ3350 ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS<br />
ACTUATOR KEYS<br />
AZ3350-B1<br />
AZ3350-B5<br />
AZ3350-B1R<br />
AZ3350-B5R<br />
AZ3350-B6<br />
AZ3350-B6H<br />
34
1<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design<br />
35
SERIES SHGV<br />
Cable-less Keyed Mechanical Safety Guard<br />
Interlock with Key Transfer System<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Highly tamper resistant … difficult to defeat with simple<br />
tools, thereby reducing liability exposure.<br />
• Four optional key entry positions … provides installation<br />
versatility.<br />
• Three optional locking cylinder locations … provides<br />
installation versatility.<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>rrosion resistant … tolerates hostile environments.<br />
• Funnel shaped entry … forgiving of mechanical actuator<br />
key misalignment<br />
• Low cost guard locking … eliminates wiring at the guard.<br />
• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
Description<br />
The SHGV Series consist of a guard-mounted mechanical<br />
locking device and a 2-position key operated selector switch<br />
for control panel mounting. This unique key transfer system<br />
assures the removal of power before allowing the access<br />
control guard to be open … without the need for electrical<br />
wiring at the interlocked machine guard location.<br />
Operation<br />
When the machine guard is open the transfer key (for<br />
operating the 2-position selector switch) cannot be withdrawn<br />
from the guard locking mechanism.<br />
Upon closing of the guard, the mechanical actuator key<br />
permits the transfer-key to be turned (locking the guard) and<br />
withdrawn. The transfer-key can now be removed and inserted<br />
into the 2-position selector switch, allowing it to be operated<br />
(e.g. power to be turned on) … trapping the transfer key in the<br />
“on” position.<br />
To unlock (open) the guard, the selector switch must be<br />
turned to the off position. The transfer-key can now be<br />
withdrawn and inserted into the guard-locking mechanism for<br />
release of the mechanical actuator key and opening of the<br />
guard.<br />
The two lock barrel version allows the removal of a second<br />
transfer key when the mechanical actuator key has been<br />
released. This second transfer key prevents the removal of the<br />
“power control” transfer key from the keyed interlock. Thus it<br />
can be removed from the interlock by the operator to protect<br />
against the inadvertent start-up of the equipment.<br />
Part Number<br />
SHGV/L1 (*) ESS21S2/103<br />
SHGV/R1 (*) ESS21S2/103<br />
SHGV/B1 (*) ESS21S2/103<br />
SHGV/LD1 (*) /<br />
(*) ESS21S2/103<br />
SHGV/RD1 (*) /<br />
(*) ESS21S2/103<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
Lock Barrel Left<br />
Description<br />
Lock Barrel Right<br />
Lock Barrel Rear<br />
Lock Barrel Left & Lock Barrel<br />
in Front <strong>Co</strong>ver<br />
Lock Barrel Right & Lock Barrel<br />
in Front <strong>Co</strong>ver<br />
Includes guard device SHGV with standard BO actuator<br />
element, keyed selector switch ESS21S2, and contact block<br />
EF103 ( 1NO/1NC)<br />
(*) Individual key identification code stamped on selector<br />
switch cylinder.<br />
Note:<br />
This system is recommended for applications in which there<br />
is no residual motion or hazard after the removal of power.<br />
For applications in which there is residual motion or the<br />
presence of a hazard immediately following the removal of<br />
power, a solenoid-locking console ( Model SVE) is recommended.<br />
Please consult factory.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
Recommended for use where wiring directly to the movable<br />
guard is cost prohibitive or subject to damage due corrosive<br />
chemicals or other harsh environmental conditions.<br />
36<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
SERIES SHGV TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Protection Class IP 65 (Housing) IEC/EN 60529<br />
IP 00 (<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Head) IEC/EN 60529<br />
Actuating Forces Insertion of actuating element - 15 N<br />
Withdrawal of actuating element - 5 N<br />
Ambient temperature - 25 °C to + 70 °C<br />
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C<br />
Material ALsi 12 painted signal red (RAL 3000)<br />
Housing<br />
Steel passivated with<br />
SHG <strong>Co</strong>ver<br />
Perbunan seals(oil and gasoline resistant)<br />
Mechanical life 2 x 10 6 operating cycles<br />
Shock resistance > 30 x g / 18ms<br />
Vibration resistance > 15 x g/10 ... 200 Hz<br />
Climatic resistance 40/91 to DIN 50015 FW 24 to DIN 50016<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to EN ISO 13849-1 CSA<br />
Standards EN 954-1 EN ISO 13850<br />
CE IEC 60947-5-1<br />
UL<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standard IEC/EN 60947-5-1<br />
Protection Class IP 65 to IEC/EN 60529<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
Fine silver<br />
Rated breaking capacity 230Vac/6A - 400VAC/4A<br />
Rated operating current 230Vac/6A - 400VAC/4A<br />
Rated insulation voltage 400VAC / 450VDC<br />
Thermal test current 10 A<br />
Utilization Category<br />
AC-15; DC-13<br />
Max. fuse rating<br />
10 A (slow blow)<br />
Ambient temperature - 25 °C to + 80 °C<br />
Switching frequency 6000 s/h<br />
1<br />
DIMENSIONAL DRAWING FOR SHGV GUARD LOCKING DEVICE<br />
37
SERIES AZ415<br />
Tamper-Resistant Movable<br />
Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat.<br />
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption<br />
upon key removal.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.<br />
• High-strength, metal actuator key … tolerates mechanical<br />
abuse without damage.<br />
• Rugged, enamel-coated metal housing … tolerates the<br />
most hostile environments.<br />
• Adjustable actuator key holding force up to 110 pounds<br />
… permits use of switch as door latch.<br />
• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
Description<br />
The AZ415 Series is designed for movable machine<br />
guards/access gates which must be closed for operator<br />
safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a<br />
significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven<br />
switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. And<br />
their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple<br />
tools, bent wires or other readily available means.<br />
Operation<br />
The AZ415 electromechanical safety interlock switch consists<br />
of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometrically-unique<br />
actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable guard.<br />
Upon opening of the guard, the NC contacts are forced to<br />
open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical linkage with<br />
the actuating key. These NC contacts assure circuit<br />
interruption (and machine stoppage) upon removal of the<br />
actuator key. (The NO contacts close upon key removal.)<br />
In the closed position, the guard is held shut by an adjustable<br />
ball catch integral to the AZ415 housing.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The AZ415 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch on<br />
movable machine guards which, when open, expose the<br />
operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical<br />
applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, access<br />
doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels and other<br />
movable guards.<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(Actuator key sold separately … see below)<br />
Part Number<br />
(AZ415 - Switch Block S1*/<br />
Switch Block S2)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
with actuator key inserted<br />
(Switch Block S1*/Switch Block S2)<br />
AZ415-11/11ZPK<br />
1 NO & 1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC<br />
AZ415-02/20ZPK<br />
2 NC / 2 NO<br />
AZ415-02/11ZPK<br />
2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC<br />
AZ415-02/02ZPK<br />
2 NC / 2 NC<br />
*Only Switch Block S1 has positive-break contacts.<br />
ACTUATING KEYS & ACCESSORIES<br />
Part Number<br />
AZ/AZM415-B1<br />
AZ/AZM415-B2<br />
AZ/AZM415-B3<br />
AZ/AZM415-B4PS<br />
AZ415-STS30-01<br />
AZ415-STS30-02<br />
AZ415-STS30-03<br />
AZ415-STS30-04<br />
AZ415-STS30-05<br />
AZ415-STS30-06<br />
Description<br />
Linear entry actuator key<br />
Small radius x-axis entry actuator<br />
key (9.8" minimum closing radius)<br />
Small radius y-radius entry actuator<br />
key (9.8" minimum closing radius)<br />
Slide bolt actuator key<br />
STS Door Handle kits for use with<br />
AZ415 switches. See page 77 for<br />
details.<br />
AZ415-STS30-07<br />
AZ415-STS30-08<br />
Optional Safety<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntroller.<br />
See Page 333.<br />
MP-AZ415-22<br />
SZ415-22-1<br />
SZ415-22-2<br />
SZ415-1<br />
SZ415-2<br />
Mounting plate<br />
Lockout device for switch<br />
Lockout device for switch<br />
Lockout device for STS door handles<br />
Lockout device for STS door handles<br />
38<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
AZ415 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Die-cast aluminum with blue<br />
enamel finish<br />
Actuator Key<br />
key shaft: Zinc coated brass<br />
mounting block: Zinc coated steel<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Travel for Positive-Break 0.2 inches (5mm)<br />
Force to Reach<br />
Depending upon ball catch setting<br />
Positive-Break<br />
(3.5 pounds minimum)<br />
Actuator Key<br />
Adjustable, 80 to 400 N<br />
Holding Force<br />
Operating Temperature -13°F to +175°F<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
1 million operations<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 CE<br />
BG-GS-ET-19 UL<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 CSA<br />
EN 954-1<br />
Minimum Closing Radius 9.8" (250 mm) with B2 or<br />
B3 actuating key<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Gap<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
Switching Action<br />
Short Circuit Protection<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
Withstand<br />
Type Terminals<br />
Fine silver<br />
Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
2mm x 2mm<br />
4A (230VAC)<br />
Slow-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts<br />
Fuse 6A (slow-blow)<br />
250VAC<br />
4kV<br />
Screw terminals with self-lifting<br />
clamps for up to 1.5mm 2<br />
(15AWG) flexible stranded wire<br />
1<br />
DIMENSIONS (mm)<br />
86<br />
3.39 8<br />
.315<br />
22<br />
.87<br />
60,5<br />
2.38<br />
ø6,5<br />
.26<br />
8,6<br />
0.34<br />
36,5<br />
1.44<br />
105<br />
4.13<br />
46<br />
1.81<br />
15<br />
.59<br />
26<br />
1.02<br />
8,6<br />
.34<br />
88<br />
3.46<br />
M20<br />
ø11<br />
.43<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
Recommended key clearance<br />
less than 3 mm<br />
<<br />
> 3mm<br />
39
AZ415 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
ACTUATOR KEY DIMENSIONS<br />
B2 Actuating radii<br />
For hinged doors over the wide edge<br />
of the actuator<br />
B3 Actuating radii<br />
For hinged doors over the small edge<br />
of the actuator<br />
Dowel holes are also provided in the actuator<br />
body. With the use of dowel pins the<br />
removal of the actuator can be prevented.<br />
By turning the adjusting screw “a,” the<br />
actuator can be brought into any desired<br />
position.<br />
Both actuators can also be used on sliding<br />
doors.<br />
SWITCH TRAVEL AND WIRING DIAGRAMS<br />
AZ415-11/11 AZ415-02/11 AZ415-02/02<br />
AZ415-02/20<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
S2<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
S1<br />
40
AZ415 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
ACTUATOR KEY DIMENSIONS<br />
55<br />
2.17<br />
0-6<br />
0-.24<br />
56<br />
2.20<br />
1<br />
125<br />
4.92<br />
8<br />
.35<br />
18,5<br />
69,5<br />
2.74<br />
9<br />
.35<br />
237<br />
9.33<br />
22<br />
.87<br />
10
42<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design
KEYED INTERLOCK SWITCHES<br />
WITH SOLENOID LATCHING<br />
2<br />
SELECTION GUIDE<br />
Switch<br />
Series<br />
Housing<br />
Material<br />
Envelope<br />
Dimensions<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfigurations<br />
<strong>Catalog</strong><br />
Page<br />
AZM170<br />
Glass-fiber,<br />
reinforced thermoplastic<br />
1 1 ⁄4" × 2 1 ⁄2" × 5"<br />
Many arrangements<br />
available<br />
see catalog page<br />
44<br />
AZM161<br />
Glass-fiber,<br />
reinforced thermoplastic<br />
1 1 ⁄4" × 3 1 ⁄2" × 5 1 ⁄8" 1NO/2NC & 1NO/2NC 50<br />
AZM200<br />
Glass-fiber,<br />
reinforced thermoplastic<br />
1 3 ⁄4" × 9" × 2"<br />
2 PNP Safety Outputs<br />
1 Diagnostic Output<br />
54<br />
MZM100<br />
Glass-fiber,<br />
reinforced thermoplastic<br />
1 3 ⁄4" × 7 1 ⁄4" × 1 3 ⁄4"<br />
2 PNP Safety Outputs<br />
1 Diagnostic Output<br />
56<br />
TZF/TZM<br />
Glass-fiber,<br />
reinforced thermoplastic<br />
1 1 ⁄2" × 4" × 5"<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
2 NO & 2 NC<br />
58<br />
TKF/TKM Die-cast aluminum 2 1 ⁄2" × 3 1 ⁄2" × 8" 2 NO & 2 NC 62<br />
TZKF/TZKM<br />
Glass-fiber,<br />
reinforced thermoplastic<br />
1 3 ⁄4" × 2" × 7"<br />
AZM415 Die-cast aluminum 2" × 5" × 5 1 ⁄2"<br />
Many arrangements<br />
available<br />
see catalog page<br />
2 NO & 2 NC<br />
3 NO & 3 NC<br />
66<br />
70<br />
43
SERIES AZM170<br />
Description<br />
The AZM170 Series is designed for machines/work cells<br />
where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled<br />
until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature<br />
permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,<br />
which may exist immediately after removal of power, have<br />
abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,<br />
motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.<br />
The unit features independent actuator key (guard) position<br />
and solenoid-latching pin position contacts. These permit the<br />
prevention of machine restart until the guard is closed and<br />
the solenoid-latching pin is in the locked position.<br />
The AZM170 consists of an electromechanical safety interlock<br />
switch joined to a solenoid-latching mechanism. Both the<br />
safety switch and solenoid mechanism feature “positive-break”<br />
contacts. In addition the actuator key features a built-in latch<br />
(unlocked key holding force of 7 pounds), and an auxiliary<br />
manual unlocking device … the latter provided to aid in<br />
installation and for use in the event of a power failure (when<br />
using the “unlocking by solenoid” model).<br />
Each unit is supplied with a cord grip and a cap to seal the<br />
unused key entry port in the solenoid-latching mechanism.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The AZM170 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch<br />
on movable machine guards which must not be opened until<br />
dangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal of<br />
power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,<br />
spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typical<br />
applications are textile machines, stamping presses,<br />
articulating robot arms, mixing machines, metal working<br />
equipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.<br />
Solenoid-Latching Machine Guard<br />
Safety Interlock Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mpact design … only 1 1 ⁄4" × 3" × 4 1 ⁄4". Ideal where space<br />
is limited.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.<br />
• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple<br />
tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.<br />
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure interruption of<br />
safety circuit upon actuator key removal.<br />
• Two key entry locations … provide mounting flexibility.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant, high-impact glass-fibre<br />
reinforced housing … tolerates the most hostile<br />
environments.<br />
• High-strength stainless steel actuator key … tolerant to<br />
mechanical abuse without damage.<br />
• Several styles of actuator key … accommodate a wide<br />
variety of movable guards.<br />
• “Power-on” or “Power-off” latching option … for<br />
application versatility.<br />
• Built-in manual unlatching release (via special<br />
triangular key) … for easier installation.<br />
• “Padlockable” key … for added security during<br />
maintenance.<br />
• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
• Units available with quick-connect “ST”, screw<br />
terminals, or insulation displacement connectors (IDC).<br />
Two optional key entrances<br />
44<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL<br />
Solenoid-latch bypass/override key “-2197”<br />
(for locking via spring models only)
AZM170 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(Order desired actuator key separately)<br />
Part Number <strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration <strong>Co</strong>nnections<br />
Spring to Lock/Power to unlock<br />
AZM170-02ZRK 2NC IDC<br />
AZM170-11ZRK 1NO & 1NC IDC<br />
AZM170-02ZRK-ST-2197-* 2NC M12x1 Quick <strong>Co</strong>nnect<br />
AZM170-11ZRK-ST-2197-* 1NO & 1NC M12x1 Quick <strong>Co</strong>nnect<br />
AZM170SK-02ZRK-2197-* 2NC Screw Terminals<br />
AZM170SK-11ZRK-2197-* 1NO & 1NC Screw Terminals<br />
AZM170ST-11/02ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 2NC M12x1 Quick <strong>Co</strong>nnect<br />
AZM170ST-11/11ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 1NO & 1NC M12x1 Quick <strong>Co</strong>nnect<br />
AZM170ST-12/02ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 2NC / 2NC M12x1 Quick <strong>Co</strong>nnect<br />
AZM170ST-12/11ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 2NC / 1NO & 1NC M12x1 Quick <strong>Co</strong>nnect<br />
AZM170SK-02/01ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 2NC / 1 NC Screw Terminals<br />
AZM170SK-02/10ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 2NC / 1 NO Screw Terminals<br />
AZM170SK-11/02ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 2NC Screw Terminals<br />
AZM170SK-11/11ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 1NO & 1NC Screw Terminals<br />
AZM170SK-12/00ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 2NC / no contacts Screw Terminals<br />
Power to Lock – see Note 1 below<br />
AZM170-02ZRKA-* 2NC IDC<br />
AZM170-11ZRKA-* 1NO & 1NC IDC<br />
AZM170-02ZRKA-ST-* 2NC M12x1 Quick <strong>Co</strong>nnect<br />
AZM170-11ZRKA-ST-* 1NO & 1NC M12x1 Quick <strong>Co</strong>nnect<br />
AZM170SK-02ZRKA-* 2NC Screw Terminals<br />
AZM170SK-11ZRKA-* 1NO & 1NC Screw Terminals<br />
AZM170ST-11/02ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 2NC M12x1 Quick <strong>Co</strong>nnect<br />
AZM170ST-11/11ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 1NO & 1NC M12x1 Quick <strong>Co</strong>nnect<br />
AZM170ST-12/02ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 2NC / 2NC M12x1 Quick <strong>Co</strong>nnect<br />
AZM170ST-12/11ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 2NC / 1NO & 1NC M12x1 Quick <strong>Co</strong>nnect<br />
AZM170SK-02/01ZRKA-24VAC/DC 2NC / 1 NC Screw Terminals<br />
AZM170SK-02/10ZRKA-24VAC/DC 2NC / 1 NO Screw Terminals<br />
AZM170SK-11/02ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 2NC Screw Terminals<br />
AZM170SK-11/11ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 1NO & 1NC Screw Terminals<br />
AZM170SK-12/00ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 2NC / no contacts Screw Terminals<br />
*Please specify solenoid operating voltage via the addition of one of<br />
the following suffix codes:<br />
Voltage<br />
Add Suffix<br />
24VAC/DC<br />
-24VAC/DC<br />
110VAC<br />
-110VAC<br />
230VAC<br />
-230VAC<br />
Note: Models with xx/yy contact designations are available as 24VAC/DC only.<br />
Note: See page 94 for appropriate connector cables for use with ST models.<br />
ACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIES<br />
Note 1: Use of power-to-lock model permits the guard<br />
to be opened in the event of a power failure.<br />
Generally accepted safety standards/practices<br />
suggest this model only be used after<br />
conducting a thorough risk evaluation in<br />
the context of the application.<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
AZ17/170-B1<br />
Standard key (7.87" minimum closing radius)<br />
AZ17/170-B5<br />
Right-angle key (7.87" minimum closing radius)<br />
AZM170-B6<br />
Flexible, close-radius key (1.97" minimum closing radius)<br />
AZ17/170-B11<br />
Elongated standard straight key (7.87" minimum closing radius)<br />
AZ17/170-B15<br />
Elongated right-angle key (7.87" minimum closing radius)<br />
AZ17/170-B1-2245<br />
Standard straight key with vibration-resistant mounting (7.87" minimum closing radius)<br />
AZM-KEY<br />
Solenoid latch bypass/override key (for locking via spring models only)<br />
AZM170-B25-L-G1<br />
Door Handle actuator with star-grip for left-hand hinged guard<br />
AZM170-B25-L-G2<br />
Door Handle actuator with T-grip for left-hand hinged guard<br />
AZM170-B25-R-G1<br />
Door Handle actuator with star-grip for right-hand hinged guard<br />
AZM170-B25-R-G2<br />
Door Handle actuator with T-grip for right-hand hinged guard<br />
MS AZM 170-P<br />
*Adjustable mounting kit for parallel mounting<br />
MS AZM 170-R/P<br />
*Adjustable mounting kit for parallel or perpendicular mounting<br />
*MS mounting kits require the use of -B6 keys<br />
2<br />
45
AZM170 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Glass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishing<br />
thermoplastic<br />
Actuator Key<br />
Stainless steel<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Unlocked Key Holding 30N (7 pounds)<br />
Force<br />
Travel for Positive-Break 11 mm (0.440 inches)<br />
Closing Force<br />
Approx. 12N (2.7 pounds)<br />
Locking Force<br />
Approx. 1000N (225 pounds)<br />
Operating Temperature –22°F to +175°F<br />
Solenoid Operating –7°F to +140°F<br />
Temperature<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
> 10 6 operations<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 CE<br />
EN 60947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-19<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 UL<br />
EN 954-1<br />
CSA<br />
Minimum Closing Radius 1.97" (with B6 actuating key)<br />
7.87" (with B1, B5, B11 and B15<br />
actuating key)<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
Switching Action<br />
Short Circuit Protection<br />
Rated Isolation Voltage<br />
Type Terminals<br />
Solenoid Supply Voltages<br />
PIN ASSIGNMENTS<br />
for M12x1<br />
connectors<br />
Fine silver<br />
Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically separated contact bridges<br />
4A/230VAC<br />
Slow-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts<br />
6A (time-delay)<br />
250V<br />
Screw terminals (SK), M12x1 quick<br />
connectors (ST), or insulation<br />
displacement connection (IDC)<br />
24VDC/AC<br />
110VAC 40-60 Hz<br />
230VAC 40-60 Hz<br />
Max. 10 Watts<br />
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS<br />
(Power-to-unlock)<br />
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS<br />
(Power-to-lock)<br />
11zrk (SK and IDC)<br />
02zrk (SK and IDC)<br />
11zrkA (SK and IDC)<br />
02zrkA (SK and IDC)<br />
A 1<br />
A2<br />
A 1<br />
A2<br />
14<br />
13<br />
22 21<br />
32<br />
12<br />
11<br />
22 21<br />
32<br />
11zrk-ST<br />
02zrk-ST<br />
11zrkA-ST<br />
02zrkA-ST<br />
11/02zrk (SK and ST) 11/11zrk (SK and ST) 11/02zrkA (SK and ST) 11/11zrkA (SK and ST)<br />
Note: Above diagrams are with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized.<br />
46
AZM170 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS &<br />
CONTACT SCHEMATICS<br />
(Power-to-unlock)<br />
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS &<br />
CONTACT SCHEMATICS<br />
(Power-to-lock)<br />
12/02zrk (ST only)<br />
12/11zrk (ST only)<br />
12/02zrkA (ST only)<br />
12/11zrkA (ST only)<br />
2<br />
12/00zrk (SK only)<br />
12/00zrka (SK only)<br />
02/01zrk (SK only)<br />
02/01zrka (SK only)<br />
02/10zrk (SK only)<br />
02/10zrka (SK only)<br />
Note: Above diagrams are with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized.<br />
47
48<br />
AZM170 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
108<br />
4.25<br />
24<br />
.94<br />
15<br />
.59<br />
90<br />
3.54<br />
23<br />
.91<br />
17<br />
.67<br />
8,2<br />
.32<br />
ca. 24<br />
.94<br />
76,5<br />
3.01<br />
31<br />
1.22<br />
ø 4,2<br />
.17<br />
ø4-10<br />
.16-.39<br />
45<br />
1.77<br />
M16<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
8<br />
.31<br />
22<br />
.81<br />
ACTUATOR KEYS<br />
30<br />
1.18 22<br />
.87 20<br />
.79<br />
23<br />
.91<br />
2<br />
.08<br />
10<br />
.40<br />
33<br />
1.30<br />
4,3<br />
.17<br />
5,5<br />
.27<br />
AZ17/170-B1<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
22<br />
.87<br />
4,3<br />
.17<br />
25<br />
.98<br />
20<br />
.79<br />
12<br />
.47<br />
23<br />
.91<br />
16<br />
.63<br />
2<br />
.08<br />
48<br />
1.89<br />
AZ17/170-B15<br />
30<br />
1.18 22<br />
.87 20<br />
.79<br />
8<br />
.31<br />
23<br />
.91<br />
12<br />
.47<br />
2<br />
.08<br />
36<br />
1.41<br />
7,5<br />
.30<br />
13<br />
.51<br />
4,3<br />
.17<br />
AZ17/170-B5<br />
28<br />
1.10<br />
12<br />
.47<br />
11<br />
.43<br />
7<br />
.28<br />
24<br />
.94<br />
4<br />
.16<br />
32<br />
1.26<br />
2<br />
08<br />
22<br />
.87<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
20<br />
.79<br />
23<br />
.91<br />
b<br />
a<br />
a<br />
b<br />
AZM170-B6<br />
30<br />
1.18 22<br />
.87 20<br />
.79<br />
23<br />
.91<br />
2<br />
.08<br />
60,5<br />
2.38<br />
37,5<br />
1.48<br />
33<br />
1.30<br />
4,3<br />
.17<br />
AZ17/170-B11<br />
ø11<br />
.43<br />
18<br />
.71<br />
8<br />
.31<br />
13<br />
.51<br />
ø4,2<br />
.17<br />
23<br />
.91<br />
36<br />
1.42<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
AZ17/170-B1-2245<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
M20
AZM170 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
DIMENSIONS ST QUICK CONNECT MODELS<br />
B25 Door Handle Actuator<br />
2<br />
Note: For more information on B25 door<br />
handles, see page 82.<br />
MS AZM 170 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT<br />
(Eases installation and facilitates<br />
adjustments due to guard misalignment)<br />
MS AZM 170-P<br />
(for parallel<br />
mounting)<br />
MS AZM 170-R/P<br />
(for parallel or<br />
perpendicular<br />
mounting)<br />
49
AZM161<br />
Solenoid-Latching Safety Interlock Switch<br />
Description<br />
The AZM161 Series is designed for machines/work cells<br />
where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled<br />
until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature<br />
permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,<br />
which may exist immediately after removal of power, have<br />
abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,<br />
motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.<br />
The unit features independent actuator key (guard) position<br />
and solenoid-latching monitoring contacts. There is a mechanical<br />
linkage preventing the solenoid position contacts from<br />
changing unless the key is inserted (guard closed).<br />
The AZM161 consists of an electromechanical safety interlock<br />
switch section with “positive-break” NC contacts and an<br />
actuator key. In addition, the solenoid mechanism features 1<br />
NO and 2 NC solenoid-latching monitoring contacts, and an<br />
auxiliary manual unlocking device … the latter provided to aid<br />
in installation and for use in the event of a power failure (when<br />
using the “unlocking by solenoid” model).<br />
Operation<br />
The AZM161 electromechanical safety interlock switch<br />
assembly consists of a rugged switch-solenoid-latching<br />
mechanism and a geometrically-unique locking actuator key.<br />
The switch actuating key is typically mounted to a movable<br />
machine guard.<br />
When the guard is closed, the actuating key is held in position<br />
by the solenoid-latching mechanism. The guard may only be<br />
opened by energizing or de-energizing (depending upon<br />
model) the solenoid-latching mechanism.<br />
Upon opening of the guard, the switch’s “positive-break” NC<br />
contacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)<br />
mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contacts<br />
close upon key removal.<br />
The machine is prevented from starting until the actuating key<br />
is inserted (guard is closed) and the solenoid has locked it in<br />
the closed position.<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Solenoid-locking design … controls access to hazardous<br />
areas until safe conditions exist.<br />
• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple<br />
tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.<br />
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption<br />
upon actuator key removal.<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nditional “safe” outputs … actuating key must be fully<br />
inserted and solenoid must be actuated to lock key before<br />
“closed” safety signal is provided.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmental<br />
requirements.<br />
• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerates<br />
mechanical abuse without damage.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile<br />
environments.<br />
• Four optional key entry locations … provide installation<br />
flexibility.<br />
• Independent actuator key position and locking pin<br />
position monitoring contacts … provide a higher degree<br />
of safety.<br />
• Available in “solenoid-locking” and “solenoidunlocking”<br />
models … for application versatility.<br />
• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
• Wide selection of accessories … to meet diverse<br />
application requirements.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The AZM161 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch<br />
on movable machine guards which must not be opened until<br />
dangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal of<br />
power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,<br />
spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typical<br />
applications are textile machines, stamping presses,<br />
articulating robot arms, mixing machines, metal working<br />
equipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.<br />
Optional Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntroller (see page 320) and<br />
Standstill Monitor (see page 363).<br />
50
AZM161 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Plastic Adapter.<br />
Actuator key ordered separately.)<br />
Part Number <strong>Co</strong>ntacts <strong>Co</strong>nnection<br />
Spring to Lock<br />
AZM161CC-12/12RK-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Cage Clamps<br />
AZM161CC-12/12RKT-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Cage Clamps<br />
AZM161CC-12/12RKN-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Cage Clamps<br />
AZM161SK-12/12RK-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Screw terminals<br />
AZM161SK-12/12RKT-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Screw terminals<br />
AZM161SK-12/12RKN-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Screw terminals<br />
Power to Lock (see Note 1 below)<br />
AZM161CC-12/12RKA-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Cage Clamps<br />
AZM161SK-12/12RKA-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Screw terminals<br />
* Please specify solenoid operating voltage:<br />
-024 for 24V AC/DC<br />
-110/230 for 110/230V AC<br />
Solenoid By-Pass Options (on spring to lock models):<br />
Suffix “T” indicates Emergency Exit Release<br />
(for units mounted inside hazardous area)<br />
Suffix “N” indicates Emergency Release<br />
(for units mounted outside hazardous area)<br />
See page 53 for diagrams<br />
Note 1: Use of power-to-lock model permits the guard to be<br />
opened in the event of a power failure. Generally<br />
accepted safety standards/practices suggest this<br />
model only be used after conducting a thorough<br />
risk evaluation in the context of the application.<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL<br />
AVAILABLE KEYS & ACCESSORIES<br />
Part Number<br />
MS mounting kits require the use of -B6 keys<br />
Description<br />
AZM161-B1 Standard actuating key<br />
AZM161-B1E Standard actuating key with heavy-duty<br />
mounting bracket<br />
AZM161-B6 Small radius actuating key<br />
AZM161-B6-2177 Funnel entry adapter with elongated<br />
flexible-movement actuating key<br />
AZM161-STS30-01<br />
AZM161-STS30-02<br />
AZM161-STS30-03<br />
AZM161-STS30-04<br />
AZM161-STS30-05<br />
AZM161-STS30-06<br />
AZM161-STS30-07<br />
AZM161-STS30-08<br />
AZM-Key<br />
M16-CG<br />
STS door handle systems for use with<br />
AZM161. See page 77 for details and<br />
selection guide.<br />
Solenoid-latch bypass key<br />
<strong>Co</strong>rd grip (cable gland)<br />
M16- 1 ⁄2"P Plastic 1 ⁄2" NPT adapter<br />
M16- 1 ⁄2"M Metal 1 ⁄2" NPT adapter<br />
PL-M16-24V<br />
PL-M16-120V<br />
MS AZM 161-P<br />
MS AZM 161-R/P<br />
24VAC/DC pilot light kit<br />
120VAC/DC pilot light kit<br />
Adjustable mounting kit for parallel mounting<br />
Adjustable mounting kit for parallel or<br />
perpendicular mounting<br />
2<br />
MS AZM 161 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT<br />
(Eases installation and facilitates adjustments due to guard misalignment)<br />
MS AZM 161-R/P<br />
(for parallel or<br />
perpendicular mounting)<br />
MS AZM 161-P<br />
(for parallel mounting)<br />
51
AZM161 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Glass-fibre reinforced selfextinguishing<br />
thermoplastic<br />
Actuator Key<br />
Stainless steel<br />
(defeat-resistant design)<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Unlocked Holding Force 30N (7 pounds)<br />
Travel for Positive-Break 8mm (0.315 inches)<br />
Force to Reach<br />
10N (Approx. 2.4 pounds)<br />
Positive-Break<br />
Closing Force<br />
Approx. 15 N (3.4 pounds)<br />
Operating Temperature –13°F to +104°F<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
1 million operations<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 CE<br />
EN 60947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-19<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 UL<br />
EN 954-1<br />
CSA<br />
Solenoid Locking Force 2,000N (440 pounds)<br />
Key Return Force 0N<br />
Minimum Closing Radius 5.9" (150mm) with B1 and B1E<br />
actuating key<br />
3.7" (95mm) with B6 actuating key<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
Fine silver<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Gap<br />
2 × 2 mm (minimum)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
4A (230VAC)<br />
Switching Action<br />
Slow-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts<br />
Short Circuit Protection Fuse 6A (time-delay)<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage 250VAC<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
6kV<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Type Terminals*<br />
Screw terminals<br />
Cage Clamps<br />
Available Solenoid<br />
24VDC, 110VDC, 230VDC<br />
Supply Voltages (Vs) 24VAC/50Hz<br />
115VAC/60Hz<br />
230VAC/50Hz<br />
Solenoid Power<br />
10W (maximum)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
Solenoid Duty Cycle 100%<br />
Solenoid Pull-in Voltage (0.85 to 1.1) Vs<br />
Solenoid Drop-out Voltage (0.2 to 0.75) Vs<br />
*Optional quick disconnect versions available.<br />
Please consult factory.<br />
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS (Solenoid-mechanism not energized)<br />
AZM 161SK-12/12rk<br />
AZM 161SK-12/12rka<br />
52<br />
Note: Above diagrams are with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized.
AZM161 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
DIMENSIONS (Switch & Actuator Keys)<br />
8<br />
.31<br />
40<br />
1.57<br />
78<br />
3.07<br />
72<br />
2.83<br />
Ø 4<br />
.18<br />
29<br />
1.14<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
7<br />
.28<br />
18<br />
.71<br />
90<br />
3.54<br />
5,5<br />
.22<br />
M16<br />
M16<br />
M16<br />
130<br />
5.12<br />
56<br />
2.20<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
10<br />
.39<br />
ø 5,5<br />
.22<br />
56<br />
2.20<br />
5<br />
.2<br />
40 +<br />
- 0<br />
1.57<br />
56<br />
2.20<br />
16<br />
.63<br />
32,7<br />
1.29<br />
32,7<br />
1.29<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
14<br />
.55<br />
5<br />
2<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
AZM161-B1 AZM161-B1E AZM161-B6<br />
b<br />
2<br />
.08<br />
.20<br />
ø5,5<br />
.22<br />
ø10,5<br />
.41<br />
11<br />
a<br />
16<br />
.63<br />
.43<br />
27<br />
1.06<br />
2<br />
.08<br />
27<br />
1.06<br />
2<br />
.08<br />
ø5,5<br />
.22<br />
40<br />
1.57<br />
a<br />
b<br />
Solenoid Latch By-pass Release examples (spring-to-lock models)<br />
standard model manual<br />
release point by-pass<br />
using separate<br />
AZM-Key<br />
Type "T" integrated Emergency Exit<br />
release lever for mounting<br />
inside hazardous area<br />
Type "N" integrated release<br />
lever for mounting outside<br />
hazardous area<br />
53
SERIES AZM 200<br />
Description<br />
The AZM 200 Series is designed for machine/work cells<br />
where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled<br />
until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature<br />
permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,<br />
which may exist immediately after removal of power, have<br />
abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,<br />
motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.<br />
The AZM 200 consists of a solenoid-latching interlock and<br />
actuator unit with door handle and optional emergency exit<br />
handle. The actuator is always inserted into its housing,<br />
protecting the actuator and the operator against damage and<br />
injury. Utilizing pulse-echo sensor technology, the actuator<br />
and interlock can have an offset of ±5 mm and the actuator<br />
still engages the interlock.<br />
Due to the one-hand operation of the emergency exit handle,<br />
the hazardous area can be left quickly and safely—even during<br />
a power failure (when using the “unlock by power” model).<br />
The solenoid interlock is a dual channel design with two<br />
short-circuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can<br />
switch up to 250 mA.<br />
With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring of<br />
the safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors,<br />
up to 31 AZM 200 solenoid interlocks can be wired in series<br />
without detriment to the safety performance level/control<br />
category (PL e to EN ISO 13849-1/<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 to<br />
EN 954-1).<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The AZM 200 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch<br />
on movable machine guards which must not be opened until<br />
dangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal of<br />
power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,<br />
spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typical<br />
applications are textile machines, stamping machines,<br />
metal working equipment, printing presses and<br />
packaging machines.<br />
54<br />
Pulse-Echo Based<br />
Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Solenoid Interlock<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Solenoid locking design … controls access to hazardous<br />
areas until safe conditions exist.<br />
• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.<br />
• Dual purpose handle … unlatches and opens guard—no<br />
additional door handles are needed.<br />
• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states<br />
• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …<br />
satisfy requirements of PL e to EN ISO 13849-1 Safety<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 to EN 954-1. *See Note Below.<br />
• One-hand emergency release … hazardous area can be<br />
left quickly and safely—even during a power failure.<br />
• Switch and actuator do not protrude into door opening …<br />
no risk of injury or damage from a protruding actuator.<br />
• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application versatility.<br />
• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, max<br />
200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety<br />
performance level.<br />
AVAILABLE AZM200 MODELS<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
Spring to Lock, Power to unlock<br />
AZM200SK-T1P2P Diagnostic Output (Screw Terminals)<br />
AZM200SK-TSD2P Serial Diagnostic Output* (Screw<br />
Terminals)<br />
AZM200ST1-T1P2P Diagnostic Output (M23x1 quick<br />
connect, 9 pin)<br />
AZM200ST1-TSD2P Serial Diagnostic Output* (M23x1<br />
quick connect, 9 pin)<br />
AZM200ST2-T1P2P Diagnostic Output (M12x1 quick<br />
connect, 8 pin)<br />
AZM200ST2-TSD2P Serial Diagnostic Output* (M12x1<br />
quick connect, 8 pin)<br />
AZM200ST-T1P2P-2568 Diagnostic Output, with pushbutton &<br />
LED (M23x1 quick connect, 12 pin)<br />
Power to Lock, Spring to unlock<br />
AZM200SK-T1P2PA Diagnostic Output (Screw Terminals)<br />
AZM200SK-TSD2PA Serial Diagnostic Output* (Screw<br />
Terminals)<br />
AZM200ST1-T1P2PA Diagnostic Output (M23x1 quick<br />
connect, 9 pin)<br />
AZM200ST1-TSD2PA Serial Diagnostic Output* (M23x1<br />
quick connect, 9 pin)<br />
AZM200ST2-T1P2PA Diagnostic Output (M12x1 quick<br />
connect, 8 pin)<br />
AZM200ST2-TSD2PA Serial Diagnostic Output* (M12x1<br />
quick connect, 8 pin)<br />
AZM200ST-T1P2PA-2568 Diagnostic Output, with pushbutton &<br />
LED (M23x1 quick connect, 12 pin)<br />
ACTUATORS<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
AZ/AZM200-B1-LT Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from<br />
left<br />
AZ/AZM200-B1-LTP0 Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from<br />
left with inside emergency door release<br />
AZ/AZM200-B1-RT Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from<br />
right<br />
AZ/AZM200-B1-RTP0 Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from<br />
right with inside emergency door<br />
release<br />
AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on left<br />
AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1P1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on left<br />
with inside emergency door release<br />
AZ/AZM200-B30-RTAG1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on right<br />
AZ/AZM200-B30-RTAG1P1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on right<br />
with inside emergency door release
SERIES AZM 200 AVAILABLE KEYS AND DIMENSIONS<br />
Part number: SZ200<br />
Description:<br />
Lockout tag, up to 5 padlocks<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector Cables for ST Models<br />
Please see page 94 for appropriate connector cable part numbers.<br />
ST1 versions use M12, 8 pin connectors<br />
(part numbers starting A-K8P-M12...)<br />
ST2 versions use M23, 9 pin connectors<br />
(part numbers starting A-K8+1-M23...)<br />
ST versions use M23, 12 pin connectors<br />
(part numbers starting A-K12P-M23...)<br />
*Sensors with Serial Diagnostic output are for use with<br />
various field bus protocols, see page 204 for SD Gateways.<br />
2<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Module Requirements Dualchannel<br />
safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor outputs. See<br />
page 320 for recommended SCHMERSAL safety control modules.<br />
*Note: A safety control module may be required for<br />
reset function and/or feedback monitoring functions,<br />
as well as increased output current requirements.<br />
AZM200...2568 includes pushbutton<br />
for authorized release at switch site.<br />
NOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please see<br />
page 172 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Sensors” section.<br />
55
SERIES MZM 100<br />
Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Magnetic-Latching Interlock<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Magnetic-latching design … controls access to hazardous<br />
areas until safe conditions exist (100 lbs. locked holding<br />
force).<br />
• Forced-closed operating principle … no mechanical wear<br />
due to non-contact design.<br />
• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states<br />
• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …<br />
satisfy requirements of PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, <strong>Co</strong>ntrol<br />
Category 4 per EN 954-1. *See Note Below.<br />
• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, max<br />
200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety<br />
performance level.<br />
• Automatic magnetic latch (35 N) … no mechanical<br />
latching required (“r” version only).<br />
• Smooth surfaces allow for easy cleaning … ideal where<br />
high hygienic standards need to be maintained.<br />
• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application versatility.<br />
AVAILABLE MZM100 MODELS<br />
Description<br />
The MZM 100 Series is designed for machine/work cells<br />
where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled<br />
until safe conditions exist. Their magnetic-latching feature<br />
permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,<br />
which may exist immediately after removal of power, have<br />
abated.<br />
The MZM 100 consists of a magnetic-latching interlock and<br />
actuator unit. An electromagnet is utilized to generate a 500 N<br />
holding force. An integrated pulse-echo based sensor detects<br />
and monitors the position of the safety guard. This sensor<br />
technology permits an offset between the actuator and interlock<br />
of ±5 mm vertical and ±3 mm horizontal.<br />
The MZM100 magnetic-latching interlock is a dual channel<br />
design with two short-circuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each of<br />
which can switch up to 250 mA. The holding force is permanently<br />
electronically measured and monitored. If the holding<br />
force drops below 500 N, the safety outputs are not enabled,<br />
recognizing a dirty interlock.<br />
With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring of<br />
the safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors,<br />
up to 31 MZM 100 magnetic-latching interlocks can be wired<br />
in series without detriment to the Safety Performance Level<br />
control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1/<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4<br />
per EN954-1).<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The MZM 100 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch<br />
on movable machine guards which must not be opened until<br />
dangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal of<br />
power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,<br />
spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typical<br />
applications are textile machines, stamping machines,<br />
food processing equipment, metal working equipment,<br />
wood working and packaging machines.<br />
Part Number<br />
MZM100ST-1P2PA<br />
MZM100ST-SD2PA<br />
MZM100ST-1P2PRA<br />
MZM100ST-SD2PRA<br />
Description<br />
2-PNP safety outputs, diagnostic<br />
output<br />
2-PNP safety outputs, Serial diagnostic<br />
output*<br />
2-PNP safety outputs, diagnostic<br />
output, with variable latching (30N to<br />
240N)<br />
2-PNP safety outputs, Serial diagnostic<br />
output*, with variable latching (30N to<br />
240N)<br />
*Sensors with Serial Diagnostic output are for use with<br />
various field bus protocols, see page 204 for SD Gateways.<br />
ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
MZM100-B1.1<br />
Actuator<br />
MS MZM 100-W<br />
Mounting Set<br />
Note: For appropriate connector cable, please see page 96.<br />
Order cable starting with A-K8+1-M23...<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Module Requirements<br />
Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor<br />
outputs. See page 320 for recommended SCHMERSAL<br />
safety control modules.<br />
Note: A safety control module may be required for reset<br />
function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as<br />
well as increased output current requirements.<br />
56
SERIES MZM 100 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Unlocked Holding Force 35N (7 pounds) (“r” version only)<br />
Magnetic Holding Force 500N (112 pounds)<br />
Operating Temperature –25°C to +55°C<br />
Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C<br />
Response Time<br />
≤ 100ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
Shock Resistance 30g/11ms<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
1 million operations<br />
Mounting<br />
40mm profiles<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE BG<br />
EN 60947-5-1 UL/CSA<br />
EN 954-1 EN ISO 13849-1<br />
IEC 61508<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Mode of Operation Magentic & Inductive<br />
Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%<br />
Rated Operating Current 1.0A<br />
No Load Current 0.5A<br />
Residual Current<br />
≤ 0.5mA<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
0.8kV<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VDC<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
(2) PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Safety Output<br />
0.25A per output<br />
Operating Current<br />
Safety Output<br />
Max. 4V below rated<br />
Operating Voltage operating voltage<br />
Signaling Output<br />
PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Signaling Output Max. 0.05A<br />
Operating Current<br />
Signaling Output<br />
Max. 4V below rated<br />
Operating Voltage operating voltage<br />
Termination<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector M23x1<br />
2<br />
NOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please see<br />
page 178 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Sensors” section.<br />
57
SERIES TZF/TZM<br />
Description<br />
The TZF/TZM Series is designed for machines/work cells<br />
where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled<br />
until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature<br />
permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,<br />
which may exist immediately after removal of power, have<br />
abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,<br />
motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.<br />
The unit features independent actuator key (guard) position<br />
and solenoid-latching monitoring contacts. These permit the<br />
prevention of machine restart until the guard is closed and<br />
the solenoid-latching pin is in the locked position.<br />
The TZF/TZM Series consists of an electromechanical safety<br />
interlock switch with “positive-break” contacts and a locking<br />
actuator key. In addition, the TZFS model features an auxiliary<br />
manual unlocking device … the latter provided to aid in<br />
installation and for use in the event of a power failure (when<br />
using the “unlocking by solenoid” model).<br />
Operation<br />
The TZF/TZM Series of electromechanical safety interlock<br />
switch assembly consists of a rugged switch, a solenoidoperated<br />
latching mechanism, and a geometrically-unique<br />
actuator key. The switch actuating key is typically mounted to<br />
a movable machine guard.<br />
When the guard is closed, the actuating key is held in position<br />
by the latching mechanism. The guard may only be opened by<br />
energizing or de-energizing (depending upon model) the<br />
latching mechanism.<br />
Upon opening of the guard, the switch’s “positive-break” NC<br />
contacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)<br />
mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contacts<br />
close upon key removal.<br />
The solenoid-latching mechanism circuit features a NO and<br />
a NC contact which permit monitoring its status. This NC<br />
contact is wired in series with the NC contact in the safety<br />
switch circuit. Thus the machine is prevented from starting<br />
until the actuating key is inserted (guard is closed) and the<br />
solenoid has locked it in the closed position.<br />
Heavy-Duty Solenoid-Latching<br />
Safety Interlock Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Solenoid-locking & spring-locking designs … controls<br />
access to hazardous areas until safe conditions exist.<br />
• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple<br />
tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.<br />
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption<br />
upon actuator key removal.<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nditional “safe” outputs … actuating key must be fully<br />
inserted and solenoid must be actuated to lock key before<br />
“closed” safety signal is provided.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmental<br />
requirements.<br />
• High-strength, galvanized-steel actuator key … tolerates<br />
mechanical abuse without damage.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile<br />
environments.<br />
• Three optional key entry locations … rotatable actuator<br />
head provides installation versatility.<br />
• Independent actuator key position and locking pin<br />
position monitoring contacts … provide a higher degree<br />
of safety.<br />
• Padlockable key … for added security during equipment<br />
maintenance.<br />
• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
• Wide selection of actuating keys … to meet diverse<br />
application requirements.<br />
• Special types for food industry … please consult factory.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The TZF/TZM Series is intended for use as a safety interlock<br />
switch on movable machine guards which must not be<br />
opened until dangerous conditions, which may exist after the<br />
removal of power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel<br />
overrun, spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc.<br />
Typical applications are textile machines, stamping presses,<br />
articulating robot arms, mixing machines, metal working<br />
equipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.<br />
TZF (SPRING TO LOCK) RELEASE OPTIONS<br />
TZF…S manual keyed release<br />
Use TZ-69 or<br />
TZ-75 key to<br />
release solenoid<br />
and reset<br />
TZF…N Emergency release knob<br />
Pull knob to release Solenoid,<br />
reset with the<br />
TZ-69 or<br />
TZ-75 key<br />
58<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
SERIES TZF/TZM AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Plastic <strong>Co</strong>nduit Adapter and<br />
TZ/CO Standard Actuator key)<br />
Part Number<br />
TZFS-*<br />
TZFCS-*<br />
TZFWS-*<br />
TZFCWS<br />
TZM-*<br />
TZMC-*<br />
TZMW-*<br />
TZMCW<br />
*Please indicate desired operation voltage:<br />
Voltage:<br />
Suffix:<br />
24VDC<br />
no suffix<br />
115VAC -115<br />
230VAC -230<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
Spring lock / Power to unlock<br />
2 NC (series) & 1 NO<br />
2 NC (series) & 2 NO<br />
2 NC (parallel) & 1 NO<br />
2 NC (parallel) & 2 NO<br />
Power to lock / spring unlock (see Note 1 below)<br />
2 NC (series) & 1 NO<br />
2 NC (series) & 2 NO<br />
2 NC (parallel) & 1 NO<br />
2 NC (parallel) & 2 NO<br />
For Spring to Lock (TZF) models:<br />
For a manual emergency release, change “S” to “N” in the<br />
part number (TZFN)<br />
OPTIONAL ACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIES<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
TZ/CO<br />
Standard straight actuator key<br />
(13" minimum closing radius)<br />
TZ/CW<br />
Right-angled straight actuator key<br />
(11.8" minimum closing radius)<br />
TZ/COR Radial entry actuator key<br />
(11.8" minimum closing radius)<br />
TZ/CK<br />
Short straight actuator key<br />
(6.3" minimum closing radius)<br />
TZ/CWR Right-angled bent actuator key<br />
(11.8" minimum closing radius)<br />
TZ/COF/HIS.1 Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)<br />
(13.8" minimum closing radius)<br />
TZ/COF/HIS.2 Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)<br />
(13.8" minimum closing radius)<br />
TZ/CORF/HIS.1 Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)<br />
(7.1" minimum closing radius)<br />
TZ/CORF/HIS.2 Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)<br />
(5.9" minimum closing radius)<br />
TZ-69<br />
Straight safety interlock auxiliary release key<br />
(for TZF models)<br />
TZ-75<br />
Right-angled safety interlock auxiliary release<br />
key (for TZF models)<br />
2<br />
Note 1: Use of power-to-lock<br />
model permits the guard<br />
to be opened in the event<br />
of a power failure.<br />
Generally accepted safety<br />
standards/practices suggest<br />
this model only be<br />
used after conducting a<br />
thorough risk evaluation<br />
in the context of the<br />
application.<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
TZ/69<br />
Three-square socket wrench<br />
for versions TZF…(supplied)<br />
59
SERIES TZF/TZM TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Glass-fibre reinforced selfextinguishing<br />
thermoplastic<br />
Actuator Key<br />
Galvanized steel<br />
(defeat-resistant design)<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Unlocked Holding Force 20N (4.8 pounds)<br />
Travel for Positive-Break 14.5 mm<br />
Force to Reach<br />
20N (Approx. 4.8 pounds)<br />
Positive-Break<br />
Closing Force<br />
Approx. 10 N (2.4 pounds)<br />
Operating Temperature –13°F to +104°F<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
2 million operations (minimum)<br />
Shock Resistance 30g / 11ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 20g / 10…55Hz<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 UL<br />
EN 60947-5-1 CSA<br />
EN ISO 13849-1<br />
EN 954-1<br />
CE<br />
BG-GS-ET-15<br />
Solenoid Locking Force 1,700N (380 pounds)<br />
Minimum Closing Radius Dependent upon actuator key used.<br />
Please see actuator key selection<br />
chart.<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Gap<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
Switching Action<br />
Short Circuit Protection<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Type Terminals<br />
Available Solenoid<br />
Voltages<br />
Fine silver<br />
Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
Guard monitoring: 2 × 3.5 mm<br />
Solenoid monitoring: 2 × 3 mm<br />
8A (250VAC)<br />
Slow-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts<br />
10A (slow-blow)<br />
250VAC<br />
4kV<br />
Screw terminals with self-lifting<br />
clamps for up to 13 AWG solid<br />
wire (2.5mm 2 ) or 13 AWG<br />
stranded (1.5mm 2 ) wire<br />
24VDC<br />
115VAC<br />
230VAC<br />
Solenoid Power<br />
8.8W (maximum)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
Solenoid Duty Cycle 100%<br />
CONTACT CONFIGURATIONS<br />
TZM (power-to-lock) models<br />
CONTACT CONFIGURATIONS<br />
TZF (spring lock/power-to-unlock) models<br />
TZM<br />
TZMW<br />
TZFS<br />
TZFWS<br />
TZMC<br />
TZMCW<br />
TZFCS<br />
TZFCWS<br />
Note: Drawings show contact state with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized.<br />
60
SERIES TZF/TZM ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS<br />
ACTUATOR KEYS<br />
TZ/CO TZ/CW TZ/COR<br />
2<br />
TZ/CWR TZ/COF/HIS.1 TZ/COF/HIS.2<br />
TZ/CORF/HIS.1 TZ/CORF/HIS.2 TZ/CK<br />
61
SERIES TKF/TKM<br />
Description<br />
The TKF/TKM Series is designed for machines/work cells<br />
where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled<br />
until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature<br />
permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,<br />
which may exist immediately after removal of power, have<br />
abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,<br />
motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.<br />
The unit features independent actuator key (guard) position<br />
and solenoid-latching monitoring contacts. These permit the<br />
prevention of machine restart until the guard is closed and<br />
the solenoid-latching pin is in the locked position.<br />
The TKF/TKM Series consists of an electromechanical safety<br />
interlock switch with “positive-break” contacts and a locking<br />
actuator key. In addition, the TKFS model features an auxiliary<br />
manual unlocking device … the latter provided to aid in<br />
installation and for use in the event of a power failure (when<br />
using the “unlocking by solenoid” model).<br />
Operation<br />
The TKF/TKM Series of electromechanical safety interlock<br />
switch assembly consists of a rugged switch, a solenoidoperated<br />
latching mechanism, and a geometrically-unique<br />
actuator key. The switch actuating key is typically mounted to<br />
a movable machine guard.<br />
When the guard is closed, the actuating key is held in position<br />
by the latching mechanism. The guard may only be opened by<br />
energizing or de-energizing (depending upon model) the<br />
latching mechanism.<br />
Upon opening of the guard, the switch’s “positive-break” NC<br />
contacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)<br />
mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contacts<br />
close upon key removal.<br />
The solenoid-latching mechanism circuit features a NO and a<br />
NC contact which permit monitoring its status. This NC<br />
contact is wired in series with the NC contact in the safety<br />
switch circuit. Thus the machine is prevented from starting<br />
until the actuating key is inserted (guard is closed) and the<br />
solenoid has locked it in the closed position.<br />
Heavy-Duty Solenoid-Latching<br />
Safety Interlock Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Solenoid-locking & spring-locking designs … controls<br />
access to hazardous areas until safe conditions exist.<br />
• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple<br />
tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.<br />
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption<br />
upon actuator key removal.<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nditional “safe” outputs … actuating key must be fully<br />
inserted and solenoid must be actuated to lock key before<br />
“closed” safety signal is provided (Series TKM).<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmental<br />
requirements.<br />
• High-strength, galvanized-steel actuator key … tolerates<br />
mechanical abuse without damage.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant metal housing … tolerates<br />
hostile environments.<br />
• Three optional key entry locations … rotatable actuator<br />
head provides installation versatility.<br />
• Independent actuator key position and locking pin<br />
position monitoring contacts … provide a higher degree<br />
of safety.<br />
• Padlockable key … for added security during equipment<br />
maintenance.<br />
• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
• Wide selection of actuating keys … to meet diverse<br />
application requirements.<br />
• Special types available for concealed installation …<br />
please consult factory.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The TKF/TKM Series is intended for use as a safety interlock<br />
switch on movable machine guards which must not be<br />
opened until dangerous conditions, which may exist after the<br />
removal of power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel<br />
overrun, spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc.<br />
Typical applications are textile machines, stamping presses,<br />
articulating robot arms, mixing machines, metal working<br />
equipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.<br />
62<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
SERIES TKF/TKM AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT <strong>Co</strong>nduit Adapter. Actuator key sold separately)<br />
Part Number Solenoid Operating Voltage <strong>Co</strong>ntacts Description<br />
TKF/90<br />
TKF/*/90<br />
24VDC<br />
115/230VAC (50/60Hz)<br />
2NC & 2 NO<br />
(NC contacts<br />
in series)<br />
“Series” actuating key locked by spring and unlocked by<br />
energizing solenoid<br />
TKM/90<br />
TKM/*/90<br />
TKF/R/90<br />
TKF/R*/90<br />
24VDC<br />
115/230VAC (50/60Hz)<br />
24VDC<br />
115/230VAC (50/60Hz)<br />
2NC & 2 NO<br />
(NC contacts<br />
in series)<br />
2NC & 2 NO<br />
(NC contacts<br />
in series)<br />
“Series” actuating key locked by energizing solenoid and<br />
unlocked by spring (See Note 1 below)<br />
“Parallel” actuating key (for right-hand insertion) locked<br />
by spring and unlocked by energizing solenoid<br />
2<br />
TKM/R/90<br />
TKM/R*/90<br />
24VDC<br />
115/230VAC (50/60Hz)<br />
2NC & 2 NO<br />
(NC contacts<br />
in series)<br />
“Parallel” actuating key (for right-hand insertion)<br />
locked by energizing solenoid and unlocked by spring<br />
(See Note 1 below)<br />
TKF/L/90<br />
TKF/L*/90<br />
24VDC<br />
115/230VAC (50/60Hz)<br />
2NC & 2 NO<br />
(NC contacts<br />
in series)<br />
“Parallel” actuating key (for left-hand insertion) locked<br />
by spring and unlocked by energizing solenoid<br />
TKM/L/90<br />
TKM/L*/90<br />
24VDC<br />
115/230VAC (50/60Hz)<br />
2NC & 2 NO<br />
(NC contacts<br />
in series)<br />
“Parallel” actuating key (for left-hand insertion)<br />
locked by energizing solenoid and unlocked by spring<br />
(See Note 1 below)<br />
* Insert 115 for 115VAC model<br />
Insert 230 for 230VAC model<br />
Note 1: Use of power-to-lock model permits the guard to be opened in the event of a power failure. Generally accepted<br />
safety standards/ practices suggest this model only be used after conducting a thorough risk evaluation in the<br />
context of the application.<br />
Part Number<br />
TK/R/90<br />
TK/RF/90<br />
TK/P/90<br />
TK/PF/90<br />
ACTUATOR KEYS<br />
Description<br />
Standard “Series” actuator key (For sliding guards<br />
only)<br />
“Series” actuator key with telescopic section (For<br />
sliding guards only)<br />
“Parallel” actuator key for right- or left-hand<br />
insertion (10” minimum closing radius)<br />
“Parallel” actuator key (with telescopic section) for<br />
right- or left-hand insertion (10” minimum closing<br />
radius)<br />
63
SERIES TKF/TKM TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Cast aluminum, enamel finish<br />
Actuator Key &<br />
Steel, chromated<br />
Locking Bolt<br />
(defeat-resistant design)<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Unlocked Holding Force 5N (1.2 pounds)<br />
Travel for Positive-Break 72 mm (“Series” actuator)<br />
38 mm (“Parallel” actuator)<br />
Force to Reach<br />
5N (Approx. 1.2 pounds)<br />
Positive-Break<br />
Closing Force<br />
Approx. 10 N (2.4 pounds)<br />
Operating Temperature 32°F to 120°F<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
1 million operations (minimum)<br />
Shock Resistance 30g / 18ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 20g / 2…100Hz<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 UL<br />
EN 60947-5-1 CSA<br />
EN ISO 13849-1<br />
EN 954-1<br />
CE<br />
BG-GS-ET-15<br />
Solenoid Locking Force 2,000N (450 pounds)<br />
Minimum Closing Radius 250mm (“Parallel” actuator)<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Gap<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
Switching Action<br />
Short Circuit Protection<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Type Terminals<br />
Available Solenoid<br />
Voltages<br />
Fine silver<br />
Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
Guard monitoring: 2 × 3 mm<br />
Solenoid monitoring: 2 × 2 mm<br />
8A (250VAC)<br />
Slow-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts<br />
10A (slow-blow)<br />
250VAC<br />
4kV<br />
Screw terminals with self-lifting<br />
clamps for up to 13 AWG solid<br />
wire (2.5mm 2 ) or 13 AWG<br />
stranded (1.5mm 2 ) wire<br />
24VDC<br />
115VAC/230VAC<br />
Solenoid Power<br />
12.0W (maximum)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
Solenoid Duty Cycle 100%<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
64
SERIES TKF/TKM ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS<br />
ACTUATOR KEYS<br />
“Series”TK/R/90<br />
(For sliding guards only)<br />
“Series”TK/RF/90 (With telescopic section)<br />
(For sliding guards only)<br />
2<br />
(For sliding guards only)<br />
“Parallel” Actuator Key TK/P/90<br />
“Parallel” Actuator Key TK/PF/90 (With telescopic section)<br />
65
SERIES TZKF/TZKM<br />
Description<br />
The TZK Series is designed for machines/work cells where<br />
access to a hazardous work area must be controlled until safe<br />
conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature permits<br />
locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions, which<br />
may exist immediately after removal of power, have abated.<br />
Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay, motion<br />
detector, position sensor or other suitable component.<br />
The unit’s contact arrangement permits the prevention of a<br />
machine restart until the guard is closed and in the locked<br />
position.<br />
Each unit is supplied with a 1 ⁄2" NPT conduit adapter.<br />
Operation<br />
The TZK Series electromechanical safety interlock switch<br />
consists of a rugged switch with a solenoid-latching<br />
mechanism and a geometrically-unique actuating key. The<br />
switch actuating key is typically mounted to a movable<br />
machine guard.<br />
When the guard is closed, the actuating key is held in position<br />
by the solenoid-latching mechanism. The guard may only be<br />
opened by energizing or de-energizing (depending upon<br />
model) the solenoid-latching mechanism.<br />
Upon opening of the guard, the switch’s ”positive-break” NC<br />
contacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)<br />
mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contacts<br />
close upon key removal.<br />
Heavy-Duty Solenoid-Latching<br />
Safety Interlock Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Solenoid-locking design … controls access to hazardous<br />
areas until safe conditions exist.<br />
• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple<br />
tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.<br />
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuit interruption<br />
upon key removal.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmental sealing<br />
requirements.<br />
• Positive locking … integral mechanical interlock prevents<br />
solenoid latching until actuating key is fully inserted.<br />
• High-strength steel actuator key … tolerates mechanical<br />
abuse without damage.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the<br />
most hostile environments.<br />
• Available in “solenoid-locking” and “solenoidunlocking”<br />
models … for application versatility.<br />
• Optional “floating” actuator key … tolerates up to 5mm of<br />
guard misalignment without damage.<br />
• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
• Rotatable actuating head … four user-selectable 90°<br />
positions for installation flexibility.<br />
• Funnel entry … forgiving of minor guard misalignment.<br />
• Optional spring-loaded actuator keys … tolerates axial<br />
misalignment of guard.<br />
• Built-in key entry dust cover … prevents ingress of dirt<br />
and dust when key is removed.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The TZK Series is intended for use as a safety interlock<br />
switch on movable machine guards which must not be<br />
opened until dangerous conditions, that may exist after the<br />
removal of power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel<br />
overrun, spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc.<br />
Typical applications are textile machines, stamping presses,<br />
articulating robot arms, mixing machines, heavy working<br />
equipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.<br />
Release Options for TZKF (locking via spring models)<br />
TZKF…S<br />
Auxiliary Release<br />
TZ-75<br />
TZKF…N<br />
Emergency Release<br />
TZ-69<br />
66<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
SERIES TZKF/TZKM AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Adapter.<br />
Order desired actuator key separately.)<br />
Part Number<br />
TZKF/BS*<br />
TZKF/CS*<br />
TZKF/ES*<br />
TZKF/HS<br />
TZKF/KS<br />
TZKF/MS<br />
TZKF/PS<br />
TZKM/B*<br />
TZKM/C*<br />
TZKM/E*<br />
TZKM/H<br />
TZKM/K<br />
TZKM/M<br />
TZKM/P<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts (Key/Solenoid)<br />
Spring lock, Power to unlock<br />
1 NC / 2 NC<br />
1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC<br />
1 NO / 2 NC<br />
2 NC / 2 NC<br />
2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC<br />
1 NO & 1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC<br />
1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NC<br />
Power to lock, spring unlock (see Note 1 below)<br />
1 NC / 2 NC<br />
1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC<br />
1 NO / 2 NC<br />
2 NC / 2 NC<br />
2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC<br />
1 NO & 1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC<br />
1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NC<br />
*Please indicate desired operation voltage:<br />
Voltage:<br />
Suffix:<br />
24VDC<br />
no suffix<br />
115VAC -115<br />
230VAC -230<br />
Example: TZKF/CS-115<br />
For Spring to Lock (TZKF) models:<br />
For a manual emergency release, change<br />
"S" to "N" in the part number (TZKF/BN)<br />
Part Number<br />
TZK/CO<br />
TZK/CW<br />
TZK/COF<br />
TZK/CORF/7.5<br />
TZK/CORF/15<br />
TZK/APL<br />
TZ-69<br />
TZ-75<br />
ACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIES<br />
Description<br />
Standard straight actuating key<br />
Standard right-angle actuating key<br />
Spring-loaded actuator key tolerates axial<br />
movement of +7.5°/-15° or -7.5°/+15°<br />
depending upon mounting orientation<br />
Pre-tensioned, spring-loaded actuator key<br />
tolerates axial movement of +7.5° or -7.5°<br />
depending upon mounting orientation<br />
Pre-tensioned, spring-loaded actuator key<br />
tolerates axial movement of +15° or -15°<br />
depending upon mounting orientation<br />
Mounting adapter plate facilitates easy<br />
alignment between actuating key and interlock<br />
Standard straight auxiliary release key<br />
(for TZKF models)<br />
Right-angle auxiliary release key<br />
(for TZKF models)<br />
Note 1: Use of power-to-lock model permits the guard to be<br />
opened in the event of a power failure. Generally<br />
accepted safety standards/practices suggest this<br />
model only be used after conducting a thorough<br />
risk evaluation in the context of the application.<br />
2<br />
DIMENSIONS (Basic Switch & Optional Mounting Adapter Plate)<br />
89<br />
3.50 32<br />
1.26<br />
12<br />
.47<br />
2,3<br />
.09<br />
TZK/APL<br />
Mounting Adapter Plate<br />
M6<br />
70<br />
2.76<br />
6<br />
.24<br />
50<br />
1.97<br />
12<br />
.47<br />
45<br />
1.77<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
116<br />
4.57<br />
178<br />
7.01<br />
6<br />
.24<br />
6<br />
.24<br />
178<br />
7.01<br />
193<br />
7.60<br />
206<br />
8.11<br />
4,5<br />
.18<br />
72<br />
2.83<br />
M20x1<br />
12<br />
.47<br />
14,5<br />
5.7<br />
6,5<br />
.26<br />
24<br />
.94<br />
29,5<br />
1.16<br />
22,5<br />
.89<br />
6<br />
.24<br />
22<br />
.87<br />
17,5<br />
.69<br />
12<br />
.47<br />
41<br />
1.61<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
67
7,5°<br />
SERIES TZKF/TZKM TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Glass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishing<br />
thermoplastic<br />
Actuator Key<br />
Galvanized steel<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Travel for Positive-Break 2.3mm<br />
Key Insertion Force 10 N (2.2 pounds)<br />
Key Holding Force 20 N (4.4 pounds)<br />
(without solenoid-latching)<br />
Solenoid Locking Force 2,000N (440 pounds)<br />
Operating Temperature +32°F to +122°F (0°C to +50°C)<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
2 x 10 6 Operations (minimum)<br />
Mounting Orientation Any position<br />
Solenoid Override Manual release from front surface<br />
Slack Resistance 30g / 11ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 20g / 10-55Hz<br />
Switching Frequency 120 cycles/hour (maximum)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947 CE<br />
EN 60947 UL<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 CSA<br />
EN 954-1<br />
BG-GS-ET-19<br />
Minimum Closing Radius 6.9" (175mm) for CO and CORF<br />
actuating key<br />
9.8" (250mm) for CW actuating key<br />
5.9" (150mm) for COF actuating key<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
Silver-plated, gold<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration Double-pole, double-break,<br />
electrically-separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating 8A/250VAC (AC 15)<br />
13A/24VDC (DC13)<br />
Switching Action<br />
Slow-action, positive-break<br />
NC contacts<br />
Short Circuit Protection 10A<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage 250VAC<br />
Rated Impulse Withstand 2.5 KV<br />
Voltage<br />
Type Terminals<br />
Screw terminals with self-lifting<br />
cable clamps for up to 13AWG<br />
flexible stranded wire (1.5mm 2 )<br />
Available Solenoid Voltages 24VDC<br />
115VAC/50-60 Hz<br />
230VAC/50-60 Hz<br />
Solenoid Power<br />
10W (maximum)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
Solenoid Duty Cycle 100%<br />
ACTUATOR KEY DIMENSIONS<br />
TZK/CO Straight Actuating Key<br />
TZK/CW Right-Angle Actuating Key<br />
52<br />
2.07<br />
6,5<br />
.26<br />
53,5<br />
2.11<br />
3<br />
.12<br />
8<br />
.31<br />
11<br />
.43<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
13,5<br />
.53<br />
20<br />
.79<br />
4,3<br />
.17<br />
48<br />
1.89<br />
6,5<br />
.26<br />
8,5<br />
.33<br />
57,5<br />
2.26<br />
25<br />
.98<br />
32<br />
1.26<br />
13,5<br />
.53<br />
40<br />
1.57<br />
13<br />
.51<br />
30<br />
1.18 45<br />
1.77<br />
TZK/CORF/15 Flexibly-Mounted “Floating”<br />
Actuator Key<br />
TZK/CORF/7.5 Pre-Tensioned<br />
Flexibly-Mounted Actuator Key<br />
48<br />
1.89<br />
6,5<br />
.26<br />
8,5<br />
.33<br />
57,5<br />
2.26<br />
3<br />
.12<br />
25<br />
.98<br />
32<br />
1.26<br />
3<br />
.12<br />
15°<br />
60<br />
2.36<br />
16,5<br />
.65<br />
48<br />
1.89<br />
16,5<br />
.65<br />
13,5<br />
.53<br />
13,5<br />
.53<br />
68
SERIES TZKF/TZKM TECHNICAL DATA<br />
CONTACT CONFIGURATIONS — TZKM (power-to-lock) models<br />
TZKM/B<br />
TZKM/C<br />
TZKM/E<br />
TZKM/H<br />
2<br />
TZKM/K<br />
TZKM/M<br />
TZKM/P<br />
Note:<br />
Drawings show contact state<br />
with actuator key inserted<br />
and solenoid de-energized.<br />
CONTACT CONFIGURATIONS — TZKF (spring lock/power to unlock) models<br />
TZKF/BS<br />
TZKF/CS<br />
TZKF/ES<br />
TZKF/HS<br />
TZKF/KS<br />
TZKF/MS<br />
TZKF/PS<br />
Note:<br />
Drawings show contact state<br />
with actuator key inserted<br />
and solenoid de-energized.<br />
69
SERIES AZM415<br />
Description<br />
The AZM415 Series is designed for movable machine guards<br />
where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled<br />
until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature<br />
permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,<br />
which may exist immediately after removal of power, have<br />
abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time-delay,<br />
motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.<br />
Latching may occur upon energizing or de-energizing the<br />
solenoid — depending upon model. In addition the AZM415<br />
features “positive-break” NC contacts, and an adjustable-force<br />
ball latch which maintains a holding force on the guard when<br />
the key is in the unlocked state.<br />
A two-key model is also available for guards which may be<br />
open in two directions (Model AZM415-33zpdk).<br />
Operation<br />
The AZM415 two-piece electromechanical safety interlock<br />
switch consists of a rugged switch and solenoid-latching<br />
mechanism and a geometrically-unique actuating key. The<br />
switch actuating key is typically mounted to a movable<br />
machine guard.<br />
When the guard is closed, the actuator key is locked in<br />
position by a toggle-lever system. The guard may only be<br />
opened by energizing or de-energizing (depending upon<br />
model) the solenoid-latching mechanism.<br />
Upon opening of the guard the switch’s “positive-break” NC<br />
contacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)<br />
mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contacts<br />
close upon key removal.<br />
70<br />
Safety controller see page 320,<br />
Speed monitors see page 363<br />
Heavy-Duty Solenoid-Latching<br />
Safety Interlock Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Solenoid-locking design … controls access to hazardous<br />
areas until safe conditions exist.<br />
• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat.<br />
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption<br />
upon actuator key removal.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.<br />
• High-strength, metal actuator key … tolerates mechanical<br />
abuse without damage.<br />
• Rugged, enamel-coated metal housing … tolerates the<br />
most hostile environments.<br />
• Adjustable actuator key holding force up to 110 pounds<br />
… permits use of switch as door latch.<br />
• Available in “solenoid-locking” and “solenoidunlocking”<br />
models … for application versatility.<br />
• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
• *Increased locking force … up to 560 pounds.<br />
• Patented toggle-lever locking system … facilitates easy<br />
unlocking of (even heavily misaligned) guards.<br />
• Two-key model … for double-sided guards (AZM415-33zpdk).<br />
• Optional B4 Actuator Key … prevents unintentional guard<br />
closure.<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(Actuator key ordered separately)<br />
Part Number<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts (solenoid/key)<br />
Spring to Lock<br />
AZM415-02/02ZPK-*<br />
2 NC / 2 NC<br />
AZM415-02/11ZPK-*<br />
2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC<br />
AZM415-02/20ZPK-*<br />
2 NC / 2 NO<br />
AZM415-11/02ZPK-*<br />
1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NC<br />
AZM415-11/11ZPK-*<br />
1 NO & 1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC<br />
AZM415-11/20ZPK-*<br />
1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NO<br />
Spring to Lock, with maunal release<br />
AZM415-02/02ZPKT-24VAC/DC 2 NC / 2 NC<br />
AZM415-02/11ZPKT 24VAC/DC 2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC<br />
AZM415-02/20ZPKT 24VAC/DC 2 NC / 2 NO<br />
AZM415-11/02ZPKT 24VAC/DC 1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NC<br />
AZM415-11/11ZPKT 24VAC/DC 1 NO & 1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC<br />
AZM415-11/20ZPKT 24VAC/DC 1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NO<br />
Power to Lock (see Note 1 below)<br />
AZM415-02/02ZPKA-*<br />
2 NC / 2 NC<br />
AZM415-02/11ZPKA-*<br />
2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC<br />
AZM415-02/20-ZPKA-*<br />
2 NC / 2 NO<br />
AZM415-11/02-ZPKA-*<br />
1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NC<br />
AZM415-11/11ZPKA-*<br />
1 NO & 1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC<br />
AZM415-11/20ZPKA-*<br />
1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NO<br />
*Please specify solenoid operating voltage via addition of one of the<br />
following suffix codes:<br />
-24VAC/DC -110VAC -230VAC<br />
ACTUATING KEYS<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
AZ/AZM415-B1<br />
Linear entry actuator key<br />
(For sliding lift-off guards)<br />
AZ/AZM415-B2<br />
Small radius (250mm) x-axis entry actuator<br />
key (For hinged guards)<br />
AZ/AZM415-B3<br />
Small radius (250mm) y-radius entry actuator<br />
key (For hinged guards)<br />
AZ/AZM415-B4PS Slide bolt actuator key (For sliding guards)<br />
AZM415-STS30…<br />
STS door handle systems. See page 77 for<br />
details and selection guide.<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
AZM415 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Die-cast aluminum with blue<br />
enamel finish<br />
Actuator Key<br />
key shaft: Zinc coated brass<br />
mounting block: Zinc coated steel<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Travel for Positive-Break 5mm (0.2 inches)<br />
Force to Reach<br />
Positive-Break<br />
Solenoid Locking Force<br />
Actuator Key<br />
Holding Force<br />
Operating Temperature<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
Depending upon ball catch setting<br />
(3.5 pounds minimum)<br />
560 pounds<br />
Adjustable, 80 to 400 N<br />
-13°F to +175°F<br />
1 million operations<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 UL<br />
BG-GS-ET-19 CSA<br />
EN ISO 13849-1<br />
EN 954-1<br />
CE<br />
Minimum Closing Radius 9.8" (250mm)<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Gap<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
Switching Action<br />
Short Circuit Protection<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
Withstand<br />
Type Terminals<br />
Available Solenoid<br />
Supply Voltages (Vs)<br />
Fine silver<br />
Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
2mm x 2mm<br />
4A (230VAC)<br />
Slow-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts<br />
Fuse 6A (slow-blow)<br />
250VAC<br />
4kV<br />
Screw terminals with self-lifting<br />
clamps for up to 13AWG<br />
flexible stranded wire (1.5 mm 2 )<br />
24VAC/DC<br />
115VAC/60Hz<br />
230VAC/50Hz<br />
Solenoid Power<br />
10W (maximum)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
Solenoid Duty Cycle 100%<br />
2<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
M20<br />
Model with “T”<br />
manual override<br />
71
AZM415 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
WIRING SCHEMATICS<br />
AZM415xx/yyZPK (Power-to-unlock)<br />
11/11<br />
WIRING SCHEMATICS<br />
AZM415xx/yyZPKA (Power-to-lock)<br />
11/11<br />
11/02<br />
11/02<br />
11/20<br />
11/20<br />
02/11<br />
02/11<br />
02/02<br />
02/02<br />
02/20<br />
02/20<br />
72 <strong>Co</strong>ntacts shown with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized.
9<br />
AZM415 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
ACTUATOR KEY DIMENSIONS<br />
B4pS Actuator for Hand Operated Locking<br />
B1 Actuator<br />
125<br />
4.92<br />
55<br />
2.17<br />
0-6<br />
0-.24<br />
56<br />
2.20<br />
20<br />
.79<br />
21<br />
.83<br />
35<br />
1.38<br />
237<br />
9.33<br />
22<br />
.87<br />
8<br />
.35<br />
.35<br />
18,5<br />
69,5<br />
2.74<br />
2<br />
19<br />
.75<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
6,5<br />
.26<br />
10
74<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design
APPLICATION ACCESSORIES<br />
STS Safety Handle<br />
Assembly<br />
B25<br />
Safety Door Handle<br />
TG<br />
Safety Door Handle<br />
3<br />
Page 76<br />
Page 82<br />
Page 84<br />
ZSD<br />
Enabling Device<br />
TFH<br />
Safety Foot Switch<br />
SEPK(G) Two-Hand<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol <strong>Co</strong>nsoles<br />
Page 88<br />
Page 90<br />
Page 92<br />
TFA/TFI<br />
Guard Alignment Aid<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection<br />
Cables<br />
Page 81<br />
Page 94<br />
75
SERIES STS<br />
Safety Guard Door-Handle System<br />
(with Emergency Release Option)<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Suited for all types of guards ... for application versatility.<br />
• Dual-purpose handle ... unlatches and opens guard.<br />
No additional door handles are needed.<br />
• Optional inside “emergency” release handle available ...<br />
heightens system safety level.<br />
• Interlock switch mountable from inside or outside<br />
guard … for application flexibility.<br />
• Rugged, durable design ... actuator designed for 15,000 N<br />
(3,400 pounds) of shear force.<br />
• Mechanical design facilitates easy actuator key<br />
withdrawal ... without “sticking” or “binding.”<br />
• Meets ANSI/RIA R15.06 safety standards ... provides for<br />
emergency egress.<br />
Description<br />
The STS door handle system consists of one safety interlock<br />
switch (ordered separately), an actuator key and handle<br />
assembly (with or without emergency release handle),<br />
mounting plates, and an optional lockout/tagout device. An<br />
optional red interior release handle is available which opens<br />
the guard from the inside in case of an emergency.<br />
Operation<br />
Should someone find themselves in a hazardous area and<br />
the guard is accidentally closed, the guard can be opened<br />
from the inside by turning the optional emergency handle (2).<br />
Locking of the guard from the inside is not possible.<br />
When using the optional emergency handle with a solenoidlatching<br />
keyed interlock switch (AZM161 or AZM415), always<br />
order the version with an emergency unlocking feature. In this<br />
case the emergency latching release button or knob (1)<br />
provided with this model must be actuated before operating<br />
the emergency release handle (2).<br />
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
MP TG-01 Handle mounting plate for<br />
inside mounted actuators<br />
TFA-010<br />
TFI-010<br />
TFA-020<br />
TFI-020<br />
SZ 415-1<br />
SZ 415-2<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
Please see page 77<br />
Alignment aid for outside mounting<br />
(for hinged guards)<br />
Alignment aid for inside mounting<br />
(for hinged guards)<br />
Alignment aid for outside mounting<br />
(AZ 16 & AZM 161 ONLY)<br />
Alignment aid for inside mounting<br />
(AZ 16 & AZM 161 ONLY)<br />
Lockout tag for STS30-01/-03/-06/-08<br />
Lockout tag for STS30-02/-04/-05/-07<br />
76
SERIES STS<br />
SELECTION TABLE & ORDERING GUIDE: SAFETY DOOR-HANDLE SYSTEM<br />
Actuator<br />
Mounting Position<br />
Actuator<br />
Door Hinge<br />
With<br />
emergency handle<br />
Inside<br />
Right<br />
➛<br />
XX-STS30-01*<br />
Left<br />
➛<br />
XX-STS30-02*<br />
Outside<br />
Right<br />
XX-STS30-05<br />
3<br />
Left<br />
XX-STS30-06<br />
➛<br />
➛<br />
Without<br />
emergency handle<br />
Inside<br />
Right<br />
Left<br />
➛ ➛<br />
XX-STS30-03*<br />
XX-STS30-04*<br />
Outside<br />
Right<br />
XX-STS30-07<br />
Left<br />
XX-STS30-08<br />
➛<br />
➛<br />
*For actuators mounted on the inside, mounting plate MP TG-01<br />
(ordered separately) must be used to mount the door handle<br />
when the door frame width is smaller than the handle.<br />
➛<br />
➛<br />
View from outside the hazardous area<br />
View from inside the hazardous area<br />
77
SERIES STS<br />
TO ORDER COMPLETE STS DOOR HANDLE SYSTEM<br />
STS Door Handle Systems are available with actuator keys for the following switch series:<br />
AZ16 . . . . . . . . . . . . see page 13<br />
AZ3550* . . . . . . . . . . see page 32<br />
AZ415 . . . . . . . . . . . see page 38<br />
AZM161 . . . . . . . . . . see page 51<br />
AZM415 . . . . . . . . . . see page 70<br />
1. <strong><strong>Co</strong>mplete</strong> the STS door handle catalog number on the previous page by replacing<br />
XX with the desired safety interlock switch.<br />
2. Order Safety Switch separately.<br />
*Please note: STS door handles to be used with AZ3350<br />
switches require special versions of the switch with the actuator<br />
head rotated to the left (U90) or right (U270) to accommodate<br />
key entry when properly mounted. Please order one of these<br />
part numbers:<br />
Model<br />
Description<br />
AZ3350-12zuek-U90<br />
AZ3350-12zuek-U270<br />
AZ3350-03zk-U90<br />
AZ3350-03zk-U270<br />
Actuated head rotated 90° for door hinge left<br />
Actuated head rotated 270° for door hinge right<br />
Actuated head rotated 90° for door hinge left<br />
Actuated head rotated 270° for door hinge right<br />
Example: To order a safety door handle system with a right-hand door hinge, an emergency release handle,<br />
for inside mounting and equipped with an AZM 415-11/11XPKT-24 VAC/DC safety inerlock switch,<br />
order SCHMERSAL part numbers:<br />
• AZM 415-STS30-01<br />
• AZM-11/11XPKT-24 VAC/DC<br />
Note: If door frame is smaller than the handle assembly, also order the MP TG-01 Mounting Plate<br />
Example: To order a safety door handle system with a left-hand door hinge, an emergency release handle,<br />
for inside mounting and equipped with an AZM 161SK-12/12RKT safety inerlock switch, order<br />
SCHMERSAL part numbers:<br />
• AZM 161-STS30-02<br />
• AZM 161SK-12/12RKT<br />
78
SERIES STS DIMENSIONS<br />
AZ 16-STS30-…<br />
AZ 3350-STS30-…<br />
AZ 415-STS30-…<br />
AZ 16 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07<br />
AZ 3350 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07<br />
AZ 415 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07<br />
3<br />
AZ 16 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08<br />
AZ 3350 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08<br />
AZ 415 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08<br />
AZM 161-STS30-…<br />
AZM 415-STS30-…<br />
AZM 161 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07<br />
AZM 415 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07<br />
AZM 161 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08<br />
AZM 415 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08<br />
Side View Dimensions<br />
Inside Mounting<br />
STS30-01/-02/-03/-04<br />
Outside Mounting<br />
STS30-05/-06/-07/-08<br />
79
SERIES STS ACCESSORIES<br />
Lockout Accessory<br />
MP TG-01 Handle Mounting Plate<br />
ORDERING DETAILS<br />
Lockout Tag<br />
for … STS30-01/-03/-06/-08 SZ 415-1<br />
for … STS30-02/-04/-05/-07 SZ 415-2<br />
80
SERIES TFA/TFI<br />
Guard Alignment Aid<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Self-aligning … self-centering design helps align guard.<br />
• End-stop … functions as end-stop to protect guard from<br />
excessive shock on closing.<br />
• Easy-to-install … on inside or outside of guard.<br />
• Reduces maintenance … minimizes risk of downtime due<br />
to misaligned guard.<br />
• Suitable for retrofit … on existing guards.<br />
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
TFA-010<br />
TFI-010<br />
TFA-020<br />
TFI-020<br />
Alignment aid for outside mounting<br />
(for hinged guards)<br />
Alignment aid for inside mounting<br />
(for hinged guards)<br />
Alignment aid for outside mounting<br />
(AZ 16 & AZM 161 ONLY)<br />
Alignment aid for inside mounting<br />
(AZ 16 & AZM 161 ONLY)<br />
3<br />
TFA Guard Alignment Aid (for outside mounting)<br />
• Mounting outside<br />
• Self-centering of the guard door<br />
• End stop<br />
• Suitable for all types of actuators<br />
• Actuator can be easily inserted or extracted<br />
TFI Guard Alignment Aid (for inside mounting)<br />
• Mounting inside<br />
• Self-centering of the guard door<br />
• End stop<br />
• Suitable for all types of actuators<br />
• Actuator can be easily inserted or extracted<br />
81
SERIES B25<br />
Safety Door Handle System<br />
for AZ17 Interlock Switches<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Ergonomically-designed door handles … for easy<br />
operation.<br />
• Pre-machined mounting plates … for easy installation.<br />
• Dual-purpose handle … releases interlock acutator key<br />
and opens guard.<br />
• Low-profile design … minimizes protruding handle.<br />
• No protruding actuator … recessed actuator key when<br />
guard is open makes for safer installation.<br />
• User flexibility … actuator can be supplied without<br />
handle. Users can mount their own handle design on the<br />
integral, pre-tapped (M6) 8mm square shaft.<br />
Description<br />
The Series BN25 is designed to allow easy realization of a<br />
combination door handle and safety interlock for use on light<br />
to medium weight hinged and sliding machine guards. Each<br />
unit consists of a door handle assembly with integral handle<br />
and safety interlock actuator key for operating a Series<br />
AZ17…zrk interlock switch.<br />
Operation<br />
Upon manual turning of the star-grip or T-grip handle, the<br />
safety interlock switch actuator key is withdrawn from the<br />
switch body … opening the positive-break, normally-closed<br />
switch contacts (and, if so equipped, closing the normallyopen<br />
switch contact).<br />
Opening the normally-closed safety contact(s) removes power<br />
to the machine hazard. Upon operation, the actuator key is<br />
withdrawn into the door handle housing … thus eliminating<br />
the potential hazard represented by a protruding key.<br />
AZ17…zrk Installation<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The low-profile ergonomically-designed door handle is ideal<br />
for use on light- to medium-weight movable machine guards.<br />
AZM170…zrk Installation<br />
82
SERIES B25<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS & ACCESSORIES<br />
<strong>Co</strong>mpatible<br />
Safety Interlock*<br />
(order separately)<br />
Series AZ17…zrk<br />
(see Page 4)<br />
Part Number<br />
AZ17-B25-L-G1<br />
AZ17-B25-L-G2<br />
AZ17-B25-R-G1<br />
AZ17-B25-R-G2<br />
Description<br />
Star-grip for left-hand hinged guard<br />
T-grip for left-hand hinged guard<br />
Star-grip for right-hand hinged guard<br />
T-grip for right-hand hinged guard<br />
*Note: The AZ17 or AZM170<br />
Safety Interlock Switch<br />
and the mounting plates<br />
are not included in the<br />
delivery and must be<br />
ordered separately.<br />
Please note the assembly<br />
requires the interlock with<br />
the latching (“r”) option.<br />
Series AZM170…zrk<br />
(see Page 44)<br />
AZM170-B25-L-G1<br />
AZM170-B25-L-G2<br />
AZM170-B25-R-G1<br />
AZM170-B25-R-G2<br />
Star-grip for left-hand hinged guard<br />
T-grip for left-hand hinged guard<br />
Star-grip for right-hand hinged guard<br />
T-grip for right-hand hinged guard<br />
To order unit without<br />
Star-grip or T-grip handle,<br />
please change suffix to<br />
G0. For example …<br />
AZ17-B25-L-G0.<br />
Series AZ17…zrk<br />
Series AZM170…zrk<br />
MP-B25*<br />
Mounting plates for switch & handle assembly<br />
3<br />
Mounting Plates MP-B25<br />
Order separately<br />
Star-Grip<br />
T-Grip<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
AZ17…zrk Installation<br />
AZM170…zrk Installation<br />
83
SERIES ZSD<br />
3-Position Hand-Held Enabling Device<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Redundant contacts ... allows use in up to safety control<br />
category 4 systems.<br />
• Auxiliary contact ... for status signalling.<br />
• Positive-break contacts from position 2 to position 3 ...<br />
enhances safety.<br />
• 3-position (OFF-ON-OFF) design ... provides for machine<br />
stop control when operator squeezes or releases actuator<br />
from center “on” position.<br />
• Rugged IP65 rating ... withstands harsh industrial<br />
environments.<br />
• Optional normally-open top-mounted pushbutton ...<br />
enables machine jog/start control.<br />
• Meets ANSI/RIA R15.06 safety standards ... to satisfy<br />
enabling device requirements.<br />
Description<br />
The ZSD is a hand-held “dead man” switch with 3 operating<br />
positions — OFF-ON-OFF. The machine/robot can be<br />
operated in the “on” position. It provides safety based on<br />
normal human behavior of either releasing or squeezing the<br />
actuator in an emergency situation.<br />
Operation<br />
Machine/robot operation is only allowed when the enabling<br />
device is held in the middle (“on”) position. Releasing the<br />
switch (position 1) or squeezing the switch (position 3) shuts<br />
down the equipment.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
Used in robotic cells and automated manufacturing systems<br />
to provide operator safety during set-up, maintenance,<br />
or troubleshooting.<br />
SWITCHING DIAGRAM FOR ZSD5<br />
Position 1 2 3<br />
Normally open contact 1–2*<br />
Normally open contact 3–4*<br />
Auxiliary contact 5–6<br />
Open: , Closed:<br />
* Positive-break contacts from position 2 to position 3<br />
Part Number<br />
ZSD5<br />
ZSD6<br />
ZSD-H<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(INCLUDES M20 STRAIN RELIEF)<br />
Description<br />
3-Position Enabling Switch (OFF-ON-OFF)<br />
3-Position Enabling Switch (but with<br />
top-mounted pushbutton - 1NO contact)<br />
Metal Holding Bracket<br />
Note: For factory installed cable, add length in meters,<br />
e.g. ZSD5-5m.<br />
Use of a SCHMERSAL safety controller with cross short monitoring<br />
is required (SCHMERSAL models SRB301ST-24 or SRB301SQ).<br />
88
ZSD TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Operating Temperature<br />
Operating Humidity<br />
Storage Temperature<br />
Operating Frequency<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
Shock Operating Extremes 100m/s 2<br />
Resistance Damage Limits 1000m/s 2<br />
–25°C to +60°C (no freezing)<br />
45% to 85% RH maximum<br />
(no condensation)<br />
–40°C to +80°C (no freezing)<br />
1,200 operations/hour<br />
Position 1•2•1: 1,000,000 minimum<br />
Position 1•2•3•1: 100,000 minimum<br />
Vibration Operating Extremes 5 to 55Hz, amplitude 0.5mm minimum<br />
Resistance Damage Limits 16.7Hz, amplitude 1.5mm minimum<br />
Terminal Pulling Strength 20N minimum<br />
Terminal Screw Torque<br />
0.5 to 0.6Nm<br />
Degree of Protection<br />
IP65<br />
Weight<br />
Approx. 240g (ZSD6)<br />
Approx. 210g (ZSD5)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nforming to Standards ANSI/RIA R 15.06 ISO 12100<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 ISO 11161<br />
EN 954-1 ISO 10218<br />
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 EN 13850 (e-<br />
IEC 60204-1<br />
stop button)<br />
Approvals<br />
UL, CSA, BG, CE<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance<br />
100mΩ maximum<br />
Between live & dead metal parts:<br />
Insulation Resistance<br />
100MΩ maximum (at 500VDC)<br />
Between positive & negative live parts:<br />
100MΩ minimum (at 500VDC)<br />
Impulse Withstand<br />
Voltage<br />
Electrical Life<br />
Recommended Wire Size<br />
2.5kV<br />
100,000 cycles (min.) @max. load<br />
16 - 26 AWG<br />
Recommended Cable .275 - .512 inch diameter<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nditional<br />
Short Circuit Current 50A (250V)<br />
Recommended Short 250V/10A fast-blow fuse (IEC 60127-1)<br />
Circuit Protection<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating 2A @ 30V, 4A @ 125V<br />
3<br />
DIMENSIONS (mm)<br />
46<br />
ZSD5/6<br />
86<br />
174 9<br />
54 58<br />
ZSD-H<br />
Note: Model with top-mounted pushbutton shown.<br />
89
SERIES TFH<br />
Safety Foot Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Positive-Break <strong>Co</strong>ntacts ... assure circuit interruption upon<br />
complete foot pedal actuation.<br />
• Automatic latching following an emergency stop signal ...<br />
meets EN ISO 13850, EN 13850 standard for E-Stop switches.<br />
• Unique design with protective shield ... avoids unintentional<br />
actuation due to falling debris or dropped items.<br />
• Release modes ... only manually by pushing the button on the<br />
top of the pedal.<br />
• Heavy duty aluminum shield ... tolerates mechanical abuse<br />
without damage.<br />
• Designed to meet the Performance Level requirements of<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of EN 954-1.<br />
Description<br />
Extensive accident prevention research has shown that in the<br />
event of pain/distress, the foot is frequently not removed<br />
from the foot pedal that is enabling equipment operation.<br />
Paradoxically, weight is often shifted forward and pressure on<br />
the foot pedal is increased (rather than removed).<br />
Recognizing this, the series TFH safety foot switch features<br />
3-stage operation. It is designed to stop hazardous movements<br />
in machinery whether released or fully-depressed in an<br />
emergency situation.<br />
Its positive-break, normally-closed contact provides a<br />
significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven<br />
contacts which can weld/stick shut. Their glass-fiber<br />
reinforced pedal and aluminum protective shield make them<br />
ideal for heavy-duty applications in hostile environments.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The TFH foot switch is intended for use in machines or areas<br />
where operation using the hands is not possible. Typical<br />
applications are profile and tube bending machines, bar<br />
turning machines, thread cutting, and wire drawing machines.<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
Part Number<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
TFH232-11UEDR<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
TFH232-22UEDR<br />
2 NO & 2 NC<br />
All Enclosures include M20 to 1/2" NPT metal conduit adapter<br />
Operation<br />
In the event of pain, the foot is frequently not removed from<br />
the switching pedal, but paradoxically pressure is increased,<br />
and the weight shifted forward. The solution to this problem<br />
is provided by a 3-stage safety foot switch.<br />
Position 1. The pedal is not actuated in the upper position.<br />
→ Machine “ OFF ”<br />
Signal Output<br />
0ff<br />
Position 1<br />
(Pedal not<br />
actuated)<br />
Position 2. The operation circuit contact closes after<br />
actuating the foot pedal (the pedal is in contact<br />
with the tangible pressure-point stop).<br />
→ Machine “ ON ”<br />
On<br />
Position 2<br />
(Pedal depressed<br />
to pressure point)<br />
Position 3. The pressure point is overcome in the event of<br />
danger or sensing pain, the circuit contact opens<br />
and is automatically latched.<br />
→ Machine “ Emergency Stop ”<br />
Operation to position 3 requires manual reset using the<br />
integral push button actuator<br />
Optional safety controllers for E-Stop applications are<br />
available. Please see SRB Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers starting on<br />
page 320.<br />
0ff<br />
0ff<br />
Position 3<br />
(Pedal fully<br />
depressed)<br />
Release/Reset<br />
(Pedal returns<br />
to position 1)<br />
90<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
SERIES TFH TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Enclosure<br />
Aluminum (die casting)<br />
Protecting Hood (shield) Aluminum (die casting)<br />
Pedal<br />
Glass-fiber reinforced<br />
thermoplastic<br />
Degree of Protection IP 65 to IEC/EN 60529<br />
Ambient temperature –25 °C to +70 °C<br />
Mechanical life<br />
> 1 million operations<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC/EN 60947-5-1 EN ISO 13849-1<br />
EN 13850 EN 954-1<br />
BG-GS-ET-15 EN ISO 13850<br />
UL/CSA<br />
CE<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating 4 A / 230VAC 1 A / 24DC<br />
Switching Action<br />
Slow-action NC<br />
Positive break contacts<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage 500 V<br />
Type Terminals<br />
Screw terminals, 2.5 mm 2 max.<br />
(including conductor ferrules)<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
6 kV<br />
Thermal test current 10 A<br />
Max. fuse rating<br />
6 A (slow-blow)<br />
TFH SERIES DIMENSIONS (mm)<br />
3<br />
CONTACT DIAGRAMS<br />
TFH232-11…<br />
TFH232-22…<br />
91
SERIES SEPK(G)<br />
Description<br />
Schmersal’s family of two-hand control consoles have an<br />
ergonomic design that require the operator to use both hands<br />
to initiate a control action. Thus they insure that the operator’s<br />
hands are kept away from the hazardous area of a machine<br />
during operation.<br />
The units are designed such that simultaneous operation<br />
(within 0.5 seconds) of both control buttons is required to<br />
initiate the machine cycle. The control buttons must remain<br />
actuated to complete the machine cycle.<br />
Each is equipped with an integral E-stop mushroom<br />
pushbutton to facilitate emergency stoppage.<br />
Units are available with a wide choice of options and<br />
accessories, such as adjustable stands, auxiliary control<br />
buttons, foot pedals, special colors, etc. for optimizing safety<br />
and functionality.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
Two-hand control consoles are used as protective devices in<br />
setting up and operating single-stroke equipment, and other<br />
applications where it is desired to keep both of the operator’s<br />
hands safe from a hazardous area during machine operation.<br />
Applications are typically found in the metal working, rubber,<br />
plastics and chemical industries as well as in semi-automatic<br />
assembly equipment.<br />
92<br />
2-Hand <strong>Co</strong>ntrol <strong>Co</strong>nsoles<br />
(with light force actuators)<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Choice of console material … rugged Lexan or die-cast<br />
aluminum.<br />
• Optional control functions … consoles designed to<br />
accept up to 8 additional control and signalling devices.<br />
• Hinged console covers … facilitate easy wiring and<br />
assembly.<br />
• Ergonomically-designed shelf to support hands during<br />
actuation (SEPG model) … minimizes stress.<br />
• Protective safety hoods … protect against accidental<br />
actuation of pushbuttons.<br />
• Integral E-stop mushroom pushbutton … for easy<br />
emergency stop control<br />
• IP65 ingress protection rating … tolerates hostile, wet<br />
environments.<br />
• Meets EN574 standard … safety of machinery for twohand<br />
control consoles.<br />
• Available adjustable stands (optional) … to optimize user<br />
comfort.<br />
• Available optional accessories … e.g., safety controllers,<br />
foot pedals, rollers, special paint finishes for application<br />
flexibility.<br />
• Custom units available … please consult factory.<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
Model Number<br />
SEPK02.0.4.0.22/95<br />
SEPK02.0.L.22<br />
SEPG05.3.4.0.22/95.E1<br />
SEPG05.3.L.22<br />
Description<br />
Plastic (Lexan), hooded console with<br />
one red, 38.5mm E-stop mushroom<br />
button (1NO & 1NC contact) and two<br />
light force (2.3 lbs.) black, 55mm<br />
mushroom pushbutton actuators (each<br />
with 1NO & 1NC contact)<br />
Empty plastic (Lexan) hooded console<br />
(gray) with 3 bore holes for actuators<br />
Powder-coated (gray) aluminum<br />
hooded console with one red, 38.5mm<br />
E-stop mushroom button (1NO & 1NC<br />
contacts) and two light force (2.3 lbs.)<br />
black, 55mm mushroom pushbutton<br />
actuators (each with 1NO & 1NC<br />
contact)<br />
Empty powder-coated (gray) aluminum<br />
hooded console with 3 bore holes for<br />
actuators<br />
Note: Also available as custom control panels with up to 8 control<br />
and/or signalling devices in the central portion of the console<br />
(in addition to the E-stop actuator) and adjustable height floor<br />
stands (with or without rollers). Please consult factory.<br />
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
SRB201ZH-24VDC Two-hand control safety controller<br />
(Please see page 336 for details)<br />
EDRR40RT<br />
KDRRK40RT<br />
EFR<br />
EF303.1<br />
ADP55.3SW<br />
AF02<br />
AF10<br />
Metal E-stop actuator (SEPG)<br />
Plastic E-Stop actuator (SEPK)<br />
Spring element for E-stop<br />
E-stop actuator contact block with<br />
1NO & 1NC contact<br />
Light force palm button<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol actuator contact block with<br />
1NO contact<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol actuator contact block with<br />
1NC contact
SERIES SEPK(G)<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nsole Material<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nsole <strong>Co</strong>lor<br />
Ingress Protection<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
Expectancy of<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Blocks<br />
Temperature Range<br />
Mushroom Button<br />
Actuating Force<br />
Lexan (SEPK02…)<br />
Die-cast aluminum (SEPG05…)<br />
RAL 7035, light gray (SEPK02…)<br />
RAL 7004, signal gray (SEPG05…)<br />
IP65<br />
Type A <strong>Co</strong>ntacts:<br />
5 million cycles (minimum)<br />
Type B <strong>Co</strong>ntacts:<br />
10 million cycles (minimum)<br />
Type AF <strong>Co</strong>ntacts: -25°C to +60°C<br />
Type EF <strong>Co</strong>ntacts: -25°C to +80°C<br />
2.3 lbs. (SEPK02…)<br />
2.3 lbs. (SEPG05… EI)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards EN ISO 13849-1 EN 13850<br />
EN 954-1 IEC/EN 60947-5-1<br />
CE IEC/EN 60947-5-5<br />
UL, CSA EN 574<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (<strong>Co</strong>ntact Blocks)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type<br />
Specification<br />
Rated Operating<br />
Current (Ie)<br />
6A, 250VAC (AC15)<br />
3A, 24VDC (DC13)<br />
Insulation Voltage (Ui) 500V@Test Voltage<br />
of 2,500V<br />
Short Circuit<br />
Protection<br />
Type AF<br />
(Operating<br />
Pushbuttons)<br />
Wire Size 2 x 0.5 to 2.5mm 2<br />
(2 x 20AWG to<br />
13AWG)<br />
Type EF<br />
(E-stop Button)<br />
8A, 250VAC (AC15)<br />
5A, 24VDC (DC13)<br />
440V@Test Voltage<br />
of 2,500V<br />
10A, Slow-blow 10A, Slow-blow<br />
2 x 0.5 to 1.5mm 2<br />
(2 x 20AWG to<br />
15AWG)<br />
3<br />
DIMENSIONS SEPK<br />
DIMENSIONS SEPG<br />
93
<strong>Co</strong>nnection Cables<br />
Ordering code breakdown:<br />
(1)-(2)-(3)-(4)-(5)-(6)-(7)-(8)-(9)-(10)-(11)<br />
Nr. Option Description<br />
Cable<br />
(1) A <strong>Co</strong>nnection Cable<br />
S <strong>Co</strong>nnector without cable<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection/Number of poles<br />
(2) K Female coupling<br />
3P 3 Pole<br />
4P 4 Pole<br />
5P 5 Pole<br />
6P 6 Pole<br />
7P 7 Pole<br />
8P 8 Pole<br />
8+1P 9 Pole<br />
12P 12 Pole<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector diameter/threading<br />
(3) M12 M12<br />
M18 M18<br />
M23 M23<br />
M8 M8<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection type<br />
(4) R Snap on<br />
S Screw on<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector head form<br />
(5) G Straight<br />
W Right angled<br />
Nr. Option Description<br />
Cable color<br />
(7) X No cable<br />
BK Black<br />
OG Orange<br />
GY Gray<br />
Cable material<br />
(8) X No cable<br />
1 PVC<br />
2 PUR<br />
LED Signal lights<br />
(9) X No LEDs<br />
2LP 2 LED – PNP<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ding<br />
(10) X Standard<br />
A A-<strong>Co</strong>ding<br />
B B-<strong>Co</strong>ding<br />
Approvals<br />
(11) 1 None<br />
2 UL<br />
3 CSA<br />
4 CULUS<br />
Cable length<br />
(6) X No cable<br />
2M 2m<br />
2,5M 2,5m<br />
3M 3m<br />
5M 5m<br />
10M 10m<br />
Example:<br />
S-K4P-M8-S-G-X-X-X-X-X-1<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector without cable, 4 pole, M8 threading, screw on, straight connector.<br />
94
EMERGENCY CABLE-PULL SWITCHES<br />
SELECTION GUIDE<br />
4<br />
Switch<br />
Series<br />
Housing<br />
Material<br />
Maximum<br />
Span<br />
ZQ700 Thermoplastic 32.5 feet<br />
ZQ900<br />
Die-cast<br />
zinc<br />
165 feet<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfigurations<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
1 NO & 3 NC<br />
2 NO & 2 NC<br />
2 NC, 4NC<br />
Rated<br />
<strong>Catalog</strong><br />
Page<br />
No 96<br />
(Optional) 98<br />
S900 Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner 111<br />
Installation accessories and installation instructions 106<br />
95
SERIES ZQ700<br />
Emergency Cable-Pull Switch<br />
New!<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mpact size … ideal for limited space applications.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile<br />
environments.<br />
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assures circuit<br />
interruption upon pulling of trip-wire.<br />
• Push/pull operation … operates if trip-wire is pulled or<br />
goes slack.<br />
• Watertight design … meets up to IP67 environmental<br />
requirements.<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntinuous E-stop protection satisfying<br />
EN ISO 13850 … for supported spans up to 32.5 feet (10m).<br />
• Visual position indicator … for ease of installation.<br />
• Designed to meet the Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
• Mounting accessories … ease and extend installation.<br />
Description<br />
The ZQ700 is designed to provide continuous emergency stop<br />
control along exposed areas of machinery and conveyors which<br />
present hazards to operator/maintenance personnel. Unlike<br />
E-Stop pushbuttons, emergency cable-pull systems can be<br />
actuated at any point along the “trip wire”.<br />
The unit features a double-break contact block offering two contact<br />
variations which change state when the cable is pulled or<br />
goes slack. Thus the switch can be actuated if an operator falls<br />
into, is pulled into, or leans on the trip wire.<br />
The unit also features a position indicator for easier installation,<br />
and a button reset.<br />
The ZQ700 is capable of spanning lengths of up to 10 meters. Its<br />
rugged, Thermoplastic housing and watertight design (up to<br />
IP67) make it ideal in hostile environments.<br />
Operation<br />
When the trip-wire is pulled, the positive-opening NC contact(s)<br />
are forced to open via a direct mechanical linkage with the<br />
actuating shaft … resulting in machine stoppage.<br />
If the trip-wire goes slack (e.g. breaks or is cut) the NC contact(s)<br />
opens … also resulting in equipment stoppage.<br />
The integral reset mechanism assures that the equipment<br />
cannot be restarted until the cable-pull switch reset has<br />
been actuated.<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
Part Number<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
ZQ 700-11<br />
1NO/1NC<br />
ZQ 700-02<br />
2NC<br />
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
STQ441-SC 5mm diameter steel cable, PVC coated<br />
STQ441-EB M10 eye bolt & hex nut<br />
STQ441-CC Cable clamp<br />
STQ441-TB Turnbuckle<br />
STQ441-TH Thimble<br />
STQ441-PU Pulley assembly (for “cable cornering”)<br />
S900 Cable-Pull Switch Wire tensioner, see page 111<br />
For recommended installation instructions, please see page 106.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The ZQ700 is ideal for replacing multiple, discrete E-stop<br />
pushbuttons or achieving a continuous, immediately accessible<br />
emergency stop … especially where space is limited. Typical<br />
applications include conveyor lines, textile machinery, packaging<br />
machinery, and transfer lines.<br />
96<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
ZQ700 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ver<br />
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Maximum Supported 32.5 feet (10m)<br />
Span<br />
Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F (–25°C to +70°C)<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
1 million operations<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE EN 954-1<br />
EN ISO 13850 UL, CSA<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 TUV<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
Fine silver<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically-separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating 4A/230VAC 4A/24VDC<br />
Switching Action<br />
Snap-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts with wire pull<br />
Short Circuit Protection 6A (Slow blow)<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage 500VAC<br />
Type Terminals<br />
Screw terminals with self-lifting<br />
clamps for up to 13 AWG flexible<br />
stranded wire (2.5mm 2 )<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
Cable length vs. temperature range<br />
4<br />
At 2 to 5 m distance, intermediate wire supports are<br />
required, see accessories.<br />
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS<br />
ZQ700-11<br />
ZQ700-02<br />
97
SERIES ZQ900<br />
Emergency Cable-Pull Switch<br />
New!<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile<br />
environments.<br />
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assures circuit<br />
interruption upon pulling of trip-wire.<br />
• Push/pull operation … operates if trip-wire is pulled or<br />
goes slack.<br />
• Integrated emergency-stop button (optional) … assures<br />
complete emergency stop.<br />
• Watertight design … meets up to IP67 environmental<br />
requirements.<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntinuous E-stop protection satisfying<br />
EN ISO 13850 … for supported spans up to 165 feet (50m).<br />
• Visual position indicator … for ease of installation.<br />
• Up to four contacts in a compact housing … available in<br />
five contact configurations.<br />
• Designed to meet the Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
• Mounting accessories … ease and extend installation.<br />
Description<br />
The ZQ900 is designed to provide continuous emergency stop<br />
control along exposed areas of machinery and conveyors which<br />
present hazards to operator/maintenance personnel. Unlike<br />
E-Stop pushbuttons, emergency cable-pull systems can be<br />
actuated at any point along the “trip wire”.<br />
The unit features a double-break contact block offering a choice<br />
of five contact variations which change state when the cable is<br />
pulled or goes slack. Thus the switch can be actuated if an<br />
operator falls into, is pulled into, or leans on the trip wire.<br />
In addition the unit features an optional integrated E-Stop<br />
pushbutton, a position indicator for easier installation, a button<br />
reset, three cable entries, and an optional signaling lamp.<br />
The unit is capable of spanning lengths of up to 50 meters.<br />
Its rugged, metal housing and watertight design (up to IP67)<br />
make it ideal in hostile environments.<br />
Operation<br />
When the trip-wire is pulled, the positive-opening NC contact(s)<br />
are forced to open via a direct mechanical linkage with the<br />
actuating shaft … resulting in machine stoppage.<br />
If the trip-wire goes slack (e.g. breaks or is cut) the NC<br />
contact(s) opens … also resulting in equipment stoppage.<br />
The integral reset mechanism assures that the equipment<br />
cannot be restarted until the cable-pull switch reset has<br />
been actuated.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The ZQ900 is ideal for replacing multiple, discrete E-stop<br />
pushbuttons or achieving a continuous, immediately accessible<br />
emergency stop … especially where space is limited. Typical<br />
applications include conveyor lines, textile machinery, packaging<br />
machinery, and transfer lines.<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
Part Number<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
ZQ 900-11<br />
1NO/1NC<br />
ZQ 900-02<br />
2NC<br />
ZQ 900-13<br />
1NO/3NC<br />
ZQ 900-22<br />
2NO/2NC<br />
ZQ 900-04<br />
4NC<br />
Note: Add -N for integral E-stop button<br />
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
PL-M20-24V 24V Pilot light kit<br />
PL-M20-120V 120V Pilot light kit<br />
STQ441-SC 5mm diameter steel cable, PVC coated<br />
STQ441-EB M10 eye bolt & hex nut<br />
STQ441-CC Cable clamp<br />
STQ441-TB Turnbuckle<br />
STQ441-TH Thimble<br />
STQ441-PU Pulley assembly (for “cable cornering”)<br />
S900 Cable-Pull Switch Wire tensioner, see page 111<br />
For recommended installation instructions, please see page 106.<br />
98<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
ZQ900 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Die-cast zinc, enamel finish<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ver<br />
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic<br />
cover<br />
Degree of Protection IP67; -N version IP65<br />
Maximum Supported 165 feet (50m)<br />
Span<br />
Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F (–25°C to +70°C)<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
1 million operations<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE EN 954-1<br />
EN ISO 13850 UL, CSA<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 TUV<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
Fine silver<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically-separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating 4A/230VAC 1A/24VDC<br />
Switching Action<br />
Snap-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts with wire pull<br />
Short Circuit Protection 6A (Slow blow)<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage 500VAC<br />
Type Terminals<br />
Screw terminals with self-lifting<br />
clamps for up to 13 AWG flexible<br />
stranded wire (2.5mm 2 )<br />
-10<br />
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80<br />
T(°C)<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
10<br />
20<br />
30<br />
40<br />
50<br />
l (m)<br />
Cable length vs. temperature range<br />
4<br />
At 5 m distance, intermediate wire supports are<br />
required, see accessories.<br />
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS<br />
ZQ900-11<br />
ZQ900-02<br />
ZQ900-04<br />
ZQ900-22<br />
ZQ900-13<br />
99
Recommended Emergency Cable-Pull Switch Installation Instructions<br />
ZQ700<br />
ZQ900<br />
ZS71<br />
ZS80<br />
Thimble Red PVC Eye bolt<br />
coated (cable Guide)<br />
cable<br />
Thimble Thimble Eye bolt Thimble<br />
(cable Guide)<br />
Eye bolt<br />
(End anchor)<br />
Cable Clamps<br />
(remove red PVC<br />
coating from<br />
clamping area)<br />
Cable Clamps<br />
(remove red PVC<br />
coating from<br />
clamping area)<br />
Turnbuckle<br />
tensioner<br />
Cable Clamps<br />
(remove red PVC<br />
coating from<br />
clamping area)<br />
Cable Clamps<br />
(remove red PVC<br />
coating from<br />
clamping area)<br />
Spring<br />
S900<br />
Tensioner<br />
Eye bolt<br />
(cable Guide)<br />
Red PVC<br />
coated cable<br />
Eye bolt<br />
(cable Guide)<br />
Eye bolt<br />
(cable Guide)<br />
Thimble<br />
Eye bolt<br />
(End anchor)<br />
Spring<br />
Cable Clamps<br />
(remove red PVC<br />
coating from<br />
clamping area)<br />
See page 126 for S900 Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nsult factory for appropriate Spring. Tension force is<br />
dependant on switch used.<br />
Part # S900 - Tensioner<br />
Replaces turnbuckle & cable clamps<br />
Part # STQ 441 SS - Steel Spring<br />
For lateral actuation application and extreme<br />
temperature environments<br />
106
S900<br />
Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Smooth adjustment … reduces adjustment effort.<br />
• Only one tool required … simplifies installation.<br />
• Anti-slip design … reduces need for readjustment.<br />
• Ergonomic … risk of injury is reduced.<br />
• Time-saving … cost of ownership is reduced.<br />
• Stainless steel components … tolerates the most hostile<br />
environments.<br />
AVAILABLE MODEL<br />
Model Number<br />
S900<br />
S900-SH<br />
Cable Pull Wire Tensioner<br />
Shackle<br />
Description<br />
Description<br />
The S900 is a unique wire tensioning device which simplifies<br />
the installation and adjustment of cable pull switches.<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nventional systems are usually time consuming and<br />
difficult to install and adjust, but not with the S900.<br />
The S900 is an all-in-one unit that replaces the complicated<br />
turnbuckle assembly, with its thimbles and multiple wire<br />
clamps, and does not require the cable to be stripped to be<br />
secured.<br />
The S900 requires only a single tool to secure the wire and<br />
adjust the tension. Its “anti-slip” design minimizes the need for<br />
readjustments.<br />
The unit features a “C” hook which easily slips onto the ring of<br />
a cable-pull switch. Should the switch need to be replaced,<br />
the S900 can be easily removed from the switch by releasing<br />
the tension.<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
Note: The cable-pull switch is purchased separately.<br />
S900-SH shackle is required to utilize with<br />
Schmersal ZS71 and ZS80 cable-pull switches.<br />
4<br />
111
112<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design
NON-CONTACT SAFETY SENSORS<br />
Sensor<br />
Series<br />
SELECTION GUIDE<br />
Approximate<br />
Envelope<br />
Dimensions<br />
Operating<br />
Voltage<br />
BNS250 1.0" × 1.4" × 0.5" 24VDC<br />
BNS260 1.0" × 1.4" × 0.5" 24VDC<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfiguration(s)<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
3 NC<br />
<strong>Catalog</strong><br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
BNS33 3.5" × 1.0" × 0.5"<br />
24VAC/DC<br />
120VAC/DC<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
118<br />
3 NC<br />
BNS33S 3.5" × 1.0" × 0.625"<br />
24VDC<br />
100VAC/DC<br />
1 NO & 2 NC 122<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
BNS36 3.5" × 1.0" × 0.5" 24VDC 1 NO & 2 NC<br />
2NC, 3NC<br />
124<br />
BNS303 1.18" Dia × 1.74" 100VAC/DC<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
126<br />
BNS30 & BNS300 1.18" Dia × 3.07" 24VDC 1 NC<br />
128<br />
BNS333 4.5" × 1.7" × 1.7" 24VDC 1 NC 130<br />
BNS16 1.25" × 2" × 3" 100VAC/DC<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
132<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
134<br />
BNS-B20 NA 24VDC 1 NO & 1 NC 136<br />
CSS 180 0.7" Dia × 3.6" 24VDC 2 PNP 138<br />
CSS 34 1" × 4" × 1" 24VDC 2 PNP 140<br />
CSS 30S 1.18" Dia × 3.5" 24VDC 2 PNP 142<br />
CSS 16 1.25" × 2" × 3" 24VDC 2 PNP 144<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-Magnet Sensor <strong>Co</strong>mpatible Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers<br />
147<br />
114<br />
116<br />
5<br />
113
SERIES BNS250<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-Magnet Sensors<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mpact size … ideal for limited space applications.<br />
• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability<br />
in the most hostile environments.<br />
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple<br />
magnets.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most<br />
industrial environments.<br />
• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy<br />
installation and provide visual indication of switch status.<br />
• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand<br />
mechanical abuse.<br />
• Satisfy PL c, PL d, or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or Category<br />
1, 3, or 4 to EN 954-1 … when used with appropriate<br />
Schmersal safety controllers.<br />
Description<br />
The Series BNS250 coded-magnet sensors are designed for<br />
use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine<br />
guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a<br />
multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The<br />
reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence<br />
of their matched magnetic field array.<br />
Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67<br />
(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant design<br />
prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly coded<br />
magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features a 1-<br />
meter long prewired pigtail.<br />
Operation<br />
The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary<br />
portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly<br />
mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When<br />
the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns<br />
with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the<br />
guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not<br />
properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor<br />
output will remain “off.”<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The sealed, compact BNS250 is ideal for use on movable<br />
machine guards in hostile environments. Typical applications<br />
include food processing equipment, chemical processing<br />
equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,<br />
and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(Please order BPS250 magnet separately)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfiguration*<br />
BNS250-11z<br />
BNS250-12z<br />
BNS250-12z-2187<br />
*<strong>Co</strong>ntact configuration in presence of BPS250 coded-magnet<br />
actuator.<br />
*Important Note: Series BNS <strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet sensors are for<br />
use in safety applications only when used with<br />
an electrically compatible safety controller or<br />
safety PLC. (For recommended compatible<br />
SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller,<br />
see selection chart on Page 147.)<br />
!<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
BNS250-11zG 1 NO & 1 NC<br />
BNS250-12zG<br />
BNS250-11zG-2205<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
Multiple reed switch<br />
assembly with 1-meter<br />
prewired pigtail<br />
Multiple reed switch<br />
assembly with 1 meter<br />
prewired pigtail and built-in<br />
LED display<br />
Multiple reed switch assembly<br />
with 5 meter pigtail (side entry)<br />
and built-in LED display<br />
BPS250 N/A <strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet actuator<br />
USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY<br />
DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.<br />
114
BNS250 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic<br />
Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 4mm (0.16")<br />
“Off”: 14mm (0.55")<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F<br />
Operating Principle Magnetic<br />
Shock Resistance<br />
30g/11ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE EN ISO 13849-1<br />
UL EN 954-1<br />
CSA BG-GS-ET-14<br />
*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The<br />
proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Maximum Operating Voltage 24VDC<br />
Maximum <strong>Co</strong>ntinuous 100 mA (BNS250-11z/12z)<br />
Current Rating<br />
10 mA (BNS250-11zG/12zG)<br />
Maximum Switching<br />
1W (BNS250-11z/12z)<br />
Capacity (Power Rating) 240mW (BNS250-11zG/12zG)<br />
Type <strong>Co</strong>nnection* 1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm 2<br />
(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail<br />
*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on<br />
request. Please consult factory.<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
25<br />
.98<br />
19<br />
.75<br />
33<br />
1.30<br />
22<br />
.87<br />
13<br />
5.1<br />
ø4,5<br />
.18<br />
13<br />
.51<br />
8,7<br />
.34<br />
33<br />
1.30<br />
22<br />
.87<br />
13<br />
.51<br />
8,7<br />
.34<br />
1000<br />
39.37<br />
25<br />
.98<br />
19<br />
.75<br />
ø4,5<br />
.18<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
Note: BNS250 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.<br />
WIRING DETAILS<br />
5<br />
BNS250-11z<br />
BNS250-12z<br />
BNS250-11zG<br />
BNS250-12zG<br />
13<br />
(black)<br />
14<br />
(blue)<br />
13<br />
(black)<br />
14<br />
(blue)<br />
13<br />
(black)<br />
14<br />
(blue)<br />
13<br />
(black)<br />
14<br />
(blue)<br />
21<br />
(white)<br />
22<br />
(brown)<br />
21<br />
(white)<br />
C<br />
(brown)<br />
21<br />
(white)<br />
22<br />
(brown)<br />
21<br />
(white)<br />
C<br />
(brown)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts shown with gate closed<br />
MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE<br />
BNS250-12z-2187<br />
115
SERIES BNS260<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-Magnet Sensors<br />
Description<br />
The Series BNS260 coded-magnet sensors are designed<br />
for use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine<br />
guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a<br />
multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The<br />
reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence<br />
of their matched magnetic field array.<br />
Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67<br />
(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant design<br />
prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly<br />
coded magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features<br />
a 1-meter long prewired pigtail or an available connector.<br />
Operation<br />
The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary<br />
portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly<br />
mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When<br />
the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns<br />
with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the<br />
guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not<br />
properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor<br />
output will remain “off.”<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The sealed, compact BNS260 is ideal for use on movable<br />
machine guards in hostile environments. Typical applications<br />
include food processing equipment, chemical processing<br />
equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,<br />
and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.<br />
Note: See page 94 for appropriate M8 connector cables.<br />
4 pole models accept either a screw-on or snap-on<br />
connector.<br />
6 pole models (with signalling contact) accept only a<br />
snap-on connector.<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mpact size … ideal for limited space applications.<br />
• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability<br />
in the most hostile environments.<br />
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple<br />
magnets.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most<br />
industrial environments.<br />
• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy<br />
installation and provide visual indication of switch status.<br />
• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand<br />
mechanical abuse.<br />
• Satisfy CE & fail-to-safe requirements … when used with<br />
Series AES safety controllers.<br />
• Satisfy PL c, PL d, or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or Category<br />
1, 3, or 4 to EN 954-1 … when used with appropriate<br />
Schmersal safety controllers.<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
(Actuator ordered separately)<br />
Part Number <strong>Co</strong>ntacts <strong>Co</strong>nnection<br />
BNS260-02Z-* 2 NC prewired<br />
BNS260-02ZG-* 2 NC<br />
1 meter cable<br />
BNS260-02Z-ST-* 2 NC M8, 4 pole<br />
BNS260-02ZG-ST-* 2 NC<br />
connector<br />
BNS260-11Z-* 1 NO & 1 NC prewired<br />
BNS260-11ZG-* 1 NO & 1 NC 1 meter cable<br />
BNS260-11Z-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC M8, 4 pole<br />
BNS260-11ZG-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC connector<br />
With 1 NC signalling contact<br />
BNS260-02/01Z-* 2 NC prewired<br />
BNS260-02/01ZG-* 2 NC<br />
1 meter cable<br />
BNS260-02/01Z-ST-* 2 NC M8, 6 pole<br />
BNS260-02/01ZG-ST-* 2 NC<br />
connector<br />
BNS260-11/01Z-* 1 NO & 1 NC prewired<br />
BNS260-11/01ZG-* 1 NO & 1 NC 1 meter cable<br />
BNS260-11/01Z-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC M8, 6 pole<br />
BNS260-11/01ZG-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC connector<br />
*Please indicate hinge direction: -L (left) or -R (right)<br />
CODED MAGNET ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES<br />
Model Number<br />
BPS260-1<br />
BPS260-2<br />
BNS260<br />
Description<br />
Standard Actuator<br />
Actuator for 90° operation<br />
Spacer for mounting reed switch or<br />
magnet on ferrous material<br />
Important Note: Series BNS <strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet sensors are for<br />
use in safety applications only when used with<br />
an electrically compatible safety controller or<br />
safety PLC. (For recommended compatible<br />
SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller,<br />
see selection chart on Page 147.)<br />
116<br />
!<br />
USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY<br />
DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.
BNS260 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic<br />
Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 5mm (0.2")<br />
“Off”: 15mm (0.6")<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F<br />
Operating Principle Magnetic<br />
Shock Resistance<br />
30g/11ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE EN 954-1<br />
cUL<br />
BG-GS-ET-14<br />
EN ISO 13849-1<br />
*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The<br />
proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Maximum Operating Voltage 75VDC<br />
24VDC for LED versions<br />
Maximum <strong>Co</strong>ntinuous 400 mA without LED<br />
Current Rating<br />
10 mA with LED<br />
Maximum Switching<br />
10va without LED<br />
240mW with LED<br />
Type <strong>Co</strong>nnection* 1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm 2<br />
(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail or M8<br />
4 or 6 pin connector (ST)<br />
*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on<br />
request. Please consult factory.<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
BNS260<br />
BPS260<br />
mm<br />
Note: BNS260 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.<br />
WIRING DETAILS (<strong>Co</strong>ntact configuration shown in presence of BPS260 <strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet actuator)<br />
BNS260-02z(G)<br />
BNS260-02/01z(G) BNS260-11z(G) BNS260-11/01z(G)<br />
5<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts shown with gate closed. <strong>Co</strong>lor configuration shown for cabled versions, connector color codes may vary.<br />
QUICK-CONNECT DIAGRAMS<br />
MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE<br />
BNS260 4-Pole<br />
BNS260 6-Pole<br />
117
SERIES BNS33<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-Magnet Sensors<br />
Description<br />
The Series BNS33 coded-magnet sensors are designed for<br />
use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine<br />
guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a<br />
multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The<br />
reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence<br />
of their matched magnetic field array.<br />
Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67<br />
(submersible) standards (IP69K for BNS33S). Their tamperresistant<br />
design prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or<br />
improperly coded magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module<br />
features an optional built-in LED display of switch status, and<br />
a 1-meter long prewired pigtail to assure sealing integrity.<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mpact size … ideal for limited space applications.<br />
• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability<br />
in the most hostile environments.<br />
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple<br />
magnets.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most<br />
industrial environments.<br />
• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy<br />
installations and provide visual indication of switch status.<br />
• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand<br />
mechanical abuse.<br />
• Satisfy PL c, PL d, or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or<br />
Category 1, 3, or 4 to EN 954-1 … when used with<br />
appropriate Schmersal safety controllers.<br />
• Optional high-strength field coded-magnets …<br />
extends sensing range to 10mm.<br />
• Units available with M8 quick-connect.<br />
(Please consult factory.)<br />
• Available stainless steel housing (BNS33S) … ideal<br />
for the food industry (see page 122).<br />
Operation<br />
The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary<br />
portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly<br />
mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When<br />
the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns<br />
with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the<br />
guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not<br />
properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor<br />
output will remain “off.”<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The sealed, compact BNS33 is ideal for use on movable<br />
machine guards in hostile environments or where space is<br />
limited. Typical applications include food processing<br />
equipment, chemical processing equipment, woodworking<br />
machinery, packaging machinery, and articulating robot arm<br />
rest position sensing.<br />
Required Safety<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntroller.<br />
*Important Note: Series BNS <strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet sensors are for<br />
use in safety applications only when used with<br />
an electrically compatible safety controller or<br />
safety PLC. (For recommended compatible<br />
SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller,<br />
see selection chart on Page 147.)<br />
!<br />
USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY<br />
DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.<br />
118
BNS33 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
Part Number<br />
BNS33-11z**<br />
BNS33-12z***<br />
BNS33-02z-2187**<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(Please order BPS33 or BPS33-2326 magnet separately)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfiguration*<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
Maximum<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
100VAC/DC<br />
(400mA)<br />
100VAC/DC<br />
(250mA)<br />
Description<br />
Multiple reed switch<br />
assembly with 1-meter<br />
prewired pigtail<br />
ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
BPS33<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet actuator<br />
(5mm sensing distance)<br />
BPS33-2326<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet actuator<br />
(10mm sensing distance)<br />
BN31/33<br />
Shim plate for mounting reed switch<br />
assembly on ferrous material<br />
Note: See page 94 for M8, 4 pin connector cables<br />
BNS33-11zG**<br />
BNS33-12zG***<br />
BNS33-02zG-2187**<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
24VDC<br />
(10mA)<br />
Multiple reed switch<br />
assembly with 1-meter<br />
prewired pigtail and<br />
built-in LED display<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded Magnet<br />
Sensor<br />
BNS33-12z-2187**<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
100VAC/DC<br />
(250mA)<br />
Multiple reed switch<br />
assembly with 1-meter<br />
prewired pigtail<br />
BNS33-11z-ST**<br />
1NO & 1NC<br />
60VAC/DC<br />
(400mA)<br />
BNS33-11zG-ST**<br />
BNS33-12z-ST***<br />
1NO & 1NC<br />
1NO & 2NC<br />
24VDC<br />
(10mA)<br />
60VAC/DC<br />
(400mA)<br />
Multiple reed switch<br />
assembly with M8x1<br />
quick-connect<br />
Multiple Reed Switch Assembly<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntroller<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-Magnet Sensor and<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntroller sold separately.<br />
BNS33-12zG-ST***<br />
1NO & 2NC<br />
24VDC<br />
(10mA)<br />
*<strong>Co</strong>ntact configuration in presence of BPS33 coded-magnet actuator.<br />
**These models feature isolated contacts.<br />
***These models feature C-form contacts.<br />
5<br />
Note: Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on request.<br />
Please consult factory.<br />
Note: SPEZ-2237 for sliding doors is available for BNS33-11z and -11zG only.<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact factory for more information.<br />
119
BNS33 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic<br />
Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 5mm (0.2")<br />
“Off”: 15mm (0.6")<br />
“On”: 8mm (0.3") (For BNS33S only)<br />
“Off”: 18mm (0.7") (For BNS33S only)<br />
Degree of Protection IP67 (BNS33S: IP69k)<br />
Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F (+178°F for BNS33S)<br />
Operating Principle Magnetic<br />
Shock Resistance 30g/11ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE EN ISO 13849-1<br />
UL EN 954-1<br />
CSA<br />
BG-GS-ET-14<br />
IEC 529/EN60529<br />
*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The<br />
proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
For electrical ratings see page 139<br />
Type <strong>Co</strong>nnection* 1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm 2<br />
(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail.<br />
M8x1 quick-connect for versions<br />
with “ST” suffix<br />
*Longer prewired cables available on request. Please consult factory.<br />
BPS33 MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE<br />
120
BNS33 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
Note: 27mm width and<br />
14.5mm depth for<br />
BNS33S/BPS33S<br />
M8<br />
25<br />
0.98<br />
7<br />
0.28<br />
3,5<br />
0.14<br />
88<br />
3.47<br />
78<br />
3.07<br />
0,5<br />
.02<br />
ø5<br />
.02 DIA<br />
18,5<br />
.073<br />
BNS33 with Quick-<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnect Terminal<br />
4,5<br />
0.18<br />
3<br />
.012<br />
13<br />
0.51<br />
Note: BNS33 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.<br />
WIRING DETAILS<br />
Quick-<strong>Co</strong>nnect for<br />
BNS33-11 units<br />
5<br />
2 3<br />
1 4<br />
Pins 1-2 are Normally-closed<br />
Pins 3-4 are Normally-open<br />
Quick-<strong>Co</strong>nnect for<br />
BNS33-12 units<br />
BNS33-02zG-2187<br />
2 3<br />
1 4<br />
Pin 1: <strong>Co</strong>mmon<br />
Pins 2 & 4 are Normally-closed<br />
Pin 3 is Normally-open<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts shown with gate closed<br />
121
SERIES BNS33S<br />
Stainless Steel <strong>Co</strong>ded-Magnet Sensors<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mpact size … ideal for limited space applications.<br />
• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability<br />
in the most hostile environments.<br />
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple<br />
magnets.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most<br />
industrial environments.<br />
• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy<br />
installations and provide visual indication of switch status.<br />
• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand<br />
mechanical abuse.<br />
• Satisfy PL c, PL d, or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or<br />
Category 1, 3, or 4 to EN 954-1 … when used with<br />
appropriate Schmersal safety controllers.<br />
• Stainless steel housing … ideal for the food industry.<br />
Description<br />
The Series BNS33S coded-magnet sensor is designed for<br />
use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine<br />
guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a<br />
multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The<br />
reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence<br />
of their matched magnetic field array.<br />
Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP69K<br />
standards. Their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing<br />
with a simple magnet or improperly coded magnetic field. In<br />
addition, the BNS module features an optional built-in LED<br />
display of switch status, and a 1-meter long prewired pigtail to<br />
assure sealing integrity.<br />
Operation<br />
The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary<br />
portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly<br />
mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When<br />
the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns<br />
with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the<br />
guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not<br />
properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor<br />
output will remain “off.”<br />
Part Number<br />
BNS33S-12z**<br />
BNS33S-12zG**<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(Please order BPS33S magnet separately)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfiguration*<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
Maximum<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
Rating<br />
100VAC/DC<br />
(250mA)<br />
24VDC<br />
(10mA)<br />
BPS33S N/A N/A<br />
Description<br />
Multiple reed<br />
switch assembly<br />
with 1-meter<br />
prewired pigtail<br />
and stainless<br />
steel enclosure<br />
Stainless steel<br />
coded-magnet<br />
actuator<br />
*<strong>Co</strong>ntact configuration in presence of BPS33S coded-magnet actuator.<br />
**These models feature isolated contacts.<br />
Note: Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on<br />
request. Please consult factory.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The sealed, compact BNS33S is ideal for use on movable<br />
machine guards in hostile environments or where space is<br />
limited. Typical applications include food processing<br />
equipment, chemical processing equipment, woodworking<br />
machinery, packaging machinery, and articulating robot arm<br />
rest position sensing.<br />
*Important Note: Series BNS <strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet sensors are for<br />
use in safety applications only when used with<br />
an electrically compatible safety controller or<br />
safety PLC. (For recommended compatible<br />
SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller,<br />
see selection chart on Page 147.)<br />
!<br />
USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY<br />
DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.<br />
122
BNS33S TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Type V4A (316L) stainless steel<br />
Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 8mm (0.3")<br />
“Off”: 18mm (0.7")<br />
Degree of Protection IP69k<br />
Operating Temperature –13°F to +178°F<br />
Operating Principle Magnetic<br />
Shock Resistance 30g/11ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE EN 954-1<br />
IEC 529/EN60529 BG-GS-ET-14<br />
EN ISO 13849-1<br />
*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The<br />
proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
For electrical ratings see page<br />
Type <strong>Co</strong>nnection* 1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm 2<br />
(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail.<br />
*Longer prewired cables available on request. Please consult factory.<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
BPS33S<br />
BNS33S<br />
Note: BNS33 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.<br />
WIRING DETAILS<br />
BNS33S MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE<br />
5<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts shown with gate closed<br />
123
SERIES BNS36<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-Magnet Sensors<br />
Description<br />
The Series BNS36 coded-magnet sensors are designed<br />
for use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine<br />
guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a<br />
multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The<br />
reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence<br />
of their matched magnetic field array.<br />
Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67<br />
(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant design<br />
prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly<br />
coded magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features an<br />
optional built-in LED display of switch status, and a 1-meter<br />
long prewired pigtail or an available connector.<br />
Operation<br />
The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary<br />
portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly<br />
mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When<br />
the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns<br />
with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the<br />
guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not<br />
properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor<br />
output will remain “off.”<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The sealed, compact BNS36 is ideal for use on movable<br />
machine guards in hostile environments. Typical applications<br />
include food processing equipment, chemical processing<br />
equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,<br />
and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.<br />
Note: See page 94 for appropriate M8 connector cables.<br />
4 pole models accept either a screw-on or snap-on<br />
connector.<br />
6 pole models (with signalling output) accept only a<br />
snap-on connector.<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mpact size … ideal for limited space applications.<br />
• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability<br />
in the most hostile environments.<br />
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple<br />
magnets.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most<br />
industrial environments.<br />
• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy<br />
installation and provide visual indication of switch status.<br />
• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand<br />
mechanical abuse.<br />
• Satisfy CE & fail-to-safe requirements … when used with<br />
Series AES safety controllers.<br />
• Satisfy PL c, PL d, or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or Category<br />
1, 3, or 4 to EN 954-1 … when used with appropriate<br />
Schmersal safety controllers.<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
(Actuator ordered separately)<br />
Part Number <strong>Co</strong>ntacts <strong>Co</strong>nnection<br />
BNS36-02Z-* 2 NC prewired<br />
BNS36-02ZG-* 2 NC<br />
1 meter cable<br />
BNS36-02Z-ST-* 2 NC M8, 4 pole<br />
BNS36-02ZG-ST-* 2 NC<br />
connector<br />
BNS36-11Z-* 1 NO & 1 NC prewired<br />
BNS36-11ZG-* 1 NO & 1 NC 1 meter cable<br />
BNS36-11Z-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC M8, 4 pole<br />
BNS36-11ZG-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC connector<br />
With 1 NC signalling contact<br />
BNS36-02/01Z-* 2 NC prewired<br />
BNS36-02/01ZG-* 2 NC<br />
1 meter cable<br />
BNS36-02/01Z-ST-* 2 NC M8, 6 pole<br />
BNS36-02/01ZG-ST-* 2 NC<br />
connector<br />
BNS36-11/01Z-* 1 NO & 1 NC prewired<br />
BNS36-11/01ZG-* 1 NO & 1 NC 1 meter cable<br />
BNS36-11/01Z-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC M8, 6 pole<br />
BNS36-11/01ZG-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC connector<br />
*Please indicate hinge direction: -L (left) or -R (right)<br />
CODED MAGNET ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES<br />
Model Number<br />
BPS36-1<br />
BPS36-2<br />
BNS36<br />
Description<br />
Standard Actuator<br />
Actuator for 90° operation<br />
Spacer for mounting reed switch or<br />
magnet on ferrous material<br />
Important Note: Series BNS <strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet sensors are for<br />
use in safety applications only when used with<br />
an electrically compatible safety controller or<br />
safety PLC. (For recommended compatible<br />
SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller,<br />
see selection chart on Page 147.)<br />
124<br />
!<br />
USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY<br />
DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.
BNS36 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic<br />
Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 7mm<br />
“Off”: 17mm<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F<br />
Operating Principle Magnetic<br />
Shock Resistance<br />
30g/11ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE EN 954-1<br />
BG-GS-ET14 UL<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 CSA<br />
*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The<br />
proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Maximum Operating Voltage 75V DC<br />
24VDC for LED versions<br />
Maximum <strong>Co</strong>ntinuous 400 mA without LED<br />
Current Rating<br />
10 mA with LED<br />
Maximum Switching<br />
10va without LED<br />
240mW with LED<br />
Type <strong>Co</strong>nnection* 1 meter long LiYY* 0.25mm 2<br />
(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail or M8<br />
4 or 6 pin connector (ST)<br />
*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on<br />
request. Please consult factory.<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
BNS36<br />
BPS36<br />
BNS36 Spacer<br />
Note: BNS36 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.<br />
WIRING DETAILS (<strong>Co</strong>ntact configuration shown in presence of BPS36 <strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet actuator)<br />
BNS36-02z(G)<br />
BNS36-02/01z(G) BNS36-11z(G) BNS36-11/01z(G)<br />
5<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts shown with gate closed. <strong>Co</strong>lor configuration shown for cabled versions, connector color codes may vary.<br />
QUICK-CONNECT DIAGRAMS<br />
MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE<br />
BNS36 4-Pole<br />
BNS36 6-Pole<br />
125
SERIES BNS303<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-Magnet Sensors<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mpact size … ideal for limited space applications.<br />
• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability<br />
in the most hostile environments.<br />
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple<br />
magnets.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most<br />
industrial environments.<br />
• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand<br />
mechanical abuse.<br />
• Satisfy PL c, PL d, or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or Category<br />
1, 3, or 4 to EN 954-1 … when used with appropriate<br />
Schmersal safety controllers.<br />
Description<br />
The Series BNS303 coded-magnet sensors are designed for<br />
use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine<br />
guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a<br />
multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The<br />
reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence<br />
of their matched magnetic field array.<br />
Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67<br />
(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant design<br />
prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly coded<br />
magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features an<br />
integral built-in LED display of switch status, and a 1-meter<br />
long prewired pigtail.<br />
Operation<br />
The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary<br />
portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly<br />
mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When<br />
the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns<br />
with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the<br />
guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not<br />
properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor<br />
output will remain “off.”<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(Please order BPS300 or BPS303 magnet separately)<br />
Part Number<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfiguration*<br />
Description<br />
BNS303-11z 1 NO & 1 NC<br />
Multiple reed switch<br />
(100VAC/DC/400mA)<br />
BNS303-12z 1 NO & 2 NC<br />
assembly with 1-meter<br />
prewired pigtail<br />
BNS303-11zG 1 NO & 1 NC<br />
Multiple reed switch<br />
(24VDC/10mA) assembly<br />
with 1-meter prewired<br />
BNS303-12zG 1 NO & 2 NC pigtail and built-in LED<br />
display<br />
BPS300<br />
N/A<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet actuator<br />
(front mount)<br />
BPS303**<br />
N/A<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet actuator<br />
(rear mount)<br />
*<strong>Co</strong>ntact configuration in presence of BPS300 or BPS303 codedmagnet<br />
actuator.<br />
**Available with stainless-steel outer jackets. Please consult factory.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The sealed, compact BNS303 is ideal for use on movable<br />
machine guards in hostile environments. Typical applications<br />
include food processing equipment, chemical processing<br />
equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,<br />
and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.<br />
*Important Note: Series BNS <strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet sensors are for<br />
use in safety applications only when used with<br />
an electrically compatible safety controller or<br />
safety PLC. (For recommended compatible<br />
SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller,<br />
see selection chart on Page 147.)<br />
BPS300 Actuator<br />
BPS303 Actuator**<br />
!<br />
USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY<br />
DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.<br />
126
BNS303 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic<br />
Switching Distance, “S”* “On”: 5mm (0.2")<br />
“Off”: 15mm (0.6")<br />
“On”: 8 mm ¸<br />
“Off”: 18mm<br />
˝Suffix 2211 only<br />
˛<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F<br />
Operating Principle Magnetic<br />
Shock Resistance 30g/11ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE EN ISO 13849-1<br />
UL EN 954-1<br />
CSA BG-GS-ET-14<br />
*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The<br />
proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Maximum Operating Voltage 24VDC (with LED)<br />
100VAC/DC (without LED)<br />
Maximum <strong>Co</strong>ntinuous 10mA (with LED)<br />
Current Rating<br />
400mA (without LED)<br />
Maximum Switching<br />
10VA<br />
Capacity (Power Rating)<br />
Type <strong>Co</strong>nnection* 1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm 2<br />
(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail<br />
*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on<br />
request. Please consult factory.<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
BPS300<br />
6<br />
.24<br />
36<br />
1.42<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
ø 4,5<br />
.18<br />
2<br />
.08<br />
90°<br />
ø2<br />
.08<br />
14<br />
.55<br />
x 1,5<br />
.06<br />
15<br />
.59<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
M 30<br />
1.20<br />
2<br />
.08<br />
ø2<br />
.08<br />
44<br />
1.74<br />
1000<br />
39.37<br />
ø30<br />
1.18<br />
14<br />
.55<br />
ø 37<br />
1.46<br />
5<br />
15<br />
.59<br />
BPS303 (Ideal for use in the food industry)<br />
Note: BNS303 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.<br />
WIRING DETAILS<br />
MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE<br />
BNS303-11z<br />
13<br />
(black)<br />
21<br />
(white)<br />
14<br />
(blue)<br />
22<br />
(brown)<br />
13<br />
(black)<br />
21<br />
(white)<br />
BNS303-11zG<br />
14<br />
(blue)<br />
22<br />
(brown)<br />
22<br />
(black)<br />
32<br />
(white)<br />
BNS303-12z<br />
14<br />
(blue)<br />
C<br />
(brown)<br />
BNS303-12zG<br />
13<br />
(black)<br />
21<br />
(white)<br />
14<br />
(blue)<br />
C<br />
(brown)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts shown with gate closed<br />
127
SERIES BNS30 & BNS300<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-Magnet Sensor with<br />
Integral Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Module<br />
Description<br />
The Series BNS30 and BNS300 coded-magnet sensors are<br />
designed for use as a safety interlock switch on movable<br />
machine guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set<br />
consists of a multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet<br />
actuator. The reed switches, wired in series, will only close in<br />
the presence of their matched magnetic field array.<br />
In addition, the Series features an integral monitoring and<br />
control circuit which detects faults in the reed switch array<br />
(satisfying EN ISO 13849-1, PL c/Category 1 without use of an<br />
ancillary safety relay module).<br />
Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67<br />
(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant design<br />
prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly coded<br />
magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features an<br />
integral LED display of switch status and a 1-meter long<br />
prewired pigtail.<br />
Operation<br />
The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary<br />
portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly<br />
mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When<br />
the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns<br />
with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the<br />
guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not<br />
properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor<br />
output will remain “off.”<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mpact size … ideal for limited space applications.<br />
• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability<br />
in the most hostile environments.<br />
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple<br />
magnets.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most<br />
industrial environments.<br />
• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy<br />
installations and provide visual indication of switch status.<br />
• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand<br />
mechanical abuse.<br />
• Integral reed switch monitoring & control module…<br />
detects faults in reed switch array. Satisfies PL c per<br />
EN ISO 13849-1, or Safety Category 1 per EN 954-1.<br />
• Available in metal (BNS30) or plastic (BNS300)<br />
housings … for application versatility.<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(Please order BPS300 or BPS303 magnet separately)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
Part Number<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfiguration*<br />
Description<br />
BNS30-01ZG**<br />
and<br />
BNS300-01zG**<br />
BPS300<br />
BPS303***<br />
1 NC<br />
N/A<br />
N/A<br />
Multiple reed switch<br />
(24VDC/30mA) assembly<br />
with 1-meter prewired pigtail<br />
and built-in LED display<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet actuator<br />
(front mount)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet actuator<br />
(rear mount)<br />
*<strong>Co</strong>ntact configuration in presence of BPS300 or BPS 303<br />
coded-magnet actuator.<br />
**Important Note: The BNS30 and BNS300 are 4-wire sensors<br />
designed to satisfy PL c per EN ISO 13849-1,<br />
or control Category 1 per EN 954-1. They are<br />
not designed for use with a separate safety<br />
controller.<br />
***Available with stainless-steel outer jacket. Please consult<br />
factory<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable<br />
machine guards in hostile environments. Typical applications<br />
include food processing equipment, chemical processing<br />
equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,<br />
and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.<br />
BPS300 Actuator<br />
BPS303 Actuator***<br />
128
BNS300 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic (BNS300)<br />
Brass, nickel-plated (BNS30)<br />
Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 5mm (0.2")<br />
“Off”: 15mm (0.6")<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F<br />
Operating Principle Magnetic<br />
Shock Resistance 30g/11ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE EN ISO 13849-1<br />
UL EN954-1<br />
CSA BG-GS-ET-14<br />
*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The<br />
proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Maximum Supply Voltage<br />
Maximum <strong>Co</strong>ntinuous<br />
Current Rating<br />
Maximum Switching<br />
Capacity (Power Rating)<br />
Type <strong>Co</strong>nnection*<br />
24VDC<br />
30mA<br />
Voltage: 250VAC<br />
Current: 3A (750VA)<br />
1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm2<br />
(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail<br />
*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available<br />
on request. Also available with M12x1 quick-connect. Please<br />
consult factory.<br />
DIMENSIONS & WIRING DETAILS<br />
6<br />
.24<br />
36<br />
1.42<br />
2<br />
.08<br />
BPS300<br />
ø2<br />
.08<br />
M 30<br />
1.20<br />
x 1.5<br />
.06<br />
90°<br />
ø 4,5<br />
.18<br />
14<br />
.55<br />
15<br />
.59<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
78<br />
3.07<br />
1000<br />
40<br />
2<br />
.08<br />
ø2<br />
.08<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
BN 24 VDC<br />
BK<br />
BK<br />
BU 30 mA<br />
BNS300-01-zG<br />
L+<br />
L-<br />
ø30<br />
1.18<br />
15<br />
.59<br />
14<br />
.55<br />
ø 37<br />
1.46<br />
BPS303 (Ideal for use in the food industry)<br />
5<br />
Note: BNS300 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.<br />
MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE<br />
129
SERIES BNS333<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-Magnet Sensors with<br />
Integral Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Module<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mpact size … ideal for limited space applications.<br />
• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability<br />
in the most hostile environments.<br />
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple<br />
magnets.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most<br />
industrial environments.<br />
• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy<br />
installation and provide visual indication of switch status.<br />
• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand<br />
mechanical abuse.<br />
• Integral reed switch monitoring/control module …<br />
detects faults in reed switch array. Satisfies PL c per<br />
EN ISO 13849-1, or control Category 1 per EN 954-1.<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(Please order BPS300 or BPS303 magnet separately)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
Part Number<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfiguration*<br />
Description<br />
Description<br />
The Series BNS333 coded-magnet sensors are designed for<br />
use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine<br />
guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a<br />
multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The<br />
reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence<br />
of their matched magnetic field array.<br />
In addition, the BNS333 features an integral monitoring and<br />
control circuit which detects faults in the reed switch array<br />
(satisfying EN ISO 13849-1, PL c /Category 1 without use of an<br />
ancillary safety circuit monitoring module).<br />
Their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with a<br />
simple magnet or improperly coded magnetic field. In<br />
addition, the BNS module features an optional built-in LED<br />
display of switch status.<br />
Operation<br />
The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary<br />
portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly<br />
mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When<br />
the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns<br />
with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the<br />
guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not<br />
properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor<br />
output will remain “off.”<br />
BNS333-01YU** 1 NC<br />
Multiple reed switch(24VAC/<br />
DC/40mA) assembly with<br />
integral switch monitoring<br />
and control module.<br />
Actuation from rear (“U”)<br />
BNS333-01YD**<br />
Same as above but<br />
actuation from front<br />
(“D”)<br />
BNS333-01YL**<br />
Same as above but<br />
actuation from left (“L”)<br />
BNS333-01YR**<br />
Same as above but<br />
actuation from right (“R”)<br />
BNS333-01YV**<br />
Same as above but<br />
actuation from top (“V”)<br />
BPS300<br />
N/A<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet actuator<br />
(front mount)<br />
BPS303***<br />
N/A<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet actuator<br />
(rear mount)<br />
*<strong>Co</strong>ntact configuration in presence of BPS300 or BPS 303<br />
coded-magnet actuator.<br />
**The BNS333 is a 4-wire sensor designed to satisfy PL c per<br />
EN ISO 13849-1, or control Category 1 per EN 954-1. It is not<br />
designed for use with a separate safety controller.<br />
***Available with stainless steel outer jacket. Please consult<br />
factory.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The sealed, compact BNS333 is ideal for use on movable<br />
machine guards in hostile environments. Typical applications<br />
include food processing equipment, chemical processing<br />
equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,<br />
and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.<br />
BPS300 Actuator<br />
BPS303 Actuator***<br />
130
BNS333 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic<br />
Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 4mm (0.16")<br />
“Off”: 14mm (0.55")<br />
Degree of Protection IP65<br />
Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F<br />
Operating Principle Magnetic<br />
Shock Resistance 30g/11ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE<br />
EN ISO 13849-1<br />
EN 954-1<br />
BG-GS-ET-14<br />
*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The<br />
proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Maximum Operating Voltage 24VDC<br />
Maximum <strong>Co</strong>ntinuous 40mA<br />
Current Rating<br />
Maximum Switching<br />
Voltage: 250VAC<br />
Capacity (Power Rating) Current: 5A<br />
(1,250VA)<br />
Type <strong>Co</strong>nnection<br />
Screw terminals<br />
DIMENSIONS & WIRING DETAILS<br />
40<br />
1.57<br />
40<br />
1.57<br />
2<br />
.08<br />
BPS300<br />
ø2<br />
.08<br />
5,3<br />
.49<br />
112<br />
4.40<br />
45<br />
1.77<br />
90°<br />
ø 4,5<br />
.18<br />
14<br />
.55<br />
15<br />
.59<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
2<br />
.08<br />
14<br />
.55<br />
ø2<br />
.08<br />
60<br />
2.36<br />
7,3<br />
.29<br />
ø30<br />
1.18<br />
15<br />
.59<br />
ø 37<br />
1.46<br />
BPS 303 (Ideal for use in the food industry)<br />
5<br />
30<br />
1.18<br />
M20<br />
34,3<br />
1.35<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
24 VDC<br />
40 mA<br />
BNS333-01y<br />
L+<br />
L-<br />
MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE<br />
Actuating directions<br />
131
SERIES BNS16<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-Magnet Sensors<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability<br />
in the most hostile environments.<br />
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple<br />
magnets.<br />
• Satisfy PL c, PL d, or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or Category<br />
1, 3, or 4 to EN 954-1 … when used with appropriate<br />
Schmersal safety controllers.<br />
• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand<br />
mechanical abuse.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most<br />
industrial environments.<br />
• Long-life … no mechanical wear due to non-contact design<br />
• Same mounting as Series AZ16 … ideal alternative in<br />
wet, dirty environments.<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(Actuator ordered separately)<br />
Description<br />
The Series BNS16 coded-magnet sensors are designed for<br />
use as a safety interlock on movable machine guards. Each<br />
sensor set consists of a multiple reed switch unit and a<br />
coded-magnet actuator. The sensor outputs will only change<br />
state in the presence of their matched magnetic field array.<br />
Both switch and magnet assembly are sealed to IP67<br />
(submersible) standards. The unit features the same mounting<br />
dimensions as our popular Series AZ16 keyed safety interlock<br />
switches ... providing an attractive alternative in applications<br />
characterized by alignment problems and/or harsh<br />
environments.<br />
Operation<br />
The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary<br />
portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly<br />
mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When<br />
the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns<br />
with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the<br />
guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not<br />
properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor<br />
output will remain “off.”<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The sealed, compact BNS16 is ideal for use on movable<br />
machine guards in hostile environments or where space is<br />
limited. Typical applications include food processing<br />
equipment, chemical processing equipment, woodworking<br />
machinery, packaging machinery, and articulating robot arm<br />
rest position sensing.<br />
Important Note: Series BNS <strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet sensors are for<br />
use in safety applications only when used with<br />
an electrically compatible safety controller or<br />
safety PLC. (For recommended compatible<br />
SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller,<br />
see selection chart on Page 147.)<br />
Part Number<br />
BNS16 - 12ZD<br />
BNS16 - 12ZU<br />
BNS16 - 12ZV<br />
BNS16 - 12ZR<br />
BNS16 - 12ZL<br />
BNS16 - 12ZLR<br />
BPS16<br />
Actuator Plane<br />
Front cover<br />
Back<br />
Top<br />
Right<br />
Left<br />
Dual actuation - both Left and Right<br />
(2) BPS16 actuators required<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet actuator<br />
Actuating Planes<br />
!<br />
USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY<br />
DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.<br />
132
BNS16 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic<br />
Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 8mm (0.315")<br />
“Off”: 18mm (0.700")<br />
Maximum Switching 5H (in combination with Series AES<br />
Frequency<br />
safety controller)<br />
Degree of Protection IP67 per IEC 60529<br />
Operating Temperature –25°C to +70°C (–13°F to +158°F)<br />
Operating Principle Magnetic<br />
Shock Resistance 30g/11ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards EN 60347-5-3 EN ISO 13849-1<br />
CE EN 954-1<br />
UL<br />
BG-GS-ET-14<br />
CSA<br />
*When no ferromagnetic material is present in vicinity of the sensor<br />
or actuator.<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Maximum <strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating* 100VAC/DC<br />
Maximum <strong>Co</strong>ntinuous 0.4A<br />
Current Rating<br />
Maximum Switching<br />
10VA<br />
Capacity (Power Rating)<br />
Type <strong>Co</strong>nnection<br />
3 removable cable entries<br />
(M20x1.5) give access to screw<br />
terminals with self-lifting clamps<br />
for up to 13AWG (2.5mm 2 )<br />
flexible stranded wire.<br />
*Inductive loads (e.g. contactors, relays, etc.) are to be suppressed<br />
by means of a suitable circuit.<br />
AXIAL TOLERANCE<br />
5<br />
WIRING DETAILS<br />
1 NO<br />
2 NC<br />
BNS16-11ZLR with actuation to right and left<br />
surfaces. Requires two actuators.<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts shown with gate closed<br />
133
SERIES BNS-B20<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-Magnet Sensor with<br />
Safety Door Handle<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple<br />
magnets<br />
• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability<br />
in the most hostile environments.<br />
• Dual-function latch & sensor … integral magnetic holding<br />
latch (with force of 100N).<br />
• Application flexibility … 3-contact design compatible with<br />
35mm, 40mm, and 45mm aluminum profiles<br />
• Long-life … no mechanical wear due to non-contact<br />
design.<br />
• Satisfy PL c , PL d , or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or Category<br />
1, 3, or 4 to EN 954-1 … when used with appropriate<br />
Schmersal safety controllers.<br />
• Easy-to-install … optional M12 x 1 quick disconnect &<br />
LED status indicator in NC circuit<br />
• Application diversity … suitable for hinged & sliding<br />
guards, available for left- or right-hand doors/guards.<br />
• Integral LED … displays switch status (non-LED models<br />
also available).<br />
Description<br />
The Series BNS-B20 is designed for use as a combination<br />
door handle and safety interlock switch for use on light to<br />
medium weight hinged and sliding machine guards. Each<br />
unit consists of a door handle assembly equipped with two<br />
multiple reed switch arrays and coded magnet actuators. In<br />
addition, the unit features two latching magnets that attract<br />
pole pieces in the sensor unit—providing a holding force of<br />
approximately 100 Newtons.<br />
The reed switches will only close in the presence of their<br />
matched magnetic field array … thus enabling machine<br />
operation. Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed<br />
to IP67 standards. Their tamper-resistant design prevents<br />
bypassing with simple magnets. The unit also features an<br />
LED display of switch status and an optional M12x1 quickconnect<br />
for ease of wiring and installation.<br />
Operation<br />
The unit consists of two components … the door handle unit<br />
and the sensor unit. The sensor unit is typically mounted to<br />
the stationary portion of the guard structure, with the codedmagnet/handle<br />
assembly mounted to the movable element of<br />
the machine guard.<br />
When the guard is closed, the matched magnetic fields align<br />
with the reed switch arrays, closing the switches and enabling<br />
machine operation. When the guard is open, or the magnetic<br />
fields are not properly aligned with their reed switch arrays,<br />
the sensor output will remain “off.”<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The sealed low-profile, ergonomic door handle system is ideal<br />
for use on movable machine guards in hostile environments.<br />
The absence of protruding elements eliminate/reduce risk of<br />
injury and unintentional opening of the guard. Typical applications<br />
include food processing equipment, chemical processing<br />
equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,<br />
and printing equipment.<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS & ACCESSORIES*<br />
(Please order sensor, actuator-door handle unit and<br />
optional connector separately)<br />
Part Number Description Termination<br />
BNS-B20-12ZG-L<br />
BNS-B20-12ZG-R<br />
BNS-B20-12ZG-H<br />
BNS-B20-12ZG-ST-L<br />
BNS-B20-12ZG-ST-R<br />
BNS-B20-B-01<br />
Sensor unit for left-hand<br />
hinged door<br />
Sensor unit for right-hand<br />
hinged door<br />
Sensor unit for both rightand<br />
left-hand hinged door<br />
Sensor unit for left-hand<br />
hinged door<br />
Sensor unit for right-hand<br />
hinged door<br />
Actuator-door handle unit<br />
Note: Sensor unit is also available for ASI Safety-at-Work bus<br />
systems. Please add suffix “-AS” to sensor part number.<br />
** 3, 5, and 10 meter cable lengths available on request;<br />
add suffix “-XXm”<br />
1 meter of<br />
bottom-mounted<br />
cable**<br />
1 meter of<br />
rear-mounted<br />
cable**<br />
Bottom-mounted<br />
M12 conncetor<br />
(M12x1, 8-pin)<br />
see page 96<br />
N/A<br />
*Important Note: Series BNS <strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet sensors are for<br />
use in safety applications only when used with<br />
an electrically compatible safety controller or<br />
safety PLC. (For recommended compatible<br />
SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller,<br />
see selection chart on Page 147.)<br />
!<br />
USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY<br />
DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.<br />
136
SERIES BNS-B20 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic<br />
Operating Principle Magnetic<br />
Maximum Sensing Gap<br />
(Sar) 22mm<br />
(Sao) 0mm<br />
Protection Class<br />
IP67<br />
Ambient Operating –25°C to +70°C<br />
Temperature<br />
Maximum Storage –25°C to +70°C<br />
Temperature<br />
Switching Frequency 5 Hz<br />
Resistance to Shock 30g/11ms<br />
Resistance to Vibration 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
Max. door/guard weight Hinged guard: 5Kg<br />
Sliding guard: 3Kg<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 60947-5-3 EN ISO 13849-1<br />
BG-GS-ET-14 EN 954-1<br />
UL<br />
CE<br />
CSA<br />
Maximum Latching Force Approx. 100N (22 lbs.)<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category Up to PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, or<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 per EN 954-1 when<br />
used with appropriate SCHMERSAL<br />
Series AES safety controller<br />
<strong>Co</strong>mpatible Extrusion 35mm, 40mm, 45mm<br />
Frames<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Maximum Switching Voltage 24 VDC<br />
Maximum Switching Current 10mA<br />
Maximum Switching Capacity 240mW<br />
Indication of Switching LED (Illuminated when guard<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ndition<br />
is closed)<br />
Termination M12x1 or cable (LiYY 6 x 0.25mm 2 )<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration 1 N.O. & 2 N.C.<br />
(LED in N.C. circuit)<br />
Note: Available in “ASI Safety-at-Work” configuration.<br />
WIRING DETAILS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts shown<br />
with gate closed<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
PIN configuration M12, 8 pins<br />
Note: Loads with high switch-on or switch-off voltage<br />
spikes must be suppressed by an appropriate<br />
protective circuit.<br />
5<br />
137
SERIES CSS 180<br />
Pulse-Echo Based<br />
Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Sensor<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.<br />
• Sealed for moisture protection … ideal for most hostile<br />
environments.<br />
• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor and<br />
actuator required for operation.<br />
• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easy<br />
installation and troubleshooting.<br />
• Integral self-monitoring … satisfy requirements of PL e<br />
per EN ISO 13849-1, or <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 per EN 954-1.<br />
*See note below.<br />
• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 16 devices, max<br />
200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety<br />
performance level.<br />
• Dual PNP 500mA safety outputs … for application<br />
versatility.<br />
AVAILABLE CSS180 MODELS<br />
Description<br />
The CSS 180 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is<br />
designed for application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring<br />
the position of movable safety guards. In this application<br />
the safety sensor monitors the closed position of hinged,<br />
sliding or removable guards with the aid of a coded actuator.<br />
The CSS 180 Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity<br />
devices with defined behavior under fault conditions<br />
according to EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M<br />
(self-monitoring).<br />
Operation<br />
The CSS 180 Safety Sensor and CST 180 actuator are a<br />
matched pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the<br />
sensor excites the actuator at a predetermined resonant<br />
frequency and the reads back the actuator oscillation. The<br />
sensor evaluates the actuator frequency and its distance to<br />
the actuator.<br />
Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard<br />
by the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.<br />
The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit<br />
proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up<br />
to 500 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the<br />
monitoring of the safety outputs, up to 16 CSS 180 Safety<br />
Sensors can be wired in series without detriment to the<br />
Safety Performance Level/control category (PL e per EN ISO<br />
13849-1, control category 4 per EN 954-1).<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable<br />
machine guards where multiple guard monitoring on a<br />
machine is required, and/or where hostile environments<br />
exist. Typical applications include printing machinery, textile<br />
machinery, paper converting equipment, material handling<br />
systems, packaging machinery, chemical processing equipment,<br />
and woodworking machinery.<br />
Part Number<br />
CSS-8-180-2P-E-L<br />
CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-L<br />
CSS-8-180-2P-Y-L<br />
CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-L<br />
CSS-8-180-2P-E-LST<br />
CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-LST<br />
CSS-8-180-2P-Y-LST<br />
CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-LST<br />
Description<br />
End or single device with pre-wired<br />
cable<br />
End or single device with diagnostic<br />
output, pre-wired cable<br />
Series device with double pre-wired<br />
cables<br />
Series device with diagnostic output,<br />
pre-wired cables<br />
End or single device, pre-wired cable<br />
with M12x1 4 pole connection<br />
End or single device with diagnostic<br />
output, pre-wired cable with M12x1 5<br />
pole connection<br />
Series device, two pre-wired cables<br />
with M12x1 4 pole connections<br />
Series device with diagnostic output,<br />
two pre-wired cables with M12x1 8<br />
pole connections<br />
ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
CST-180-1<br />
Actuator<br />
CST-180-2<br />
Actuator<br />
CSA-M-1<br />
Magnetic latch<br />
H-18 Mounting clamp<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Module Requirements<br />
Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor<br />
outputs. See page 320 for recommended SCHMERSAL<br />
safety control modules.<br />
*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset<br />
function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as<br />
well as increased output current requirements.<br />
138
SERIES CSS 180 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Switching Distance 8mm (Nominal)<br />
7.0mm to 9.5mm (Maximum)<br />
Operating Temperature –25°C to +55°C<br />
Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C<br />
Hysteresis<br />
≤ 0.5mm<br />
Repeatability<br />
≤ 0.2mm<br />
Response Time<br />
≤ 30ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
Shock Resistance 30g/11ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE BG<br />
EN 60947-5-3 UL<br />
EN 954-1 CSA<br />
IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Mode of Operation Inductive<br />
Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%<br />
Rated Operating Current 1.0A<br />
No Load Current 0.05A<br />
Residual Current<br />
≤ 0.5mA<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
0.8kV<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDC<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
(2) PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Safety Output Current 0.5A per output<br />
Safety Output Max. 0.5V<br />
Voltage Drop<br />
Signaling Output<br />
PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Signaling Output<br />
Max. 4V below rated operating<br />
Operating Voltage voltage<br />
Signaling Output Max. 0.05A<br />
Operating Current<br />
Type Interconnection 4x0.5mm 2 , 5x0.34mm 2 , or<br />
Cable 7x0.25mm 2<br />
NOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please see<br />
page 182 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Sensors” section.<br />
5<br />
139
SERIES CSS 34<br />
Description<br />
The CSS 34 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is designed for<br />
application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring the position<br />
of movable safety guards. In this application the safety sensor<br />
monitors the closed position of hinged, sliding or removable<br />
guards with the aid of a coded actuator.<br />
The CSS 34 Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity<br />
devices with defined behavior under fault conditions according to<br />
EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M (self-monitoring).<br />
The CSS 34 Safety Sensor and CST 34 actuator are a matched<br />
pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the sensor excites<br />
the actuator at a predetermined resonant frequency and the reads<br />
back the actuator oscillation. The sensor evaluates the actuator<br />
frequency and its distance to the actuator.<br />
Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard by<br />
the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.<br />
The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit<br />
proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up to<br />
250 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the monitoring<br />
of the safety outputs, up to 31 CSS 34 Safety Sensors can<br />
be wired in series without detriment to the safety performance<br />
level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, control category<br />
4 per EN 954-1).<br />
The models CSS34 F0/F1 have an integrated feedback option<br />
that control positive-guided contactors/relays without the need for<br />
a downstream safety control module. The integrated start/restart<br />
interlock feature provides an input for a reset pushbutton with<br />
edge detection, or without edge detection (suitable for automatic<br />
reset). The CSS34F0/F1 models are suitable as individual or<br />
end devices in a series wired chain of standard CSS34 sensors<br />
to replace a safety control module. The CSS34F0/F1 system,<br />
comprising the sensor, monitored relay and the reset switch,<br />
meets the requirements of PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, or <strong>Co</strong>ntrol<br />
Category 4 per EN954-1, provided that positive guided contactors/relays<br />
are used.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable machine<br />
guards where multiple guard monitoring on a machine is required,<br />
and/or where hostile environments exist. Typical applications<br />
include printing machinery, textile machinery, paper converting<br />
equipment, material handling systems, packaging<br />
140<br />
machinery, chemical processing equipment, and woodworking<br />
machinery.<br />
Pulse-Echo Based <strong>Co</strong>mpact<br />
Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Sensor<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.<br />
• Four different actuating surfaces … for a variety of<br />
mounting options.<br />
• Sealed for moisture protection … ideal for most hostile<br />
environments. Meets both IP65 and IP67 requirements.<br />
• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor and<br />
actuator required for operation.<br />
• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easy<br />
installation and troubleshooting.<br />
• Integral self-monitoring (CSS34), feedback and reset<br />
functions (CSS34F0/F1) … satisfy requirements of PL e per<br />
EN ISO 13849-1, or <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 per EN 954-1, and<br />
may remove need for safety control module. *See note below.<br />
• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, max<br />
200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety<br />
performance level.<br />
• Dual PNP 500mA safety outputs … for application<br />
versatility.<br />
• Integrated mounting plate included … allows for easy<br />
and accurate alignment of sensor and actuator.<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
(Actuators Ordered Separately)<br />
Model Number<br />
Standard Version<br />
Description<br />
CSS12-34-VDML*<br />
CSS12-34-VDMST*<br />
CSS14-34-SDML*<br />
CSS14-34-SDMST*<br />
F0<br />
Top Actuating surface with diagnostic output<br />
Top Actuating surface with diagnostic<br />
output, M12 Cable connector<br />
Side Actuation surface with diagnostic output<br />
Side Actuation surface with diagnostic<br />
output, M12 Cable connector<br />
Integrated Feedback, without edge<br />
detection, auto-reset<br />
CSS12-34F0-VDMST Top Actuating surface with diagnostic output,<br />
M12 Cable connector<br />
CSS14-34F0-SDMST Side Actuation surface with diagnostic<br />
output, M12 Cable connector<br />
F1<br />
Integrated Feedback, with edge<br />
detection of reset button, manual reset<br />
CSS12-34F1-VDMST Top Actuating surface with diagnostic<br />
output, M12 Cable connector<br />
CSS14-34F1-SDMST Side Actuation surface with diagnostic<br />
output, M12 Cable connector<br />
Note: See page 94 for M12, 9 pin connector cables.<br />
Sensors are also available with a serial diagnostic output for<br />
use with various field bus protocols network. Please see page<br />
204 for SD Gateways.<br />
Model Number<br />
CST34-S-1<br />
CST34-V-1<br />
AVAILABLE ACTUATORS<br />
Side surface actuator<br />
Top surface actuator<br />
Description<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Module Requirements<br />
Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor<br />
outputs. See page 320 for recommended SCHMERSAL<br />
safety control modules.<br />
*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset<br />
function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as<br />
well as increased output current requirements.
SERIES CSS 34 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic<br />
Degree of Protection IP65 and IP67<br />
Switching Distance Top (V) 12mm Nominal<br />
10-15mm (Maximum)<br />
Side (S) 14mm Nominal<br />
12-17mm (Maximum)<br />
Operating Temperature –25°C to +70°C<br />
Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C<br />
Hysteresis<br />
1mm<br />
Repeatability<br />
≤ 0.5mm<br />
Response Time<br />
≤ 30ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
Shock Resistance 30g/11ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE BG<br />
EN 60947-5-3 UL<br />
EN 954-1 CSA<br />
IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Mode of Operation Inductive<br />
Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%<br />
Rated Operating Current 0.6A<br />
No Load Current 0.1A<br />
Residual Current<br />
≤ 0.5mA<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
1 kV<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDC<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
(2) PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Safety Output Current 0.25A per output<br />
Safety Output Max. 0.5V<br />
Voltage Drop<br />
Signaling Output<br />
PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Signaling Output<br />
Max. 4V below rated operating<br />
Operating Voltage voltage<br />
Signaling Output Max. 0.05A<br />
Operating Current<br />
Interconnection Cable: Y-UL2517/8xAWG22 (8x0.35mm 2 ), 2m<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector:<br />
M12x1, 8 pin quick connect<br />
NOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please see<br />
page 188 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Sensors” section.<br />
5<br />
141
SERIES CSS 30S<br />
Stainless Steel Pulse-Echo Based<br />
Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Sensor<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Stainless Steel Housing … ideal for hygienic applications.<br />
• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.<br />
• IP69K rated housing (to DIN 40050-9) … suitable for high<br />
pressure, high temperature wash downs.<br />
• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor and<br />
actuator required for operation.<br />
• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easy<br />
installation and troubleshooting.<br />
• Integral self-monitoring … satisfy requirements of PL e per<br />
EN ISO 13849-1, or <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 per EN 954-1.<br />
*See note below.<br />
• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, max<br />
200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety<br />
performance level.<br />
• Dual PNP 250mA safety outputs … for application<br />
versatility.<br />
Description<br />
The CSS 30S non-contact, electronic safety sensor is<br />
designed for application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring<br />
the position of movable safety guards. In this application<br />
the safety sensor monitors the closed position of hinged,<br />
sliding or removable guards with the aid of a coded actuator.<br />
The CSS 30S Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity<br />
devices with defined behavior under fault conditions<br />
according to EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M<br />
(self-monitoring).<br />
Operation<br />
The CSS 30S Safety Sensor and CST 30S-1 actuator are a<br />
matched pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the<br />
sensor excites the actuator at a predetermined resonant<br />
frequency and the reads back the actuator oscillation. The<br />
sensor evaluates the actuator frequency and its distance to<br />
the actuator.<br />
Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard<br />
by the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.<br />
The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit<br />
proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up<br />
to 250 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the<br />
monitoring of the safety outputs, up to 31 CSS 30S Safety<br />
Sensors can be wired in series without detriment to the safety<br />
performance level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1,<br />
control category 4 per EN 954-1).<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
(Accessories Ordered Separately)<br />
Model Number<br />
Description<br />
CSS 11-30-SD-M-ST<br />
CSS 11-30S-D-M-ST<br />
CST 30S-1<br />
H 30<br />
2 PNP safety outputs, 1 serial diagnostic<br />
output<br />
2 PNP safety outputs, 1 signalling output<br />
Actuator<br />
Mounting clamp<br />
Note: For M12, 8 pin connection cables, see page 94.<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Module Requirements<br />
Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor<br />
outputs. See page 320 for the SCHMERSAL safety<br />
control modules recommended for this application.<br />
*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset<br />
function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as<br />
well as increased output current requirements.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable<br />
machine guards where multiple guard monitoring on a<br />
machine is required, and/or where hostile environments<br />
exist. Typical applications include food processing machinery,<br />
pharmaceutical and medical applications, material handling<br />
systems, packaging machinery, chemical processing equipment,<br />
and marine and outdoor applications.<br />
142
SERIES CSS 30S TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Stainless Steel<br />
Degree of Protection IP67 to IEC/EN 60529<br />
IP69K to DIN 40050-9<br />
Switching Distance 11mm<br />
Operating Temperature –25°C to +65°C<br />
Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C<br />
Hysteresis<br />
< 2mm<br />
Repeatability<br />
< 1mm<br />
Response Time<br />
< 60ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
Shock Resistance 30g/11ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE UL<br />
IEC 60947-5-3 CSA<br />
IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1<br />
TUV EN 954-1<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Mode of Operation Inductive<br />
Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%<br />
Rated Operating Current 0.6A<br />
No Load Current 0.1A<br />
Residual Current<br />
≤ 0.5mA<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
0.8kV<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDC<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
(2) PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Safety Output Current 0.25A per output<br />
Safety Output Max. 0.5V<br />
Voltage Drop<br />
Signaling Output<br />
PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Signaling Output min. (Ue – 5 V)<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
Signaling Output Max. 0.05A<br />
Operating Current<br />
NOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please see<br />
page 194 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Sensors” section.<br />
5<br />
143
SERIES CSS 16<br />
Pulse-Echo Based<br />
Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Sensor<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.<br />
• Sealed for moisture protection … ideal for most hostile<br />
environments.<br />
• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor and<br />
actuator required for operation.<br />
• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easy<br />
installation and troubleshooting.<br />
• Integral self-monitoring … satisfy requirements of PL e per<br />
EN ISO 13849-1, or <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 per EN 954-1.<br />
*See note below.<br />
• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 16 devices, max<br />
200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety<br />
performance level.<br />
• Dual PNP 500mA safety outputs … for application<br />
versatility.<br />
• Same mounting dimensions as Series AZ16 … ideal<br />
alternative in applications with alignment problems or harsh<br />
environments.<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
(Accessories Ordered Separately)<br />
Model Number<br />
Description<br />
Description<br />
The CSS 16 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is designed<br />
for application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring the<br />
position of movable safety guards. In this application the safety<br />
sensor monitors the closed position of hinged, sliding or<br />
removable guards with the aid of a coded actuator.<br />
The CSS 16 Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity<br />
devices with defined behavior under fault conditions<br />
according to EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M<br />
(self-monitoring).<br />
Operation<br />
The CSS 16 Safety Sensor and CST 16-1 actuator are a<br />
matched pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the<br />
sensor excites the actuator at a predetermined resonant<br />
frequency and the reads back the actuator oscillation. The<br />
sensor evaluates the actuator frequency and its distance to<br />
the actuator.<br />
Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard<br />
by the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.<br />
The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit<br />
proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up<br />
to 500 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the<br />
monitoring of the safety outputs, up to 16 CSS 16 Safety<br />
Sensors can be wired in series without detriment to the safety<br />
performance level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1,<br />
or control category 4 per EN 954-1).<br />
CSS-8-16-2P-E-L<br />
CSS-8-16-2P+D-E-L<br />
CSS-8-16-2P-Y-L<br />
CSS-8-16-2P+D-M-L<br />
CST-16-1<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Module Requirements<br />
Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor<br />
outputs. See page 320 for the SCHMERSAL safety<br />
control modules recommended for this application.<br />
*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset<br />
function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as<br />
well as increased output current requirements.<br />
CST16-1 Actuator<br />
End or single device with pre-wired cable<br />
End or single device with diagnostic<br />
output, pre-wired cable<br />
Series device with double pre-wired cable<br />
Series device with diagnostic output,<br />
pre-wired cable<br />
Actuator<br />
Sensors available with M12 cable connector – Add ST after L in<br />
catalog number. See page 94 for M12 connector cables (4-, 5-, or<br />
8-pin).<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable<br />
machine guards where multiple guard monitoring on a<br />
machine is required, and/or where hostile environments<br />
exist. Typical applications include printing machinery, textile<br />
machinery, paper converting equipment, material handling<br />
systems, packaging machinery, chemical processing equipment,<br />
and woodworking machinery.<br />
144
SERIES CSS 16 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic<br />
Degree of Protection IP67/IP65<br />
Switching Distance 8mm (Nominal)<br />
7.0mm to 11mm (Maximum)<br />
Operating Temperature –25°C to +55°C for max. output<br />
current ≤ 500mA/output<br />
–25°C to +65°C for output current<br />
≤ 200mA/output<br />
–25°C to +70°C for output current<br />
≤ 100mA/output<br />
Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C<br />
Hysteresis<br />
max. 1mm<br />
Repeatability<br />
< 0.5mm<br />
Response Time<br />
≤ 30ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
Shock Resistance 30g/11ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE BG<br />
IEC 61508 UL<br />
IEC 60947-5-3 CSA<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 EN 954-1<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Mode of Operation Inductive<br />
Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%<br />
Rated Operating Current 1.1A<br />
No Load Current 0.05A<br />
Residual Current<br />
≤ 0.5mA<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
0.8kV<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDC<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
(2) PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Safety Output Current 0.5A per output<br />
Safety Output Max. 0.5V<br />
Voltage Drop<br />
Signaling Output<br />
PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Signaling Output<br />
Max. 4V below rated operating<br />
Operating Voltage voltage<br />
Signaling Output Max. 0.05A<br />
Operating Current<br />
Type Interconnection 4x0.5mm 2 , 5x0.34mm 2 , or<br />
Cable 7x0.25mm 2<br />
NOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please see<br />
page 198 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Sensors” section.<br />
5<br />
145
146<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design
BNS SERIES - COMPATIBLE SERIES AES SAFETY CONTROLLERS<br />
SELECTION CHART<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntroller<br />
Suitable for use with<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-Magnet Sensor<br />
Part Numbers below<br />
BNS250...<br />
BNS33...<br />
BNS303...<br />
BNS250...<br />
BNS33...<br />
BNS303...<br />
BNS36<br />
BNS260<br />
}<br />
}<br />
}<br />
12Z(G)<br />
11Z(G)<br />
11Z(G)<br />
02Z(G)<br />
BNS16-12Z<br />
BNS33-12Z(G)-2187<br />
BNS-B20-12Z(G)<br />
BNS33S-12Z(G)<br />
Max. Number<br />
of Directly-<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnected<br />
BNS Series<br />
Sensors<br />
(without “daisy<br />
chaining”)<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntroller<br />
Part Number<br />
(and available supply voltages)<br />
Number<br />
of Safety<br />
Outputs<br />
(Enabling<br />
Paths)<br />
Max.<br />
Achievable<br />
Safety<br />
Rating per<br />
EN 954-1<br />
(ISO-13849-1)<br />
Type of<br />
Reset<br />
Feedback<br />
Circuit<br />
1 AES1102 (24VAC, 24VDC, 110VAC) 1 1 (b) Automatic No<br />
2 AES1112 (24VAC, 24VDC, 110VAC) 1 1 (b) Automatic No<br />
1 AES1135 (24VDC)<br />
1 1/3* (b/d)* Automatic No<br />
2 AES1165 (24VDC)<br />
1 1/3* (b/d)* Automatic No<br />
1 AES1235 (24VDC)<br />
2 3 (d) Automatic Yes<br />
2 AES1265 (24VDC)<br />
2 3 (d) Automatic Yes<br />
1 AES2135 (24-230V AC/DC)<br />
1 1/3* (b/d)* Automatic No<br />
1 AES2335 (24-230V AC/DC)<br />
3 3 (d) Automatic Yes<br />
1 SRB211AN (24VAC/DC) 2 Stop Cat. 0 4 (e) Automatic Yes<br />
1 Stop Cat. 1<br />
or Manual<br />
1 AES1337 (24VAC/DC)<br />
3 4 (e) Automatic Yes<br />
or Manual<br />
6 AES2285<br />
2<br />
3 (d) Automatic Yes<br />
SRB207AN-230V (48-240VAC)<br />
or Manual<br />
5<br />
*Category 3 (Performance Level d) when safety controller is directly connect to load.<br />
147
AES 1102/AES 1112<br />
BNS <strong>Co</strong>mpatible <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers<br />
Features<br />
• PL c per EN ISO 13849-1,<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 1 to EN 954-1<br />
• 1 enabling path<br />
• Monitoring of 1 or a number of guard<br />
devices<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nnection of BNS .. -12z magnetic safety<br />
sensors with 1 NO and 2 NC contacts<br />
• LED function indicators<br />
• Available for various operational voltages<br />
Dimensions<br />
22.5 x 100 x 121 mm<br />
Model<br />
Designation<br />
AES 1102-24VDC<br />
AES 1102-24VAC<br />
AES 1102-42VAC<br />
AES 1102-110VAC<br />
AES 1102-230VAC<br />
AES 1112-24VDC<br />
AES 1112-24VAC<br />
AES 1112-42VAC<br />
AES 1112-110VAC<br />
AES 1112-230VAC<br />
Approvals BG UL CSA<br />
148
AES 1102/AES 1112<br />
Typical<br />
Application<br />
Typical<br />
Wiring<br />
Diagram<br />
U<br />
e<br />
YE GN YE GN YE GN<br />
BN WH BN WH BN WH<br />
PK GY PK GY PK GY<br />
L1<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
S22<br />
S32<br />
S14 C 13<br />
24 VDC<br />
K3<br />
K2<br />
K1<br />
AES 1102<br />
5<br />
14<br />
K4<br />
N<br />
3 M<br />
Application<br />
Notes<br />
• AES to secure a number of guard<br />
devices using series-parallel circuits<br />
for PL c /Category 1 to EN ISO<br />
13849-1, or <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 1 to<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
• Only suitable for the connection of<br />
magnetic safety sensors.<br />
• Monitoring a number of guard<br />
devices using BNS 33..-12z-2187<br />
range magnetic safety sensors with<br />
isolated contacts.<br />
• The wiring diagram is with guard<br />
devices closed and shows the deenergized<br />
condition.<br />
• Use with multiple “daisy-chained”<br />
inputs does not permit identification<br />
of which guard/coded-magnet sensor<br />
is in an open/fault condition.<br />
• Monitoring one guard device using<br />
a BNS .. -12z Series coded-magnet<br />
safety sensor.<br />
149
AES 1135/AES 1165<br />
BNS <strong>Co</strong>mpatible Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers<br />
Features<br />
• PL d per EN ISO 13849-1,<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 3 to EN 954-1<br />
• 1 enabling circuit<br />
• Enable delay time can be modified<br />
• Monitoring of mechanical position switches,<br />
safety switches, solenoid interlocks, coded<br />
magnet sensors or E-stops<br />
• Can be used as emergency-stop controller<br />
for Category 0 to EN 60204-1<br />
• Monitoring for short-circuit between<br />
connections with NO-NC contact<br />
combination<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nnection of input expansion modules<br />
possible<br />
Dimensions<br />
22.5 x 100 x 121 mm<br />
Model<br />
Designation<br />
AES 1135-24VDC<br />
AES 1165-24VDC<br />
Function<br />
Table<br />
Additional semiconductor<br />
output Y<br />
Function of output Y<br />
Switching <strong>Co</strong>ndition<br />
AES 1135 Y1 Enable Enable circuit closed<br />
Y2 No enable Enable circuit open<br />
Approvals BG UL CSA<br />
150
AES 1135/AES 1165<br />
Typical<br />
Applications<br />
Typical<br />
Wiring<br />
Diagram<br />
5<br />
Application<br />
Notes<br />
• AES to achieve up to PL d per EN<br />
ISO 13849-1, or <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 3<br />
per EN 954-1.<br />
• Monitoring a sliding, hinged or<br />
removable guard device using<br />
a solenoid interlock.<br />
• Extension of Enable Delay Time<br />
The enable delay time can be<br />
increased from 0.1 s to 1 s by<br />
changing the position of a jumper<br />
link connection under the cover of<br />
the unit.<br />
• Monitor 2 NC <strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
Jumper A1 (24 VDC) to X1<br />
• The NC contact must have positive<br />
opening function when the guard<br />
device is opened.<br />
• The wiring diagram is with guard<br />
device closed and shows the<br />
de-energized condition.<br />
151
AES 1235/AES 1265<br />
BNS <strong>Co</strong>mpatible Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers<br />
Dimensions<br />
ISD<br />
22.5 x 100 x 121 mm<br />
The following faults are recognized by the safety<br />
controller and indicated by means of ISD<br />
• Failure of door contacts to open or close<br />
• Short-circuits on or between the switch connections<br />
• Interruption of the switch connections<br />
• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or<br />
drop-out<br />
• Faults on the input circuits or on the relay control<br />
of the guard door monitor<br />
Features<br />
• PL d per EN ISO 13849-1,<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 3 to EN 954-1<br />
• 2 enabling circuits<br />
• Enable delay time can be modified<br />
• Monitoring of mechanical position switches,<br />
safety switches, solenoid interlocks, coded<br />
magnet sensors or E-stops<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntact combination can be changed from<br />
NO-NC to NC-NC<br />
• Can be used as emergency-stop controller<br />
for Stop Category 0 to EN 60204-1<br />
• Monitoring for short-circuit between<br />
connections with NO-NC contact<br />
combination<br />
• ISD Integral System Diagnostics<br />
• 2 short-circuit proof additional transistor<br />
outputs<br />
• Feedback circuit to monitor external relays<br />
• Start function<br />
• Operational voltage 24 VDC<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nnection of input expansion modules<br />
possible<br />
• Additional contact by means of output<br />
expansion modules<br />
Model<br />
Designation<br />
AES 1235-24VDC<br />
AES 1265-24VDC<br />
Function<br />
Table<br />
Additional semiconductor<br />
output Y<br />
Function of output Y<br />
Switching <strong>Co</strong>ndition<br />
AES 1235 Y1 Authorized operation Enabling paths closed<br />
Y2 No authorized operation Enabling paths open<br />
AES 1265 Y1 Authorized operation Enabling paths closed<br />
Y2 Fault Enabling paths open<br />
Approvals BG UL CSA<br />
152
AES 1235/AES 1265<br />
Typical<br />
Applications<br />
Typical<br />
Wiring<br />
Diagram<br />
L1<br />
0V<br />
+24 VDC<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
Y1<br />
X1<br />
13<br />
23<br />
max. 100mA<br />
K1<br />
K2<br />
AES 1235<br />
AES 1236<br />
S13<br />
S14 S21 S22<br />
14<br />
24<br />
0V<br />
K3<br />
SK3<br />
K4<br />
3<br />
M<br />
5<br />
Application<br />
Notes<br />
• This model achieves PL d per EN<br />
ISO 13849-1, or <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 3<br />
to EN 954-1.<br />
• Monitoring a sliding, hinged or<br />
removable guard device, each<br />
using a coded magnet sensor A.<br />
• The wiring diagram is with guard<br />
devices closed and shows the deenergized<br />
condition.<br />
• Start Pushbutton s<br />
A start pushbutton (NO) can optionally<br />
be connected to the inputs in<br />
the feedback circuit. With the guard<br />
device closed, the enabling circuits<br />
are then not closed until the start<br />
pushbutton has been operated.<br />
• Feedback Circuit<br />
A feedback circuit is shown connected<br />
in the wiring diagram. If neither<br />
a start push button nor feedback<br />
circuit is used, input X1 must<br />
be connected to 24 VDC (A1).<br />
• Extension of Enable Delay Time<br />
The enable delay time can be<br />
increased from 0.1 s to 1 s by<br />
changing the position of a jumper<br />
link connection under the cover of<br />
the unit.<br />
• Modification for 2 NC <strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
The safety motoring module can be<br />
modified to monitor two NC contacts<br />
by bridging terminals A1 and<br />
X2. The cross-wire monitoring<br />
between the connections<br />
then becomes inoperative.<br />
153
AES 2135<br />
BNS <strong>Co</strong>mpatible Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers<br />
Features<br />
• PL d per EN ISO 13849-1,<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 3 to EN 954-1<br />
• 1 enabling circuit<br />
• Enable delay time can be modified<br />
• Monitoring of mechanical position switches,<br />
safety switches, solenoid interlocks, coded<br />
magnet sensors or E-stops<br />
• Can be changed from NO-NC to NC-NC<br />
contact combination<br />
• Can be used as emergency-stop controller<br />
for Category 0 to EN 60204-1<br />
• Monitoring for short-circuit between<br />
connections with NO-NC contact<br />
combination<br />
• ISD Integral System Diagnostics<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nnection of input expansion modules<br />
possible<br />
• 2 semiconductor auxiliary outputs (nonsafety)<br />
Dimensions<br />
45 x 100 x 121 mm<br />
ISD<br />
The following faults are recognized by the safety<br />
controller and indicated by means of ISD<br />
• Failure of door contacts to open or close<br />
• Short-circuits on or between the switch connections<br />
• Interruption of the switch connections<br />
• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or<br />
drop-out<br />
• Faults on the input circuits or on the relay control<br />
of the guard door monitor<br />
Model<br />
Designation<br />
AES 2135 24-230V AC/DC<br />
Function<br />
Table<br />
Additional semiconductor<br />
output Y<br />
Function of output Y<br />
Switching <strong>Co</strong>ndition<br />
AES 2135 Y1 Enable Enable circuit closed<br />
Y2 No enable Enable circuit open<br />
Approvals BG UL CSA<br />
154
AES 2135<br />
Typical<br />
Applications<br />
Typical<br />
Wiring<br />
Diagram<br />
5<br />
Application<br />
Notes<br />
• AES to achieve PL d per EN ISO<br />
13849-1, or <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 3 to<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
• Monitoring a sliding, hinged or<br />
removable guard device, each<br />
using a safety coded magnet A.<br />
• The wiring diagram is with<br />
guard devices closed and<br />
shows the de-energized<br />
condition.<br />
• Modification for 2 NC <strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
The controller can be modified to<br />
monitor two normally closed contacts<br />
by jumping between the terminals<br />
X3 and X4. The short circuit<br />
monitoring between connections<br />
then becomes inoperative.<br />
• Extension of Enable Delay Time<br />
The enable delay time can be<br />
increased from 0.1 s to 1 s by<br />
jumping between the terminals<br />
X7 and X8.<br />
155
AES 2335<br />
BNS <strong>Co</strong>mpatible Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers<br />
Dimensions<br />
ISD<br />
45 x 100 x 121 mm<br />
The following faults are recognized by the safety<br />
controller and indicated by means of ISD<br />
• Failure of door contacts to open or close<br />
• Short-circuits on or between the switch connections<br />
• Interruption of the switch connections<br />
• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or<br />
drop-out<br />
• Faults on the input circuits or on the relay control<br />
of the guard door monitor<br />
• Failure of or functional fault on the safety controller<br />
Features<br />
• PL d per EN ISO 13849-1,<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 3 to EN 954-1<br />
• 3 enabling circuits<br />
• Enable delay time can be modified<br />
• Monitoring of mechanical position switches,<br />
safety switches, solenoid interlocks, coded<br />
magnet sensors or E-stops<br />
• NO-NC contact combination can be<br />
connected<br />
• Can be used as emergency-stop controller<br />
for Category 0 to EN 60204-1<br />
• Monitoring for short-circuit between<br />
connections<br />
• ISD Integral System Diagnostics<br />
• Available for various operational voltages<br />
• Short-circuit proof additional transistor<br />
outputs<br />
• Feedback circuit to monitor external relays<br />
• Start function<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nnection of input expansion modules<br />
possible<br />
• Additional contact by means of output<br />
expansion modules<br />
Model<br />
Designation<br />
AES 2335 24-230V AC/DC<br />
Function<br />
Table<br />
Additional semiconductor<br />
output Y<br />
Function of output Y<br />
Switching <strong>Co</strong>ndition<br />
AES 2335 Y1 High (+24V) Enable circuit closed<br />
Y2 High (+24V) Enable circuit open<br />
Approvals BG UL CSA<br />
156
AES 2335<br />
Typical<br />
Applications<br />
Typical<br />
Wiring<br />
Diagram<br />
5<br />
Application<br />
Notes<br />
• This model achieves PL d per EN<br />
ISO 13849-1, or <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 3<br />
to EN 954-1.<br />
• Monitoring a sliding, hinged or<br />
removable guard device.<br />
• The wiring diagram is with guard<br />
device closed and shows the deenergized<br />
condition.<br />
• Start Pushbutton s<br />
A start pushbutton (NO) can optionally<br />
be connected to the inputs in<br />
the feedback circuit. With the guard<br />
device closed, the enabling circuits<br />
are then not closed until the start<br />
pushbutton has been operated.<br />
• Feedback Circuit<br />
For this purpose, the positive-drive<br />
contacts of the external contactors<br />
can be connected to input X1-X2. If<br />
neither a start push button nor feedback<br />
circuit are connected, a<br />
jumper connection must be made<br />
between X1 and X2.<br />
• Modification for 2 NC <strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
The controller can be modified to<br />
monitor two normally closed contacts<br />
by jumping between the<br />
terminals X3 and X4. The short<br />
circuit monitoring between connections<br />
then becomes inoperative.<br />
157
AES 1337<br />
BNS <strong>Co</strong>mpatible Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Description<br />
The above “general-purpose” safety controllers are<br />
designed for use with safety devices having Normally-Open<br />
(N.O.) or Normally-Closed (N.C.) outputs. Each is equipped<br />
for connection of one input device in dual-channel configuration.<br />
In addition they feature user-selectable monitoredmanual<br />
or automatic reset, feedback monitoring of positiveguided<br />
controlled loads and cross-short recognition (on<br />
selected models).<br />
Input Voltage<br />
24 VAC/DC<br />
# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Dual-Channel)<br />
Monitored<br />
Monitored <strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration 1 N.O. 1 N.C.<br />
Number & Type Safety Outputs 3 N.O. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Number & Type Auxiliary<br />
1 N.C. 24 VDC<br />
(Non-Safety or Signalling Output)<br />
Typical Input Devices Monitored • E-stops (N.C.)<br />
• Interlock switches (N.C.)<br />
Type of Reset<br />
(Selectable)<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
LED Displays<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards<br />
Stop Category 0<br />
• Monitored-manual<br />
(24 VDC trailing edge)<br />
• Automatic<br />
Yes<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
• K1 (safety relay 1)<br />
• K2 (safety relay 2)<br />
• Ui (voltage beyond internal<br />
fuse)<br />
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
Safety Classification PL e per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 per<br />
EN 945-1<br />
Type Fuse<br />
Selected Features<br />
Hybrid<br />
• Cross-short recognition<br />
• Selectable monitoredmanual<br />
or automatic reset<br />
• Feedback monitoring<br />
Front View<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
Model Number<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
AES 1337<br />
AES 1337<br />
24 V AC/DC<br />
Model AES 1337 shown.<br />
158
AES 1337<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D)<br />
Ambient Operating<br />
Temperature Range<br />
Mechanical Life Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
Mounting<br />
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM<br />
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm<br />
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")<br />
-25°C to +45°C<br />
(-13°F to +113°F)<br />
10 7 switching cycles<br />
230 gm<br />
DIN rail (35mm)<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple<br />
max. 10%<br />
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption 2.4 W (max.), 3.8 VA<br />
Fuse (Input Power)<br />
24 V Internal electronic (hybrid) Fuse F1,<br />
Tripping current > 0.6 A (Resets after<br />
interruption of supply voltage)<br />
Fuse (Safety Outputs)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(Safety Outputs)<br />
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)<br />
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive<br />
(inductive with suitable surge supressor)<br />
Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 100mA<br />
(Auxiliary <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type & Materials AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
Air Clearance &<br />
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections • Self-lifting, plug-in screw terminals<br />
for 13 to 20 AWG<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
5<br />
159
SERIES SRB 211 AN<br />
BNS <strong>Co</strong>mpatible Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Description<br />
The Model SRB 211 AN is a “general purpose” unit<br />
designed for use with safety devices having Normally-Open<br />
and Normally-Closed dry contact switching outputs. It is<br />
equipped for connection of one monitored input device in<br />
dual-channel configuration. In addition it features userselectable<br />
monitored-manual or automatic reset, stop<br />
category 0 & 1 safety outputs, and feedback monitoring<br />
of positive-guided controlled loads.<br />
Input Voltage<br />
24 V AC/DC<br />
# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Dual-Channel)<br />
Monitored<br />
<strong>Co</strong>mpatible Input Device N.O./N.C (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
Number & Type<br />
3 N.O. (1 delayed : 1-30 sec.)<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
(dry contacts)<br />
Number & Type Auxiliary PNP<br />
(Non-Safety or<br />
Signalling Outputs)<br />
Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C./N.O.)<br />
Monitored<br />
• Interlock switches (N.C./N.O.)<br />
Type of Reset<br />
• Monitored-manual<br />
(Selectable)<br />
(24 VDC trailing edge)<br />
• Automatic<br />
Feedback Monitoring Yes<br />
LED Displays<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
• K1 (safety relay 1)<br />
• K2 (safety relay 2)<br />
• K3/4 (safety relay 3 & 4)<br />
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)<br />
• UB (voltage at input terminals)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards<br />
Stop Category<br />
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
0 (2 safety outputs)<br />
1 (1 safety output)<br />
Safety Classification PL e per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 per EN 945-1<br />
Selected Features<br />
• Plug-in screw terminals<br />
• Cross-short recognition<br />
• Stop category 0 & 1<br />
safety outputs<br />
• Selectable trailing edge or<br />
automatic reset<br />
• Resetable electronic fuse<br />
• Feedback monitoring<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
Model Number<br />
SRB 211 AN<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
24 V AC/DC<br />
160
SERIES SRB 211 AN<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D)<br />
Ambient Operating<br />
Temperature Range<br />
Mechanical Life Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
Mounting<br />
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM<br />
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm<br />
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")<br />
-25°C to +45°C<br />
(-13°F to +113°F)<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
255 gm<br />
DIN rail<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple<br />
max. 10%<br />
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz<br />
5.2 W, 7.2 VA (max.), plus signaling<br />
output Y1<br />
Fuse (Input Power) Internal electronic Fuse F1,<br />
Tripping current > 1.5A<br />
(Resets approx. 1 second)<br />
Fuse (Safety Outputs)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(Safety Outputs)<br />
4 A Slow-blow (Recommended)<br />
230 VAC, 4 A Resistive<br />
(inductive with suitable suppressor circuit)<br />
Switching Capacity 24 VDC 100mA<br />
(Auxiliary <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Application Category AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
≤ 40 ms<br />
Drop-out Delay ≤ 50 ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type & AgSnOAgNi, self cleaning, positive-guided<br />
Materials<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections • Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminals<br />
for 13 to 20 AWG<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
5<br />
161
AES 2285/SRB 207 AN BNS <strong>Co</strong>mpatible Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Description<br />
The Model SRB 207 AN is a “general purpose” unit<br />
designed for use with safety devices having Normally-<br />
Open (N.O.) and Normally-Closed (N.C.) dry contacts.<br />
Each is equipped for connection with up to six input<br />
devices such as E-stop push button and BNS coded<br />
magnets. In addition it features user-selectable monitoredmanual<br />
or automatic reset, six (non-safety) semiconductor<br />
outputs for signalling/annunciation, and two safety outputs.<br />
Input Voltage<br />
See available models below<br />
# Discrete Input Devices 6 (Dual-Channel)<br />
Monitored<br />
<strong>Co</strong>mpatible Input Device N.O./N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
Number & Type<br />
2 N.O. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
Number & Type Auxiliary 6 - short circuit proof, PNP-type<br />
(Non-Safety or<br />
semiconductor Y1 - Y6 max 20mA<br />
Signalling Outputs)<br />
1 - N.C. Auxiliary output<br />
Typical Input Devices • Interlocks (N.O./N.C.)<br />
Monitored<br />
• Limit switches (N.O./N.C.)<br />
Type of Reset<br />
• Monitored-manual (trailing edge)<br />
(Selectable)<br />
• Automatic<br />
Feedback Monitoring Yes<br />
LED Displays<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
• K1 (safety relay 1)<br />
• K2 (safety relay 2)<br />
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards<br />
Stop Category 0<br />
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
Safety Classification PL d per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 3 per EN 945-1<br />
Selected Features<br />
• Plug-in screw terminals<br />
• Cross-short recognition<br />
• Up to 6 monitored devices<br />
• Seven auxiliary outputs<br />
• Selectable monitored-manual or<br />
automatic reset<br />
Front View AES 2285/SRB 207<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
Model Number<br />
AES 2285<br />
SRB 207 AN-230V<br />
Operating Input Voltage<br />
24 VDC<br />
48 - 230 VAC<br />
162
AES 2285/SRB 207 AN<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D)<br />
Ambient Operating<br />
Temperature Range<br />
Mechanical Life Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
Mounting<br />
45mm x 100mm x 121mm<br />
(1.77" x 3.9" x 4.75")<br />
-25°C to +45°C<br />
(-13°F to +113°F)<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
300 gm<br />
DIN rail<br />
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM (shown with 1 input)<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple<br />
max. 10%<br />
48 VAC-240VAC, 50-60 Hz<br />
3.0 W max. (For 24 VDC)<br />
Approx. 6.8 VA (For 230 VAC)<br />
(Plus signalling contacts Y1-Y6)<br />
Fuse (Input Power)<br />
24 V Internal electronic Fuse F1,<br />
Tripping current > 1 A (Resets after<br />
approx. 1 second)<br />
230 V Primary : Fuse (glass), tripping<br />
current > 1 A<br />
Secondary : Internal electronic fuse,<br />
tripping current > 0.12 A<br />
Fuse (Safety Outputs)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(Auxiliary <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(Safety Outputs)<br />
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)<br />
Y1-Y6: 24 VDC, 20mA (PNP)<br />
31-32: 24 VDC, 2 A (Dry)<br />
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive<br />
(inductive with suitable supressor circuit)<br />
Application Category AC-15 / DC-13 : EN 60 947-5-1<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
Drop-out Delay<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type & Material<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance<br />
Air Clearance &<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections<br />
≤ 120 ms/≤ 30ns (auto start/reset button)<br />
≤ 20 ms<br />
AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided<br />
100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2<br />
• Self-lifting, plug-in screw<br />
terminals for 13 to 20 AWG<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
5<br />
163
164<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design
PULSE-ECHO BASED<br />
NON-CONTACT SAFETY SENSORS<br />
SELECTION GUIDE<br />
Switch<br />
Series<br />
AZ 200<br />
CSS 34<br />
Type<br />
AZM 200 Solenoid Interlock 1 3 ⁄4" × 9" × 2"<br />
MZM 100<br />
CSS 180<br />
CSS 30S<br />
CSS 16<br />
Interlock<br />
Magnetic-Latching<br />
Interlock<br />
Cylindrical<br />
Safety Sensor<br />
Rectangular<br />
Safety Sensor<br />
Stainless Steel Cylindrical<br />
Safety Sensor<br />
Safety Sensor<br />
in AZ16 Housing<br />
Envelope<br />
Dimensions<br />
1 1 ⁄2" × 8 3 ⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄2"<br />
1 3 ⁄4" × 7 1 ⁄4" × 1 3 ⁄4"<br />
1" × 4" × 1"<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfigurations<br />
2 PNP Safety Outputs<br />
1 or 3 diagnostic outputs<br />
2 PNP Safety Outputs<br />
1 diagnostic output<br />
2 PNP Safety Outputs<br />
1 diagnostic output<br />
2 PNP Safety Outputs<br />
1 diagnostic output<br />
<strong>Catalog</strong><br />
Page<br />
166<br />
172<br />
178<br />
0.7" × 3.6" 2 PNP Safety Outputs 182<br />
1.18" Dia × 3.5"<br />
1.25" × 2" × 3"<br />
2 PNP Safety Outputs<br />
1 diagnostic output<br />
2 PNP Safety Outputs<br />
1 diagnostic output<br />
188<br />
194<br />
198<br />
6<br />
SD-Gateway for Field Bus connection Serial Diagnostic signal converter 204<br />
Pules Echo accessories <strong>Co</strong>nnectors for series wiring 206<br />
165
SERIES AZ 200<br />
Pulse-Echo Based<br />
Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Interlock Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Tamper resistant … frequency-matched switch and<br />
actuator required for operation.<br />
• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.<br />
• Dual purpose handle … modern, ergonomic design—no<br />
additional door handles are needed.<br />
• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states<br />
• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …<br />
satisfy requirements of PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or <strong>Co</strong>ntrol<br />
Category 4 per EN 954-1. *See Note on next page.<br />
• One-hand emergency release … hazardous area can be<br />
left quickly and safely.<br />
• Switch and actuator do not protrude into door<br />
opening … no risk of injury or damage from a protruding<br />
actuator.<br />
• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application<br />
versatility.<br />
• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, max<br />
200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety<br />
performance level.<br />
Description<br />
The AZ 200 pulse-echo based non-contact safety interlock is<br />
designed for use with movable machine guards/access gates<br />
which must be closed for operator safety.<br />
The AZ 200 consists of an interlock switch and actuator unit<br />
with door handle and optional emergency exit handle. The<br />
actuator is always inserted into its housing, protecting the<br />
actuator and the operator against damage and injury. Utilizing<br />
pulse-echo sensor technology, the actuator and interlock can<br />
have an offset of ±5 mm and the actuator still engages the<br />
interlock. A sensor stimulates a coil in the actuator, which in<br />
turns sends a signal back to the sensor. The pulse-echo<br />
technology provides diagnostic information and detects and<br />
indicates any misalignment at an early stage. Two different<br />
actuator designs accommodate both sliding or hinged guards.<br />
The AZ 200 interlock is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit<br />
proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up<br />
to 250 mA. It features one electronic diagnostic output that<br />
can signal errors before the safety outputs are switched off,<br />
thus enabling a controlled shutdown of the machine.<br />
With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring of<br />
the safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors,<br />
up to 31 AZ 200 safety interlocks with one diagnostic output<br />
can be wired in series without detriment to the safety performance<br />
level/control category (PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or control<br />
category 4 per EN 954-1).<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The AZ 200 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch<br />
on movable machine guards which, when open, expose the<br />
operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical<br />
applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, access<br />
panels and other movable guards. The AZ 200 is suitable for<br />
both sliding guards and hinged guards.<br />
166<br />
AVAILABLE AZ200 MODELS<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
Screw Terminals<br />
AZ200SK-T1P2P<br />
Door detection sensor, diagnostic<br />
output, 2 PNP safety outputs<br />
AZ200SK-TSD2P<br />
Door detection sensor, serial diagnostic<br />
output*, 2 PNP safety outputs<br />
M23 x1 quick connect, 8+1pole<br />
AZ200ST1-T1P2P Door detection sensor, diagnostic<br />
output, 2 PNP safety outputs<br />
AZ200ST1-TSD2P Door detection sensor, serial diagnostic<br />
output*, 2 PNP safety outputs<br />
M12x1 quick connect, 8 pole<br />
AZ200ST2-T1P2P Door detection sensor, diagnostic<br />
output, 2 PNP safety outputs<br />
AZ200ST2-TSD2P Door detection sensor, serial diagnostic<br />
output*, 2 PNP safety outputs<br />
*Sensors with Serial Diagnostic output are for use with<br />
various field bus protocols, see page 204 for SD Gateways.<br />
ACTUATORS<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
AZ/AZM200-B1-LT Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from<br />
left<br />
AZ/AZM200-B1-LTP0 Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from<br />
left with inside emergency door<br />
release<br />
AZ/AZM200-B1-RT Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from<br />
right<br />
AZ/AZM200-B1-RTP0 Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from<br />
right with inside emergency door<br />
release<br />
AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on left<br />
AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1P1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on left<br />
with inside emergency door release<br />
AZ/AZM200-B30-RTAG1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on right<br />
AZ/AZM200-B30-RTAG1P1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on right<br />
with inside emergency door release<br />
Note: For appropriate connector cable for ST models,<br />
please see page 94.<br />
For ST1 models, order cable starting with A-K8+1-M23...<br />
For ST2 models, order cable staring with A-K8P-M12...
SERIES AZ 200 AVAILABLE KEYS AND DIMENSIONS<br />
Part number: SZ200<br />
Description:<br />
Lockout tag,<br />
up to 5 padlocks<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Module Requirements<br />
Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP<br />
semiconductor outputs. See page 320 for<br />
recommended SCHMERSAL safety control<br />
modules.<br />
Note: A safety control module may be required<br />
for reset function and/or feedback monitoring<br />
functions, as well as increased output<br />
current requirements.<br />
DIMENSIONS OF AZ 200 & AZ/AZM 200-B1 ACTUATOR<br />
AZ/AZM 200-B1<br />
for sliding doors<br />
1 – A1 Supply voltage UB<br />
2 – X1 Safety input 1<br />
3 – A2 GND<br />
4 – Y1 Safety output 1<br />
5 – OUT Diagnostic output<br />
6 – X2 Safety input 2<br />
7 – Y2 Safety output 2<br />
8 – IN serial diagnostic input<br />
9 – without function<br />
1 – A1 Supply voltage UB<br />
2 – X1 Safety input 1<br />
3 – A2 GND<br />
4 – Y1 Safety output 1<br />
5 – OUT Diagnostic output<br />
6 – X2 Safety input 2<br />
7 – Y2 Safety output 2<br />
8 – IN serial diagnostic input<br />
6<br />
167
SERIES AZ 200 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Unlocked Holding Force 30N (7 pounds)<br />
Operating Temperature –25°C to +60°C<br />
Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C<br />
Response Time<br />
≤ 60ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
Shock Resistance 30g/11ms<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
1 million operations<br />
Mounting<br />
40-45mm profiles<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE BG<br />
EN 60947-5-1 UL<br />
EN 954-1 CSA<br />
IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1<br />
DIMENSIONS OF AZ 200 & AZ/AZM 200-B30 HANDLE<br />
Door hinge on<br />
left-hand side<br />
A<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Mode of Operation Inductive<br />
Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%<br />
Rated Operating Current 0.6A<br />
No Load Current 0.1A<br />
Residual Current<br />
≤ 0.5mA<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
0.8kV<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VDC<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
(2) PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Safety Output<br />
0.25A per output<br />
Operating Current<br />
Safety Output<br />
Max. 4V below rated<br />
Operating Voltage operating voltage<br />
Signaling Output<br />
PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Signaling Output Max. 0.05A<br />
Operating Current<br />
Signaling Output<br />
Max. 4V below rated<br />
Operating Voltage operating voltage<br />
Type Terminals Screw Terminals for up to 15<br />
AWG flexible stranded wire<br />
(1.5 mm 2 )<br />
Door hinge on<br />
right-hand side<br />
AZ/AZM 200-B30<br />
for hinged doors<br />
B<br />
Legend<br />
A=Front and rear manual release<br />
B=Cable entry M20 x 1,5<br />
C=Emergency exit P1<br />
D=Door handle G1<br />
C<br />
C<br />
D<br />
D<br />
168
SERIES AZ 200 DIAGNOSTICS<br />
Function table of visual diagnostic LED, electronic diagnostic output and safety outputs<br />
LED State AZ 200<br />
Safety<br />
Outputs<br />
Diagnostic Outputs<br />
AZ200...-1P2P<br />
OUT<br />
Green<br />
Door open<br />
0 V 0 V<br />
Green<br />
Door closed<br />
0 V<br />
0 V<br />
Yellow & Green<br />
Door closed and actuator inserted<br />
24 V<br />
24 V<br />
Blinking red (1–6 impulses) Error: see blinking codes<br />
1<br />
After 30 min ➞ 0 V<br />
2<br />
With door detection sensor (-T) always high<br />
24 V 1<br />
0 V<br />
Diagnostic LED error codes<br />
The blinking sequence of the red LED of the AZ 200 identifies the active error.<br />
The following errors are indicated:<br />
Indication (red)<br />
Meaning<br />
1 blinking impulse Error output Y1<br />
2 blinking impulses Error output Y2<br />
3 blinking impulses Cross-wire<br />
4 blinking impulses Temperature too high<br />
5 blinking impulses Target error<br />
6 blinking impulses Error target combination<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntinuous red<br />
Error<br />
Blinking <strong>Co</strong>des (red) Meaning Autonomous switch-off after Cause<br />
1 blinking impulse Error output Y1 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y1”, although<br />
the output is switched off<br />
2 blinking impulses Error output Y2 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y2”,<br />
although the output is switched off<br />
3 blinking impulses Cross-wire 30 min. Cross-wire between the output cables or error at<br />
both outputs<br />
4 blinking impulses Temperature too high 30 min. Temperature measurement indicates too high an<br />
inner temperature<br />
5 blinking impulses Target error 0 min.<br />
The difference between the code (frequency) of<br />
the detected target and the set value is too large,<br />
false target<br />
6 blinking impulses Error target combination 0 min. An invalid combination of targets was detected at<br />
the 4 coils of the AZ200 T. (Current setting: latching<br />
bolt detected & door target not detected => latch<br />
breakage or tampering attempt)<br />
6<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntinuous Red Internal error 0 min.<br />
169
SERIES AZ 200 WIRING EXAMPLES<br />
WIRING EXAMPLE: SINGLE DEVICE WIRING<br />
WIRING COMPARTMENT<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
Safety Input 1<br />
Safety Input 2<br />
Ground<br />
Ground<br />
Meaning<br />
Safety Output 1<br />
Safety Output 2<br />
Diagnostic Output<br />
24 V<br />
24 V<br />
X1<br />
X2<br />
GND<br />
GND<br />
Y1<br />
Y2<br />
Terminal<br />
OUT<br />
Note: In case of single device wiring, the<br />
bridge between the “24 V” terminal and<br />
the “X1” and “X2” terminals must be<br />
established; for series wiring, this bridge<br />
must only be established in the first<br />
device of the series.<br />
WIRING EXAMPLE: SERIES WIRING OF 3 AZ 200<br />
170<br />
Series wiring up to 31 sensors<br />
without loss of PL e per EN<br />
ISO 13849-1, or control<br />
category 4 per EN 954-1.
6<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design<br />
171
SERIES AZM 200<br />
Description<br />
The AZM 200 Series is designed for machine/work cells<br />
where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled<br />
until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature<br />
permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,<br />
which may exist immediately after removal of power, have<br />
abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,<br />
motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.<br />
The AZM 200 consists of a solenoid-latching interlock and<br />
actuator unit with door handle and optional emergency exit<br />
handle. The actuator is always inserted into its housing,<br />
protecting the actuator and the operator against damage and<br />
injury. Utilizing pulse-echo sensor technology, the actuator<br />
and interlock can have an offset of ±5 mm and the actuator<br />
still engages the interlock.<br />
Due to the one-hand operation of the emergency exit handle,<br />
the hazardous area can be left quickly and safely—even during<br />
a power failure (when using the “unlock by power” model).<br />
The solenoid interlock is a dual channel design with two<br />
short-circuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can<br />
switch up to 250 mA.<br />
With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring of<br />
the safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors,<br />
up to 31 AZM 200 solenoid interlocks can be wired in series<br />
without detriment to the Safety Performance Level control<br />
category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, or control category 4<br />
per EN 954-1).<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The AZM 200 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch<br />
on movable machine guards which must not be opened until<br />
dangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal of<br />
power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,<br />
spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typical<br />
applications are textile machines, stamping machines,<br />
metal working equipment, printing presses and<br />
packaging machines.<br />
172<br />
Pulse-Echo Based<br />
Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Solenoid Interlock<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Solenoid locking design … controls access to hazardous<br />
areas until safe conditions exist.<br />
• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.<br />
• Dual purpose handle … unlatches and opens guard—no<br />
additional door handles are needed.<br />
• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states<br />
• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …<br />
satisfy requirements of PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or <strong>Co</strong>ntrol<br />
Category 4 to EN 954-1. *See Note Below.<br />
• One-hand emergency release … hazardous area can be<br />
left quickly and safely—even during a power failure.<br />
• Switch and actuator do not protrude into door opening<br />
… no risk of injury or damage from a protruding actuator.<br />
• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application versatility.<br />
• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, max<br />
200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety<br />
performance level.<br />
AVAILABLE AZM200 MODELS<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
Spring to Lock, Power to unlock<br />
AZM200SK-T1P2P Diagnostic Output (Screw Terminals)<br />
AZM200SK-TSD2P Serial Diagnostic Output* (Screw<br />
Terminals)<br />
AZM200ST1-T1P2P Diagnostic Output (M23x1 quick<br />
connect, 9 pin)<br />
AZM200ST1-TSD2P Serial Diagnostic Output* (M23x1<br />
quick connect, 9 pin)<br />
AZM200ST2-T1P2P Diagnostic Output (M12x1 quick<br />
connect, 8 pin)<br />
AZM200ST2-TSD2P Serial Diagnostic Output* (M12x1<br />
quick connect, 8 pin)<br />
AZM200ST-T1P2P-2568 Diagnostic Output, with pushbutton &<br />
LED (M23x1 quick connect, 12 pin)<br />
Power to Lock, Spring to unlock<br />
AZM200SK-T1P2PA Diagnostic Output (Screw Terminals)<br />
AZM200SK-TSD2PA Serial Diagnostic Output* (Screw<br />
Terminals)<br />
AZM200ST1-T1P2PA Diagnostic Output (M23x1 quick<br />
connect, 9 pin)<br />
AZM200ST1-TSD2PA Serial Diagnostic Output* (M23x1<br />
quick connect, 9 pin)<br />
AZM200ST2-T1P2PA Diagnostic Output (M12x1 quick<br />
connect, 8 pin)<br />
AZM200ST2-TSD2PA Serial Diagnostic Output* (M12x1<br />
quick connect, 8 pin)<br />
AZM200ST-T1P2PA-2568 Diagnostic Output, with pushbutton &<br />
LED (M23x1 quick connect, 12 pin)<br />
ACTUATORS<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
AZ/AZM200-B1-LT Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from<br />
left<br />
AZ/AZM200-B1-LTP0 Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from<br />
left with inside emergency door release<br />
AZ/AZM200-B1-RT Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from<br />
right<br />
AZ/AZM200-B1-RTP0 Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from<br />
right with inside emergency door<br />
release<br />
AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on left<br />
AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1P1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on left<br />
with inside emergency door release<br />
AZ/AZM200-B30-RTAG1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on right<br />
AZ/AZM200-B30-RTAG1P1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on right<br />
with inside emergency door release
SERIES AZM 200 AVAILABLE KEYS AND DIMENSIONS<br />
Part number: SZ200<br />
Description:<br />
Lockout tag, up to 5 padlocks<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector Cables for ST Models<br />
Please see page 94 for appropriate connector cable part numbers.<br />
ST1 versions use M12, 8 pin connectors<br />
(part numbers starting A-K8P-M12...)<br />
ST2 versions use M23, 9 pin connectors<br />
(part numbers starting A-K8+1-M23...)<br />
ST versions use M23, 12 pin connectors<br />
(part numbers starting A-K12P-M23...)<br />
*Sensors with Serial Diagnostic output are for use with<br />
various field bus protocols, see page 204 for SD Gateways.<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Module Requirements Dualchannel<br />
safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor outputs. See<br />
page 320 for recommended SCHMERSAL safety control modules.<br />
Note: A safety control module may be required for reset<br />
function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as well as<br />
increased output current requirements.<br />
DIMENSIONS OF AZM 200, AZM 200-2568 & AZ/AZM 200-B1 ACTUATOR<br />
AZM200SK<br />
AZM200ST<br />
AZM200 … -2568<br />
AZ/AZM 200-B1<br />
for sliding doors<br />
Pushbutton, for authorized<br />
release at switch site<br />
“ST” Pin Assignments<br />
1 – A1 Supply voltage UB<br />
2 – X1 Safety input 1<br />
3 – A2 GND<br />
4 – Y1 Safety output 1<br />
5 – OUT Diagnostic output<br />
6 – X2 Safety input 2<br />
7 – Y2 Safety output 2<br />
8 – IN serial diagnostic input<br />
9 – without function<br />
1 – A1 Supply voltage UB<br />
2 – X1 Safety input 1<br />
3 – A2 GND<br />
4 – Y1 Safety output 1<br />
5 – OUT Diagnostic output<br />
6 – X2 Safety input 2<br />
7 – Y2 Safety output 2<br />
8 – IN serial diagnostic input<br />
6<br />
173
SERIES AZM 200 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Unlocked Holding Force 30N (7 pounds)<br />
Solenoid Holding Force 2300N (506 pounds)<br />
Operating Temperature –25°C to +60°C<br />
Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C<br />
Response Time<br />
≤ 30ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
Shock Resistance 30g/11ms<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
1 million operations<br />
Mounting<br />
40-45mm profiles<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE BG<br />
EN 60947-5-1 UL<br />
EN 954-1 CSA<br />
IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1<br />
DIMENSIONS OF AZM 200 & AZ/AZM 200-B30 HANDLE<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Mode of Operation Inductive<br />
Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%<br />
Rated Operating Current 1.0A<br />
No Load Current 0.5A<br />
Residual Current<br />
≤ 0.5mA<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
0.8kV<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VDC<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
(2) PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Safety Output<br />
0.25A per output<br />
Operating Current<br />
Safety Output<br />
Max. 4V below rated<br />
Operating Voltage operating voltage<br />
Signaling Output<br />
PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Signaling Output Max. 0.05A<br />
Operating Current<br />
Signaling Output<br />
Max. 4V below rated<br />
Operating Voltage operating voltage<br />
Type Terminals Screw Terminals for up to 15<br />
AWG flexible stranded wire<br />
(1.5 mm 2 )<br />
Door hinge on<br />
left-hand side<br />
A<br />
Door hinge on<br />
right-hand side<br />
AZ/AZM 200-B30<br />
for hinged doors<br />
B<br />
Legend<br />
A=Front and rear manual release<br />
B=Cable entry M20 x 1,5<br />
C=Emergency exit P1<br />
D=Door handle G1<br />
C<br />
C<br />
D<br />
D<br />
174
SERIES AZM 200 DIAGNOSTICS<br />
Function table of visual diagnostic LED, electronic diagnostic output and safety outputs<br />
Diagnostic Outputs<br />
LED State AZM 200 Safety Outputs<br />
AZM200...-1P2P<br />
OUT<br />
Green<br />
Door open<br />
0 V<br />
0 V<br />
Yellow & green<br />
Actuator inserted and locked<br />
24 V<br />
24 V<br />
Blinking yellow<br />
Actuator inserted and not locked<br />
0 V<br />
24 V<br />
Blinking red (1–6 impulses)<br />
Error: see blinking codes<br />
24 V 1<br />
0 V<br />
1<br />
After 30 min ➞ 0 V<br />
Diagnostic LED error codes<br />
The blinking sequence of the red<br />
LED of the AZM 200 identifies the<br />
active error. The following errors<br />
are indicated:<br />
Indication (red)<br />
Meaning<br />
1 blinking impulse Error output Y1<br />
2 blinking impulses Error output Y2<br />
3 blinking impulses Cross-wire<br />
4 blinking impulses Temperature too high<br />
5 blinking impulses Target error<br />
6 blinking impulses Error target combination<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntinuous red<br />
Error<br />
Blinking <strong>Co</strong>des (red) Meaning Autonomous switch-off after Cause<br />
1 blinking impulse Error output Y1 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y1”, although<br />
the output is switched off<br />
2 blinking impulses Error output Y2 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y2”, although<br />
the output is switched off<br />
3 blinking impulses Cross-wire 30 min. Cross-wire between the output cables or error at<br />
both outputs<br />
4 blinking impulses Temperature too high 30 min. Temperature measurement indicates too high an<br />
inner temperature<br />
5 blinking impulses Target error 0 min.<br />
The difference between the code (frequency) of<br />
the detected target and the set value is too large,<br />
false target<br />
6 blinking impulses Error target combination 0 min. An invalid combination of targets was detected at<br />
the 4 coils of the AZM. (Current setting: latching<br />
bolt detected & door target not detected => latch<br />
breakage or tampering attempt)<br />
6<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntinuous Red Internal Error 0 min.<br />
175
SERIES AZM 200 WIRING EXAMPLES<br />
WIRING EXAMPLE: SINGLE DEVICE WIRING<br />
WIRING COMPARTMENT<br />
Meaning<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
Safety Input 1<br />
Safety Input 2<br />
Solenoid Input<br />
Ground<br />
Ground<br />
Safety Output 1<br />
Safety Output 2<br />
Diagnostic Output<br />
Terminal<br />
24 V<br />
24 V<br />
X1<br />
X2<br />
IN<br />
GND<br />
GND<br />
Y1<br />
Y2<br />
OUT<br />
Note: In case of single device wiring, the<br />
bridge between the “24 V” terminal and<br />
the “X1” and “X2” terminals must be<br />
established; for series wiring, this bridge<br />
must only be established in the first<br />
device of the series.<br />
WIRING EXAMPLE: SERIES WIRING OF 3 AZM 200<br />
+24VDC<br />
24V 24V X1 X2 IN<br />
AZM 200<br />
24V 24V X1 X2 IN<br />
AZM 200<br />
24V 24V X1 X2 IN<br />
AZM 200<br />
GND<br />
GND<br />
Y1 Y2 OUT<br />
GND<br />
GND<br />
Y1 Y2 OUT<br />
GND<br />
GND<br />
Y1 Y2 OUT<br />
0V<br />
Reset<br />
I1<br />
I2<br />
PLC<br />
I3<br />
+24VDC<br />
K B<br />
K A<br />
Q1<br />
Q2<br />
Q3<br />
A1 S12 S22 X1 X2<br />
13 23 33 41<br />
SRB 301 LC/B<br />
A2<br />
14<br />
24 34 42<br />
176<br />
Series wiring up to 31 sensors<br />
without loss of PL e per EN ISO<br />
13849-1, or control category 4<br />
per EN 954-1<br />
0V<br />
K A<br />
K B<br />
N
6<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design<br />
177
SERIES MZM 100<br />
Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Magnetic-Latching Interlock<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Magnetic-latching design … controls access to hazardous<br />
areas until safe conditions exist (100 lbs. locked holding<br />
force).<br />
• Forced-closed operating principle … no mechanical wear<br />
due to non-contact design.<br />
• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states<br />
• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …<br />
satisfy requirements of PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, or <strong>Co</strong>ntrol<br />
Category 4 per EN 954-1. *See Note Below.<br />
• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, max<br />
200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety<br />
performance level.<br />
• Automatic magnetic latch (35 N) … no mechanical<br />
latching required (“r” version only).<br />
• Smooth surfaces allow for easy cleaning … ideal where<br />
high hygienic standards need to be maintained.<br />
• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application versatility.<br />
AVAILABLE MZM100 MODELS<br />
Description<br />
The MZM 100 Series is designed for machine/work cells<br />
where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled<br />
until safe conditions exist. Their magnetic-latching feature<br />
permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,<br />
which may exist immediately after removal of power, have<br />
abated.<br />
The MZM 100 consists of a magnetic-latching interlock and<br />
actuator unit. An electromagnet is utilized to generate a 500 N<br />
holding force. An integrated pulse-echo based sensor detects<br />
and monitors the position of the safety guard. This sensor<br />
technology permits an offset between the actuator and interlock<br />
of ±5 mm vertical and ±3 mm horizontal.<br />
The MZM100 magnetic-latching interlock is a dual channel<br />
design with two short-circuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each of<br />
which can switch up to 250 mA. The holding force is permanently<br />
electronically measured and monitored. If the holding<br />
force drops below 500 N, the safety outputs are not enabled,<br />
recognizing a dirty interlock.<br />
With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring of<br />
the safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors, up<br />
to 31 MZM 100 magnetic-latching interlocks can be wired in<br />
series without detriment to the Safety Performance Level control<br />
category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, or control category 4<br />
per EN 954-1).<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The MZM 100 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch<br />
on movable machine guards which must not be opened until<br />
dangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal of<br />
power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,<br />
spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typical<br />
applications are textile machines, stamping machines, food<br />
processing equipment, metal working equipment, woodworking<br />
and packaging machines.<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
MZM100ST-1P2PA 2-PNP safety outputs, diagnostic<br />
output<br />
MZM100ST-SD2PA 2-PNP safety outputs, Serial diagnostic<br />
output<br />
MZM100ST-1P2PRA 2-PNP safety outputs, diagnostic<br />
output, with variable latching (30N to<br />
240N)<br />
MZM100ST-SD2PRA 2-PNP safety outputs, Serial diagnostic<br />
output, with variable latching (30N<br />
to 240N)<br />
*Sensors with Serial Diagnostic output are for use with<br />
various field bus protocols, see page 204 for SD Gateways.<br />
ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
MZM100-B1.1<br />
Actuator<br />
MS MZM 100-W<br />
Mounting Set<br />
Note: For appropriate connector cable, please see page 94.<br />
Order cable starting with A-K8+1-M23...<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Module Requirements<br />
Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor<br />
outputs. See page 320 for recommended SCHMERSAL<br />
safety control modules.<br />
*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset<br />
function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as<br />
well as increased output current requirements.<br />
178
SERIES MZM 100 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Unlocked Holding Force 35N (7 pounds) (“r” version only)<br />
Magnetic Holding Force 500N (112 pounds)<br />
Operating Temperature –25°C to +55°C<br />
Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C<br />
Response Time<br />
≤ 100ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
Shock Resistance 30g/11ms<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
1 million operations<br />
Mounting<br />
40mm profiles<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE BG<br />
EN 60947-5-1 UL<br />
EN 954-1 CSA<br />
IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
Switch<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Mode of Operation Magentic & Inductive<br />
Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%<br />
Rated Operating Current 1.0A<br />
No Load Current 0.5A<br />
Residual Current<br />
≤ 0.5mA<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
0.8kV<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VDC<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
(2) PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Safety Output<br />
0.25A per output<br />
Operating Current<br />
Safety Output<br />
Max. 4V below rated<br />
Operating Voltage operating voltage<br />
Signaling Output<br />
PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Signaling Output Max. 0.05A<br />
Operating Current<br />
Signaling Output<br />
Max. 4V below rated<br />
Operating Voltage operating voltage<br />
Termination<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector M23x1<br />
Actuator<br />
6<br />
Mounting Set<br />
Exploded View<br />
179
SERIES MZM 100 DIAGNOSTICS<br />
Function table of visual diagnostic LED, electronic diagnostic output and safety outputs<br />
State MZM 100<br />
LED<br />
Safety outputs Diagnostic output<br />
green yellow red Y1, Y2 OUT<br />
Guard open<br />
on off off<br />
0 V<br />
0 V<br />
Guard closed, unlocked<br />
on blinks off<br />
0 V<br />
24 V<br />
Guard closed and locked<br />
on on off<br />
24 V<br />
24 V<br />
Warning, door locked on on blinks**<br />
24 V* 0 V<br />
Error, door locked on off blinks**<br />
0 V 0 V<br />
* after 30 min. 0V ** see blinking code<br />
Diagnostic LED error codes<br />
The blinking sequence of the red<br />
LED of the MZM 100 identifies the<br />
active error. The following errors<br />
are indicated:<br />
Indication (red)<br />
Meaning<br />
1 blinking impulse Error output Y1<br />
2 blinking impulses Error output Y2<br />
3 blinking impulses Cross-wire<br />
5 blinking impulses Target error<br />
6 blinking impulses Error holding force<br />
10 blinking impulses Magnet is too hot<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntinuous Red<br />
Internal Error<br />
Blinking <strong>Co</strong>des (red) Meaning Autonomous switch-off after Cause<br />
1 blinking impulse Error output Y1 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y1”, although<br />
the output is switched off<br />
2 blinking impulses Error output Y2 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y2”, although<br />
the output is switched off<br />
3 blinking impulses Cross-wire 30 min. Cross-wire between the output cables or error at<br />
both outputs<br />
5 blinking impulses Target error 0 min. The difference between the code (frequency) of the<br />
detected target and the set value is too large, false target<br />
6 blinking impulses Holding force error 0 min. The required holding force is not obtained (misalignment/soiling).<br />
The holding force is < 500 N.<br />
10 blinking impulses Magnet temperature 0 min. The magnet is too hot: Temperature is too high T>70°C<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntinuous Red Internal error 0 min.<br />
180
SERIES MZM 100 WIRING EXAMPLE<br />
Safety Sensors in large systems<br />
The sensors have separate input<br />
and output cables. The output of one<br />
sensor can be directly wired into the<br />
input of the next sensor. The sensor<br />
chain can be built up over a length of<br />
two hundred meters.<br />
The supply voltage is wired in both<br />
safety inputs of the last solenoid<br />
interlock of the chain (starting from<br />
the control relay). The safety outputs<br />
of the first interlock are wired to the<br />
control relay.<br />
SERIES CONNECTION OF MZM 100<br />
Safety outputs -> <strong>Co</strong>ntrol relay<br />
Series wiring up to 31 sensors<br />
without loss of PL e per EN ISO<br />
13849-1, or control category 4<br />
per EN 954-1<br />
WIRING OF THE INTEGRATED CONNECTOR MZM 100<br />
6<br />
Solenoid interlock with diagnostic output<br />
Pin configuration<br />
A1 Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 1<br />
A2 Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 3<br />
X1 safety input 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 2<br />
X2 safety input 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 6<br />
Y1 safety output 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 4<br />
Y2 safety output 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 7<br />
OUT diagnostic output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 5<br />
IN magnet control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 8<br />
181
SERIES CSS 180<br />
Pulse-Echo Based<br />
Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Sensor<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.<br />
• Sealed for moisture protection … ideal for most hostile<br />
environments.<br />
• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor and<br />
actuator required for operation.<br />
• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easy<br />
installation and troubleshooting.<br />
• Integral self-monitoring … satisfy requirements of PL e per<br />
EN ISO 13849-1, or <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 per EN 954-1.<br />
*See note below.<br />
• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 16 devices, max<br />
200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety<br />
performance level.<br />
• Dual PNP 500mA safety outputs … for application<br />
versatility.<br />
AVAILABLE CSS180 MODELS<br />
Description<br />
The CSS 180 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is<br />
designed for application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring<br />
the position of movable safety guards. In this application<br />
the safety sensor monitors the closed position of hinged,<br />
sliding or removable guards with the aid of a coded actuator.<br />
The CSS 180 Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity<br />
devices with defined behavior under fault conditions<br />
according to EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M<br />
(self-monitoring).<br />
Operation<br />
The CSS 180 Safety Sensor and CST 180 actuator are a<br />
matched pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the<br />
sensor excites the actuator at a predetermined resonant<br />
frequency and the reads back the actuator oscillation. The<br />
sensor evaluates the actuator frequency and its distance to<br />
the actuator.<br />
Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard<br />
by the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.<br />
The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit<br />
proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up<br />
to 500 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the<br />
monitoring of the safety outputs, up to 16 CSS 180 Safety<br />
Sensors can be wired in series without detriment to the<br />
Safety Performance Level/control category (PL e per EN ISO<br />
13849-1, control category 4 per EN 954-1).<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable<br />
machine guards where multiple guard monitoring on a<br />
machine is required, and/or where hostile environments<br />
exist. Typical applications include printing machinery, textile<br />
machinery, paper converting equipment, material handling<br />
systems, packaging machinery, chemical processing equipment,<br />
and woodworking machinery.<br />
Part Number<br />
CSS-8-180-2P-E-L<br />
CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-L<br />
CSS-8-180-2P-Y-L<br />
CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-L<br />
CSS-8-180-2P-E-LST<br />
CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-LST<br />
CSS-8-180-2P-Y-LST<br />
CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-LST<br />
Description<br />
End or single device with pre-wired<br />
cable<br />
End or single device with diagnostic<br />
output, pre-wired cable<br />
Series device with double pre-wired<br />
cables<br />
Series device with diagnostic output,<br />
pre-wired cables<br />
End or single device, pre-wired cable<br />
with M12x1 4 pole connection<br />
End or single device with diagnostic<br />
output, pre-wired cable with M12x1 5<br />
pole connection<br />
Series device, two pre-wired cables<br />
with M12x1 4 pole connections<br />
Series device with diagnostic output,<br />
two pre-wired cables with M12x1 8<br />
pole connections<br />
ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
CST-180-1<br />
Actuator<br />
CST-180-2<br />
Actuator<br />
CSA-M-1<br />
Magnetic latch<br />
H-18 Mounting clamp<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Module Requirements<br />
Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor<br />
outputs. See page 320 for recommended SCHMERSAL<br />
safety control modules.<br />
*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset<br />
function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as<br />
well as increased output current requirements.<br />
182
SERIES CSS 180 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Switching Distance 8mm (Nominal)<br />
7.0mm to 9.5mm (Maximum)<br />
Operating Temperature –25°C to +55°C<br />
Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C<br />
Hysteresis<br />
≤ 0.5mm<br />
Repeatability<br />
≤ 0.2mm<br />
Response Time<br />
≤ 30ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
Shock Resistance 30g/11ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE BG<br />
EN 60947-5-3 UL<br />
EN 954-1 CSA<br />
IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Mode of Operation Inductive<br />
Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%<br />
Rated Operating Current 1.0A<br />
No Load Current 0.05A<br />
Residual Current<br />
≤ 0.5mA<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
0.8kV<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDC<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
(2) PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Safety Output Current 0.5A per output<br />
Safety Output Max. 0.5V<br />
Voltage Drop<br />
Signaling Output<br />
PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Signaling Output<br />
Max. 4V below rated operating<br />
Operating Voltage voltage<br />
Signaling Output Max. 0.05A<br />
Operating Current<br />
Type Interconnection 4x0.5mm 2 , 5x0.34mm 2 , or<br />
Cable 7x0.25mm 2<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
CST-180-1 Actuator<br />
CSS 180 Safety Sensor<br />
5.6mm hole diameter<br />
Refer to order information for cable<br />
types, cable length and cable crosssectional<br />
area.<br />
CST-180-2 Actuator<br />
Mounting Clamp<br />
Magnetic Latch<br />
6<br />
38<br />
14<br />
28<br />
6<br />
18<br />
1,5<br />
34<br />
21<br />
16<br />
36<br />
5,2<br />
5,2<br />
60<br />
183
SERIES CSS 180 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
SWITCHING DISTANCES, FLUSH MOUNTING<br />
Typical Response Range<br />
of the Sensor CSS 180<br />
S ON Switch-on point S ON 0 V<br />
184
SERIES CSS 180 WIRING EXAMPLE 1<br />
Safety Sensors in large systems<br />
The sensors have separate input and output<br />
cables. The output of one sensor can be<br />
directly wired into the input of the next sensor.<br />
The sensor chain can be built up over<br />
a length of two hundred meters, up to 16<br />
devices.<br />
Sensors used:<br />
1 Safety Sensor CSS-8-180-2P-E-L:<br />
This sensor has one output cable. It is<br />
designed for the beginning of a chain<br />
or for use as a single device.<br />
3 Safety Sensors CSS-8-180-2P-Y-L:<br />
These sensors have separate input<br />
and output cables. The output of the<br />
first sensor is wired into the input of<br />
the next sensor and so on. This type<br />
of sensor can also be used as the first<br />
sensor in a chain, if the supply voltage<br />
is bridged to the safety inputs.<br />
SERIES CONNECTION OF CSS-8-180<br />
Up to 16 devices can be wired in<br />
series, maximum of 200 meters.<br />
CSS-8-180-2P-Y-L<br />
Input<br />
Gray cable<br />
Operating Voltage (BN) brown P (+24 V)<br />
(BU) blue 0 V<br />
Safety Input (BK) black channel 1<br />
(WH) white channel 2<br />
Output<br />
Black cable<br />
Operating Voltage (BN) brown P (+24 V)<br />
(BU) blue 0 V<br />
Safety Output (BK) black channel 1<br />
(WH) white channel 2<br />
6<br />
CSS-8-180-2P-E-L<br />
Output<br />
Black cable<br />
Operating Voltage (BN) brown P (+24 V)<br />
(BU) blue 0 V<br />
Safety Output (BK) black channel 1<br />
(WH) white channel 2<br />
185
SERIES CSS 180 WIRING EXAMPLE 2<br />
Series connection of up<br />
to 16 Safety Sensors<br />
CSS 180 in small<br />
systems with a<br />
centralized control<br />
cabinet or wiring via<br />
junction boxes.<br />
SERIES CONNECTION OF CSS-8-180<br />
Sensors used:<br />
1 Safety Sensor CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-L:<br />
This sensor has one output cable. It is<br />
designed for the beginning of a chain or for<br />
use as a single device.<br />
3 Safety Sensors CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-L:<br />
The inputs and outputs of the sensors are<br />
brought out in one cable. The sensors are<br />
wired together in series in the control cabinet<br />
or in junction boxes.<br />
This type of sensor can also be used as the<br />
first sensor in a chain, if the supply voltage is<br />
bridged to the safety inputs. For very long<br />
sensors chains it is recommended to feed the<br />
power supply directly to the first sensor in the<br />
chain to avoid excessive voltage drop. The safe<br />
outputs of the last sensor in the chain are connected<br />
to the safety control module.<br />
If junction boxes are used, standard installation<br />
cable can be used for the wiring between junctions.<br />
When laid together with control cables in<br />
a separated cable channel, shielding is not<br />
necessary.<br />
Up to 16 devices can be<br />
wired in series, maximum<br />
of 200 meters.<br />
Note: CSS units should be connected to the<br />
same regulated power supply.<br />
CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-L<br />
Operating Voltage (BN) brown P (+24 V)<br />
(BU) blue 0 V<br />
Safety Input (WH) white channel 1<br />
(VT) violet channel 2<br />
Safety Output (RD) red channel 1<br />
(BK) black channel 2<br />
(GY) gray diagnostic output<br />
CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-L<br />
Operating Voltage (BN) brown P (+24 V)<br />
(BU) blue 0 V<br />
Safety Output (BK) black channel 1<br />
(WH) white channel 2<br />
(GY) gray diagnostic output<br />
186
WIRING EXAMPLES FOR PULSE-ECHO BASED SENSORS<br />
SERIES-WIRING OF VARIOUS SENSORS AND SOLENOID INTERLOCKS WITH DIAGNOSTIC OUTPUT<br />
Open solenoid<br />
interlock<br />
Safety<br />
outputs<br />
➞<br />
SAFETY<br />
CONTROLLER<br />
The CSS 180, CSS 34, MZM 100, AZ 200 and AZM 200 can be wired in series in any desired combination. For the<br />
CSS 180, 16 devices maximum can be wired in series; for the CSS 34 and AZM 200, maximum 31 devices. If the<br />
CSS 180 is used in a “mixed” series-wiring, the maximum number of series-wired devices is limited to 16. The<br />
maximum number of devices depends upon a maximum cable length of 200m.<br />
PRODUCT SELECTION<br />
This example applies to the following series-wired devices.<br />
6<br />
Device<br />
Description<br />
CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-L<br />
with<br />
CST-180-1<br />
With diagnostic output,<br />
connecting cable 5-wire<br />
Actuator<br />
CSS-14-34-S-D-M-L<br />
with<br />
CST-34-S-1<br />
AZM 200..-T-1P2P,a<br />
Position of the active<br />
face, on the side,<br />
connecting cable, 7-wire<br />
Actuator, on the side<br />
1 diagnostic output with<br />
power-to-lock principle<br />
and door detection sensor<br />
187
SERIES CSS 34<br />
Pulse-Echo Based <strong>Co</strong>mpact<br />
Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Sensor<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.<br />
• Four different actuating surfaces … for a variety of<br />
mounting options.<br />
• Sealed for moisture protection … ideal for most hostile<br />
environments. Meets both IP65 and IP67 requirements.<br />
• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor and<br />
actuator required for operation.<br />
• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easy<br />
installation and troubleshooting.<br />
• Integral self-monitoring (CSS34), feedback and reset<br />
functions (CSS34F0/F1) … satisfy requirements of PL e per<br />
EN ISO 13849-1, or <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 per EN 954-1, and<br />
may remove need for safety control module. *See note below.<br />
• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, max<br />
200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety<br />
performance level.<br />
• Dual PNP 500mA safety outputs … for application<br />
versatility.<br />
• Integrated mounting plate included … allows for easy<br />
and accurate alignment of sensor and actuator.<br />
Description<br />
The CSS 34 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is designed for<br />
application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring the position<br />
of movable safety guards. In this application the safety sensor<br />
monitors the closed position of hinged, sliding or removable<br />
guards with the aid of a coded actuator.<br />
The CSS 34 Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity<br />
devices with defined behavior under fault conditions according to<br />
EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M (self-monitoring).<br />
The CSS 34 Safety Sensor and CST 34 actuator are a matched<br />
pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the sensor excites<br />
the actuator at a predetermined resonant frequency and the reads<br />
back the actuator oscillation. The sensor evaluates the actuator<br />
frequency and its distance to the actuator.<br />
Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard by<br />
the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.<br />
The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit<br />
proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up to<br />
250 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the monitoring<br />
of the safety outputs, up to 31 CSS 34 Safety Sensors can<br />
be wired in series without detriment to the safety performance<br />
level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, control category<br />
4 per EN 954-1).<br />
The models CSS34 F0/F1 have an integrated feedback option<br />
that control positive-guided contactors/relays without the need for<br />
a downstream safety control module. The integrated start/restart<br />
interlock feature provides an input for a reset pushbutton with<br />
edge detection, or without edge detection (suitable for automatic<br />
reset). The CSS34F0/F1 models are suitable as individual or end<br />
devices in a series wired chain of standard CSS34 sensors to<br />
replace a safety control module. The CSS34F0/F1 system, comprising<br />
the sensor, monitored relay and the reset switch, meets<br />
the requirements of PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, or <strong>Co</strong>ntrol<br />
Category 4 per EN954-1, provided that positive guided contactors/relays<br />
are used.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable<br />
machine guards where multiple guard monitoring on a machine<br />
is required, and/or where hostile environments exist. Typical<br />
applications include printing machinery, textile machinery, paper<br />
converting equipment, material handling systems, pack-<br />
188<br />
aging machinery, chemical processing equipment, and<br />
woodworking machinery.<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
(Actuators Ordered Separately)<br />
Model Number<br />
Standard Version<br />
Description<br />
CSS12-34-VDML*<br />
CSS12-34-VDMST*<br />
CSS14-34-SDML*<br />
CSS14-34-SDMST*<br />
F0<br />
CSS12-34F0-VDMST<br />
CSS14-34F0-SDMST<br />
F1<br />
CSS12-34F1-VDMST<br />
CSS14-34F1-SDMST<br />
Top Actuating surface with diagnostic output<br />
Top Actuating surface with diagnostic<br />
output, M12 Cable connector<br />
Side Actuation surface with diagnostic output<br />
Side Actuation surface with diagnostic<br />
output, M12 Cable connector<br />
Integrated Feedback, without edge<br />
detection, auto-reset<br />
Top Actuating surface with diagnostic output,<br />
M12 Cable connector<br />
Side Actuation surface with diagnostic<br />
output, M12 Cable connector<br />
Integrated Feedback, with edge<br />
detection of reset button, manual reset<br />
Top Actuating surface with diagnostic<br />
output, M12 Cable connector<br />
Side Actuation surface with diagnostic<br />
output, M12 Cable connector<br />
Sensors available with a serial diagnostic cable, for use with<br />
various field bus protocols. Please see page 204 for SD<br />
Gateways.<br />
Note: See page 94 for M12, 9 pin connector cables.<br />
Model Number<br />
CST34-S-1<br />
CST34-V-1<br />
AVAILABLE ACTUATORS<br />
Side surface actuator<br />
Top surface actuator<br />
Description<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Module Requirements<br />
Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor<br />
outputs. See page 320 for recommended SCHMERSAL<br />
safety control modules.<br />
*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset<br />
function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as<br />
well as increased output current requirements.
SERIES CSS 34 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic<br />
Degree of Protection IP65 and IP67<br />
Switching Distance Top (V) 12mm Nominal<br />
10-15mm (Maximum)<br />
Side (S) 14mm Nominal<br />
12-17mm (Maximum)<br />
Operating Temperature –25°C to +70°C<br />
Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C<br />
Hysteresis<br />
1mm<br />
Repeatability<br />
≤ 0.5mm<br />
Response Time<br />
≤ 30ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
Shock Resistance 30g/11ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE BG<br />
EN 60947-5-3 UL<br />
EN 954-1 CSA<br />
IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Mode of Operation Inductive<br />
Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%<br />
Rated Operating Current 0.6A<br />
No Load Current 0.1A<br />
Residual Current<br />
≤ 0.5mA<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
1 kV<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDC<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
(2) PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Safety Output Current 0.25A per output<br />
Safety Output Max. 0.5V<br />
Voltage Drop<br />
Signaling Output<br />
PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Signaling Output<br />
Max. 4V below rated operating<br />
Operating Voltage voltage<br />
Signaling Output Max. 0.05A<br />
Operating Current<br />
Interconnection Cable: Y-UL2517/8xAWG22 (8x0.35mm 2 ), 2m<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector:<br />
M12x1, 8 pin quick connect<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
CST Actuator<br />
CSS 34 Safety Sensor<br />
6<br />
Integrated Mounting Plate<br />
(included with delivery)<br />
189
SERIES CSS 34 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
SWITCHING DISTANCES<br />
The actuating curves represent the points<br />
at which the CSS 34 sensor switches on<br />
and off upon the approach of the actuator.<br />
Actuation From Side<br />
Actuation From Top<br />
Legend<br />
S<br />
Switching Distance<br />
V, V1, V2 Possible misalignment<br />
(see drawings at right)<br />
S ON Switch-on point<br />
S OFF Switch-off point<br />
S H<br />
Hysteresis area<br />
S H = SOFF – SON<br />
Sao Assured operation point<br />
Sar Assured release point<br />
(according to EN60947-5-3)<br />
Sideways Misalignment<br />
Horizontal: Max ±10mm (V2)<br />
Vertical: Max ±18mm (V1)<br />
Top Misalignment<br />
Horizontal: Max ±8.5mm (V)<br />
Minimum distance between two<br />
sensor sets: approximately 100mm<br />
Function table of visual diagnostic LED<br />
Visual diagnostic (red) Cause of fault<br />
1 pulse Fault on Output Y1<br />
2 pulses<br />
Fault on Output Y2<br />
3 pulses<br />
4 pulses<br />
5 pulses<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntinuous<br />
190<br />
Cross-wire short Y1/Y2<br />
Ambient temperature too high<br />
Incorrect or defective actuator<br />
Internal fault<br />
Six different fault conditions are signalled by the diagnostic LED<br />
flashing with predefined pulse sequence or with continuous red light.<br />
Electronic Diagnostic function of CSS34 or CSS34F with conventional diagnostic output<br />
Sensor <strong>Co</strong>ndition<br />
*Only for CSS34F0/F1 with feedback circuit<br />
1<br />
The sensor waits for a signal from the feedback circuit:<br />
F0 – Close feedback circuit<br />
F1 – Trailing edge on feedback circuit<br />
LEDs<br />
Green Red Yellow<br />
Electronic<br />
diagnostic output<br />
24V DC, 50mA<br />
Safety outputs<br />
No Target, Power On On Off Off 0V 0V<br />
Actuated On Off On 24V 24V<br />
Actuated in limit area On Off<br />
Actuated and<br />
feedback circuit open*<br />
Actuated in limit area and<br />
feedback circuit open*<br />
On<br />
On<br />
Off<br />
Flashes<br />
(1Hz)<br />
Flashes<br />
(5Hz)<br />
Flashes<br />
(1Hz/5Hz)<br />
24V pulsed<br />
Fault On Flashes On 0V<br />
Off<br />
24V<br />
24V 0V 1<br />
24V pulsed 0V 1<br />
30 min. delay<br />
24V➞0V
SERIES CSS 34 WIRING EXAMPLE 1<br />
Series wiring with single diagnostic output<br />
The supply voltage is wired to both safety inputs<br />
of the last sensor of the chain (starting from the<br />
safety controller). The safety outputs of the first<br />
sensor are wired to the safety controller. The<br />
sensor chain can be built up over a length of<br />
two hundred meters.<br />
Sensors used:<br />
Safety Sensor CSS14-34-SDML:<br />
This sensor has one output cable. The output of the first sensor is wired into<br />
the input of the next sensor and so on.<br />
SERIES CONNECTION OF CSS 34<br />
Series wiring up to 31 sensors without<br />
loss of PL e per EN ISO 13849-1/control<br />
category 4 per EN 954-1<br />
CSS14-34-SDML<br />
Operating Voltage (BN) brown P (+24 V)<br />
6<br />
(BU) blue 0 V<br />
Safety Input (WH) white channel 1<br />
(VT) violet channel 2<br />
Signal Output (GY) gray diagnostic<br />
(PK) pink nonfunction<br />
Safety Output (BK) black channel 1<br />
(RD) red channel 2<br />
191
SERIES CSS 34 WIRING EXAMPLE 2<br />
Wiring example for series-wiring of the CSS 34 and CSS<br />
34F1 safety sensors with conventional diagnostic outputs<br />
In a safety chain of multiple sensors, only the first device can<br />
be a sensor of the CSS 34F type. All other components of the<br />
chain must be of the default type CSS 34, up to a maximum<br />
length of 200m.<br />
The CSS 34F1 safety sensor enables a direct control of the<br />
contactor or relay. The internal monitoring module of the CSS<br />
34F1 version monitors the trailing edge of the reset button in<br />
addition to the feedback contacts. The sensor is switched on<br />
when the button is released. It can be used for manual reset<br />
on safety guards with accessible protection field. The protected<br />
field must be designed in such manner that a single reset button<br />
can be used.<br />
SERIES CONNECTION OF CSS34 AND CSS34F1<br />
Series wiring up to 31 sensors without<br />
loss of PL e per EN ISO 13849-1/control<br />
category 4 per EN 954-1<br />
192
SERIES CSS 34 WIRING EXAMPLE 3<br />
Wiring example for the CSS 34F0 safety sensors with<br />
conventional diagnostic output with auxiliary relay for<br />
controlling high-capacity contactors<br />
Additional auxiliary relays are used when the capacity of<br />
the safety outputs of the sensor is insufficient to enable direct control<br />
of the contactors or to switch, e.g., from 24V DC to 230V AC.<br />
The NC contacts of the load-switching contactors are monitored.<br />
CONNECTION OF CSS34F0 WITH RELAYS TO SWITCH HIGH-CAPACITY LOADS<br />
6<br />
193
SERIES CSS 30S<br />
Stainless Steel Pulse-Echo Based<br />
Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Sensor<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Stainless Steel Housing … ideal for hygienic applications.<br />
• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.<br />
• IP69K rated housing (to DIN 40050-9) … suitable for high<br />
pressure, high temperature wash downs.<br />
• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor and<br />
actuator required for operation.<br />
• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easy<br />
installation and troubleshooting.<br />
• Integral self-monitoring … satisfy requirements of PL e<br />
per EN ISO 13849-1, or <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 per EN 954-1.<br />
*See note below.<br />
• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, max<br />
200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety<br />
performance level.<br />
• Dual PNP 250mA safety outputs … for application<br />
versatility.<br />
Description<br />
The CSS 30S non-contact, electronic safety sensor is<br />
designed for application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring<br />
the position of movable safety guards. In this application<br />
the safety sensor monitors the closed position of hinged,<br />
sliding or removable guards with the aid of a coded actuator.<br />
The CSS 30S Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity<br />
devices with defined behavior under fault conditions<br />
according to EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M<br />
(self-monitoring).<br />
Operation<br />
The CSS 30S Safety Sensor and CST 30S-1 actuator are a<br />
matched pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the<br />
sensor excites the actuator at a predetermined resonant<br />
frequency and the reads back the actuator oscillation. The<br />
sensor evaluates the actuator frequency and its distance to<br />
the actuator.<br />
Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard<br />
by the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.<br />
The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit<br />
proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up<br />
to 250 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the<br />
monitoring of the safety outputs, up to 31 CSS 30S Safety<br />
Sensors can be wired in series without detriment to the safety<br />
performance level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1/<br />
control category 4 per EN 954-1).<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
(Accessories Ordered Separately)<br />
Model Number<br />
Description<br />
CSS 11-30-SD-M-ST<br />
CSS 11-30S-D-M-ST<br />
CST 30S-1<br />
H 30<br />
2 PNP safety outputs, 1 serial diagnostic<br />
output*<br />
2 PNP safety outputs, 1 signaling output<br />
Actuator<br />
Mounting clamp<br />
Note: For M12, 8 pin connection cables, see page 94.<br />
*Sensors with Serial Diagnostic output are for use with various field<br />
bus protocols, see page 204 for SD Gateways<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Module Requirements<br />
Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor<br />
outputs. See page 320 for the SCHMERSAL safety<br />
control modules recommended for this application.<br />
Note: A safety control module may be required for reset<br />
function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as<br />
well as increased output current requirements.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable<br />
machine guards where multiple guard monitoring on a<br />
machine is required, and/or where hostile environments<br />
exist. Typical applications include food processing machinery,<br />
pharmaceutical and medical applications, material handling<br />
systems, packaging machinery, chemical processing equipment,<br />
and marine and outdoor applications.<br />
194
SERIES CSS 30S TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Stainless Steel<br />
Degree of Protection IP67 to IEC/EN 60529<br />
IP69K to DIN 40050-9<br />
Switching Distance 11mm<br />
Operating Temperature –25°C to +65°C<br />
Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C<br />
Hysteresis<br />
< 2mm<br />
Repeatability<br />
< 1mm<br />
Response Time<br />
< 60ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
Shock Resistance 30g/11ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE UL<br />
IEC 60947-5-3 CSA<br />
IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1<br />
TUV EN 954-1<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Mode of Operation Inductive<br />
Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%<br />
Rated Operating Current 0.6A<br />
No Load Current 0.1A<br />
Residual Current<br />
≤ 0.5mA<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
0.8kV<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDC<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
(2) PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Safety Output Current 0.25A per output<br />
Safety Output Max. 0.5V<br />
Voltage Drop<br />
Signaling Output<br />
PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Signaling Output min. (Ue – 5 V)<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
Signaling Output Max. 0.05A<br />
Operating Current<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
6<br />
195
SERIES CSS 30S TECHNICAL DATA<br />
SWITCHING DISTANCES, FLUSH MOUNTING<br />
Typical Response Range<br />
of the Sensor CSS 30S<br />
S ON Switch-on point S ON
6<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design<br />
197
SERIES CSS 16<br />
Pulse-Echo Based<br />
Non-<strong>Co</strong>ntact Safety Sensor<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.<br />
• Sealed for moisture protection … ideal for most hostile<br />
environments.<br />
• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor and<br />
actuator required for operation.<br />
• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easy<br />
installation and troubleshooting.<br />
• Integral self-monitoring … satisfy requirements of PL e per<br />
EN ISO 13849-1, or Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 to EN 954-1.<br />
*See note below.<br />
• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 16 devices, max<br />
200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety<br />
performance level.<br />
• Dual PNP 500mA safety outputs … for application<br />
versatility.<br />
• Same mounting dimensions as Series AZ16 … ideal<br />
alternative in applications with alignment problems or harsh<br />
environments.<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
(Accessories Ordered Separately)<br />
Model Number<br />
Description<br />
Description<br />
The CSS 16 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is designed<br />
for application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring the<br />
position of movable safety guards. In this application the safety<br />
sensor monitors the closed position of hinged, sliding or<br />
removable guards with the aid of a coded actuator.<br />
The CSS 16 Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity<br />
devices with defined behavior under fault conditions<br />
according to EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M<br />
(self-monitoring).<br />
Operation<br />
The CSS 16 Safety Sensor and CST 16-1 actuator are a<br />
matched pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the<br />
sensor excites the actuator at a predetermined resonant<br />
frequency and the reads back the actuator oscillation. The<br />
sensor evaluates the actuator frequency and its distance to<br />
the actuator.<br />
Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard<br />
by the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.<br />
The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit<br />
proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up<br />
to 500 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the<br />
monitoring of the safety outputs, up to 16 CSS 16 Safety<br />
Sensors can be wired in series without detriment to the safety<br />
performance level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1/<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 per EN954-1).<br />
CSS-8-16-2P-E-L<br />
CSS-8-16-2P+D-E-L<br />
CSS-8-16-2P-Y-L<br />
CSS-8-16-2P+D-M-L<br />
CST-16-1<br />
End or single device with pre-wired cable<br />
End or single device with diagnostic<br />
output, pre-wired cable<br />
Series device with double pre-wired cable<br />
Series device with diagnostic output,<br />
pre-wired cable<br />
Actuator<br />
Sensors available with M12 cable connector – Add ST after L in<br />
catalog number. See page 94 for M12 connector cables (4-, 5-,<br />
or 8-pin).<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Module Requirements<br />
Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor<br />
outputs. See page 320 for the SCHMERSAL safety<br />
control modules recommended for this application.<br />
*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset<br />
function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as<br />
well as increased output current requirements.<br />
CST16-1 Actuator<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable<br />
machine guards where multiple guard monitoring on a<br />
machine is required, and/or where hostile environments<br />
exist. Typical applications include printing machinery, textile<br />
machinery, paper converting equipment, material handling<br />
systems, packaging machinery, chemical processing equipment,<br />
and woodworking machinery.<br />
198
SERIES CSS 16 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic<br />
Degree of Protection IP67/IP65<br />
Switching Distance 8mm (Nominal)<br />
7.0mm to 11mm (Maximum)<br />
Operating Temperature –25°C to +55°C for max. output<br />
current ≤ 500mA/output<br />
–25°C to +65°C for output current<br />
≤ 200mA/output<br />
–25°C to +70°C for output current<br />
≤ 100mA/output<br />
Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C<br />
Hysteresis<br />
max. 1mm<br />
Repeatability<br />
< 0.5mm<br />
Response Time<br />
≤ 30ms<br />
Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm<br />
Shock Resistance 30g/11ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards CE BG<br />
IEC 61508 UL<br />
IEC 60947-5-3 CSA<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 EN 954-1<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Mode of Operation Inductive<br />
Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%<br />
Rated Operating Current 1.1A<br />
No Load Current 0.05A<br />
Residual Current<br />
≤ 0.5mA<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
0.8kV<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDC<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
(2) PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Safety Output Current 0.5A per output<br />
Safety Output Max. 0.5V<br />
Voltage Drop<br />
Signaling Output<br />
PNP, short-circuit proof<br />
Signaling Output<br />
Max. 4V below rated operating<br />
Operating Voltage voltage<br />
Signaling Output Max. 0.05A<br />
Operating Current<br />
Type Interconnection 4x0.5mm 2 , 5x0.34mm 2 , or<br />
Cable 7x0.25mm 2<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
CST 16-1<br />
6<br />
199
SERIES CSS 16 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
SWITCHING DISTANCES<br />
Typical Response Range<br />
of the Sensor CSS 16<br />
S ON Switch-on point S ON
SERIES CSS 16 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
WIRING CONNECTIONS<br />
Terminal or individual sensor<br />
CSS-8-16-2P+…-E-L…<br />
or<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnecting cable (2 m):<br />
Cable section: 4-pole: 4 x 0.5 mm 2 ,<br />
5-pole: 5 x 0.5 mm 2 ,<br />
or<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnecting cable (2 m) with connector:<br />
Male connector M12, 4-pole<br />
Male connector M12, 5-pole<br />
Lead colors connecting cable Wiring Pin configuration of the connector<br />
BN (brown) A1 Ue Pin 1<br />
BU (blue) A2 GND Pin 3<br />
BK (black) Y1 Safety output 1 Pin 4<br />
WH (white) Y2 Safety output 2 Pin 2<br />
GY (gray) only 5-pole version: diagnostic output (optional) Pin 5<br />
Sensor for series wiring:<br />
CSS-8-16-2P-Y-LST<br />
and<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnecting cable with connector:<br />
Inputs (IN): female connector M12 x 1<br />
4 pole, 0.25 m long<br />
Outputs (OUT):<br />
male connector M12<br />
4 pole, 2 m long<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnecting cable:<br />
Inputs (IN) gray cable, 4 pole, 0.25 m long<br />
Outputs (OUT) black cable, 4 pole, 2 m long<br />
Lead colors connecting cable Wiring gray cable (IN) black cable (OUT) Pin configuration of the connector<br />
BN (brown) A1 Ue A1 Ue Pin 1<br />
BU (blue) A2 GND A2 GND Pin 3<br />
BK (black) X1 Safety input 1 Y1 Safety output 1 Pin 4<br />
WH (white) X2 Safety input 2 Y2 Safety output 2 Pin 2<br />
Multifunctional connection:<br />
CSS-8-16-2P+D-M-L…<br />
6<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnecting cable (2 m):<br />
Cable section 7 pole: 7 x 0.25 mm 2<br />
or<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnecting cable (2 m) with connector:<br />
Male connector<br />
M12, 8 pole<br />
Lead colors connecting cable Wiring Pin configuration of the connector<br />
BN (brown) A1 Ue Pin 1<br />
BU (blue) A2 GND Pin 3<br />
VT (violet) X1 Safety input 1 Pin 6<br />
WH (white) X2 Safety input 2 Pin 2<br />
BK (black) Y1 Safety output 1 Pin 4<br />
RD (red) Y2 Safety output 2 Pin 7<br />
GY (gray) Diagnostic output Pin 5<br />
— spare Pin 8<br />
201
COMPATIBLE PULSE-ECHO SAFETY CONTROLLERS SRB301LC/B<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Input Voltage<br />
24 V AC/DC<br />
# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual channel)<br />
Monitored<br />
Monitored <strong>Co</strong>ntact N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts) or<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
PNP-switching<br />
Number & Type Safety 3 N.O. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Outputs<br />
Number & Type Auxilliary 1 N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
(Non-Safety or Signalling<br />
Output)<br />
Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)<br />
Monitored<br />
• Interlock switches (N.C.)<br />
• Devices with PNP semiconductor<br />
outputs<br />
Type of Reset<br />
• Manual (24 V Leading Edge)<br />
(Selectable)<br />
• Automatic<br />
Feedback Monitoring Yes<br />
LED Displays<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
• K1 (safety relay 1)<br />
• K2 (safety relay 2)<br />
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)<br />
• UB (voltage at input terminals)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
Stop Category 0<br />
Safety Classification PL e per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 per EN 954-1<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple<br />
max. 10%<br />
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption 1.7 W (max.), 1.9 VA<br />
Fuse (Input Power) Internal glass fuse F1: T 0.25 A<br />
Fuse (Safety Outputs) 6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)<br />
Switching Capacity 230 VAC, 6 A Resistive<br />
(Safety Outputs)<br />
(inductive with suitable<br />
supressor circuit)<br />
Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 2 A<br />
(Auxilliary <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
≤ 30 ms<br />
Drop-out Delay<br />
≤ 50 ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type & Materials AgSnO, self cleaning,<br />
positive-guided<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
Air Cleaner &<br />
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections • Screw terminals for<br />
13 to 20 AWG<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D) 22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm<br />
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")<br />
Ambient Operating -25°C to +45°C<br />
Temperature Range (-13°F to +113°F)<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
230 gm (0.5 lbs.)<br />
Mounting<br />
DIN rail (35mm)<br />
Terminal <strong>Co</strong>nnections For Use With AZM 200<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
Monitored Input #1<br />
(N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input #2<br />
(N.C.)<br />
Safety Output #1<br />
(N.O.)<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
S12<br />
S22<br />
13 14<br />
Safety Output #2<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Safety Output #3<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
with Automatic or<br />
Manual (Leading Edge) Reset<br />
Auxiliary Output<br />
(N.C.)<br />
23 24<br />
33 34<br />
X1<br />
X2<br />
41 42<br />
202
COMPATIBLE PULSE-ECHO SAFETY CONTROLLERS SRB324ST<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Input Voltage<br />
24 V AC/DC<br />
# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual channel)<br />
Monitored<br />
Monitored <strong>Co</strong>ntact N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts) or<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
PNP-switching<br />
Number & Type Safety 5 N.O. (2 delayed: 1-30 sec.)<br />
Outputs<br />
(dry contacts)<br />
Number & Type Auxilliary 1 N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
(Non-Safety or Signalling 3-PNP<br />
Output)<br />
Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)<br />
Monitored<br />
• Interlock switches (N.C.)<br />
• Devices with PNP semiconductor<br />
outputs<br />
Type of Reset<br />
• Monitored-manual (trailing edge)<br />
(Selectable)<br />
• Automatic<br />
Feedback Monitoring Yes<br />
LED Displays<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
• K1-K4 (safety relays 1-4)<br />
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)<br />
• UB (voltage at input terminals)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
Stop Category<br />
0 (3 safety outputs)<br />
1 (2 safety outputs)<br />
Safety Classification PL e per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 per EN 954-1<br />
Terminal <strong>Co</strong>nnections For Use With AZM 200<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple<br />
max. 10%<br />
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption 4.8 W, 7.8 VA max.<br />
(Plus signalling contacts Y1-Y3)<br />
Fuse (Input Power) • Internal glass fuse F1,<br />
tripping current > 2.5 A<br />
(reset approx. 1 second)<br />
• Internal hybrid fuse F2,<br />
tripping current > 1.0 A<br />
(reset after interruption of<br />
supply voltage)<br />
Fuse (Safety Outputs) 6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)<br />
Switching Capacity 230 VAC, 6 A Resistive<br />
(Safety Outputs Stop 0) (inductive with suitable<br />
supressor circuit)<br />
Switching Capacity Y1-Y3: 24 VDC, 100mA (PNP)<br />
(Auxilliary <strong>Co</strong>ntacts) 61/62: 24 VDC, 2A max. (Dry)<br />
Application Category AC-15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
≤ 30 ms<br />
Drop-out Delay ≤ 30 ms (13/14, 23/24, 33/34)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type & Materials AgSnO, self cleaning,<br />
positive-guided<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
Air Cleaner &<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections<br />
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2<br />
• Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminals<br />
13 to 20 AWG<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D) 45mm x 100mm x 121mm<br />
(1.8" x 3.9" x 4.75")<br />
Ambient Operating -25°C to +45°C<br />
Temperature Range (-13°F to +113°F)<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
480 gm<br />
Mounting<br />
DIN rail<br />
6<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
Monitored Input #1<br />
Monitored Input #2<br />
Safety Output #1 (NO)<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
S12<br />
S22<br />
13 14<br />
Safety Output #2 (NO)<br />
Safety Output #3 (NO)<br />
Safety Output #4<br />
Stop Category 1 (NO)<br />
Safety Output #5<br />
Stop Category 1 (NO)<br />
23 24<br />
33 34<br />
47 48<br />
57 58<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
Monitored-Manual Reset<br />
Automatic Reset<br />
Jumper<br />
Auxiliary PNP Output<br />
X1<br />
X2<br />
X3<br />
X4<br />
X4<br />
X5<br />
S31<br />
S32<br />
Y1 Y2 Y3<br />
203
SD-Gateway for field bus connection<br />
Description<br />
The SD Gateways for field bus connection are used in conjunction<br />
with pulse-echo based, non-contact safety sensors<br />
and solenoid interlocks with serial diagnostics (SD): AZ200,<br />
AZM200, MZM100, CSS34, or CSS30S. In these components,<br />
the diagnostic output is replaced with a serial input and<br />
output cable. If components with serial diagnostics are wired<br />
in series, the inputs and outputs of the diagnostic channels as<br />
well as the safety circuits are wired in series. As a result, up<br />
to 31 identical or different pulse-echo based, non-contact<br />
safety sensors can be wired in series, fulfilling the requirements<br />
of PL e/Category 4 to EN ISO 13849-1, and provide<br />
ease of diagnostic evaluation.<br />
The serial diagnostic cable can be connected to either the<br />
PROFIBUS gateway, or to the Universal gateway, converting<br />
the serial information of the series-wiring into the corresponding<br />
field bus protocol. The Universal gateway accommodates<br />
the following protocols: PROFINET IO, ETHERNET/IP,<br />
DeviceNet, CC-Link, or CANopen. The gateway is integrated<br />
as a slave at the end of an existing field bus system. The<br />
diagnostic signals of all SD devices can be evaluated by the<br />
control system through the field bus master.<br />
Features<br />
Advantages of serial diagnostics<br />
• Diagnostic cables of up to 31 safety components can be<br />
wired in series<br />
• Series-wiring of different components possible<br />
• The diagnostic cable is suitable for series-wiring or daisychaining,<br />
thus reducing the cabling costs<br />
• Bidirectional communication, i.e. reading of the operational<br />
data and unlocking of a solenoid interlock in the chain<br />
Advantages of the field bus connection<br />
• Smoother connection to conventional PLC systems<br />
• Available for the conventional default protocols:<br />
PROFIBUS, PROFINET, ETHERNET/IP, DeviceNet,<br />
CC-Link, CANopen...<br />
Advantages for the communication set-up<br />
• Automatic addressing of the safety components through<br />
the serial input<br />
• Automatic and continuous transmission of the operating<br />
data from each participant in the diagnostic chain<br />
Advantages of the diagnostic in the PLC<br />
• Mapping of the operating data of the series wired safety<br />
sensors and solenoid interlocks<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntrol commands for unlocking all connected solenoid<br />
interlocks<br />
• Fast and accurate error messages with detailed information<br />
about the failure/malfunction<br />
• Increased availability: pre-signalling of failures during<br />
machine operation, e.g. sagging of the safety<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
SD-I-DP-V0-2<br />
SD-I-U-PN<br />
SD-I-U-EIP<br />
SD-I-U-DN<br />
SD-I-U-CCL<br />
SD-I-U-CAN<br />
WIRING EXAMPLE<br />
Gateway – PROFIBUS<br />
Gateway – PROFINET IO<br />
Gateway – EitherNet IP<br />
Gateway – DeviceNet<br />
Gateway – CC Link<br />
Gateway – CAN Open<br />
Operational conditions can be read and control commands,<br />
such as unlocking a solenoid interlock that is installed on the<br />
series-wired chain, can be transmitted. The status or failure<br />
information of each individual component of the series-wired<br />
chain is automatically loaded in the PLC.<br />
204
SD-Gateway for Field Bus protocol<br />
SPECIFICATIONS<br />
PROFIBUS interface<br />
Protocol<br />
Transmission rate<br />
Short-circuiting device<br />
9-pole D-SUB connector<br />
Default PROFIBUS connection<br />
(DP-A, DP-B, 5V, GND)<br />
PROFIBUS-DP –V0 upwards<br />
compatible<br />
9.6 kilo baud … 12 mega baud<br />
internal fuse to 0.5A/60V<br />
Operating voltage Ue 24 VDC, –15%/+20%<br />
Operating current Ie<br />
Insulation voltage Ui<br />
Rated impulse withstand<br />
voltage U<br />
Storage temperatures<br />
Operating temps<br />
typically 180mA, max. 250mA<br />
32V<br />
0.5kV<br />
Protection class IP 10<br />
Resistance to vibration<br />
Resistance to shock<br />
Electrical connection<br />
–25°C … +85°C<br />
–5°C … +55°C<br />
5 … 9Hz/3.5mm<br />
15g/11ms<br />
SD connection for max. 31 devices<br />
24 VDC voltage supply<br />
SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Universal Interface<br />
Short-circuiting device<br />
RJ45, 9-pole D-SUB, or 5-pole<br />
Molex connector.<br />
internal fuse to 1A slow blow<br />
Operating voltage Ue 24 VDC, –15%/+20%<br />
Current <strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
Insulation voltage Ui<br />
Rated impulse withstand<br />
voltage U<br />
Storage temperatures<br />
Operating temps<br />
Protection class<br />
Resistance to vibration<br />
Resistance to shock<br />
500mA<br />
32V<br />
0.5kV<br />
–25°C … +75°C<br />
0°C … +55°C<br />
IP20<br />
10Hz/.35mm<br />
10g<br />
Electrical connection SD connection for max. 31<br />
devices 24 VDC voltage supply<br />
6<br />
LED SIGNALS PROFIBUS<br />
PB <strong>Co</strong>ntinuous red Profibus error<br />
Flashing signal Profibus initialization<br />
LED SIGNALS UNIVERSAL GATEWAY<br />
SD-<br />
LED<br />
Green ON<br />
Red ON<br />
SD interface normal operation<br />
SD interface error<br />
SD <strong>Co</strong>ntinuous red SD Gateway error<br />
Flashing signal<br />
SD Gateway initialization<br />
Teach<br />
LED<br />
Yellow Flashing<br />
Yellow ON<br />
Teach error SD interface<br />
SD initialization error<br />
T <strong>Co</strong>ntinuous yellow SD initialization error or ‘teach’<br />
switch active<br />
Red Flashing<br />
Universal Gateway warm boot<br />
Flashing signal<br />
Initialization error SD participant<br />
addresses, teaching required<br />
ON <strong>Co</strong>ntinuous green Supply voltage on<br />
205
PULSE-ECHO Accessories<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
Part Number<br />
Description<br />
SD-2V-F-SK<br />
Junction box, enclosed<br />
SD-2V-S-SK<br />
CSS-T<br />
CSS-T-A<br />
Junction box, for Din rail mounting<br />
T-shaped connector for series wiring<br />
Terminal connector<br />
SD-2V-F-SK<br />
SD-2V-S-SK<br />
Description<br />
Wiring tools enabling a fast and smooth series-wiring<br />
of electronic sensors and solenoid interlocks of the<br />
CSS, AZ/AZM 200 and MZM family.<br />
• T-adapter CSS-T<br />
PULSE-ECHO sensors with serial diagnostic can be<br />
daisy-chained by means of T-adapters and conventional<br />
cables with 5/8-pole connectors and sockets. The<br />
number of participants is limited by the 2 A-fuse.<br />
• SD junction box<br />
To be used preferably for the series-wiring of MZM<br />
and AZM components with high power demand IP 65<br />
enclosure or open IP 00 design for control cabinet<br />
mounting.<br />
The SD junction box and the T-adapter are suitable for<br />
the series-wiring of components with serial diagnostic.<br />
When components with conventional diagnostic output<br />
are daisy-chained, only the safety channels are wired<br />
in series.<br />
SD-2V-S-SK<br />
SD-2V-F-SK<br />
DIMENSIONS & PIN ASSIGNMENTS<br />
WIRING EXAMPLE<br />
CSS-T<br />
CSS-T-A<br />
206
HINGED SAFETY INTERLOCK SWITCHES<br />
Switch<br />
Series<br />
SELECTION GUIDE<br />
Housing<br />
Material<br />
Angular Displacement<br />
for <strong>Co</strong>ntact Opening<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfigurations<br />
<strong>Catalog</strong><br />
Page<br />
TESF<br />
Die-cast zinc<br />
Adjustable<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
2 NO & 2 NC<br />
208<br />
TESZ<br />
Glass-fiber,<br />
4.5°<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
212<br />
reinforced thermoplastic<br />
3 NC<br />
ES95 SB<br />
Glass-fiber,<br />
reinforced thermoplastic<br />
7°<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
214<br />
TVS335<br />
T.C 235<br />
Die-cast aluminum,<br />
enamel finish<br />
Die-cast zinc,<br />
enamel finish<br />
2°<br />
4.5°<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
1 NC<br />
216<br />
218<br />
7<br />
T.C 236<br />
Glass-fiber,<br />
reinforced thermoplastic<br />
4.5°<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
1 NC<br />
218<br />
207
SERIES TESF<br />
Description<br />
The TESF Series is designed for use with movable hinged<br />
machine guards which must be closed for operator safety.<br />
Their tamper-resistant design and positive-opening NC<br />
contacts provide a significantly higher level of safety than<br />
conventional, spring-driven limit switches or proximity<br />
switches often used to monitor hinged guard positions.<br />
Their compact, low-profile design and IP65 rating make<br />
them ideal for interlocking hinged safety guards in industrial<br />
environments. Designed to mount directly on the hinged<br />
guard and its stationary frame, it is easy to install on a wide<br />
range of extruded aluminum guard sizes and other guard<br />
styles.<br />
Among its unique features is its ability to adjust the switching<br />
point in the field to meet specific application requirements.*<br />
Once adjusted, the switching point is easily permanently<br />
locked to prevent further adjustment by unauthorized<br />
personnel. In addition it features top or bottom cable entries,<br />
1 NO or 2 NO and 2 NC contacts, designs suitable for insideor<br />
outside-guard mounting, and the ability to open a full 180°.<br />
*Note: The unit is delivered factory set with a switching point at<br />
a 3° opening angle with positive-break occurring at 5°.<br />
Please note that with use this factory-set point may<br />
increase 2° during lifetime. This should be considered ...<br />
especially where finger or hand protection is desired.<br />
Operation<br />
The installed TESF features two integral contact blocks …<br />
each featuring a NO and a NC contacts. NC contacts are<br />
positive-opening, while the NO contact(s) may be used for<br />
signaling purposes. The electromechanical switch elements<br />
are actuated when the hinged guard is opened to the user’s<br />
desired switching position (angle of opening). At this point the<br />
unit’s positive-break, normally-closed contacts are forced to<br />
open by a direct (non-resilient) actuating mechanism, while<br />
the normally-open contacts close. The opening of the positivebreak<br />
NC contacts ensure circuit interruption and machine<br />
stoppage. Machine restart is not possible while the<br />
guard remains opened.<br />
208<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL<br />
Adjustable Switching Point<br />
Hinged Interlock Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Tamper-resistant … integral switch elements and actuator<br />
prevent bypassing.<br />
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuit<br />
interruption when guard is opened to user’s desired<br />
switching position (angle of opening).<br />
• User-selectable switching point … makes unit suitable for<br />
a wide range of applications.<br />
• Models available for inside-of-guard or front-of-guard<br />
mounting … for application versatility.<br />
• Choice of top or bottom cable entry … for installation<br />
flexibility.<br />
• Permits wide guard opening … up to 180°.<br />
• Splash-proof design … meets IP65 environmental<br />
requirements.<br />
• Slotted mounting holes … permit installation to most<br />
30mm to 60mm aluminum profiles.<br />
• Rugged construction … tolerates mechanical abuse and<br />
hostile environments.<br />
• Designed to meet the Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of EN<br />
954-1.<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
(Includes hinge switch assembly and additional hinge)<br />
Part Number<br />
Type<br />
(<strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Description <strong>Co</strong>nnections<br />
TESF/O<br />
(2NO & 2NC)<br />
TESF/180<br />
(2NO & 2NC)<br />
TESF/U<br />
(2NO & 2NC)<br />
TESF/ST24.1PE/U<br />
(1NO & 2NC)<br />
TESF/ST24.2PE/U<br />
(1NO & 2NC)<br />
TESF/ST24.1PE/O<br />
(1NO & 2NC)<br />
TESF/ST24.2PE/O<br />
(1NO & 2NC)<br />
TESF/ST24.1PE/180<br />
(1NO & 2NC)<br />
TESF/ST24.2PE/180<br />
(1NO & 2NC)<br />
TESFA/180<br />
(2NO & 2NC)<br />
TESFA/ST24.1PE/180<br />
(1NO & 2NC)<br />
TESFA/ST24.2PE/180<br />
(1NO & 2NC)<br />
Part Number<br />
TESF/S<br />
TESFA/S<br />
TESF-14<br />
For front installation with factory<br />
set switching point at 3°<br />
For inside installation with factory<br />
set switching point at 3°<br />
For front or inside installation with<br />
user adjustable switching point<br />
For front or inside installation with<br />
user adjustable switching point<br />
For front or inside installation with<br />
user adjustable switching point<br />
For front installation with factory<br />
set switching point at 3°<br />
For front installation with factory<br />
set switching point at 3°<br />
For inside installation with factory<br />
set switching point at 3°<br />
For inside installation with factory<br />
set switching point at 3°<br />
Hinged interlock with integral fixedto-movable<br />
guard frame alignment<br />
aid. For inside installation with<br />
factory set switching point at 3°<br />
Hinged interlock with integral fixedto-movable<br />
guard frame alignment<br />
aid. For inside installation with<br />
factory set switching point at 3°<br />
Hinged interlock with integral fixedto-movable<br />
guard frame alignment<br />
aid. For inside installation with<br />
factory set switching point at 3°<br />
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES<br />
Description<br />
Switching Point Adjustment Tool<br />
Screw<br />
terminals<br />
Screw<br />
terminals<br />
Screw<br />
terminals<br />
24VDC<br />
Quick disconnect<br />
(bottom entry)<br />
24VDC<br />
Quick disconnect<br />
(top entry)<br />
24VDC<br />
Quick disconnect<br />
(bottom entry)<br />
24VDC<br />
Quick disconnect<br />
(top entry)<br />
24VDC<br />
Quick disconnect<br />
(bottom entry)<br />
24VDC<br />
Quick disconnect<br />
(top entry)<br />
Screw<br />
terminals<br />
24VDC<br />
Quick disconnect<br />
(bottom entry)<br />
24VDC<br />
Quick disconnect<br />
(top entry)<br />
A 22 mm gap between the door and door frame is required for models with the<br />
alignment aid and for inside mount models.<br />
Additional hinge assembly (without alignment aid)<br />
Additional hinge assembly (with integral alignment aid)
SERIES TESF TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Materials of <strong>Co</strong>nstruction Housing & hinge: die-cast zinc<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ver: thermoplastic<br />
Factory Set Displacement 3°*<br />
Angle for NC <strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
Opening and NO <strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
Closing<br />
Degree of Protection<br />
IP65<br />
Maximum Opening Angle 180°<br />
Operating Temperature –10°F to +148°F<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
> 10 6 Operations (minimum)<br />
Mechanical Loading Capacity F1: 5000 N (110 lbs.)<br />
(See dimensional drawings) F2: 5000 N (110 lbs.)<br />
F3: 2000 N (45 lbs.)<br />
Installed Position<br />
Random<br />
Operating Rate<br />
1200 operations/hour (maximum)<br />
Shock Tolerance<br />
30g/18ms<br />
Vibration Tolerance<br />
20g, 10 … 200 Hz<br />
Cable Entry M16 x 1.5<br />
Maximum Actuation Speed 180°/0.3 seconds<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC/EN 60947-5-1 UL<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 CSA<br />
EN 954-1 BG-GS-ET-15<br />
CE<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
Silver-nickel, gold-plated<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
2A/250 VAC (AC15)<br />
1A/24 VDC (DC13)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact System<br />
Cross Point System<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Force<br />
1N per contact<br />
Switching Action<br />
Slow-acting, positive-break<br />
NC contacts<br />
Short-Circuit Protection 2.0 A (Slow blow)<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
2.5 kV<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage 250 VAC<br />
Thermal Rated Current 2.5 A<br />
Rated Operating Voltage 250 VAC<br />
Switching of Small Loads 5 VDC/1 mA (minimum)<br />
Electrical <strong>Co</strong>nnections* Screw terminals for 15AWG<br />
maximum stranded wire or<br />
24 VDC quick disconnect:<br />
M12 (8 Pole)<br />
Front installation:<br />
Guard closed<br />
Front installation:<br />
Guard opened through 180°<br />
Inside installation:<br />
Guard closed<br />
Inside installation:<br />
Guard opened through 180°<br />
CONNECTOR PIN CONFIGURATION<br />
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS &<br />
CONTACT SCHEMATICS<br />
7<br />
*The unit is delivered factory set with a switching point at a 3° opening<br />
angle and positive-break occurring at 5° (with consideration of the<br />
tolerances and wear at the end of the mechanical lifetime, relative to<br />
the factory preset). Please note that with use this factory-set point may<br />
increase 2° during lifetime. This should be considered … especially<br />
where finger or hand protection is desired. Note: On connector<br />
models contact 43-44 is not wired.<br />
209
SERIES TESF TECHNICAL DATA<br />
DIMENSIONS (SWITCH & HINGE ASSEMBLY SHOWN WITH ALIGNMENT AIDS)<br />
M16 x 1.5<br />
(Top)<br />
Optional Alignment Aids<br />
F3<br />
(Bottom)<br />
F1<br />
F2<br />
DIMENSIONS (ADDITIONAL HINGE SHOWN WITH ALIGNMENT AIDS)<br />
F3<br />
F1<br />
F2<br />
210
SERIES TESF TECHNICAL DATA<br />
DETERMINING THE DOOR GAP AS DEPENDENT ON OPENING ANGLE, DOOR WIDTH AND OVERLAP<br />
Opening angle “ß” of the door 3° 4° 5° 6° 7° 8° 9° 10°<br />
Door width “C” in mm<br />
Door gap “D” in millimeters with overlap “B” = 0 mm<br />
100 5.2 7.0 8.7 10.4 12.2 13.9 15.6 17.4<br />
150 7.8 10.5 13.1 15.7 18.3 20.9 23.5 26.0<br />
200 10.5 13.9 17.4 20.9 24.4 27.8 31.3 34.7<br />
250 13.1 17.4 21.8 26.1 30.5 34.8 39.1 43.3<br />
300 15.7 20.9 26.1 31.3 36.5 41.7 46.9 52.1<br />
350 18.3 24.4 30.5 36.6 42.6 48.7 54.7 60.7<br />
400 20.9 27.9 34.8 41.8 48.7 55.6 62.5 69.4<br />
450 23.5 31.4 39.2 47.0 54.8 62.6 70.4 78.1<br />
500 26.2 34.9 43.6 52.2 60.9 69.6 78.2 86.8<br />
550 28.8 38.3 47.9 57.5 67.0 76.5 86.0 95.5<br />
600 31.4 41.8 52.3 62.7 73.1 83.5 93.8 104.1<br />
650 34.0 45.3 56.6 67.9 79.2 90.4 101.6 112.8<br />
700 36.6 48.8 61.0 73.1 85.3 97.4 109.4 121.5<br />
750 39.2 52.3 65.3 78.4 91.4 104.3 117.3 130.2<br />
800 41.8 55.8 69.7 83.6 97.4 111.3 125.1 138.8<br />
850 44.5 59.3 74.0 88.8 103.5 118.2 132.9 147.5<br />
900 47.1 62.7 78.4 94.0 109.6 125.2 140.7 156.2<br />
950 49.7 66.2 82.8 99.3 115.7 132.1 148.5 164.9<br />
1,000 52.3 69.7 87.1 104.5 121.8 139.1 156.4 173.6<br />
1,050 54.9 73.2 91.5 109.7 127.9 146.1 164.2 182.2<br />
1,100 57.5 76.7 95.8 114.9 134.0 153.0 172.0 190.9<br />
1,150 60.2 80.2 100.2 120.1 140.1 160.0 179.8 199.6<br />
1,200 62.8 83.7 104.5 125.4 146.2 166.9 187.6 208.3<br />
1,250 65.4 87.2 108.9 130.6 152.3 173.9 195.4 217.0<br />
1,300 68.0 90.6 113.2 135.8 158.4 180.8 203.3 225.6<br />
1,350 70.6 94.1 117.6 141.0 164.4 187.8 211.1 234.3<br />
1,400 73.2 97.6 122.0 146.3 170.5 194.7 218.9 243.0<br />
1,450 75.8 101.1 126.3 151.5 176.6 201.7 226.7 251.7<br />
1,500 78.5 104.6 130.7 156.7 182.7 208.7 234.5 260.3<br />
Calculation example<br />
The actual door gap “D1” is calculated from the door gap “D” calculated according<br />
to the above table less the overlap of door and frame “B”:<br />
D1 = D – B<br />
Example: A door made of 40 mm aluminium profile with a length of 950 mm is to<br />
be secured with a TESF. According to the technical data sheet the safety contact of<br />
the TESF opens at 3° in new state (5° at end of useful life). In new state a door gap<br />
of approx. 49.7 mm is derived from the above table. The actual door gap, calculated<br />
using the above formula D1 = D – B produces (49.7 – 40 = 9.7); D1 = 9.7 mm. At<br />
the end of useful life there is a door gap of approx. 82.8 mm and an actual door<br />
gap of (82.8 – 40 = 42.8); D1 = 42.8 mm.<br />
7<br />
211
Series TESZ<br />
Hinged Safety Interlock Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Tamper-resistant … integral switch element and actuator<br />
prevents bypassing.<br />
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuit<br />
interruption upon only 4° of guard displacement.<br />
• Splashproof design … meets IP65 environmental<br />
requirements.<br />
• Rugged construction … tolerates mechanical abuse and<br />
hostile environments.<br />
• Designed to meet the Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of EN<br />
954-1.<br />
• Easy to install … fits most popular extruded hinged guard<br />
designs.<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mpatible with popular extruded profile widths.<br />
• Optional integral manual reset … please consult factory.<br />
Part Number*<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
(Guard Closed)<br />
Description<br />
Description<br />
The TESZ Series are designed for use with hinged movable<br />
machine guards which must be closed for operator safety.<br />
Their tamper-resistant design and positive-opening NC<br />
contacts provide a significantly higher level of safety than<br />
conventional, spring-driven limit switches often used to<br />
monitor hinged-guard position. Their compact, low-profile<br />
design and IP65 rating make them ideal for interlocking<br />
hinged safety guards in industrial environments. Designed to<br />
mount directly on the hinged guard and its stationary frame, it<br />
is easy to install on a wide range of guard styles and sizes.<br />
TESZ1102/30<br />
TESZ1110/30<br />
TESZ1102/35<br />
TESZ1110/35<br />
TESZ1102**<br />
TESZ1110**<br />
TESZ1102/45<br />
TESZ1110/45<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
3 NC<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
3 NC<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
3 NC<br />
1 NO & 2 NC<br />
3 NC<br />
Hinged safety interlock<br />
switch for 30mm width<br />
extruded guards<br />
Hinged safety interlock<br />
switch for 35mm width<br />
extruded guards<br />
Hinged safety interlock<br />
switch for 40mm width<br />
extruded guards<br />
Hinged safety interlock<br />
switch for 45mm width<br />
extruded guards<br />
Operation<br />
The installed TESZ features an integral electromechanical<br />
switch element which is actuated when opening a hinged<br />
machine guard. After opening the guard only 4°, the unit’s<br />
positive-break, normally-closed contact(s) are forced to open<br />
by a direct (non-resilient) actuating mechanism. These<br />
positive-break contacts ensure circuit interruption and<br />
machine stoppage. The normally-open signalling contact<br />
closes after 13.5° of guard displacement.<br />
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS<br />
*Includes hinge assembly with switch, switch actuator and an<br />
additional hinge assembly (without switch or switch actuator).<br />
**Available with stainless-steel hinges. (Please consult factory)<br />
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES<br />
Part Number*<br />
Description<br />
TESZ/S/30<br />
Hinge assembly (without switch or switch<br />
actuator) for 30mm width extruded guards<br />
TESZ/S/35<br />
TES/S<br />
TES/S/45<br />
*Includes hinge and hinge pin.<br />
Hinge assembly (without switch or switch<br />
actuator) for 35mm width extruded guards<br />
Hinge assembly (without switch or switch<br />
actuator) for 40mm width extruded guards<br />
Hinge assembly (without switch or switch<br />
actuator) for 45mm width extruded guards<br />
11<br />
12<br />
0 4°<br />
13 5°<br />
21<br />
33<br />
22<br />
34<br />
TESZ1102<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
33-34<br />
13 °<br />
11<br />
12<br />
0 4°<br />
13 5°<br />
212<br />
21<br />
31<br />
22<br />
32<br />
TESZ1110<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
31-32
SERIES TESZ TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Materials of <strong>Co</strong>nstruction Hinge: Aluminum<br />
Switch <strong>Co</strong>ver: Thermoplastic<br />
Displacement Angle for 4°<br />
NC <strong>Co</strong>ntact Opening<br />
Degree of Protection IP65<br />
Displacement Angle for 13.5°<br />
NO <strong>Co</strong>ntact Closing<br />
DIMENSIONS*<br />
Maximum Opening Angle 135°<br />
Operating Temperature –13°F to +149°F<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
>10<br />
mm<br />
operations<br />
Mechanical Loading Maximum torque of 3KN/m at<br />
Capacity inch 1m distance from hinge<br />
Operating Rate<br />
1,200 operations/hour (maximum)<br />
Shock Tolerance<br />
30g/18ms<br />
Vibration Tolerance 20g/10… 200Hz<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 EN 954-1<br />
EN60947-5-1 CE<br />
BG-GS-ET-15 UL<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 CSA<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
Switching Action<br />
Short Circuit Protection<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage<br />
Rated Impulse Withstand<br />
Voltage<br />
Electrical <strong>Co</strong>nnections<br />
Fine silver<br />
Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically-separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
2A (250VAC), AC-15, DC-13<br />
Slow-acting, positive-break NC<br />
contact<br />
6.0A (Slow blow)<br />
250VAC (maximum)<br />
2.5kV<br />
Screw terminals for 15 AWG<br />
maximum stranded wire size<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
36<br />
1.42<br />
TESZ1102 & TESZ1110<br />
SERIES<br />
135°<br />
Part Number Dimension “A” Dimension “B” Dimension “C”<br />
TESZ1102/30<br />
TESZ1110/30<br />
1.34" (34mm) 5.28" (132mm) 4.41" (112mm)<br />
TESZ1102/35<br />
TESZ1110/35<br />
1.53" (39mm) 5.28" (132mm) 4.41" (112mm)<br />
TESZ1102<br />
TESZ1110<br />
1.73" (44mm) 3.62" (92mm) 2.44" (62mm)<br />
TESZ1102/45<br />
TESZ1110/45<br />
1.93" (49mm) 5.28" (132mm) 4.41" (112mm)<br />
5<br />
.20<br />
19<br />
.75<br />
M20<br />
76<br />
2.99<br />
42<br />
1.65<br />
71<br />
2.80<br />
0°<br />
15<br />
.59<br />
5<br />
.20<br />
TESZ/S SERIES<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
"C"<br />
"B"<br />
92<br />
3.62<br />
7<br />
"A"<br />
"A"<br />
71<br />
2.80<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL<br />
213
Series TVS335<br />
Hinged Safety Interlock Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Tamper-resistant … integral actuation shaft prevents<br />
bypassing.<br />
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuit<br />
interruption upon only 3° of guard displacement.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown and<br />
immersion requirements.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the<br />
most hostile environments.<br />
• Designed to meet the Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of EN<br />
954-1.<br />
• Four 90° actuator head positions … provide installation<br />
flexibility.<br />
• Optional LED indicators … provide visual display of<br />
supply voltage and switch operation.<br />
Description<br />
The TVS335 Series are designed for use with hinged movable<br />
machine guards which must be closed for operator safety.<br />
Their tamper-resistant design and positive-opening NC<br />
contacts provide a significantly higher level of safety than<br />
conventional, spring-driven limit switches often used to<br />
monitor hinged-guard position. Their IP67 rating make them<br />
ideal for interlocking safety guards in hostile environments.<br />
Part Number<br />
TV8S-335-11Z<br />
TV8S-335-02Z<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
(Guard Closed)<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
Description*<br />
Hinged safety interlock<br />
switch with 8mm<br />
diameter shaft bore<br />
hole<br />
Operation<br />
The TVS335 is a single-piece, electromechanical safety<br />
interlock switch which is designed to mount to a hinged<br />
machine guard. After opening the guard only 3°, the unit’s<br />
positive-break, normally-closed contacts are forced to open by<br />
a direct (non-resilient) actuating mechanism. These positivebreak<br />
contacts ensure circuit interruption (and machine<br />
stoppage).<br />
Optional Safety<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntroller.<br />
See Page 320.<br />
TV10S-335-11Z<br />
TV10S-335-02Z<br />
TV8S-335-11ZG24<br />
TV8S-335-02ZG24<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
Hinged safety interlock<br />
switch with 10mm<br />
diameter shaft bore<br />
hole<br />
Hinged safety interlock<br />
switch with 8 mm<br />
diameter shaft bore<br />
and integral LED<br />
indicators for supply<br />
voltage (green) and<br />
switch operation<br />
(yellow)<br />
TV10S-335-11ZG24<br />
TV10S-335-02ZG24<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
Hinged safety interlock<br />
switch with 10 mm<br />
diameter shaft bore<br />
and integral LED<br />
indicators for supply<br />
voltage (green) and<br />
switch operation<br />
(yellow)<br />
*The actuator head may be rotated into any one of four 90° positions.<br />
216<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
TVS335 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Diecast aluminum, enamel finish<br />
Displacement Angle 3°<br />
for <strong>Co</strong>ntact Opening<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Operating Temperature –22°F to +158°F<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
>10 6 operations<br />
Operating Rate<br />
5,000 operations/hour (maximum)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 CE<br />
EN 60947-5-1 BG-GS-ET15<br />
EN 50041 UL<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 CSA<br />
EN 954-1<br />
DIMENSIONS<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
Switching Action<br />
Short Circuit Protection<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Electrical <strong>Co</strong>nnections<br />
Fine silver<br />
Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically-separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
4A (230VAC)<br />
2.5A (400VDC)<br />
1A (500VAC)<br />
Slow-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts<br />
Fuse 6A (time-delay)<br />
500VAC<br />
6kV<br />
Screw terminals with selflifting<br />
clamps 13AWG (2.5mm 2 )<br />
maximum wire size<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
*Travel positive break<br />
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS &<br />
CONTACT SCHEMATICS<br />
13<br />
21<br />
TV8S 335-11z<br />
TV10S 335-11z<br />
14<br />
22<br />
354° 3° 0 3° 354°<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
7° 7°<br />
TV8S 335-02z<br />
TV10S 335-02z<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
354° 3° 0 3° 354°<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
7° 7°<br />
LED Indicators<br />
Green LED (gn) indicator for<br />
supply voltage and yellow<br />
LED (ge) indicator for switch<br />
operation for 24VDC. The<br />
LED’s must not be wired,<br />
however, in the safety<br />
circuit!<br />
Shown here:<br />
TV8S 335-11zG24<br />
Shown here:<br />
NO contact (model -11ZG24) serves for alarm and<br />
signaling purposes.<br />
7<br />
Protected against wrong polarity connection.<br />
Protected against transient voltages.<br />
217
Series T.C 235/236<br />
Hinged Safety Interlock Switch<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Tamper-resistant … integral actuator arm prevents<br />
bypassing by operator.<br />
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuit<br />
interruption upon only 4.5° of guard displacement.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown and<br />
immersion requirements.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the<br />
most hostile environments.<br />
• Designed to meet the Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of EN<br />
954-1.<br />
• Four 90° actuator head positions … provide installation<br />
flexibility.<br />
Description<br />
The T.C 235/236 Series are designed for use with hinged<br />
movable machine guards which must be closed for operator<br />
safety. Their tamper-resistant design and positive-opening NC<br />
contacts provide a significantly higher level of safety than<br />
conventional, spring-driven limit switches often used to<br />
monitor hinged-guard position. Their IP67 rating make them<br />
ideal for interlocking safety guards in hostile environments.<br />
Operation<br />
The T.C 235/236 is a single-piece, electromechanical safety<br />
interlock switch which is designed to mount to a hinged<br />
machine guard. After opening the guard only 4.5°, the unit’s<br />
positive-break, normally-closed contacts are forced to open by<br />
a direct (non-resilient) actuating mechanism. These positivebreak<br />
contacts ensure circuit interruption (and machine<br />
stoppage).<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The T.C 235/236 is intended for use as a safety interlock<br />
switch on hinged, movable machine guards which, when<br />
open, expose operator/maintenance personnel to machine<br />
hazards. Their sealed design (IP67) and oil-tolerant seals<br />
make them ideal for use in hostile environments.<br />
Part Number<br />
T3C235-11Z<br />
T3C236-11Z<br />
T3C235-02Z<br />
T3C236-02Z<br />
T3C235-01Z<br />
T3C236-01Z<br />
T4C235-11Z<br />
T4C236-11Z<br />
T4C235-02Z<br />
T4C236-02Z<br />
T4C235-01Z<br />
T4C236-01Z<br />
T5C235-11Z<br />
T5C236-11Z<br />
T5C235-02Z<br />
T5C236-02Z<br />
T5C235-01Z<br />
T5C236-01Z<br />
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
(Guard Closed)<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
1 NC<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
1 NC<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NC<br />
1 NC<br />
Description*<br />
Hinged safety interlock<br />
switch with actuating lever<br />
to right in rest position<br />
Hinged safety interlock<br />
switch with actuating lever<br />
vertical to switch body in<br />
rest position<br />
Hinged safety interlock<br />
switch with actuating lever<br />
to left in rest position<br />
*The actuator head may be rotated into any one of four 90° positions.<br />
218<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
T.C 235/236 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
(Series 235): Diecast zinc, enamel<br />
finish<br />
(Series 236): Glass-fiber, reinforced,<br />
self-extinguishing thermoplastic<br />
Displacement Angle 4.5°<br />
for <strong>Co</strong>ntact Opening<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
Operating Temperature –22°F to +175°F<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
>106 operations<br />
Operating Rate<br />
5,000 operations/hour (maximum)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 BG-GS-ET15<br />
EN 60947-5-1 DIN-EN50047<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 UL<br />
EN 954-1 CSA<br />
CE<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
Switching Action<br />
Short Circuit Protection<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Electrical <strong>Co</strong>nnections<br />
Fine silver<br />
Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically-separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
4A (230VAC)<br />
2.5A (400VDC)<br />
1A (500VAC)<br />
Slow-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts<br />
Fuse 6A (time-delay) as a<br />
positive-break switch<br />
500VAC<br />
6kV<br />
Screw terminals with self-lifting<br />
clamps for 13AWG (2.5mm2)<br />
maximum wire size<br />
Optional Safety<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntroller.<br />
See Page 320.<br />
7<br />
219
T.C 235 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
Types of Actuator Levers<br />
Lever 3 C<br />
Lever 4 C<br />
Lever 5 C<br />
Dimensions<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
M20<br />
M20<br />
M20<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Function Diagrams<br />
Slow action<br />
1 NO + 1 NC<br />
13<br />
21<br />
14<br />
22<br />
180°<br />
T3C 235-11z<br />
3,5° 0<br />
12,5° 4,5°<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
T4C 235-11z<br />
90° 3,5° 0 3,5° 90°<br />
12,5°<br />
12,5°<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
4,5° 4,5°<br />
T5C 235-11z<br />
0 3,5°<br />
180°<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
4,5° 12,5°<br />
Slow action<br />
2 NC<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
T3C 235-02z<br />
180° 12,5° 4,5°<br />
12,5° 4,5°<br />
0<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
T4C 235-02z<br />
90° 4,5° 0 4,5° 90°<br />
12,5°<br />
12,5°<br />
4,5°<br />
4,5°<br />
12,5°<br />
12,5°<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
T5C 235-02z<br />
0 4,5° 12,5° 180°<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
4,5° 12,5°<br />
Slow action<br />
2<br />
1 NC<br />
11 12<br />
T3C 235-01z<br />
180° 12,5° 4,5°<br />
0<br />
11-12<br />
T4C 235-01z<br />
90° 4,5° 0 4,5° 90°<br />
12,5° 12,5° 11-12<br />
T5C 235-01z<br />
0 4,5° 12,5° 180°<br />
11-12<br />
220
T.C 236 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
Types of Actuator Levers<br />
Lever 3 C<br />
Lever 4 C<br />
Lever 5 C<br />
Dimensions<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Function Diagrams<br />
Slow action<br />
1 NO + 1 NC<br />
13<br />
21<br />
14<br />
22<br />
180°<br />
T3C 236-11z<br />
3,5° 0<br />
12,5° 4,5°<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
T4C 236-11z<br />
90° 3,5° 0 3,5° 90°<br />
12,5°<br />
12,5°<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
4,5° 4,5°<br />
T5C 236-11z<br />
0 3,5°<br />
180°<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
4,5° 12,5°<br />
Slow action<br />
2 NC<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
T3C 236-02z<br />
180° 12,5° 4,5°<br />
12,5° 4,5°<br />
0<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
T4C 236-02z<br />
90° 4,5° 0 4,5° 90°<br />
12,5°<br />
12,5°<br />
4,5°<br />
4,5°<br />
12,5°<br />
12,5°<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
T5C 236-02z<br />
0 4,5° 12,5° 180°<br />
4,5°<br />
12,5°<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
Slow action<br />
2<br />
1 NC<br />
11 12<br />
T3C 236-01z<br />
180° 12,5° 4,5°<br />
0<br />
11-12<br />
T4C 236-01z<br />
90° 4,5° 0 4,5° 90°<br />
12,5° 12,5° 11-12<br />
T5C 236-01z<br />
0 4,5° 12,5° 180°<br />
11-12<br />
7<br />
221
222<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design
SAFETY-RATED LIMIT SWITCHES<br />
Switch<br />
Series<br />
Housing<br />
Material<br />
Housing<br />
Dimensions<br />
Z/T235 Die-cast zinc 1 1 ⁄4"×1 1 ⁄4"×2 1 ⁄2"<br />
Z/T236<br />
Glass-fibre reinforced<br />
thermoplastic<br />
1 1 ⁄4"×1 1 ⁄4"×2 1 ⁄2"<br />
Z/T335 Die-cast aluminum 1 1 ⁄2"×1 1 ⁄4"×3"<br />
Z/T336<br />
Glass-fibre reinforced<br />
thermoplastic<br />
1 1 ⁄2"×1 1 ⁄2"×3"<br />
Z332 Die-cast aluminum 1 1 ⁄2"×1 1 ⁄2"×3"<br />
SELECTION GUIDE<br />
Degree of<br />
Protection<br />
IP67<br />
IP67<br />
IP67<br />
IP67<br />
IP65<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfigurations<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NO<br />
2NC<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NO<br />
2NC<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NO<br />
2NC<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
2 NO<br />
2NC<br />
1 NO & 1 NC<br />
(snap-action<br />
only)<br />
<strong>Catalog</strong><br />
Page<br />
224<br />
232<br />
240<br />
246<br />
252<br />
7<br />
223
SERIES Z/T235<br />
Description<br />
The Z/T235 Series limit switches are designed for use with<br />
movable machine guards/access gates which must be closed<br />
for operator safety … and for any other presence/position<br />
sensing application normally addressed with conventional limit<br />
switches. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a higher<br />
level of safety and reliability than conventional spring-driven<br />
switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut.<br />
Each is available with a choice of six standard actuators …<br />
rounded plunger, roller plunger, roller rocking lever, rod<br />
rocking lever, adjustable roller rocking lever and one-way<br />
roller lever … mountable in any one of four 90° positions. All<br />
rocking levers are positively-locked to the shaft, and are<br />
adjustable throughout 360° in 10° increments.<br />
Units are available with a choice of slow-action or snap-action<br />
contacts.<br />
Their rugged metal housing and IP67 rating make them ideal<br />
alternatives to conventional limit switches.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The Z/T235 Series may be used in any presence/position<br />
sensing application normally addressed with conventional<br />
limit switches. Models with positive-break NC contacts are<br />
approved for use in safety systems. For safety applications<br />
the switch must be mounted such that the actuating element<br />
of the machine displaces the switch actuator far enough to<br />
exceed the positive-break point.<br />
Safety-Rated, Positive-Break<br />
Miniature DIN Limit Switches<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … won’t stick or weld shut.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile<br />
environments.<br />
• Six popular actuator styles … for application versatility.<br />
• Four 90° actuator mounting positions … provide<br />
installation flexibility.<br />
• Slow or snap-action operation … choose to best satisfy<br />
application requirements.<br />
• Safety-system approved … models with positive-break<br />
contacts approved for use in machine guarding applications.<br />
• Designed to meet the Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of EN<br />
954-1.<br />
PART NUMBER INFORMATION<br />
➀➁235-➂Z➃➄<br />
➀<strong>Co</strong>ntact operation<br />
➁Operating Head<br />
Optional Safety<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntroller.<br />
See Page 320.<br />
T<br />
Z<br />
S<br />
R<br />
4S<br />
4R<br />
K<br />
3K<br />
4K<br />
K4<br />
V7H<br />
V10H<br />
V12H<br />
V14H<br />
➂<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration 02<br />
11<br />
20<br />
➃Special extras<br />
H<br />
UE<br />
Z<br />
-1637<br />
➄<strong>Co</strong>nnection<br />
<br />
-NPT<br />
-ST<br />
Slow action<br />
Snap Action<br />
*Not for use in safety applications<br />
Note: See pages 226-230 for specific part numbers<br />
for available models.<br />
Rounded plunger<br />
Roller plunger<br />
Rounded plunger (threaded collar)<br />
Roller plunger (threaded collar)<br />
Roller lever<br />
Roller lever<br />
Roller lever<br />
Roller lever<br />
Roller rocking lever*<br />
Rod rocking lever*<br />
Roller rocking lever<br />
Roller rocking lever<br />
2 NC<br />
1 NO/1 NC<br />
2 NO*<br />
Staggered contacts<br />
Overlaping contacts<br />
Sealing of V operating head<br />
Gold contacts<br />
M20 threaded opening<br />
1/2" NPT treaded opening<br />
M12x1, 4 pin connector<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL<br />
224
Z/T235 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Chromated diecast zinc with brown<br />
enamel finish<br />
Operating Temperature –22°F to +175°F (–30°C to +80°C)<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
20 million operations<br />
Minimum Cam Speed Z235 Series: 0.04m./minute<br />
(Referenced to Plunger) T235 Series: 2.4m./minute<br />
Maximum Operating Rate 5000 operations/hour<br />
Bounce Time<br />
Z235 Series: £ 3 ms<br />
T235 Series: Function of cam speed<br />
Changeover Time Z235 Series: £ 5 ms for minimum<br />
cam speed<br />
T235 Series: Function of cam speed<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 BG-GS-ET15<br />
EN 60947-5-1 DIN EN 50 047<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 CSA<br />
EN 954-1 UL<br />
CE<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Gap<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
Switching Action<br />
Short Circuit Protection<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Type Terminals<br />
Fine silver<br />
Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically-separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
Z235 Series: 2x0.08 inches<br />
(2x2mm)<br />
T235 Series: 2x0.14 inches<br />
(2x3.5mm)<br />
4A/230VAC<br />
2.5A/400VAC<br />
Snap-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts (Z235)<br />
Slow-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts (T235)<br />
Fuse: 10A (time delay)<br />
2.5A (no time delay<br />
6A (time delay) as positive-break<br />
position switch<br />
500VAC<br />
6kV<br />
Screw terminals, maximum<br />
2.5mm (AWG13) wire<br />
CONTACT SYSTEMS<br />
Series T235<br />
Slow-action<br />
switch<br />
Series Z235<br />
Snap-action<br />
switch<br />
7<br />
225
Z/T235 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact function diagrams<br />
Snap action positive break<br />
1 NO + 1 NC<br />
0<br />
2,5<br />
4,8<br />
6<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
ZS 235-11z<br />
0<br />
2,5<br />
4,8<br />
6<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
ZR 235-11z<br />
1<br />
21-22<br />
1<br />
21-22<br />
Slow action<br />
1 NO + 1 NC (break before make)<br />
0 3,5 6<br />
2,5<br />
3,8<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
TS 235-11z<br />
0 3,5 6<br />
2,5<br />
3,8<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
TR 235-11z<br />
0 3,5 6<br />
0 3,5 6<br />
2 NO (simultaneous)<br />
3,5<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
TS 235-20z<br />
3,5<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
TR 235-20z<br />
2 NC (simultaneous)<br />
0 2,5 3,8 6<br />
2,5 3,8<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
TS 235-02z<br />
0 2,5 3,8 6<br />
2,5 3,8<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
TR 235-02z<br />
Dimensions<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
Types of Actuators<br />
Actuating force/-torque<br />
Actuating speed Z/T at<br />
Rounded plunger<br />
Style S<br />
9 N (19 N positive break)<br />
0°: min. 10/60 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
Roller plunger<br />
Style R<br />
9 N (19 N positive break)<br />
30°: min. 20/120 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
13<br />
21<br />
14<br />
22<br />
Snap Action<br />
positive break<br />
ZS 235-11z<br />
ZR 235-11z<br />
Part No.<br />
13<br />
21<br />
13<br />
23<br />
14<br />
22<br />
14<br />
24<br />
Slow action<br />
Slow action<br />
TS 235-11z<br />
TS 235-20z*<br />
TR 235-11z<br />
TR 235-20z*<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
Slow action<br />
TS 235-02z<br />
TR 235-02z<br />
226<br />
* Not for use in safety applications
Z/T235 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
0<br />
2,5<br />
6<br />
0<br />
2,5<br />
6<br />
0<br />
3,6<br />
9,3<br />
4,8<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
Z4S 235-11z<br />
4,8<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
Z4R 235-11z<br />
13-14<br />
7,1 21-22<br />
ZK 235-11z<br />
1<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
1<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
1,4<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
0 3,5 6<br />
0 3,5 6<br />
0 5,2<br />
9,3<br />
2,5<br />
3,8<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
T4S 235-11z<br />
2,5<br />
3,8<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
T4R 235-11z<br />
3,6<br />
5,5<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
TK 235-11z<br />
0 3,5 6<br />
0 3,5 6<br />
0 5,2<br />
9,3<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
T4S 235-20z<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
T4R 235-20z<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
TK 235-20z<br />
3,5<br />
3,5<br />
5,2<br />
0 2,5 3,8 6<br />
0 2,5 3,8 6<br />
0 3,6 5,5 9,3<br />
2,5<br />
3,8<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
T4S 235-02z<br />
2,5<br />
3,8<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
T4R 235-02z<br />
3,6<br />
5,5<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
TK 235-02z<br />
Rounded plunger (central mounting)<br />
Style 4S<br />
Top roller plunger (central mounting)<br />
Style 4R<br />
One-way roller lever<br />
Style K<br />
9 N (19 N positive break)<br />
0°: min. 10/60 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
9 N (19 N positive break)<br />
30°: min. 20/120 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
8 N (18 N positive break)<br />
30°: min. 24/240 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
7<br />
Z4S 235-11z<br />
Z4R 235-11z<br />
ZK 235-11z<br />
T4S 235-11z<br />
T4R 235-11z<br />
TK 235-11z<br />
T4S 235-20z*<br />
T4R 235-20z*<br />
TK 235-20z*<br />
T4S 235-02z<br />
T4R 235-02z<br />
TK 235-02z<br />
* Not for use in safety applications<br />
227
Z/T235 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact function diagrams<br />
Snap action positive break<br />
1 NO + 1 NC<br />
70°<br />
30° 0 30° 70°<br />
13-14<br />
57° 57° 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
12° 12°<br />
ZV12H 235-<br />
11z<br />
70°<br />
30° 0 30° 70°<br />
13-14<br />
57° 57° 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
12° 12°<br />
ZV14H 235-<br />
11z<br />
Slow action<br />
1 NO + 1 NC (break before make)<br />
2 NO (simultaneous)<br />
2 NC (simultaneous)<br />
70° 41° 0 41° 70°<br />
45°<br />
30°<br />
30°<br />
45°<br />
70° 41° 0 41° 70°<br />
41°<br />
41°<br />
70° 30° 0 30° 70°<br />
45° 45°<br />
45°<br />
45°<br />
30°<br />
30°<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
TV12H 235-<br />
11z<br />
TV12H 235-<br />
20z<br />
TV12H 235-<br />
02z<br />
70° 30° 0 30° 70°<br />
45°<br />
41°<br />
41°<br />
45°<br />
70° 41° 0 41° 70°<br />
41°<br />
41°<br />
70° 30° 0 30° 70°<br />
45° 45°<br />
45°<br />
45°<br />
30°<br />
30°<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
TV14H 235-<br />
11z<br />
TV14H 235-<br />
20z<br />
TV14H 235-<br />
02z<br />
Dimensions<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
Types of Actuators<br />
Actuating force/-torque<br />
Actuating speed Z/T at<br />
13<br />
21<br />
14<br />
22<br />
Snap Action<br />
positive break<br />
Roller rocking lever<br />
Style 12H<br />
15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)<br />
30°: min. 687/4122 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
ZV12H 235-11z<br />
Roller rocking lever<br />
Style 14H<br />
15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)<br />
30°: min. 687/4122 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
ZV14H 235-11z<br />
Part No.<br />
13<br />
21<br />
13<br />
23<br />
14<br />
22<br />
14<br />
24<br />
Slow action<br />
Slow action<br />
TV12H 235-11z<br />
TV12H 235-20z*<br />
TV14H 235-11z<br />
TV14H 235-20z*<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
Slow action<br />
TV12H 235-02z<br />
TV14H 235-02z<br />
228<br />
* Not for use in safety applications
Z/T235 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
70°<br />
30° 0 30° 70°<br />
13-14<br />
57° 57° 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
12° 12°<br />
ZV7H 235-<br />
11z<br />
70°<br />
30° 0 30° 70°<br />
13-14<br />
57° 57° 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
12° 12°<br />
ZV10H 235-<br />
11z<br />
0<br />
1,2<br />
2,8<br />
7<br />
13-14<br />
5,5 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
Z3K 235-<br />
11z<br />
70° 30° 0 30° 70°<br />
45°<br />
41°<br />
41°<br />
45°<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
TV7H 235-<br />
11z<br />
70° 41° 0 41° 70°<br />
45°<br />
30°<br />
30°<br />
45°<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
TV10H 235-<br />
11z<br />
0 4 7<br />
2,8<br />
4,3<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
T3K 235-<br />
11z<br />
70° 41° 0 41° 70°<br />
41°<br />
41°<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
TV7H 235-<br />
20z<br />
70° 41° 0 41° 70°<br />
41°<br />
41°<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
TV10H 235-<br />
20z<br />
0 4 7<br />
4<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
T3K 235-<br />
20z<br />
70° 30° 0 30° 70°<br />
45° 45°<br />
45°<br />
45°<br />
30°<br />
30°<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
TV7H 235-<br />
02z<br />
70° 30° 0 30° 70°<br />
45° 45° 11-12<br />
45° 45° 21-22<br />
30° 30°<br />
TV10H 235-<br />
02z<br />
0 2,8 4,3 7<br />
2,8<br />
4,3<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
T3K 235-<br />
02z<br />
Adjustable roller rocking lever*<br />
Style 7H<br />
Rod rocking lever*<br />
Style 10H<br />
One-way roller lever<br />
Style 3K<br />
15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)<br />
30°: min. 240/1440 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
ZV7H 235-11z*<br />
15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)<br />
30°: min. 687/4122 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
ZV10H 235-11z*<br />
9 N (19 N positive break)<br />
30°: min. 27/160 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
Z3K 235-11z<br />
7<br />
TV7H 235-11z*<br />
TV10H 235-11z*<br />
T3K 235-11z<br />
TV7H 235-20z*<br />
TV10H 235-20z*<br />
T3K 235-20z*<br />
TV7H 235-02z*<br />
TV10H 235-02z*<br />
T3K 235-02z<br />
* Not for use in safety applications<br />
229
Z/T235 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact function diagrams<br />
Snap action positive break<br />
1 NO + 1 NC<br />
0<br />
2<br />
5<br />
12<br />
13-14<br />
9,6 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
Z4K 235-<br />
11z<br />
0<br />
1,8<br />
4,9<br />
12,8<br />
13-14<br />
10,1 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
ZK4 235-<br />
11z<br />
Slow action<br />
1 NO + 1 NC (break before make)<br />
0 7 12<br />
5<br />
7,6<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
T4K 235-<br />
11z<br />
0 7,2 12,8<br />
4,9<br />
7,7<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
TK4 235-<br />
11z<br />
2 NO (simultaneous)<br />
0 7 12<br />
7<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
T4K 235-<br />
20z<br />
0 7,2 12,8<br />
7,2<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
TK4 235-<br />
20z<br />
2 NC (simultaneous)<br />
0 5 7,6 12<br />
5<br />
7,6<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
T4K 235-<br />
02z<br />
0 4,9 7,7 12,8<br />
4,9<br />
7,7<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
TK4 235-<br />
02z<br />
Dimensions<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
Types of Actuators<br />
One-way roller lever<br />
Style 4K<br />
One-way roller lever<br />
Style K4<br />
Actuating force/-torque<br />
Actuating speed Z/T at<br />
6 N (16 N positive break)<br />
30°: min. 44/264 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
6 N (16 N positive break)<br />
30°: min. 56/336 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
13<br />
21<br />
14<br />
22<br />
Snap Action<br />
positive break<br />
Z4K 235-11z<br />
ZK4 235-11z<br />
Part No.<br />
13<br />
21<br />
13<br />
23<br />
14<br />
22<br />
14<br />
24<br />
Slow action<br />
Slow action<br />
T4K 235-11z<br />
T4K 235-20z*<br />
TK4 235-11z<br />
TK4 235-20z*<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
Slow action<br />
T4K 235-02z<br />
TK4 235-02z<br />
230<br />
*Not for use in safety applications.
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design<br />
7<br />
231
SERIES Z/T236<br />
Safety-Rated, Positive-Break<br />
Miniature DIN Limit Switches<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … won’t stick or weld shut.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile<br />
environments.<br />
• Six popular actuator styles … for application versatility.<br />
• Four 90° actuator mounting positions … provide<br />
installation flexibility.<br />
• Slow or snap-action operation … choose to best satisfy<br />
application requirements.<br />
• Safety-system approved … models with positive-break<br />
contacts approved for use in machine guarding applications.<br />
• Designed to meet the Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of EN<br />
954-1.<br />
Description<br />
The Z/T236 Series limit switches are designed for use with<br />
movable machine guards/access gates which must be closed<br />
for operator safety … and for any other presence/position<br />
sensing application normally addressed with conventional limit<br />
switches. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a higher<br />
level of safety and/or reliability than conventional spring-driven<br />
switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut.<br />
Each is available with a choice of six standard actuators …<br />
rounded plunger, roller plunger, roller rocking lever, rod<br />
rocking lever, adjustable roller rocking lever and one-way<br />
roller lever … mountable in any one of four 90° positions. All<br />
rocking levers are positively-locked to the shaft, and are<br />
adjustable throughout 360° in 10° increments.<br />
Units are available with a choice of slow-action or snap-action<br />
contacts.<br />
Their rugged fiberglass-reinforced housing and IP67 rating<br />
make them ideal alternatives to conventional limit switches.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The Z/T236 Series may be used in any presence/position<br />
sensing application normally addressed with conventional<br />
limit switches. Models with positive-break NC contacts are<br />
approved for use in safety systems. For safety applications<br />
the switch must be mounted such that the actuating element<br />
of the machine displaces the switch actuator far enough to<br />
exceed the positive-break point.<br />
PART NUMBER INFORMATION<br />
➀➁236-➂Z➃➄<br />
➀<strong>Co</strong>ntact operation<br />
➁Operating Head<br />
T<br />
Z<br />
S<br />
R<br />
4S<br />
4R<br />
1R<br />
K<br />
3K<br />
4K<br />
K4<br />
V1H<br />
V7H<br />
V10H<br />
➂<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration 02<br />
11<br />
20<br />
➃Special extras<br />
H<br />
UE<br />
Z<br />
-1637<br />
➄<strong>Co</strong>nnection<br />
<br />
NPT<br />
-ST<br />
Slow action<br />
Snap Action<br />
Rounded plunger<br />
Roller plunger<br />
Rounded plunger (threaded collar)<br />
Roller plunger (threaded collar)<br />
Roller lever<br />
Roller lever<br />
Roller lever<br />
Roller lever<br />
Roller lever<br />
Roller rocking lever<br />
Roller rocking lever*<br />
Rod rocking lever*<br />
2 NC<br />
1 NO/1 NC<br />
2 NO*<br />
Staggered contacts<br />
Overlaping contacts<br />
Sealing of V operating head<br />
Gold contacts<br />
M20 threaded opening<br />
1/2" NPT treaded opening<br />
M12x1, 4 pin connector<br />
*Not for use in safety applications<br />
Note: See pages 234-238 for specific part numbers for available models.<br />
232<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
Z/T236 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Glass fiber reinforced selfextinguishing<br />
thermoplastic<br />
Operating Temperature –22°F to +175°F (–30°C to +80°C)<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
20 million operations<br />
Minimum Cam Speed Z236 Series: 0.04m./minute<br />
(Referenced to Plunger) T236 Series: 2.4m./minute<br />
Maximum Operating Rate 5000 operations/hour<br />
Bounce Time<br />
Z236 Series: £ 3 ms<br />
T236 Series: Function of cam speed<br />
Changeover Time Z236 Series: £ 5 ms for minimum<br />
cam speed<br />
T236 Series: Function of cam speed<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 BG-GS-ET15<br />
EN 60947-5-1 DIN EN 50 047<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 CSA<br />
EN 954-1<br />
UL<br />
CE<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Gap<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
Switching Action<br />
Short Circuit Protection<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Type Terminals<br />
Fine silver<br />
Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically-separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
Z236 Series: 2x0.08 inches<br />
(2x2mm)<br />
T236 Series: 2x0.14 inches<br />
(2x3.5mm)<br />
4A/230VAC<br />
2.5A/400VAC<br />
Snap-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts (Z236)<br />
Slow-action, positive-break NC<br />
contacts (T236)<br />
Fuse: 10A (time delay)<br />
2.5A (no time delay<br />
6A (time delay) as positive-break<br />
position switch<br />
500VAC<br />
6kV<br />
Screw terminals, maximum<br />
2.5mm (AWG13) wire<br />
CONTACT SYSTEMS<br />
Series T236<br />
Slow-action<br />
switch<br />
Series Z236<br />
Snap-action<br />
switch<br />
7<br />
233
Z/T236 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact function diagrams<br />
Snap action positive break<br />
1 NO + 1 NC<br />
0<br />
2,5<br />
4,8<br />
6<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
ZS 236-11z<br />
0<br />
2,5<br />
4,8<br />
6<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
ZR 236-11z<br />
1<br />
21-22<br />
1<br />
21-22<br />
Slow action<br />
1 NO + 1 NC (break before make)<br />
0 3,5 6<br />
2,5<br />
3,8<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
TS 236-11z<br />
0 3,5 6<br />
2,5<br />
3,8<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
TR 236-11z<br />
0 3,5 6<br />
0 3,5 6<br />
2 NO (simultaneous)<br />
3,5<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
TS 236-20z<br />
3,5<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
TR 236-20z<br />
2 NC (simultaneous)<br />
0 2,5 3,8 6<br />
2,5 3,8<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
TS 236-02z<br />
0 2,5 3,8 6<br />
2,5 3,8<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
TR 236-02z<br />
Dimensions<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
Types of Actuators<br />
Actuating force/-torque<br />
Actuating speed Z/T at<br />
Rounded plunger<br />
Style S<br />
9 N (19 N positive break)<br />
0°: min. 10/60 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
Roller plunger<br />
Style R<br />
9 N (19 N positive break)<br />
30°: min. 20/120 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
13<br />
21<br />
14<br />
22<br />
Snap Action<br />
positive break<br />
ZS 236-11z<br />
ZR 236-11z<br />
Part No.<br />
13<br />
21<br />
13<br />
23<br />
14<br />
22<br />
14<br />
24<br />
Slow action<br />
Slow action<br />
TS 236-11z<br />
TS 236-20z*<br />
TR 236-11z<br />
TR 236-20z*<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
Slow action<br />
TS 236-02z<br />
TR 236-02z<br />
234<br />
* Not for use in safety applications
Z/T236 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
0<br />
2,5<br />
6<br />
0<br />
2,5<br />
6<br />
0<br />
3,6<br />
9,3<br />
4,8<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
Z4S 236-11z<br />
4,8<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
Z4R 236-11z<br />
13-14<br />
7,1 21-22<br />
ZK 236-11z<br />
1<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
1<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
1,4<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
0 3,5 6<br />
0 3,5 6<br />
0 5,2<br />
9,3<br />
2,5<br />
3,8<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
T4S 236-11z<br />
2,5<br />
3,8<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
T4R 236-11z<br />
3,6<br />
5,5<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
TK 236-11z<br />
0 3,5 6<br />
0 3,5 6<br />
0 5,2<br />
9,3<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
T4S 236-20z<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
T4R 236-20z<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
TK 236-20z<br />
3,5<br />
3,5<br />
5,2<br />
0 2,5 3,8 6<br />
0 2,5 3,8 6<br />
0 3,6 5,5 9,3<br />
2,5<br />
3,8<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
T4S 236-02z<br />
2,5<br />
3,8<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
T4R 236-02z<br />
3,6<br />
5,5<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
TK 236-02z<br />
Rounded plunger (central mounting)<br />
Style 4S<br />
Top roller plunger (central mounting)<br />
Style 4R<br />
Top roller lever<br />
Style K<br />
9N (19N positive break)<br />
0°: min. 10/60 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
9 N (19N positive break)<br />
30°: min. 20/120 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
8 N (18 N positive break)<br />
30°: min. 24/240 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
7<br />
Z4S 236-11z<br />
Z4R 236-11z<br />
ZK 236-11z<br />
T4S 236-11z<br />
T4R 236-11z<br />
TK 236-11z<br />
T4S 236-20z*<br />
T4R 236-20z*<br />
TK 236-20z*<br />
T4S 236-02z<br />
T4R 236-02z<br />
TK 236-02z<br />
* Not for use in safety applications<br />
235
Z/T236 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact function diagrams<br />
0<br />
2,7<br />
7<br />
13-14<br />
Snap action positive break<br />
1 NO + 1 NC<br />
ZV1H 236-<br />
11z<br />
5,4<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
Z1R 236-<br />
11z<br />
21-22<br />
1<br />
Slow action<br />
1 NO + 1 NC (break before make)<br />
TV1H 236-<br />
11z<br />
0<br />
2,3<br />
7<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
T1R 236-<br />
11z<br />
1<br />
2 NO (simultaneous)<br />
70° 41° 0 41° 70°<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
TV1H 236-<br />
20z<br />
0<br />
2,3 7<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
T1R 236-<br />
20z<br />
41°<br />
41°<br />
2,3<br />
2 NC (simultaneous)<br />
70° 30° 0 30° 70°<br />
45° 45°<br />
45°<br />
45°<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
TV1H 236-<br />
02z<br />
0<br />
1 2,3<br />
7<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
T1R 236-<br />
02z<br />
30°<br />
30°<br />
2,3<br />
Dimensions<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
Types of Actuators<br />
Actuating force/-torque<br />
Actuating speed Z/T at<br />
Roller rocking lever<br />
Style 1H<br />
15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)<br />
30°: min. 92/492 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
Top roller lever<br />
Style 1R<br />
15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)<br />
30°: min. 27/160 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
13<br />
21<br />
14<br />
22<br />
Snap Action<br />
positive break<br />
ZV1H 236-11z<br />
Z1R 236-11z<br />
Part No.<br />
13<br />
21<br />
13<br />
23<br />
14<br />
22<br />
14<br />
24<br />
Slow action<br />
Slow action<br />
TV1H 236-11z<br />
TV1H 236-20z*<br />
T1R 236-11z<br />
T1R 236-20z*<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
Slow action<br />
TV1H 236-02z<br />
T1R 236-02z<br />
236<br />
* Not for use in safety applications
Z/T236 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
0<br />
2,8<br />
7<br />
13-14<br />
ZV7H 236-<br />
11z<br />
ZV10H 236-<br />
11z<br />
5,5 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
Z3K 236-<br />
11z<br />
21-22<br />
1,2<br />
TV7H 236-<br />
11z<br />
TV10H 236-<br />
11z<br />
0 4 7<br />
2,8<br />
4,3<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
T3K 236-<br />
11z<br />
70° 41° 0 41° 70°<br />
41°<br />
41°<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
TV7H 236-<br />
20z<br />
70° 41° 0 41° 70°<br />
41°<br />
41°<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
TV10H 236-<br />
20z<br />
0 4 7<br />
4<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
T3K 236-<br />
20z<br />
70° 30° 0 30° 70°<br />
45° 45°<br />
45°<br />
45°<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
TV7H 236-<br />
02z<br />
70° 30° 0 30° 70°<br />
45° 45°<br />
45° 45°<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
TV10H 236-<br />
02z<br />
0 2,8 4,3 7<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
T3K 236-<br />
02z<br />
30°<br />
30°<br />
30°<br />
30°<br />
2,8<br />
4,3<br />
Adjustable roller rocking lever*<br />
Style 7H<br />
Rod rocking lever*<br />
Style 10H<br />
One-way roller lever<br />
Style 3K<br />
15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)<br />
30°: min. 240/1440 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)<br />
30°: min. 687/4122 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
9 N (19 N positive break)<br />
30°: min. 27/160 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
7<br />
ZV7H 236-11z*<br />
ZV10H 236-11z*<br />
Z3K 236-11z<br />
TV7H 236-11z*<br />
TV10H 236-11z*<br />
T3K 236-11z<br />
TV7H 236-20z*<br />
TV10H 236-20z*<br />
T3K 236-20z*<br />
TV7H 236-02z*<br />
TV10H 236-02z*<br />
T3K 236-02z<br />
* Not for use in safety applications<br />
237
Z/T236 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact function diagrams<br />
Snap action positive break<br />
1 NO + 1 NC<br />
0<br />
2<br />
5<br />
12<br />
13-14<br />
9,6 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
Z4K 236-<br />
11z<br />
0<br />
1,8<br />
4,9<br />
12,8<br />
13-14<br />
10,1 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
ZK4 236-<br />
11z<br />
Slow action<br />
1 NO + 1 NC (break before make)<br />
0 7 12<br />
5<br />
7,6<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
T4K 236-<br />
11z<br />
0 7,2 12,8<br />
4,9<br />
7,7<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
TK4 236-<br />
11z<br />
2 NO (simultaneous)<br />
0 7 12<br />
7<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
T4K 236-<br />
20z<br />
0 7,2 12,8<br />
7,2<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
TK4 236-<br />
20z<br />
2 NC (simultaneous)<br />
0 5 7,6 12<br />
5<br />
7,6<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
T4K 236-<br />
02z<br />
0 4,9 7,7 12,8<br />
4,9<br />
7,7<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
TK4 236-<br />
02z<br />
Dimensions<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
Types of Actuators<br />
One-way roller lever<br />
Style 4K<br />
One-way roller lever<br />
Style K4<br />
Actuating force/-torque<br />
Actuating speed Z/T at<br />
6 N (16 N positive break)<br />
30°: min. 44/264 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
6 N (16 N positive break)<br />
30°: min. 56/336 mm/min, max. 1 m/s<br />
13<br />
21<br />
14<br />
22<br />
Snap Action<br />
positive break<br />
Z4K 236-11z<br />
ZK4 236-11z<br />
Part No.<br />
13<br />
21<br />
13<br />
23<br />
14<br />
22<br />
14<br />
24<br />
Slow action<br />
Slow action<br />
T4K 236-11z<br />
T4K 236-20z*<br />
TK4 236-11z<br />
TK4 236-20z*<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
Slow action<br />
T4K 236-02z<br />
TK4 236-02z<br />
238<br />
* Not for use in safety applications
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design<br />
7<br />
239
SERIES Z/T335<br />
Description<br />
The Z/T335 Series limit switches are designed for use with<br />
movable machine guards/access gates which must be closed<br />
for operator safety … and for any other presence/position<br />
sensing application normally addressed with conventional limit<br />
switches. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a higher<br />
level of safety and/or reliability than conventional spring-driven<br />
switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut.<br />
Each is available with a choice of six standard actuators …<br />
rounded plunger, roller plunger, roller rocking lever, rod<br />
rocking lever, adjustable roller rocking lever and one-way<br />
roller lever … mountable in any one of four 90° positions. All<br />
rocking levers are positively-locked to the shaft, and are<br />
adjustable throughout 360° in 10° increments.<br />
Units are available with a choice of slow-action or snap-action<br />
contacts.<br />
Their rugged metal housing and IP67 rating make them ideal<br />
alternatives to conventional limit switches.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The Z/T335 Series may be used in any presence/position<br />
sensing application normally addressed with conventional<br />
limit switches. Models with positive-break NC contacts are<br />
approved for use in safety systems. For safety applications<br />
the switch must be mounted such that the actuating element<br />
of the machine displaces the switch actuator far enough to<br />
exceed the positive-break point.<br />
Heavy-Duty Safety-Rated,<br />
Positive-Break Limit Switches<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … won’t stick or weld shut.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile<br />
environments.<br />
• Six popular actuator styles … for application versatility.<br />
• Four 90° actuator mounting positions … provide<br />
installation flexibility.<br />
• Slow or snap-action operation … choose to best satisfy<br />
application requirements.<br />
• Safety-system approved … models with positive-break<br />
contacts approved for use in machine guarding applications.<br />
• Designed to meet the Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of EN<br />
954-1.<br />
• Optional LED indicators … provide visual display of<br />
supply voltage and switch operation.<br />
PART NUMBER INFORMATION<br />
➀➁335-➂Z➃➄<br />
➀<strong>Co</strong>ntact operation<br />
➁Operating Head<br />
Optional Safety<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntroller.<br />
See Page 320.<br />
T<br />
Z<br />
➂<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration 02<br />
11<br />
20<br />
12<br />
03<br />
01/01<br />
➃Special extras<br />
H<br />
UE<br />
-1637<br />
➄<strong>Co</strong>nnection<br />
Slow action<br />
Snap Action<br />
S Rounded plunger<br />
R Roller plunger<br />
4VH Roller rocking lever<br />
4V7H Roller rocking lever*<br />
4V10H Rod rocking lever*<br />
1K Roller lever<br />
3K Roller lever<br />
<br />
NPT<br />
-ST<br />
*Not for use in safety applications<br />
Note: See pages 242-244 for specific part numbers<br />
for available models.<br />
2 NC<br />
1 NO/1 NC<br />
2 NO*<br />
1 NO/2 NC<br />
3 NC<br />
1 NC (left) & 1 NC (right)<br />
Staggered contacts<br />
Overlaping contacts<br />
Gold contacts<br />
M20 threaded opening<br />
1/2" NPT treaded opening<br />
M12x1, 4 pin connector<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL INC.<br />
240
Z/T335 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Diecast aluminum with enamel<br />
finish<br />
Operating Temperature –22°F to +195°F (–30°C to +90°C)<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
30 million operations<br />
Maximum Operating Rate 5000 operations/hour<br />
Bounce Time<br />
Z335 Series: < 2 ms<br />
T335 Series: Function of cam speed<br />
Changeover Time Z335 Series: < 2 ms for cam speed<br />
of 1 mm/minute<br />
T335 Series: Function of cam speed<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-15<br />
EN 60947-5-1 DIN EN 50041<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 CSA<br />
EN 954-1<br />
UL<br />
CE<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Gap<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
Switching Action<br />
Short Circuit Protection<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Type Terminals<br />
Fine silver<br />
Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically-separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
Z335 Series: 2x0.03 inches<br />
T335 Series: 2x0.16 inches<br />
4A/230VAC<br />
2.5A/400VAC<br />
Z335 Series: Snap-action with<br />
positive-break NC<br />
contacts<br />
T335 Series: Slow-action,<br />
positive-break NC<br />
contacts<br />
Fuse: 10A (time delay)<br />
16A (no time delay<br />
6A (time delay) as positivebreak<br />
position switch<br />
500VAC<br />
6kV<br />
Screw terminals, maximum<br />
2.5mm 2 (AWG13) wire<br />
SNAP ACTION CONTACT SYSTEMS<br />
SLOW ACTION CONTACT SYSTEMS<br />
Slow Action Switch<br />
T335<br />
Snap Action Switch<br />
Z335<br />
LED INDICATOR MODELS<br />
Green LED (gn) indicator supply voltage and yellow LED (ye) indicator for switch operation of<br />
NO or NC contacts for 24VDC. Available for all models of Series 335.<br />
Shown here:<br />
Z4VH 335-11zG24<br />
Wiring diagram:<br />
7<br />
Shown here:<br />
indication of operation of NC contact<br />
(terminals 21-22);<br />
for indication of operation of NO contact use<br />
terminals 13-14<br />
protected against wrong polarity connection<br />
protected against transient voltages 700V<br />
Attention: no inductive loads<br />
241
Z/T335 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact function diagrams<br />
Snap action positive break<br />
1 NO + 1 NC<br />
0<br />
0<br />
2<br />
1<br />
1,6<br />
6<br />
13-14<br />
3,9 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
3,9 6<br />
ZS 335-11z<br />
0<br />
0<br />
2<br />
1<br />
1,6<br />
6<br />
13-14<br />
3,9 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
3,9 6<br />
ZR 335-11z<br />
2 NC<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
11-12<br />
ZS 335-02z<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
11-12<br />
ZR 335-02z<br />
21-22<br />
21-22<br />
0,8<br />
0,8<br />
Slow action 1 NO + 1 NC<br />
break before make or make before break<br />
2 NO simultaneous contacts staggered<br />
(2-step)<br />
2 NC simultaneous contacts staggered<br />
(2-step)<br />
1 NC + 1 NC (CW-CCW)<br />
-11z<br />
-20z<br />
-02z<br />
0 3<br />
6<br />
2<br />
2,8<br />
0 3<br />
6<br />
3<br />
0 2 2,8<br />
6<br />
TS 335…<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
0 3<br />
6<br />
3,7<br />
4,5<br />
0 3<br />
6<br />
1,3<br />
0 3,7 4,5 6<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
-11zu<br />
-20zh<br />
-02zh<br />
-11z<br />
-20z<br />
-02z<br />
0 3<br />
6<br />
2<br />
2,8<br />
0 3<br />
6<br />
3<br />
0 2 2,8<br />
6<br />
TR 335…<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
0 3<br />
6<br />
3,7<br />
4,5<br />
0 3<br />
6<br />
1,3<br />
0 3,7 4,5 6<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
-11zu<br />
-20zh<br />
-02zh<br />
2<br />
2,8<br />
2<br />
2,8<br />
2<br />
2,8<br />
2<br />
2,8<br />
Dimensions<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
Types of Actuators<br />
Rounded plunger<br />
Style S<br />
Roller plunger<br />
Style R<br />
Actuating Force<br />
Actuating Force<br />
13<br />
21<br />
14<br />
22<br />
Snap Action<br />
positive break<br />
ZS 335-11z<br />
12 N<br />
ZR 335-11z<br />
12 N<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
Snap Action<br />
positive break<br />
ZS 335-02z<br />
12 N<br />
ZR 335-02z<br />
12 N<br />
Part No.<br />
13<br />
21<br />
13<br />
23<br />
14<br />
22<br />
14<br />
24<br />
Slow Action<br />
Make before break<br />
Slow Action<br />
2-step<br />
TS 335-11z<br />
TS 335-11zu<br />
TS 335-20z*<br />
TS 335-20zh*<br />
15 N<br />
17 N<br />
TR 335-11z<br />
TR 335-11zu<br />
TR 335-20z*<br />
TR 335-20zh*<br />
15 N<br />
17 N<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
Slow Action<br />
2-step<br />
TS 335-02z<br />
TS 335-02zh<br />
14 N<br />
TR 335-02z<br />
TR 335-02zh<br />
14 N<br />
242<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
Slow Action<br />
1 NC CW + 1 NC CCW<br />
* Not for use in safety applications
Z/T335 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
80°<br />
24° 0 24°<br />
80°<br />
80°<br />
24° 0 24°<br />
80°<br />
80°<br />
24° 0 24°<br />
80°<br />
45° 45°<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
Z4VH 335-11z<br />
45° 45°<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
Z4V7H 335-11z<br />
45° 45°<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
Z4V10H 335-11z<br />
12° 12°<br />
21-22<br />
12° 12°<br />
21-22<br />
12° 12°<br />
21-22<br />
80°<br />
45° 0<br />
45° 80°<br />
80°<br />
45° 0<br />
45° 80°<br />
80° 45° 0<br />
45° 80°<br />
11-12<br />
11-12<br />
11-12<br />
19° 19°<br />
21-22<br />
11-12<br />
Z4VH 335-02z<br />
19° 19°<br />
21-22<br />
11-12<br />
Z4V7H 335-02z<br />
19° 19°<br />
21-22<br />
11-12<br />
Z4V10H 335-02z<br />
21-22<br />
21-22<br />
21-22<br />
8° 8°<br />
8° 8°<br />
8° 8°<br />
-11z<br />
-20z<br />
-02z<br />
T4VH 335…<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
13-14<br />
13-14<br />
34°<br />
34° 21-22<br />
56° 56° 21-22<br />
24° 24°<br />
4 5°<br />
45°<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
13-14<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
23-24<br />
36°<br />
36°<br />
16° 16°<br />
80° 24° 0 24° 80°<br />
80° 45° 0 45° 80°<br />
34°<br />
34° 11-12<br />
56°<br />
56° 11-12<br />
34°<br />
34° 21-22<br />
34°<br />
34° 21-22<br />
-11zu<br />
-20zh<br />
-02zh<br />
-11z<br />
-20z<br />
T4V7H 335…<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
13-14<br />
13-14<br />
34°<br />
34° 21-22<br />
56° 56° 21-22<br />
24° 24°<br />
4 5°<br />
45°<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
13-14<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
23-24<br />
36°<br />
36°<br />
16° 16°<br />
-11zu<br />
-20zh<br />
-11z<br />
-20z<br />
T4V10H 335…<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
13-14<br />
13-14<br />
34°<br />
34° 21-22<br />
56° 56° 21-22<br />
24° 24°<br />
45° 45°<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
13-14<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
23-24<br />
36°<br />
36°<br />
16° 16°<br />
-11zu<br />
-20zh<br />
24° 24°<br />
24° 24°<br />
80° 0 24° 58°<br />
-01/01zh<br />
50° 11-12<br />
21-22<br />
24°<br />
-02z<br />
80° 24° 0 24° 80°<br />
34°<br />
34° 11-12<br />
34°<br />
34° 21-22<br />
24° 24°<br />
80° 45° 0 45° 80°<br />
56°<br />
56° 11-12<br />
34°<br />
34° 21-22<br />
24° 24°<br />
-02zh<br />
-02z<br />
80° 24° 0 24° 80°<br />
34° 34° 11-12<br />
34° 34° 21-22<br />
24° 24°<br />
80° 45° 0 45° 80°<br />
56°<br />
56° 11-12<br />
34° 34° 21-22<br />
24° 24°<br />
-02zh<br />
4V operating head with<br />
roller rocking lever<br />
Style H<br />
Actuating Force<br />
4V operating head with<br />
adjustable roller rocking lever<br />
Style 7H*<br />
Actuating Force<br />
4V operating head with<br />
rod rocking lever<br />
Style 10H*<br />
Actuating Force<br />
Z4VH 335-11z<br />
27 Ncm<br />
Z4V7H 335-11z*<br />
27 Ncm<br />
Z4V10H 335-11z*<br />
27 Ncm<br />
7<br />
Z4VH 335-02z<br />
27 Ncm<br />
Z4V7H 335-02z*<br />
27 Ncm<br />
Z4V10H 335-02z*<br />
27 Ncm<br />
T4VH 335-11z<br />
T4VH 335-11zu<br />
27.5 Ncm<br />
T4V7H 335-11z*<br />
T4V7H 335-11zu*<br />
27.5 Ncm<br />
T4V10H 335-11z*<br />
T4V10H 335-11zu*<br />
27.5 Ncm<br />
T4VH 335-20z*<br />
T4VH 335-20zh*<br />
28 Ncm<br />
T4V7H 335-20z*<br />
T4V7H 335-20zh*<br />
28 Ncm<br />
T4V10H 335-20z*<br />
T4V10H 335-20zh*<br />
28 Ncm<br />
T4VH 335-02z<br />
T4VH 335-02zh<br />
27.5 Ncm<br />
T4V7H 335-02z*<br />
T4V7H 335-02zh*<br />
27.5 Ncm<br />
T4V10H 335-02z*<br />
T4V10H 335-02zh*<br />
27.5 Ncm<br />
TVH 335-01/01z<br />
26.5 Ncm<br />
(other levers upon request)<br />
* Not for use in safety applications<br />
243
Z/T335 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact function diagrams<br />
Snap action positive break<br />
1 NO + 1 NC<br />
0<br />
0<br />
2,1<br />
1<br />
1,6<br />
6,3<br />
13-14<br />
4,2 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
6,3<br />
Z1K 335-11z<br />
0 4,5<br />
2,2<br />
0 3,6<br />
11<br />
13-14<br />
8,8 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
11<br />
Z3K 335-11z<br />
2 NC<br />
4,2<br />
4,2<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
11-12<br />
Z1K 335-02z<br />
8,8<br />
8,8<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
11-12<br />
Z3K 335-02z<br />
21-22<br />
21-22<br />
0,8<br />
1,4<br />
Slow action 1 NO + 1 NC<br />
break before make or make before break<br />
2 NO simultaneous contacts staggered<br />
(2-step)<br />
2 NC simultaneous contacts staggered<br />
(2-step)<br />
1 NC + 1 NC (CW-CCW)<br />
-11z<br />
-20z<br />
-02z<br />
0 3,2<br />
6,3<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
2,1 3<br />
0 6,3<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
3,2<br />
0 2,1 3<br />
6,3<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
2,1 3<br />
T1K 335…<br />
0 3,2<br />
6,3<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
4 5<br />
0 3,2<br />
6,3<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
1,3<br />
0 4 5 6,3<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
2,1 3<br />
-11zu<br />
-20zh<br />
-02zh<br />
-11z<br />
-20z<br />
-02z<br />
0 6,6<br />
11<br />
4,5<br />
6,3<br />
0 11<br />
6,6<br />
0 4,5 6,3 11<br />
4,5<br />
6,3<br />
T3K 335…<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
0 6,6 11<br />
8,2 9,9<br />
0 6,6 11<br />
2,8<br />
0 4,5 8,2 11<br />
4,5 6,3<br />
9,9<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
-11zu<br />
-20zh<br />
-02zh<br />
Dimensions<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
Types of Actuators<br />
One-way roller lever<br />
Style 1K<br />
One-way roller lever<br />
Style 3K<br />
Actuating Force<br />
Actuating Force<br />
13<br />
21<br />
14<br />
22<br />
Snap Action<br />
positive break<br />
Z1K 335-11z<br />
12 N<br />
Z3K 335-11z<br />
5.0 N<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
Snap Action<br />
positive break<br />
Z1K 335-02z<br />
12 N<br />
Z3K 335-02z<br />
5.0 N<br />
Part No.<br />
13<br />
21<br />
13<br />
23<br />
14<br />
22<br />
14<br />
24<br />
Slow Action<br />
Make before break<br />
Slow Action<br />
2-step<br />
T1K 335-11z<br />
T1K 335-11zu<br />
T1K 335-20z*<br />
T1K 335-20zh*<br />
15 N<br />
17 N<br />
T3K 335-11z<br />
T3K 335-11zu<br />
T3K 335-20z*<br />
T3K 335-20zh*<br />
6.3 N<br />
7.2 N<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
Slow Action<br />
2-step<br />
T1K 335-02z<br />
T1K 335-02zh<br />
14 N<br />
T3K 335-02z<br />
T3K 335-02zh<br />
6.0 N<br />
244<br />
* Not for use in safety applications
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design<br />
7<br />
245
SERIES Z/T336<br />
Heavy-Duty Safety-Rated,<br />
Positive-Break Limit Switches<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … won’t stick or weld shut.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile<br />
environments.<br />
• Six popular actuator styles … for application versatility.<br />
• Four 90° actuator mounting positions … provide<br />
installation flexibility.<br />
• Slow or snap-action operation … choose to best satisfy<br />
application requirements.<br />
• Safety-system approved … models with positive-break<br />
contacts approved for use in machine guarding applications.<br />
• Designed to meet the Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of EN<br />
954-1.<br />
Description<br />
The Z/T336 Series limit switches are designed for use with<br />
movable machine guards/access gates which must be closed<br />
for operator safety … and for any other presence/position<br />
sensing application normally addressed with conventional limit<br />
switches. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a higher<br />
level of safety and/or reliability than conventional spring-driven<br />
switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut.<br />
Each is available with a choice of six standard actuators …<br />
rounded plunger, roller plunger, roller rocking lever, rod<br />
rocking lever, adjustable roller rocking lever and one-way<br />
roller lever … mountable in any one of four 90° positions. All<br />
rocking levers are positively-locked to the shaft, and are<br />
adjustable throughout 360° in 10° increments.<br />
Units are available with a choice of slow-action or snap-action<br />
contacts.<br />
Their rugged fiberglass-reinforced thermoplastic housing and<br />
IP67 rating make them ideal alternatives to conventional limit<br />
switches.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The Z/T336 Series may be used in any presence/position<br />
sensing application normally addressed with conventional<br />
limit switches. Models with positive-break NC contacts are<br />
approved for use in safety systems. For safety applications<br />
the switch must be mounted such that the actuating element<br />
of the machine displaces the switch actuator far enough to<br />
exceed the positive-break point.<br />
PART NUMBER INFORMATION<br />
➀➁336-➂Z➃➄<br />
➀<strong>Co</strong>ntact operation<br />
➁Operating Head<br />
T<br />
Z<br />
➂<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration 02<br />
11<br />
20<br />
01/01<br />
➃Special extras<br />
H<br />
UE<br />
-1637<br />
➄<strong>Co</strong>nnection<br />
Slow action<br />
Snap Action<br />
S Rounded plunger<br />
R Roller plunger<br />
4VH Roller rocking lever<br />
4V7H Roller rocking lever*<br />
4V10H Rod rocking lever*<br />
1K Roller lever<br />
3K Roller lever<br />
<br />
-NPT<br />
-ST<br />
2 NC<br />
1 NO/1 NC<br />
2 NO*<br />
1 NC (left) & 1 NC (right)<br />
Staggered contacts<br />
Overlaping contacts<br />
Gold contacts<br />
M20 threaded opening<br />
1/2" NPT treaded opening<br />
M12x1, 4 pin connector<br />
*Not for use in safety applications<br />
Note: See pages 248-250 for specific part numbers for available models.<br />
246<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
Z/T336 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Glass fiber reinforced selfextinguishing<br />
thermoplastic<br />
Operating Temperature –22°F to +195°F (–30°C to +90°C)<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
30 million operations<br />
Maximum Operating Rate 5000 operations/hour<br />
Bounce Time<br />
Z336 Series: < 2 ms<br />
T336 Series: Function of cam speed<br />
Changeover Time Z336 Series: < 2 ms for cam speed<br />
of 1 mm/minute<br />
T336 Series: Function of cam speed<br />
Degree of Protection IP67<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-15<br />
EN 60947-5-1 DIN EN 50041<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 CSA<br />
EN 954-1 UL<br />
CE<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Gap<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
Switching Action<br />
Short Circuit Protection<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Type Terminals<br />
Fine silver<br />
Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically-separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
Z336 Series: 2x0.03 inches<br />
T336 Series: 2x0.16 inches<br />
4A/230VAC<br />
2.5A/400VAC<br />
Z336 Series: Snap-action with<br />
positive-break NC<br />
contacts<br />
T336 Series: Slow-action,<br />
positive-break NC<br />
contacts<br />
Fuse: 10A (time delay)<br />
16A (no time delay<br />
6A (time delay) as positivebreak<br />
position switch<br />
500VAC<br />
6kV<br />
Screw terminals, maximum<br />
2.5mm (AWG13) wire<br />
SNAP ACTION CONTACT SYSTEMS<br />
SLOW ACTION CONTACT SYSTEMS<br />
Slow Action Switch<br />
T336<br />
Snap Action Switch<br />
Z336<br />
7<br />
247
Z/T336 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact function diagrams<br />
Snap action positive break<br />
1 NO + 1 NC<br />
0<br />
0<br />
2<br />
1<br />
1,6<br />
6<br />
13-14<br />
3,9 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
3,9 6<br />
ZS 336-11z<br />
0<br />
0<br />
2<br />
1<br />
1,6<br />
6<br />
13-14<br />
3,9 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
3,9 6<br />
ZR 336-11z<br />
2 NC<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
11-12<br />
ZS 336-02z<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
11-12<br />
ZR 336-02z<br />
21-22<br />
21-22<br />
0,8<br />
0,8<br />
Slow action 1 NO + 1 NC<br />
break before make or make before break<br />
2 NO simultaneous contacts staggered<br />
(2-step)<br />
2 NC simultaneous contacts staggered<br />
(2-step)<br />
1 NC + 1 NC (CW-CCW)<br />
-11z<br />
-20z<br />
-02z<br />
0 3<br />
6<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
2 2,8<br />
0 3<br />
6<br />
3<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
0 2 2,8<br />
6<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
TS 336…<br />
0 3<br />
6<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
3,7 4,5<br />
0 3<br />
6<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
1,3<br />
0 3,7 4,5 6<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
-11zu<br />
-20zh<br />
-02zh<br />
-11z<br />
-20z<br />
-02z<br />
0 3<br />
6<br />
2<br />
2,8<br />
0 3<br />
6<br />
3<br />
0 2 2,8<br />
6<br />
TR 336…<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
0 3<br />
6<br />
3,7<br />
4,5<br />
0 3<br />
6<br />
1,3<br />
0 3,7 4,5 6<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
-11zu<br />
-20zh<br />
-02zh<br />
2<br />
2,8<br />
2<br />
2,8<br />
2<br />
2,8<br />
2<br />
2,8<br />
Dimensions<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
Types of Actuators<br />
Rounded plunger<br />
Style S<br />
Roller plunger<br />
Style R<br />
Actuating Force<br />
Actuating Force<br />
13<br />
21<br />
14<br />
22<br />
Snap Action<br />
positive break<br />
ZS 336-11z<br />
12 N<br />
ZR 336-11z<br />
12 N<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
Snap Action<br />
positive break<br />
ZS 336-02z<br />
12 N<br />
ZR 336-02z<br />
12 N<br />
Part No.<br />
13<br />
21<br />
13<br />
23<br />
14<br />
22<br />
14<br />
24<br />
Slow Action<br />
Make before break<br />
Slow Action<br />
2-step<br />
TS 336-11z<br />
TS 336-11zu<br />
TS 336-20z*<br />
TS 336-20zh*<br />
15 N<br />
17 N<br />
TR 336-11z<br />
TR 336-11zu<br />
TR 336-20z*<br />
TR 336-20zh*<br />
15 N<br />
17 N<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
Slow Action<br />
2-step<br />
TS 336-02z<br />
TS 336-02zh<br />
14 N<br />
TR 336-02z<br />
TR 336-02zh<br />
14 N<br />
248<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
Slow Action<br />
1 NC CW + 1 NC CCW<br />
* Not for use in safety applications
Z/T336 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
80°<br />
24° 0 24° 80°<br />
13-14<br />
45° 45° 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
12° 12°<br />
Z4VH 336-11z<br />
80°<br />
24° 0 24° 80°<br />
13-14<br />
45° 45° 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
12° 12°<br />
Z4V7H 336-11z<br />
80°<br />
24° 0 24°<br />
45° 45°<br />
12° 12°<br />
80°<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
Z4V10H 336-11z<br />
80°<br />
45° 0 45° 80°<br />
11-12<br />
19° 19° 21-22<br />
11-12<br />
Z4VH 336-02z<br />
80°<br />
45° 0 45° 80°<br />
11-12<br />
19° 19° 21-22<br />
11-12<br />
Z4V7H 336-02z<br />
80° 45° 0 45° 80°<br />
11-12<br />
19° 19° 21-22<br />
11-12<br />
Z4V10H 336-02z<br />
21-22<br />
21-22<br />
21-22<br />
8° 8°<br />
8° 8°<br />
8° 8°<br />
-11z<br />
-20z<br />
-02z<br />
T4VH 336…<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
13-14<br />
13-14<br />
34°<br />
34° 21-22<br />
56° 56° 21-22<br />
24° 24°<br />
4 5°<br />
45°<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
13-14<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
23-24<br />
36°<br />
36°<br />
16° 16°<br />
80° 24° 0 24° 80°<br />
80° 45° 0 45° 80°<br />
34°<br />
34° 11-12<br />
56°<br />
56° 11-12<br />
34°<br />
34° 21-22<br />
34°<br />
34° 21-22<br />
-11zu<br />
-20zh<br />
-02zh<br />
-11z<br />
-20z<br />
T4V7H 336…<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
13-14<br />
13-14<br />
34°<br />
34° 21-22<br />
56° 56° 21-22<br />
24° 24°<br />
4 5°<br />
45°<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
13-14<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
23-24<br />
36°<br />
36°<br />
16° 16°<br />
-11zu<br />
-20zh<br />
-11z<br />
-20z<br />
T4V10H 336…<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
13-14<br />
13-14<br />
34°<br />
34° 21-22<br />
56° 56° 21-22<br />
24° 24°<br />
45° 45°<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
80° 36° 0 36° 80°<br />
13-14<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
23-24<br />
36°<br />
36°<br />
16° 16°<br />
-11zu<br />
-20zh<br />
24° 24°<br />
24° 24°<br />
80° 0 24° 58°<br />
-01/01zh<br />
50° 11-12<br />
21-22<br />
24°<br />
-02z<br />
80° 24° 0 24° 80°<br />
34°<br />
34° 11-12<br />
34°<br />
34° 21-22<br />
24° 24°<br />
80° 45° 0 45° 80°<br />
56°<br />
56° 11-12<br />
34°<br />
34° 21-22<br />
24° 24°<br />
-02zh<br />
-02z<br />
80° 24° 0 24° 80°<br />
34° 34° 11-12<br />
34° 34° 21-22<br />
24° 24°<br />
80° 45° 0 45° 80°<br />
56°<br />
56° 11-12<br />
34° 34° 21-22<br />
24° 24°<br />
-02zh<br />
4V operating head with<br />
roller rocking lever<br />
Style H<br />
4V operating head with<br />
adjustable roller rocking lever<br />
Style 7H*<br />
4V operating head with<br />
rod rocking lever<br />
Style 10H*<br />
Actuating Force<br />
Actuating Force<br />
Actuating Force<br />
Z4VH 336-11z<br />
27 Ncm<br />
Z4V7H 336-11z*<br />
27 Ncm<br />
Z4V10H 336-11z*<br />
27 Ncm<br />
7<br />
Z4VH 336-02z<br />
27 Ncm<br />
Z4V7H 336-02z*<br />
27 Ncm<br />
Z4V10H 336-02z*<br />
27 Ncm<br />
T4VH 336-11z<br />
T4VH 336-11zu<br />
T4VH 336-20z*<br />
T4VH 336-20zh*<br />
T4VH 336-02z<br />
T4VH 336-02zh<br />
27.5 Ncm<br />
28 Ncm<br />
27.5 Ncm<br />
T4V7H 336-11z*<br />
T4V7H 336-11zu*<br />
T4V7H 336-20z*<br />
T4V7H 336-20zh*<br />
T4V7H 336-02z*<br />
T4V7H 336-02zh*<br />
27.5 Ncm<br />
28 Ncm<br />
27.5 Ncm<br />
T4V10H 336-11z*<br />
T4V10H 336-11zu*<br />
T4V10H 336-20z*<br />
T4V10H 336-20zh*<br />
T4V10H 336-02z*<br />
T4V10H 336-02zh*<br />
27.5 Ncm<br />
28 Ncm<br />
27.5 Ncm<br />
TVH 336-01/01z 26.5 Ncm<br />
(other levers upon request)<br />
* Not for use in safety applications<br />
249
Z/T336 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact function diagrams<br />
Snap action positive break<br />
1 NO + 1 NC<br />
0<br />
0<br />
2,1<br />
1<br />
1,6<br />
6,3<br />
13-14<br />
4,2 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
6,3<br />
Z1K 336-11z<br />
0 4,5<br />
2,2<br />
0 3,6<br />
11<br />
13-14<br />
8,8 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
11<br />
Z3K 336-11z<br />
2 NC<br />
4,2<br />
4,2<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
11-12<br />
Z1K 336-02z<br />
8,8<br />
8,8<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
11-12<br />
Z3K 336-02z<br />
21-22<br />
21-22<br />
0,8<br />
1,4<br />
Slow action 1 NO + 1 NC<br />
break before make or make before break<br />
2 NO simultaneous contacts staggered<br />
(2-step)<br />
2 NC simultaneous contacts staggered<br />
(2-step)<br />
1 NC + 1 NC (CW-CCW)<br />
-11z<br />
-20z<br />
-02z<br />
0 3,2<br />
6,3<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
2,1 3<br />
0 6,3<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
3,2<br />
0 2,1 3<br />
6,3<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
2,1 3<br />
T1K 336…<br />
0 3,2<br />
6,3<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
4 5<br />
0 3,2<br />
6,3<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
1,3<br />
0 4 5 6,3<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
2,1 3<br />
-11zu<br />
-20zh<br />
-02zh<br />
-11z<br />
-20z<br />
-02z<br />
0 6,6<br />
11<br />
4,5<br />
6,3<br />
0 11<br />
6,6<br />
0 4,5 6,3 11<br />
4,5<br />
6,3<br />
T3K 336…<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
0 6,6 11<br />
8,2 9,9<br />
0 6,6 11<br />
2,8<br />
0 4,5 8,2 11<br />
4,5 6,3<br />
9,9<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
23-24<br />
11-12<br />
21-22<br />
-11zu<br />
-20zh<br />
-02zh<br />
Dimensions<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
Types of Actuators<br />
One-way roller lever<br />
Style 1K<br />
One-way roller lever<br />
Style 3K<br />
Actuating Force<br />
Actuating Force<br />
13<br />
21<br />
14<br />
22<br />
Snap Action<br />
positive break<br />
Z1K 336-11z<br />
12 N<br />
Z3K 336-11z<br />
5.0 N<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
Snap Action<br />
positive break<br />
Z1K 336-02z<br />
12 N<br />
Z3K 336-02z<br />
5.0 N<br />
Part No.<br />
13<br />
21<br />
13<br />
23<br />
14<br />
22<br />
14<br />
24<br />
Slow Action<br />
Make before break<br />
Slow Action<br />
2-step<br />
T1K 336-11z<br />
T1K 336-11zu<br />
T1K 336-20z*<br />
T1K 336-20zh*<br />
15 N<br />
17 N<br />
T3K 336-11z<br />
T3K 336-11zu<br />
T3K 336-20z*<br />
T3K 336-20zh*<br />
6.3 N<br />
7.2 N<br />
11<br />
21<br />
12<br />
22<br />
Slow Action<br />
2-step<br />
T1K 336-02z<br />
T1K 336-02zh<br />
14 N<br />
T3K 336-02z<br />
T3K 336-02zh<br />
6.0 N<br />
250<br />
* Not for use in safety applications
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design<br />
7<br />
251
SERIES Z332<br />
Heavy-Duty Safety-Rated,<br />
Positive-Break Limit Switches<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … won’t stick or weld shut.<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP65 washdown requirements.<br />
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile<br />
environments.<br />
• Five popular actuator styles … for application versatility.<br />
• Four 90° actuator mounting positions … provide<br />
installation flexibility.<br />
• Safety-system approved … for use in machine guarding<br />
applications.<br />
• Designed to meet the Performance Level requirements<br />
of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of EN<br />
954-1.<br />
Description<br />
The Z332 Series limit switches are designed for use with<br />
movable machine guards/access gates which must be closed<br />
for operator safety … and for any other presence/position<br />
sensing application normally addressed with conventional limit<br />
switches. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a higher<br />
level of safety and/or reliability than conventional spring-driven<br />
switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut.<br />
Each is available with a choice of five standard actuators …<br />
rounded plunger, roller plunger, roller rocking lever, rod<br />
rocking lever and adjustable roller rocking lever … mountable<br />
in any one of four 90° positions. All rocking levers are<br />
positively-locked to the shaft, and are adjustable throughout<br />
360° in 10° increments.<br />
Their rugged metal housing and IP65 rating make them ideal<br />
alternatives to conventional limit switches.<br />
PART NUMBER INFORMATION<br />
Z➀332-11Y➁<br />
➀Operating Head<br />
➁<strong>Co</strong>nnection<br />
S<br />
R<br />
4VH<br />
4V7H<br />
4V10H<br />
<br />
-ST<br />
Rounded plunger<br />
Roller plunger<br />
Roller rocking lever<br />
Roller rocking lever*<br />
Rod rocking lever*<br />
M20 threaded opening<br />
M12x1, 4 pin connector<br />
*Not for use in safety applications<br />
Note: See page 254, 255 for specific part numbers for available models.<br />
Typical Applications<br />
The Z332 Series may be used in any presence/position<br />
sensing application normally addressed with conventional limit<br />
switches. Featuring positive-break NC contacts, they are<br />
approved for use in safety systems. For safety applications<br />
the switch must be mounted such that the actuating element<br />
of the machine displaces the switch actuator far enough to<br />
exceed the positive-break point.<br />
252<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
Z332 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Housing<br />
Diecast aluminum with enamel<br />
finish<br />
Operating Temperature –22°F to +195°F (–30°C to +90°C)<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
1 million operations<br />
Minimum Cam Speed 1 mm/minute<br />
(Referenced to Plunger)<br />
Maximum Operating Rate 5000 operations/hour<br />
Bounce Time<br />
2 ms<br />
Changeover Time 1.5 ms for minimum cam speed<br />
Degree of Protection IP65<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 CE<br />
EN 60947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-15<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 DIN EN 50041<br />
EN 954-1 CSA<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact System<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Gap<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Rating<br />
Switching Action<br />
Short Circuit Protection<br />
Rated Insulation Voltage<br />
Rated Impulse<br />
Withstand Voltage<br />
Type Terminals<br />
Fine silver<br />
Double-pole, double-break with<br />
electrically-separated contact<br />
bridges<br />
2 × 0.05 in. immediately after<br />
switching<br />
2 × 0.19 in. with full travel of<br />
actuator<br />
2.5A/250VAC<br />
Z332 Series: Snap-action with<br />
positive-break NC<br />
contacts<br />
Fuse: 20A (time delay)<br />
25A (no time delay<br />
6A (time delay) as positivebreak<br />
position switch<br />
250VAC<br />
6kV<br />
Screw terminals, maximum<br />
2.5mm (AWG13) wire<br />
Magnetic storage<br />
snap-action system<br />
SNAP ACTION CONTACT SYSTEMS<br />
• Snap-action switching, 1 NO 1 NC<br />
• Change-over, double-gap with four terminals<br />
• Two electrically separated moving contacts<br />
• Plated solid silver contacts<br />
• Positive-break NC contact with snap-action switching<br />
• Reliable change-over, even with slow plunger actuation<br />
• Snap-action system separated from contact system<br />
• Full contact force right up to operating point<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nstant operating position, as independent of contact burning<br />
• Short, constant flight time of only 1.5 ms<br />
• Short bounce time<br />
• High short-circuit resistance<br />
• High vibration resistance of 10 g still only 0.01 mm before operating point<br />
• Wide contact gap of 2 × 1.25 mm immediately after switching point<br />
7<br />
253
Z332 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact function diagrams<br />
Snap action positive break<br />
1 NO + 1 NC<br />
0<br />
2<br />
6<br />
13-14<br />
3,2 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
ZS 332-11y<br />
0<br />
2<br />
6<br />
13-14<br />
3,2 21-22<br />
13-14<br />
ZR 332-11y<br />
21-22<br />
21-22<br />
1,4<br />
1,4<br />
Dimensions<br />
mm<br />
inch<br />
Types of Actuators<br />
Rounded plunger<br />
Style S<br />
Roller plunger<br />
Style R<br />
Actuating Force<br />
Actuating Force<br />
Part No.<br />
13<br />
21<br />
14<br />
22<br />
Snap Action<br />
positive break<br />
ZS 332-11y<br />
31 N<br />
ZR 332-11y<br />
31 N<br />
254
Z332 TECHNICAL DATA<br />
90° 24° 0 24°<br />
90°<br />
90° 24° 0 24°<br />
90°<br />
90°<br />
24° 0 24°<br />
90°<br />
13-14<br />
39° 39° 21-22<br />
15° 15°<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
Z4VH 332-<br />
11y<br />
13-14<br />
39° 39° 21-22<br />
15° 15°<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
Z4V7H 332-<br />
11y<br />
15° 15°<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
13-14<br />
21-22<br />
Z4V10H 332-<br />
11z<br />
4V operating head with<br />
roller rocking lever<br />
Style H<br />
Actuating Force<br />
4V operating head with<br />
adjustable roller lever<br />
Style 7H*<br />
Actuating Force<br />
4V operating head with<br />
rod rocking lever<br />
Style 10H*<br />
Actuating Force<br />
Z4VH 332-11y<br />
35 Ncm<br />
Z4V7H 332-11y*<br />
35 N<br />
Z4V10H 332-11y*<br />
35 Ncm<br />
* Not for use in safety applications<br />
7<br />
255
258<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design
SAFETY LIGHT CURTAINS & BEAMS<br />
SELECTION GUIDE<br />
Series Description Range Page<br />
SLB 200 Safety Category 2 Light Beam 4m 268<br />
SLB 400 Safety Category 4 Light Beam 15m 269<br />
SLC 220/SLG 220 Type 2 Safety Light Curtain & Grid 14m 276<br />
SLG 220-P Type 2 Safety Light Grid, Reflective 6m 277<br />
SLC 220 IP69K Type 2 Safety Light Curtain, IP69K Rated 14m 279<br />
SLC 420 Type 4 Safety Light Curtain & Grid 18m 280<br />
SLC 420 IP69K Type 4 Safety Light Curtain, IP69K Rated 10m 282<br />
SLG 422-P Type 4 Safety Light Grid, Reflective 7m 283<br />
SLC 430 Type 4 Safety Light Curtain, <strong>Co</strong>mpact housing 3.5m 284<br />
SLC 425I Type 4 Safety Light Curtain, Muting 10m 287<br />
Accessories Installation accessories — 290<br />
8<br />
259
Introduction – Optoelectronic safety sensors<br />
EN 61496<br />
The field of automation is<br />
subject to a permanent and<br />
innovative change of products<br />
and applications. The focus is<br />
on increasing the productivity<br />
and realizing a smooth-running<br />
production process with<br />
a minimum of human interventions<br />
on machinery and<br />
systems. The ideal, a fully<br />
automated and totally safe<br />
machine however will always<br />
remain a dream, though the<br />
robots used in production<br />
plants already are a big step<br />
towards this goal.<br />
Human intervention and<br />
knowledge will always be<br />
required for the commissioning,<br />
monitoring and maintenance<br />
of modern industrial<br />
systems. Man however is not<br />
infallible and ignorance or lack<br />
of information, thoughtlessness<br />
or negligence often<br />
leads to damages.<br />
For these reasons European<br />
directives such as the<br />
Machinery Directive 98/37/EC<br />
(2006/42/EG) and their corresponding<br />
standards were<br />
implemented at European<br />
level. These standards aim at<br />
detecting and constructively<br />
avoiding all possible risks and<br />
hazards during the planning<br />
and project phase of<br />
machines and systems.<br />
Safety components must be<br />
used to minimize or eliminate<br />
the residual risks.<br />
In this way, manufacturers<br />
and users are making equivalent<br />
efforts to set up an optimal<br />
process flow, which offers<br />
the highest possible protection<br />
to the operating staff. The<br />
challenge for all manufacturers<br />
of safety components is to<br />
design efficient and safe<br />
product solutions for mechanical<br />
engineers. Flaps and<br />
doors are the simplest means<br />
of access to the machine.<br />
These separating hardguarding<br />
safety solutions offer an<br />
efficient and effective protection<br />
against hazardous movements<br />
and products being<br />
ejected from the machine.<br />
When these safety guards are<br />
opened, the machine is<br />
brought to standstill (through<br />
the corresponding safety sensor<br />
transmitting the “stop”<br />
signal to the control), which<br />
interrupts and therefore slows<br />
down the production. In case<br />
of continuous processes,<br />
which must not be interrupted,<br />
solenoid interlocks protect<br />
man and the work piece<br />
against damages.<br />
Safety fences are not suitable<br />
for production processes<br />
requiring the material to be<br />
transported into the working<br />
area by means of conveyor<br />
belts, as it does not allow for<br />
an ergonomic and optimal<br />
work sequence.<br />
A “virtual safety guard“ in the<br />
form of an active optoelectronic<br />
device (AOPD), e.g. a<br />
safety light curtain, is a perfect<br />
solution, offering both an<br />
optimal protection of human<br />
life and uninterrupted production<br />
process.<br />
260
Typical applications:<br />
• Power-driven machines<br />
• Power-driven presses in<br />
metalworking, plastics,<br />
leather, stone working and<br />
rubber processing industry<br />
• Folding presses and cutters<br />
• Filter presses<br />
• Punching machines in<br />
leather, textile and plastics<br />
processing<br />
• Robots stations and welding<br />
booths<br />
• Printing and injection<br />
molding machines<br />
• Transportation systems<br />
• Pallet loaders and palletizers<br />
• Materials handling and<br />
storage technology<br />
• and so on<br />
Depending on the application,<br />
the AOPD are used for point of<br />
operation, danger zone and<br />
perimeter guarding. The user<br />
can choose from a large range<br />
of different optoelectronic safety<br />
solutions e.g. light barriers,<br />
light grids, light curtains and<br />
laser scanners.<br />
8<br />
261
Design and operating principle<br />
Optoelectronic<br />
Safety light barriers<br />
The safety light barrier systems<br />
of the SLB range are<br />
active optoelectronic protective<br />
devices (AOPD) fulfilling<br />
the <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 2 or 4 in<br />
accordance with EN 954-1 or<br />
EN 61496, or PL c or PL e in<br />
accordance with EN ISO<br />
13849-1. These systems are<br />
used as entry guards on hazardous<br />
zones, points of operation<br />
and entrances. They<br />
protect human life without<br />
restricting the production flow.<br />
Typical applications for safety<br />
light barriers are on robots,<br />
automatic-processing plants,<br />
transfer lines, rack storages<br />
and pallet loaders.<br />
The entire safety light barrier<br />
system includes a light emitter,<br />
a light receiver and a safety<br />
monitoring module. This<br />
module monitors the signals<br />
of the emitter.<br />
If the light beam is interrupted,<br />
a signal is emitted to bring<br />
the dangerous movement of<br />
the machine to standstill. The<br />
safety monitoring module<br />
integrates functions such as<br />
start and restart inhibit as well<br />
as a contactor monitoring.<br />
The maintenance-free safety<br />
sensors of the system with<br />
protection class IP 67 offer an<br />
integrated soiling check.<br />
Because of their small size,<br />
safety light barriers can be fitted<br />
almost everywhere.<br />
Safety light grids /<br />
light curtains<br />
The safety light curtains and<br />
safety light grids of the SLC<br />
and SLG meet the requirements<br />
of <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 2 or<br />
4 to EN 954-1 and Type 2 or<br />
Type 4 to EN 61496, or PL c or<br />
PL e in accordance with EN ISO<br />
13849-1. They safeguard<br />
points of operation and hazardous<br />
areas on different applications,<br />
e.g. presses, robot<br />
stations, injection molding<br />
machines, pallet machines, etc.<br />
In these active optoelectronic<br />
protective devices (AOPD),<br />
the emitter and receiver are<br />
fitted in two separate enclosures.<br />
An invisible infrared<br />
signal is sent from the emitter<br />
and monitored by the receiver.<br />
If the light beam is interrupted<br />
by an object or a person, a<br />
stop signal is emitted to bring<br />
the machine to standstill.<br />
The protection field is defined<br />
by the height and width of the<br />
protection field. The protected<br />
height is the range between<br />
the first and last infrared light<br />
beam of a light curtain. The<br />
protected height defines the<br />
physical size of the system to<br />
be used.<br />
The protected width or operating<br />
range is the distance<br />
between the transmitter and<br />
receiver unit.<br />
For an accurate detection of<br />
objects with different sizes in<br />
the hazardous area, the user<br />
can choose between light<br />
grids and light curtains with<br />
different resolutions. Here, the<br />
following rule applies: the<br />
smaller the distance between<br />
two adjacent light beams, the<br />
more accurate the detection<br />
sensitivity of the AOPD.<br />
For the detection of body<br />
parts, a distinction is made<br />
between finger, hand and<br />
body protection.<br />
EN 999 or DIN EN ISO 13857<br />
sets the biometric data for finger<br />
protection to 14 mm, for<br />
hand detection to 30 mm, for<br />
leg detection up to 70 mm<br />
and for body detection to over<br />
70 mm.<br />
Safety light grids with 2, 3<br />
or 4 individual beams are<br />
generally used to detect the<br />
penetration of the entire<br />
human body. Safety light<br />
curtains are multiple beam<br />
systems (> 5 individual<br />
beams) and can also detect<br />
smaller objects in case of<br />
intrusion into the protected<br />
field. The maintenance- free<br />
safety light curtains and light<br />
grids can be smoothly fitted<br />
using an M12 connector and<br />
are equipped a diagnostic<br />
interface and LED indication<br />
for status messages.<br />
Depending on the type of<br />
safety light curtain or light grid<br />
used, the components offer<br />
an integrated monitoring<br />
module with start/restart<br />
inhibit and external device<br />
monitoring. Additional functions<br />
such as blanking, muting<br />
and cascading of the light<br />
curtains are available as well.<br />
The SLC and SLG product<br />
series therefore offer a<br />
maximum of flexibility for<br />
safeguarding different points<br />
of operation.<br />
262
safety systems<br />
Important conditions for<br />
the use of optoelectronic<br />
safety devices:<br />
In order to choose the appropriate<br />
active optoelectronic<br />
protective device (AOPD) such<br />
as light barriers, light curtains/grids<br />
and laser scanners<br />
and to use them correctly,<br />
both the requirements of the<br />
standards (EN 61496, EN 999,<br />
EN 294, C standards etc.) and<br />
product-specific features<br />
(detection sensitivity, range,<br />
etc.) must be taken into<br />
account. AOPD’s can be<br />
used, provided that:<br />
• the dangerous movement<br />
can be stopped at all times<br />
and that it is ensured that<br />
the dangerous area can only<br />
be reached after the movement<br />
has come to standstill,<br />
• the dangerous movement<br />
can be stopped at all times<br />
and that it is ensured that<br />
the dangerous area can only<br />
be reached after the movement<br />
has come to standstill,<br />
• the run-out time of the<br />
machine and all safety components<br />
is known,<br />
• no objects (work pieces,<br />
sparks, liquids, etc.) can<br />
be ejected,<br />
• the AOPD meet the requirements<br />
of Type 2 or Type 4<br />
acc. to EN 61496,<br />
• the dangerous area can only<br />
be reached by passing<br />
through the protected field of<br />
the AOPD,<br />
• reaching over, under or<br />
through the protected field is<br />
impossible,<br />
• the start or restart command<br />
devices are fitted in such a<br />
way that the entire hazardous<br />
area is completely visible<br />
from the outside and that it<br />
cannot be activated from<br />
within the hazardous area<br />
• and the safety distance is calculated<br />
and constructively<br />
applied in accordance with<br />
EN 999.<br />
The effectiveness of the safety<br />
guard corresponds to the risk<br />
assessment, which was carried<br />
out during the planning and<br />
design phase, taking all important<br />
boundary conditions, e.g.<br />
environment, machine and<br />
function into account.<br />
Protected width (operating range)<br />
Protected height<br />
8<br />
Light beam<br />
263
Application<br />
Safety distance<br />
EN 999<br />
Safety distances for light<br />
curtains<br />
Between the interruption of a<br />
light beam and the standstill<br />
of the machine, a certain time<br />
expires. The safety light grid<br />
or light curtain must be sized<br />
and installed such that a stop<br />
would be signaled and the<br />
hazard ceased prior to a person<br />
or a body part accessing<br />
the hazard.<br />
The standard EN 999 provides<br />
the user with detailed information<br />
about the calculation<br />
of the minimum safety distances.<br />
These include the<br />
following important influencing<br />
factors:<br />
• run-out time of the entire<br />
system, taking the different<br />
reaction times of the individual<br />
systems into account<br />
(e.g. machine, safety monitoring<br />
module, AOPD etc.)<br />
• capacity of the AOPD to<br />
detect body parts (fingers,<br />
hand and entire human<br />
body)<br />
• set-up of the safety guard in<br />
normal condition (vertical fitting),<br />
parallel condition (horizontal<br />
fitting) or at an arbitrary<br />
angle in front of the<br />
safety guard and<br />
• the speed at which the protection<br />
field is approached.<br />
For the calculation of the minimum<br />
safety distance S to the<br />
hazardous area, EN 999 presents<br />
the following general formula:<br />
S = K x T + C<br />
Where:<br />
S the safety distance to the<br />
dangerous area (mm)<br />
K the approach speed of the<br />
body or the body part<br />
(mm/s)<br />
T the entire reaction time of<br />
the system(s) (including the<br />
machine’s run-out time, the<br />
reaction time of the safety<br />
guard and the safety monitoring<br />
module etc.)<br />
C additional distance (mm) in<br />
front of the safety guard<br />
Normal approach<br />
for light curtains:<br />
(Resolution: max. 40 mm)<br />
The minimum safety distance<br />
S is calculated in the following<br />
way:<br />
S = 2000 T + 8 (D-14)<br />
(D = Resolution)<br />
This formula applies to safety<br />
distances up to 500 mm. The<br />
minimum safety distance<br />
Smin may not be less than<br />
100 mm.<br />
If the calculation produces a<br />
distance larger than 500 mm<br />
for S, the calculation can be<br />
repeated with a lower<br />
approach speed:<br />
S = 1600 T + 8 (D-14)<br />
In this case, Smin may not be<br />
less than 500 mm.<br />
Light curtain<br />
Approach<br />
direction<br />
If the dangerous area of the<br />
machine is accessible from<br />
the top because of its particular<br />
construction, the height H<br />
of the topmost beam of the<br />
light barrier must be at least<br />
1800 mm above the base G<br />
of the machine.<br />
Normal approach<br />
for light curtains:<br />
(Resolution: from 40 mm<br />
up to max. 70 mm)<br />
The minimum safety distance<br />
S is calculated in the following<br />
way:<br />
S = 1600 T + 850<br />
The height of the topmost<br />
light beam must be at least<br />
900 mm, the height of the<br />
lowermost light beam maximum<br />
300 mm above the bottom<br />
(for the protection of children<br />
younger than 14: 200<br />
mm).<br />
Point of<br />
operation<br />
Reference floor<br />
264
Normal approach<br />
for light grids:<br />
(Resolution: > 70 mm)<br />
The minimum safety distance<br />
S is calculated using the<br />
following formula:<br />
S = 1600 T + 850<br />
For safety guards with<br />
multiple beams, height H (mm)<br />
above the reference floor of<br />
the individual beams must be<br />
applied in the following way:<br />
Number Height above the<br />
of beams reference floor<br />
2 400, 900<br />
3 300, 700, 1100<br />
4 300, 600, 900,1200<br />
When using light curtains or<br />
light grids, particular attention<br />
must be paid to the tampering<br />
possibilities of the safety<br />
guard and to the mechanical<br />
risks (e.g. crushing, shearing,<br />
cutting, ejection).<br />
Horizontal approach<br />
for light curtains/grids<br />
(resolution: > 50 mm)<br />
The minimum safety distance<br />
S is calculated using the<br />
following formula:<br />
S = 1600 T + 1200 – 0.4 H<br />
Here, Smin is 850 mm.<br />
The lowest authorized height<br />
H depends on the resolution<br />
D of the light curtain:<br />
H = 15 (D-50)<br />
For this type of safety guard,<br />
the maximum height H is<br />
1000 mm.<br />
In the risk analysis, special<br />
attention must be paid to the<br />
prevention of unintentional<br />
undetected access from<br />
underneath the protection<br />
field.<br />
Further calculation examples<br />
can be found in DIN EN 999<br />
as well as in the mounting<br />
instructions of the SLC/SLG<br />
safety sensors.<br />
Point of<br />
operation<br />
Point of<br />
operation<br />
Light<br />
curtain/grid<br />
Direction of<br />
approach<br />
Direction of<br />
approach<br />
Reference floor<br />
Light<br />
curtain/grid<br />
Reference floor<br />
8<br />
265
Modes of operation and functions<br />
Master/Slave cascading<br />
Muting<br />
Blanking /Floating Blanking<br />
For the SLC/SLG…M/S product<br />
series, the master light<br />
curtain can be extended with<br />
another (slave) light curtain<br />
(cascading). In this way, multiple<br />
protection fields can be<br />
generated. A protection field<br />
is created between the emitter<br />
and receiver and between the<br />
slave components.<br />
This device cascading provides<br />
for a comfortable and<br />
efficient protection of contiguous<br />
protection fields against<br />
reaching over or through the<br />
protection field. The slave<br />
light curtains are connected to<br />
the master by means of an<br />
M12 connector.<br />
The master and slave light<br />
curtains are available in<br />
different sizes and resolutions<br />
and allow for almost any combination.<br />
If goods or objects must be<br />
transported in or out of the<br />
hazardous area without<br />
stopping the machine, the<br />
safety light curtain must be<br />
automatically and temporarily<br />
suspended.<br />
To this end, two or four muting<br />
sensors are used to detect<br />
whether a person is approaching<br />
the hazardous area or a<br />
transport system enters or<br />
leaves the hazardous area.<br />
Suitable muting sensors are<br />
light barriers, proximity switches<br />
or position switches.<br />
The integrated safety-muting<br />
controller of the safety light<br />
curtain or light grid monitors<br />
and controls the muting<br />
process.<br />
The safety outputs are not disabled.<br />
Any malfunction of the<br />
monitored signal source will<br />
cause the OSSD’s to be<br />
switched off. Depending on<br />
the application, different light<br />
curtains with integrated muting<br />
function are available. Detailed<br />
product information can be<br />
found in this brochure from<br />
page 33.<br />
If continuity of the production<br />
process is required, a part of<br />
the protection field can be<br />
blanked without triggering a<br />
stop signal.<br />
In this way, objects such as<br />
work pieces can be fed or a<br />
conveyor belt can be<br />
positioned at a fixed position<br />
in the protection field.<br />
The integrated floating<br />
blanking function of the<br />
SLC…B light curtains enables<br />
a flexible blanking of up to 2<br />
adjacent light beams in the<br />
protection field of the light<br />
curtain. This function is<br />
required to ensure that one or<br />
two adjacent light beams can<br />
be interrupted at an undefined<br />
position in the protection field.<br />
In this way, objects such as<br />
fixtures or materials with<br />
slightly varying heights can be<br />
fed through the light curtain<br />
without triggering a stop<br />
signal. Different blanking<br />
functions are available. The<br />
distinguishing feature of the<br />
different modes is the number<br />
of light beams that can be<br />
interrupted by an object. In<br />
addition to that, it can be<br />
defined whether the object<br />
may interrupt the protection<br />
field permanently or only<br />
temporarily. The interrupted<br />
light beams can be at any<br />
position in the protection field.<br />
Except the first infrared light<br />
beam (the beam closest to the<br />
connector), any light beam can<br />
be used for blanking.<br />
When blanking is applied, the<br />
resolution of the light curtain<br />
changes. The technical<br />
documentation of the different<br />
light curtains includes the<br />
tables with the effective<br />
resolutions D to calculate the<br />
minimum safety distance to<br />
EN 999.<br />
Further technical product<br />
information can be found in<br />
this brochure.<br />
Master<br />
Slave<br />
1 2<br />
1 Floating-Blanking-Area<br />
2 Movable object<br />
266
Safety light barriers<br />
System features:<br />
• PL c and PL e acc. to EN ISO 13849-1<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 2 and 4 acc. to EN 954-1<br />
or acc. to EN 61496, Type 2 and Type 4<br />
• Up to 4 pairs of one-way light barriers can<br />
be connected<br />
• Different functions:<br />
Start/Restart interlock<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntactor monitoring<br />
Cyclic testing<br />
• Integrated soiling check<br />
• Status and error indication<br />
• Signalling outputs for external indications<br />
• Free of maintenance<br />
• Extremely compact design<br />
• Simple and flexible mounting and adjustment<br />
8<br />
267
Safety light barriers<br />
SLB 200<br />
20<br />
30,8<br />
¤9,6<br />
24<br />
43,4<br />
50,3<br />
39,4<br />
5,5<br />
16,1<br />
10<br />
¤8,5<br />
¤10<br />
• Range to 4 m<br />
• LEDs visible from both sides<br />
• Protection class IP 67<br />
18,8<br />
¤4,4<br />
Technical data<br />
Standards: IEC/EN 61496<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category: 2*<br />
Performance Level: e*<br />
Enclosure:<br />
ABS<br />
10 % GF<br />
Enclosure dimensions: 31 x 50.5 x 19 mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection: emitter: 10 cm conductor,<br />
M8, 3-pole coupler socket<br />
receiver: 10 cm conductor,<br />
M8, 4-pole coupler socket<br />
Max. cable length:<br />
50 m<br />
Protection class: IP 67<br />
Response time: 30 ms *<br />
Range:<br />
4 m<br />
Start/Restart interlock: *<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntactor control: *<br />
Light emission<br />
wavelength:<br />
880 nm<br />
Ue: 24 VDC ± 20%<br />
Safety outputs: *<br />
Angle of radiation: ± 4°<br />
Min. size of object:<br />
9 mm Ø<br />
LED status indication: soiling, switching<br />
condition and<br />
power on<br />
Ambient temperature: – 10 °C ... + 55 °C<br />
Storage and<br />
transport temperature: – 20 °C … + 80 ºC<br />
System components<br />
SLB 200-C04-1R<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug<br />
* only in combination with safety monitoring<br />
module SLB 200-C04-1R<br />
Mounting angle BF 31<br />
Approvals<br />
Ordering details<br />
SLB 200-➀31-21<br />
No. Option Description<br />
➀ E Emitter<br />
R<br />
Receiver<br />
268<br />
Note<br />
The system components (safety monitoring<br />
module, cable, etc.) are not included in<br />
delivery.<br />
Mounting angle BF UNI 1<br />
Ordering details<br />
Monitoring of safety light barriers<br />
SLB 200-C04-1R refer to page 270<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug (female) for emitter:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector only<br />
S-K3P-M8-S-G-X-X-X-X-X-1<br />
2 meter cable<br />
A-K3P-M8-S-G-2M-BK-2-X-X-1<br />
5 meter cable<br />
A-K3P-M8-S-G-5M-BK-2-X-X-1<br />
Receiver:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector only<br />
S-K4P-M8-S-G-X-X-X-X-X-1<br />
2 meter cable<br />
A-K4P-M8-S-G-2M-BK-2-X-X-X<br />
5 meter cable<br />
A-K4P-M8-R-G-5M-BK-2-X-X-1<br />
Mounting angles BF 31<br />
Mounting angles universal BF UNI 1
Safety light barriers<br />
SLB 400<br />
Technical data<br />
System components<br />
63,5<br />
13,5<br />
17<br />
46<br />
44<br />
16<br />
4<br />
4,3<br />
50<br />
M12x1<br />
40<br />
44<br />
• Range to 15 m<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nnecting plug can be rotated<br />
• LED switching conditions display<br />
• Protection class IP 67<br />
4,3<br />
4<br />
Standards: IEC/EN 61496<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category: 4*<br />
Performance Level: e*<br />
Enclosure:<br />
ABS<br />
Enclosure dimensions: 50 x 50 x 17 mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection:<br />
M12, 4-pole coupler<br />
socket, can be rotated<br />
Max. cable length:<br />
100 m<br />
Protection class: IP 67<br />
Response time:<br />
25 ms*<br />
Range:<br />
15 m<br />
Start/Restart interlock: *<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntactor control: *<br />
Light emission<br />
wavelength:<br />
880 nm<br />
Ue: 24 VDC ± 20%<br />
Safety outputs: *<br />
Angle of radiation: ± 2°<br />
Min. size of object:<br />
13 mm Ø<br />
LED status indication: soiling, switching<br />
condition and<br />
power on<br />
Ambient temperature: 0 °C ... + 60 °C<br />
Storage and<br />
transport temperature: – 20 °C … + 80 ºC<br />
* only in combination with safety monitoring<br />
module SLB 400-C10-1R<br />
SLB 400-C10-1R<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug<br />
Mounting angle BF 50<br />
Mounting angle BF UNI 1<br />
Approvals<br />
H<br />
Ordering details<br />
SLB 400-➀50-21P<br />
No. Option Description<br />
➀ E Emitter<br />
R<br />
Receiver<br />
Note<br />
The system components (safety monitoring<br />
module, cable, etc.) are not included in<br />
delivery.<br />
Ordering details<br />
Monitoring of safety light barriers<br />
SLB 400-C10-1R refer to page 272<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug (female) for emitter/receiver:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector only<br />
S-K4P-M12-S-G-X-X-X-X-B-1<br />
2 meter cable<br />
A-K4P-M12-S-G-2M-BK-2-X-A-1<br />
5 meter cable<br />
A-K4P-M12-S-G-5M-BK-2-X-A-1<br />
8<br />
Mounting angles BF 50<br />
Mounting angles universal BF UNI 1<br />
269
Safety light barriers<br />
SLB 200-C<br />
• Up to two pairs of light barrier devices can<br />
be connected<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>-ordinated for use with SLB 200 R/E<br />
safety light barriers<br />
• 1 safety contact, STOP 0<br />
• 1 signalling output<br />
• Operating voltage 24 VDC<br />
• Test input<br />
• LED display of switching conditions<br />
• Response time ≤ 30 ms<br />
• Start/Restart interlock can be switched<br />
active or inactive<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntactor monitoring can be switched<br />
active or inactive<br />
• Additional cyclic testing<br />
Technical data<br />
Standards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2, IEC 60947-5-3, IEC 61508<br />
Start conditions:<br />
Test button, start-resetbutton, on/off coding<br />
Feedback circuit (Y/N):<br />
yes<br />
Max. switching frequency:<br />
10 Hz<br />
Rated operating voltage Ue: 24 VDC ± 20%<br />
Rated operating current Ie:<br />
180 mA<br />
Outputs:<br />
Stop category 0: 1<br />
Stop category 1: 0<br />
Number of safety contacts: 1<br />
Number of auxiliary contacts: 0<br />
Number of signalling outputs: 1<br />
Max. switching capacity of the safety contacts:<br />
8 A<br />
Switching capacity of the signalling outputs:<br />
500 mA<br />
Max. fuse rating of the safety contacts:<br />
4 A gG D-fuse<br />
Utilisation category to EN 60947-5-1:<br />
AC-15: 250 V / 2 A<br />
DC-13: 24 V / 2 A<br />
Ambient conditions:<br />
Environmental temperature:<br />
0°C…+50°C<br />
Storage and transport temperature:<br />
-20°C…+80°C<br />
Protection class: Enclosure: IP 40, Terminals: IP 20, Clearance: IP 54<br />
Mounting: Snaps onto standard DIN rail to EN 60715<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection type:<br />
Screw connection<br />
max. cable section:<br />
4.0 mm 2 (incl. conductor ferrules)<br />
Dimensions (Height/Width/Depth):<br />
84 x 45 x 118 mm<br />
Safety Classifications:<br />
Performance Level (EN ISO 13849-1):<br />
up to c<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category (EN954-1): up to 2<br />
Approvals<br />
Ordering details<br />
SLB 200-C04-1R<br />
270
Safety light barriers<br />
Note<br />
Wiring diagram<br />
• Monitoring two pairs of light barrier devices<br />
and the power contactor using the<br />
SLB 200-C safety monitoring module<br />
• Test push button I<br />
The test push button is connected to X13<br />
and X14 in order to carry out a check of<br />
the light barrier monitoring function. The<br />
terminals X15 and X16 must be bridged.<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntactor checkTo monitor an external<br />
contactor, the feedback circuit is connected<br />
to X17 and X18. The terminals X19 and X20<br />
must be bridged.<br />
• Start push button H<br />
The start push button can be used to start<br />
the monitoring of the light barriers for a new<br />
start or after an interruption. The terminals<br />
X3 and X4 must be bridged.<br />
• It is also possible to connect only one pair of<br />
light barrier devices.<br />
+24 VDC<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
BN<br />
WH<br />
SLB-R SLB-E SLB-R SLB-E<br />
1 1 2 2<br />
BN<br />
BK<br />
BN<br />
WH<br />
BN<br />
BK<br />
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 X11 X12 13<br />
K3<br />
K4<br />
max.<br />
X13 X14 X15 X16 X17 X18 X19 X20 X21 X22 Y1 X23 14<br />
L1<br />
SLB 200-C<br />
0V<br />
K1<br />
N<br />
3<br />
M<br />
Note<br />
In order to set for the desired mode of<br />
operation and number of light barriers<br />
connected, remove the front cover of the<br />
safety monitoring module. As supplied all<br />
switches are in Position 1.<br />
Note<br />
The required functions can be selected by means of the internal DIP switches.<br />
DIP switch 1 DIP switch 2 DIP switch 3<br />
Position 1 With contactor check With start/restart interlock <strong>Co</strong>nnection of two<br />
light barriers<br />
Position 2 Without contactor check Without start/restart interlock <strong>Co</strong>nnection of one<br />
light barrier<br />
The wiring diagram is shown for the de-energized condition.<br />
Inductive loads (e.g. contactors, relays, etc.) are to be suppressed by means of a suitable circuit.<br />
271
Safety light barriers<br />
SLB 400-C<br />
• Up to 4 light barrier pairs SLB 400<br />
can be connected<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>-ordinated for use with SLB 400 R/E<br />
safety light barriers<br />
• 2 safety contacts, STOP 0<br />
• 2 signalling outputs<br />
• Cross-wire monitoring<br />
• ISD Integral System Diagnostics<br />
• Operating voltage 24 VDC<br />
• Feedback circuit to monitor external<br />
contactors<br />
• Two short-circuit proof additional<br />
transistor outputs<br />
• Response time ≤ 30 ms<br />
• Start/Restart interlock can be switched<br />
active or inactive<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntactor monitoring can be switched<br />
active or inactive<br />
• Can be coded<br />
Technical data<br />
Standards IEC/EN 61496-1/-2, IEC 60947-5-3, IEC 61508<br />
Start conditions:<br />
Start-reset button, on/off coding<br />
Feedback circuit (Y/N):<br />
yes<br />
Max. switching frequency:<br />
10 Hz<br />
Rated operating voltage Ue: 24 VDC ± 15%<br />
Rated operating current Ie:<br />
0.3 A without additional transistor<br />
outputs and safety light barriers<br />
Max. fuse rating of the operating voltage:<br />
1 A<br />
Outputs:<br />
Stop category 0: 2<br />
Stop category 1: 0<br />
Number of safety contacts: 2<br />
Number of auxiliary contacts: 2<br />
Number of signalling outputs: 2<br />
Max. switching capacity of the safety contacts:<br />
2 A<br />
Switching capacity of the auxiliary contacts:<br />
2 A<br />
Switching capacity of the signalling outputs:<br />
100 mA<br />
Max. fuse rating of the safety contacts:<br />
2 A gG D-fuse<br />
Utilisation category to EN 60947-5-1:<br />
AC-15: 250 V / 2 A<br />
DC-13: 24 V / 2 A<br />
LED display:<br />
ISD<br />
Ambient conditions:<br />
Environmental temperature:<br />
0°C…+55°C<br />
Storage and transport temperature:<br />
-25°C…+70°C<br />
Protection class: Enclosure: IP 40, Terminals: IP 20, Clearance: IP 54<br />
Mounting: Snaps onto standard DIN rail to EN 60715<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection type:<br />
Screw connection<br />
max. cable section:<br />
4.0 mm2 (incl. conductor ferrules)<br />
Dimensions (Height/Width/Depth):<br />
75 x 99.7 x 110 mm<br />
Safety Classifications:<br />
Performance Level (EN ISO 13849-1):<br />
up to e<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category (EN954-1): up to 4<br />
Approvals<br />
H<br />
Ordering details<br />
SLB 400-C10-1R<br />
272
Safety light barriers<br />
Note<br />
• Monitoring up to four pairs of light barrier<br />
devices and the power contactors using the<br />
SLB 400-C safety monitoring module<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nnection of two pairs of safety light<br />
barrier devices:<br />
When two pairs of safety light barriers are<br />
connected, the terminals X9-X10 and<br />
X11-X12 must be bridged.<br />
• Restart push button J<br />
The restart function can be selected by<br />
means of the DIP switches. When a start<br />
push button is connected to X5 and X6, it<br />
must be operated for min. 250 ms and max.<br />
5 s after an interruption of the safety light<br />
barriers.<br />
Wiring diagram<br />
SLB-E SLB-R SLB-E SLB-R<br />
+24 VDC<br />
1 234 1 234 1234 1234<br />
A1<br />
X1<br />
24V T0<br />
X2<br />
Q1<br />
X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 13 23 33 41<br />
T2<br />
R<br />
Q2 RESTART CONT.M<br />
Made in Germany<br />
+ -<br />
U OUT<br />
RESTART<br />
RELAY<br />
B<br />
L1<br />
0V<br />
A2<br />
T3 Q3 T4 Q4 PM INDIC.<br />
UB<br />
OUT<br />
+<br />
X9 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 Y1 Y2 - 14 24 34 42<br />
0V<br />
0V<br />
1234 1234 1234 1234<br />
K4<br />
SLB-E<br />
SLB-R<br />
SLB-E<br />
SLB-R<br />
N<br />
K5<br />
3<br />
M<br />
Note<br />
The following faults are registered<br />
by the safety monitoring modules<br />
and indicated by ISD<br />
• Short-circuit on the connecting leads<br />
• Interruption of the connecting leads<br />
• Failure of the safety relay to pull-in<br />
or drop-out<br />
• Fault on the input circuits or the relay control<br />
circuits of the safety monitoring module<br />
• Mutual influence between the connected<br />
pairs of light barrier device and others on<br />
neighboring systems<br />
Note<br />
The ISD tables (Integral System Diagnostics) for analysis of the fault indications and their causes<br />
are shown in the manual.<br />
The wiring diagram is shown for the de-energized condition.<br />
Inductive loads (e.g. contactors, relays, etc.) are to be suppressed by means of a<br />
suitable circuit.<br />
8<br />
273
Safety light barriers accessories SLB 200 and SLB 400<br />
System components<br />
System components<br />
Mirror SLB 200/400 SMA 80<br />
Mounting post ST 1250<br />
Mounting angle BF SMA 80-1<br />
Floor-stand base STB 1<br />
Mounting angle BF SMA 80-2<br />
T-slot nut NST 20-8<br />
Ordering details<br />
Mirror SMA 80<br />
Mounting angles for mirror BF SMA 80-1<br />
BF SMA 80-2<br />
T-slot nut NST 20-8<br />
Ordering details<br />
Mounting post ST 1250<br />
Floor-stand base STB 1<br />
274
Safety light curtains and safety light grids<br />
System features:<br />
• PL c and PL e acc. to EN ISO 13849-1<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 2 and 4 acc. to EN 61496,<br />
Type 2 and Type 4<br />
• Different integrated functions:<br />
Start/Restart interlock<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntactor monitoring<br />
Muting<br />
Blanking<br />
Master/Slave configuration<br />
• Diagnostic display<br />
• Optical synchronisation<br />
• Maintenance-free<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mpact design<br />
• Simple, flexible mounting and adjustment<br />
8<br />
275
Safety light curtains and safety light grids<br />
SLC 220 standard<br />
SLG 220 standard<br />
Technical data<br />
A<br />
¤40<br />
• Safety light curtain<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntrol category Type 2 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2<br />
• Resolution 30 and 80 mm<br />
• Protection field heights from<br />
175 mm to 1675 mm<br />
• Integrated start/restart interlock<br />
• Integrated contactor control †<br />
• Integrated blanking function †<br />
• Diagnostic and parametrization interface †<br />
• Range 0.3 m ... 14 m<br />
• Integrated self-test<br />
• Fail-safe transistor outputs<br />
• Status display<br />
• Protection class IP 65<br />
• Signalling output<br />
Legend:<br />
A: Total length<br />
Protection field height 175 mm: A = 216 mm<br />
Protection field height 250 ... 1675 mm:<br />
A = 28.5 mm + Protection field height<br />
A<br />
• Safety light grid<br />
• 2-, 3- or 4-beam light grid<br />
• Range 0.3 ... 30 m<br />
¤40<br />
Legend:<br />
A: Total length<br />
A = 78.5 mm + Distance between<br />
outermost beams<br />
Standards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2<br />
Type 2<br />
Enclosure:<br />
Aluminium<br />
Enclosure dimensions:<br />
ø 40 mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug<br />
M12, 8-pole<br />
Max. cable length:<br />
100 m / 1Ω<br />
Protection class: IP 65 to EN 60529<br />
Response time:<br />
9 … 45 ms<br />
(depends on length<br />
and resolution)<br />
Detection sensitivity<br />
(Resolution):<br />
30 and 80 mm<br />
Protection field height:<br />
Resolution 30 mm 175 ... 1675 mm<br />
Resolution 80 mm 325 ... 1675 mm<br />
2-, 3-, 4-beam 500, 800, 900 mm<br />
Protection field width,<br />
Range:<br />
0.3 ... 6 m (Standard),<br />
SLC<br />
4 ... 14 m (High range)<br />
SLG<br />
5 ... 30 m (High range)<br />
Start/restart interlock:<br />
Integrated<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntactor control:<br />
Integrated<br />
Blanking function:<br />
Integrated<br />
Light emission wavelength: 880 nm (infrared)<br />
Ue: 24 VDC ± 10%<br />
Safety outputs:<br />
2 x PNP, 200 mA<br />
Signalling output:<br />
PNP 100 mA<br />
Power consumption: Emitter 4 W,<br />
Receiver 8 W<br />
Data interface: RS 485<br />
Status and diagnostics:<br />
LED display<br />
Ambient temperature: –10 °C … + 50 ºC<br />
Storage and<br />
transport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºC<br />
Classification:<br />
to IEC/EN 61508: SIL 2<br />
to EN ISO 13849-1:<br />
PL d<br />
PFH-value: 3.59 x 10 -8 / h<br />
to EN 954-1: <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Cat. 2<br />
Approvals<br />
Approvals<br />
Ordering details<br />
SLC 220-E/R➀-➁RFB-➂<br />
No. Option Description<br />
➀ xxxx Protected heights (mm)<br />
Available lengths:<br />
0175*, 0250*, 0325, 0475,<br />
0625, 0775, 0925, 1075,<br />
1225, 1375, 1525, 1675<br />
➁ 30 Resolution 30 mm<br />
80 Resolution 80 mm<br />
➂<br />
Range 0.3 m … 6 m<br />
H<br />
High Range 4 m … 14 m<br />
276<br />
Notes<br />
* only for resolution 30 mm<br />
Ordering details<br />
SLG 220-E/R➀RF-➁<br />
No. Option Description<br />
➀<br />
Distance between<br />
outermost beams:<br />
0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam<br />
0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam<br />
0900-04 900 mm, 4-beam<br />
➁<br />
Range 0.3 m … 6 m<br />
H<br />
High Range 5 m … 30 m<br />
Mounting brackets are included in the delivery.<br />
Ordering details<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug M12, 8-pole straight<br />
for emitter/receiver<br />
Cable length 5 m<br />
Cable length 10 m<br />
Cable length 20 m<br />
KA-0904<br />
KA-0905<br />
KA-0908<br />
Notes<br />
†<br />
Curtains are delivered with the EDM turned<br />
off — NSR 0700 required for programming<br />
these functions
Safety light curtains and safety light grids<br />
SLG 220-P<br />
Technical Data<br />
734,5<br />
606<br />
¤ 49 50 50<br />
• Safety light grid<br />
• Emitter and receiver in one enclosure<br />
(retro reflector)<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntrol category Type 2<br />
to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2<br />
• Protection field heights 500 mm<br />
• 2-beam light grid<br />
• Integrated start/restart interlock<br />
• Integrated contactor control †<br />
• Range 0.3 m ... 6 m<br />
• Fail-safe transistor outputs<br />
• Status display<br />
• Protection class IP 65<br />
Standards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2<br />
Type 2<br />
Enclosure:<br />
Aluminium<br />
Enclosure dimensions:<br />
ø 40 mm<br />
Deflecting mirror:<br />
50 x50 x 606 mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug<br />
M12, 8-pole<br />
Max. cable length:<br />
100 m / 1 Ω<br />
Protection class: IP 65 to EN 60529<br />
Response time:<br />
12 ms<br />
Detection sensitivity<br />
(Resolution):<br />
500 mm<br />
Protection field height:<br />
2-beam<br />
500 mm<br />
Protection field width, Range:<br />
2-beam<br />
0.3 m ... 7 m<br />
Start/restart interlock:<br />
Integrated<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntactor control:<br />
Integrated<br />
Light emission wavelength:<br />
880 nm<br />
(infrared)<br />
Ue: 24 VDC ± 10%<br />
Safety outputs:<br />
2 x PNP, 200 mA<br />
Signalling output:<br />
PNP 100 mA<br />
Power consumption:<br />
10 W<br />
Data interface: –<br />
Status and diagnostics:<br />
LED display<br />
Ambient temperature: –10 °C … + 50 ºC<br />
Storage and<br />
transport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºC<br />
Classification:<br />
to IEC/EN 61508: SIL 2<br />
to EN ISO 13849-1:<br />
PL d<br />
PFH-value: 3.59 x 10 -8 / h<br />
to EN 954-1: <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Cat. 2<br />
Approvals<br />
F<br />
Ordering details<br />
SLG 220-P-E/R0500-02RF<br />
ULS-P-0500<br />
Safety light grid<br />
Deflecting mirror<br />
Ordering details<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug M12, 8-pole straight<br />
Cable length 5 m<br />
Cable length 10 m<br />
Cable length 20 m<br />
KA-0904<br />
KA-0905<br />
KA-0908<br />
Mounting brackets are included in the delivery.<br />
Notes<br />
†<br />
Curtains are delivered with the EDM turned<br />
off — NSR 0700 required for programming<br />
these functions<br />
8<br />
277
Safety light curtains and safety light grids<br />
SLC 220 Master / Slave<br />
Technical data<br />
• Safety light curtain<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntrol category Type 2 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2<br />
• Resolution 30 and 80 mm<br />
• Protection field height:<br />
Master from 175 mm to 1675 mm<br />
Slave from 325 mm to 775 mm<br />
• Integrated start/restart interlock<br />
• Integrated contactor control †<br />
• Diagnostic and parametrization interface †<br />
• Cascading of Master and Slave devices<br />
• Range 0.3 m ... 6 m<br />
• Fail-safe transistor outputs<br />
• Status display<br />
• Protection class IP 65<br />
• Signalling output<br />
• Integrated self-test<br />
Approvals<br />
Ordering details<br />
SLC 220-E/R➀-➁-RFB➂<br />
No. Option Description<br />
➀ xxxx Protected heights (mm)<br />
Available lengths:<br />
0175*, 0250*, 0325, 0475,<br />
0625, 0775, 0925, 1075,<br />
1225, 1375, 1525, 1675<br />
➁ 30 Resolution 30 mm<br />
80 Resolution 80 mm<br />
➂ M Master function<br />
S<br />
Slave function**<br />
Different lengths and resolutions can be<br />
combined for Master/Slave.<br />
278<br />
A<br />
Ordering details<br />
¤40<br />
Legend:<br />
A: Total length<br />
Protection field height 175 mm: A = 216 mm<br />
Protection field height 250 ... 1675 mm:<br />
A = 28.5 mm + Protection field height<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug M12, 8-pole straight<br />
for emitter/receiver<br />
Cable length 5 m<br />
Cable length 10 m<br />
Cable length 20 m<br />
KA-0904<br />
KA-0905<br />
KA-0908<br />
for Master/Slave connection<br />
Female connector 2 x M12, 6-pole straight<br />
Cable length 0.3 m<br />
KA-0907<br />
Mounting brackets are included in the delivery.<br />
Notes<br />
* only for resolution 30 mm<br />
** only protected heights from<br />
325 mm to 775 mm<br />
Standards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2<br />
Type 2<br />
Enclosure:<br />
Aluminium<br />
Enclosure dimensions:<br />
ø 40 mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug<br />
Master Emitter:<br />
M12, 8-pole,<br />
Master Receiver:<br />
M12, 8-pole<br />
Slave Emitter:<br />
M12, 6-pole,<br />
Slave Receiver:<br />
M12, 6-pole<br />
Max. cable length:<br />
100 m / 1Ω<br />
Max. cable length: (Master/Slave) 0.3 m<br />
Protection class: IP 65 to EN 60529<br />
Response time:<br />
12 … 65 ms<br />
(depends on length<br />
and resolution)<br />
Detection sensitivity<br />
(Resolution):<br />
30 and 80 mm<br />
Protection field height:<br />
Resolution 30 mm 175 ... 2450 mm<br />
Resolution 80 mm 325 ... 2450 mm<br />
Protection field width, Range: 0.3 ... 6 m<br />
Start/restart interlock:<br />
Integrated<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntactor control:<br />
Integrated<br />
Cascading: (Master/Slave)<br />
possible<br />
Light emission wavelength: 880 nm (infrared)<br />
Ue: 24 VDC ± 10%<br />
Safety outputs:<br />
2 x PNP, 200 mA<br />
Signalling output:<br />
PNP, 100 mA<br />
Power consumption: Emitter 4 W,<br />
Receiver 8 W<br />
Data interface: RS 485<br />
Status and diagnostics:<br />
LED display<br />
Ambient temperature: –10 °C … + 50 ºC<br />
Storage and<br />
transport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºC<br />
Classification:<br />
to IEC/EN 61508: SIL 2<br />
to EN ISO 13849-1:<br />
PL d<br />
PFH-value: 3.59 x 10 -8 / h<br />
to EN 954-1: <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Cat. 2<br />
Notes<br />
†<br />
Curtains are delivered with the EDM<br />
turned off — NSR 0700 required for<br />
programming these functions
Safety light curtains and safety light grids<br />
SLC 220 IP 69K<br />
SLG 220 IP 69K<br />
Technical data<br />
A<br />
• Safety light curtain<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntrol category Type 2<br />
to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2<br />
• Resolution 30 and 80 mm<br />
• Protection field heights from<br />
175 mm to 1675 mm<br />
• Protection class IP 69K<br />
• Integrated start/restart interlock<br />
• Integrated contactor control †<br />
• Integrated blanking function<br />
• Diagnostic and parametrization interface †<br />
• Range 0.3 m ... 14 m<br />
• Integrated self-test<br />
• Fail-safe transistor outputs<br />
• Status display<br />
• Signalling output<br />
¤60<br />
Legend:<br />
A: Total length<br />
A = 54 mm + Protection field height<br />
A<br />
¤60<br />
• Safety light grid<br />
• 2-, 3- or 4-beam light grid<br />
• Range 0.3 ... 30 m<br />
Legend:<br />
A: Total length<br />
A = 104 mm + Distance between<br />
outermost beams<br />
Standards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2<br />
Type 2<br />
Enclosure:<br />
Aluminium<br />
Enclosure dimensions:<br />
ø 60 mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection:<br />
Cable 8-pole<br />
with connector M12, 8-pole<br />
5 m long<br />
Max. cable length:<br />
100 m / 1Ω<br />
Protection class:<br />
IP 69K<br />
Response time:<br />
9 … 45 ms<br />
(depends on length<br />
and resolution)<br />
Detection sensitivity<br />
(Resolution):<br />
30 and 80 mm<br />
Protection field height:<br />
Resolution 30 mm 175 ... 1675 mm<br />
Resolution 80 mm 325 ... 1675 mm<br />
2-, 3-, 4-beam 500, 800, 900 mm<br />
Protection field width,<br />
Range:<br />
0.3 ... 6 m (Standard),<br />
SLC<br />
4 ... 14 m (High range)<br />
SLG<br />
5 ... 30 m (High range)<br />
Start/restart interlock:<br />
Integrated<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntactor control:<br />
Integrated<br />
Blanking function:<br />
Integrated<br />
Light emission wavelength: 880 nm (infrared)<br />
Ue: 24 VDC ± 10%<br />
Safety outputs:<br />
2 x PNP, 200 mA<br />
Signalling output:<br />
PNP, 100 mA<br />
Power consumption: Emitter 4 W,<br />
Receiver 8 W<br />
Data interface: RS 485<br />
Status and diagnostics:<br />
LED display<br />
Ambient temperature: –10 °C … + 50 ºC<br />
Storage and<br />
transport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºC<br />
Classification:<br />
to IEC/EN 61508: SIL 2<br />
to EN ISO 13849-1:<br />
PL d<br />
PFH-value: 3.59 x 10 -8 / h<br />
to EN 954-1: <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Cat. 2<br />
Approvals<br />
Approvals<br />
Ordering details<br />
SLC 220-E/R➀-30-69-RFB-➂<br />
No. Option Description<br />
➀ xxxx Protected heights (mm)<br />
Available lengths:<br />
0175*, 0250*, 0325, 0475,<br />
0625, 0775, 0925, 1075,<br />
1225, 1375, 1525, 1675<br />
➁ 30 Resolution 30 mm<br />
80 Resolution 80 mm<br />
➂<br />
Range 0.3 m … 6 m<br />
H<br />
High Range 4 m … 14 m<br />
Notes<br />
* only for resolution 30 mm<br />
Ordering details<br />
SLG 220-E/R➀-30-69-RF-➁<br />
No. Option Description<br />
➀<br />
Distance between<br />
outermost beams:<br />
0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam<br />
0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam<br />
0900-04 900 mm, 4-beam<br />
➁<br />
Range 0.3 m … 6 m<br />
H<br />
High Range 5 m … 30 m<br />
Mounting brackets (stainless steel) are included in the delivery.<br />
Notes<br />
†<br />
Curtains are delivered with the EDM turned off — NSR 0700<br />
required for programming these functions<br />
8<br />
279
Safety light curtains and safety light grids<br />
SLC 420 standard<br />
SLG 420 standard<br />
Technical data<br />
A<br />
¤49<br />
• Safety light curtain<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntrol category Type 4<br />
to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2<br />
• Resolution 14, 30 and 50 mm<br />
• Protection field heights from<br />
170 mm to 1770 mm<br />
• Integrated start/restart interlock<br />
• Integrated contactor control †<br />
• Integrated blanking function (fixed and<br />
mobile blanking) †<br />
• Diagnostic and parametrization interface †<br />
• Range 0.3 m ... 18 m<br />
• Fail-safe transistor outputs<br />
• Optical synchronisation<br />
• Status display<br />
• Protection class IP 67<br />
Legend:<br />
A: Total length<br />
A = 84.5 mm + Protection field height<br />
Approvals<br />
Ordering details<br />
A<br />
• Safety light grid<br />
• 2-, 3- or 4-beam light grid<br />
• Range 0.3 ... 40 m<br />
¤49<br />
Legend:<br />
A: Total length<br />
2-beam<br />
A = 734.5 mm<br />
3 and 4-beam A = 1054.5 mm<br />
Ordering details<br />
SLC 420-E/R➀-➁-RFB-➂<br />
SLG 420-E/R➀-RF-➁<br />
No. Option Description<br />
No. Option Description<br />
➀ xxxx Protected heights (mm) ➀<br />
Distance between<br />
Available lengths:<br />
outermost beams:<br />
0170, 0250, 0330, 0410, 0490, 0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam<br />
0570, 0650, 0730, 0810, 0890, 0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam<br />
0970, 1050, 1130, 1210, 1290, 0900-04 900 mm, 4-beam<br />
1370, 1450, 1530*, 1610*, ➁<br />
Range 0.3 m … 10 m<br />
1690*, 1770*<br />
H<br />
High Range 8 m … 40 m<br />
➁ 14 Resolution 14 mm<br />
30 Resolution 30 mm<br />
Mounting brackets are included in the delivery.<br />
➂<br />
50 Resolution 50 mm<br />
Notes<br />
Range 0.3 m … 7 m**<br />
* only for resolution 30 mm and 50 mm<br />
Range 0.3 m … 10 m*<br />
** only for resolution 14 mm<br />
H High Range 0.3 m … 18 m*** ***only for resolution 30 mm<br />
280<br />
Approvals<br />
Standards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2<br />
Type 4<br />
Enclosure:<br />
Aluminium<br />
Enclosure dimensions:<br />
ø 49 mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug<br />
Emitter:<br />
M12, 4-pole,<br />
Receiver:<br />
M12, 8-pole<br />
Max. cable length:<br />
100 m / 1 Ω<br />
Protection class: IP 67 to EN 60529<br />
Response time:<br />
10 … 27 ms<br />
(depends on length and resolution)<br />
Detection sensitivity<br />
(Resolution):<br />
14, 30 and 50 mm<br />
Protection field height:<br />
Resolution 14 mm 170 ... 1450 mm<br />
Resolution 30, 50 mm 170 ... 1770 mm<br />
2-, 3-, 4-beam 500, 800, 900 mm<br />
Protection field width, Range:<br />
Resolution 14 mm<br />
0.3 m ... 7 m<br />
Resolution 30, 50 mm 0.3 m ... 10 m<br />
High Range<br />
Resolution 30 mm<br />
0.3 m ... 18 m<br />
2-, 3-, 4-beam 0.3 m ... 10 m<br />
High Range<br />
2-, 3-, 4-beam 8 m ... 40 m<br />
Start/restart interlock:<br />
Integrated<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntactor control:<br />
Integrated<br />
Blanking function:<br />
Integrated<br />
Cascading: (Master/Slave) –<br />
Light emission wavelength: 880 nm (infrared)<br />
Ue: 24 VDC ± 10%<br />
Safety outputs:<br />
2 x PNP, 500 mA<br />
Power consumption: Emitter 4 W,<br />
Receiver 8 W<br />
Data interface: RS 485<br />
Status and diagnostics:<br />
LED display<br />
Ambient temperature: –10 °C … + 50 ºC<br />
Storage and<br />
transport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºC<br />
Classification:<br />
to IEC 62061: SIL 3<br />
to EN ISO 13849-1:<br />
PL e<br />
PFH-value: 7.42 x 10 -9 / h<br />
to EN 954-1: <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Cat. 4<br />
Ordering details<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug for emitter<br />
M12, 4-pole straight<br />
Cable length 5 m<br />
Cable length 10 m<br />
Cable length 20 m<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug for receiver<br />
M12, 8-pole straight<br />
Cable length 5 m<br />
Cable length 10 m<br />
Cable length 20 m<br />
KA-0804<br />
KA-0805<br />
KA-0808<br />
KA-0904<br />
KA-0905<br />
KA-0908<br />
Notes<br />
†<br />
Curtains are delivered with the EDM turned<br />
off — NSR 0801 required for programming<br />
these functions
Safety light curtains and safety light grids<br />
SLC 420 Master / Slave<br />
Technical data<br />
Approvals<br />
A<br />
Ordering details<br />
SLC 420-E/R➀-➁-RFB-➂➃<br />
No. Option Description<br />
➀ xxxx Protected heights (mm)<br />
Available lengths:<br />
0170, 0250, 0330, 0410, 0490,<br />
0570, 0650, 0730, 0810, 0890,<br />
0970, 1050, 1130, 1210, 1290,<br />
1370, 1450, 1530*, 1610*,<br />
1690*, 1770*<br />
➁ 14 Resolution 14 mm<br />
30 Resolution 30 mm<br />
50 Resolution 50 mm<br />
¤49<br />
• Safety light curtain<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntrol category Type 4 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2<br />
• Resolution 14, 30 and 50 mm<br />
• Protection field height:<br />
Master from 170 mm to 1770 mm<br />
Slave from 170 mm to 650 mm<br />
• Integrated start/restart interlock<br />
• Integrated contactor control †<br />
• Integrated blanking function †<br />
• Diagnostic and parametrization interface †<br />
• Cascading of Master and Slave devices<br />
• Range 0.3 m ... 7 m or 0.3 m ... 10 m<br />
• Fail-safe transistor outputs<br />
• Optical synchronisation<br />
• Status display<br />
Legend:<br />
A: Total length<br />
A = 84.5 mm + Protection field height<br />
➂<br />
Range 0.3 m … 7 m**<br />
Range 0.3 m … 10 m*<br />
H High Range 0.3 m … 18 m*<br />
➃ M Master function<br />
S*** Slave function<br />
Standards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2<br />
Type 4<br />
Enclosure:<br />
Aluminium<br />
Enclosure dimensions:<br />
ø 49 mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug<br />
Master Emitter:<br />
M12, 4-pole,<br />
Master Receiver:<br />
M12, 8-pole<br />
Slave Emitter:<br />
M12, 4-pole,<br />
Slave Receiver:<br />
M12 1, 8-pole<br />
Max. cable length:<br />
100 m / 1 Ω<br />
Max. cable length: (Master/Slave) 0.8 m<br />
Protection class: IP 67 to EN 60529<br />
Response time:<br />
10 … 37 ms<br />
(Depends on length and resolution)<br />
Detection sensitivity<br />
(Resolution):<br />
14, 30 and 50 mm<br />
Protection field height:<br />
Resolution 14 mm 170 ... 2100 mm<br />
Resolution 30, 50 mm 170 ... 2420 mm<br />
Protection field width, Range:<br />
Resolution 14 mm<br />
0.3 m ... 7 m<br />
Resolution 30, 50 mm 0.3 m ... 10 m<br />
High Range<br />
0.3 m ... 18 m<br />
Start/restart interlock:<br />
Integrated<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntactor control:<br />
Integrated<br />
Blanking function:<br />
Integrated<br />
Cascading: (Master/Slave)<br />
possible<br />
Light emission wavelength: 880 nm (infrared)<br />
Ue: 24 VDC ± 10%<br />
Safety outputs:<br />
2 x PNP, 500 mA<br />
Power consumption: Emitter 4 W,<br />
Receiver 8 W<br />
Data interface: RS 485<br />
Status and diagnostics:<br />
LED display<br />
Ambient temperature: –10 °C … + 50 ºC<br />
Storage and<br />
transport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºC<br />
Classification:<br />
to IEC 62061: SIL 3<br />
to EN ISO 13849-1:<br />
PL e<br />
PFH-value: 7.42 x 10 -9 / h<br />
to EN 954-1: <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Cat. 4<br />
Ordering details<br />
Mounting brackets are included in the delivery.<br />
Notes<br />
* only for resolution 30 mm<br />
** only for resolution 30 and 50 mm<br />
***Protection field heights from 170 ... 650 mm<br />
†<br />
Curtains are delivered with the EDM turned<br />
off — NSR 0700 required for programming<br />
these functions<br />
Ordering details<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug for emitter<br />
M12, 4-pole straight<br />
Cable length 5 m<br />
KA-0804<br />
Cable length 10 m<br />
KA-0805<br />
Cable length 20 m<br />
KA-0808<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug for receiver<br />
M12, 8-pole straight<br />
Cable length 5 m<br />
KA-0904<br />
Cable length 10 m<br />
KA-0905<br />
Cable length 20 m<br />
KA-0908<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug for Master/Slave connection<br />
Emitter<br />
Female connector 2 x M12, 4-pole straight<br />
Cable length 0.8 m<br />
KA-0810<br />
Receiver<br />
Female connector 2 x M12, 8-pole straight<br />
Cable length 0.8 m<br />
KA-0901<br />
281
Safety light curtains and safety light grids<br />
SLC 420 IP 69K<br />
A<br />
• Safety light curtain<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntrol category Type 4<br />
to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2<br />
• Resolution 14 mm and 30 mm<br />
• Protection field heights from<br />
170 mm to 1450 mm<br />
• Protection class IP 69K<br />
• Integrated start/restart interlock<br />
• Integrated contactor control †<br />
• Integrated blanking function (fixed and<br />
mobile blanking) †<br />
• Diagnostic and parametrization interface †<br />
• Range 0.3 m ... 10 m<br />
• Fail-safe transistor outputs<br />
• Optical synchronisation<br />
• Status display<br />
¤60<br />
Legend:<br />
A: Total length<br />
A = 97 mm + Protection field height<br />
SLG 420 IP 69K<br />
A<br />
¤60<br />
• Safety light grid<br />
• 2-, 3- or 4-beam light grid<br />
• Range 0.3 ... 12 m<br />
Legend:<br />
A: Total length<br />
2-beam<br />
A = 747 mm<br />
3 and 4-beam A = 1067 mm<br />
Technical data<br />
Standards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2<br />
Type 4<br />
Enclosure:<br />
Aluminium<br />
Enclosure dimensions:<br />
ø 60 mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection:<br />
Emitter/Receiver: Cable gland PG 9,<br />
Receiver<br />
Cable length 5 m, 8-pole<br />
Emitter<br />
Cable length 5 m, 4-pole<br />
Gore TM Membrane M12<br />
Max. cable length:<br />
100 m / 1 Ω<br />
Protection class: IP 69 to EN 60529<br />
Response time:<br />
10 … 27 ms<br />
(depends on length<br />
and resolution)<br />
Detection sensitivity<br />
(Resolution):<br />
14, 30 mm<br />
Protection field height:<br />
Resolution 14, 30 mm 170 ... 1770 mm<br />
2-, 3-, 4-beam 500, 800, 900 mm<br />
Protection field width, Range:<br />
Resolution 14 mm<br />
0.3 m ... 7 m<br />
Resolution 30 mm<br />
0.3 m ... 10 m<br />
2-, 3-, 4-beam 0.3 m ... 10 m<br />
Start/restart interlock:<br />
Integrated<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntactor control:<br />
Integrated<br />
Blanking function:<br />
Integrated<br />
Cascading: (Master/Slave) –<br />
Light emission wavelength: 880 nm (infrared)<br />
Ue: 24 VDC ± 10%<br />
Safety outputs:<br />
2 x PNP, 500 mA<br />
Power consumption: Emitter 4 W,<br />
Receiver 8 W<br />
Data interface: RS 485<br />
Status and diagnostics:<br />
LED display<br />
Ambient temperature: –10 °C … + 50 ºC<br />
Storage and<br />
transport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºC<br />
Classification:<br />
to IEC 62061: SIL 3<br />
to EN ISO 13849-1:<br />
PL e<br />
PFH-value: 7.42 x 10 -9 / h<br />
to EN 954-1: <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Cat. 4<br />
Approvals<br />
Approvals<br />
Ordering details<br />
SLC 420-E/R➀-➁-69-RFB<br />
No. Option Description<br />
➀ xxxx Protected heights (mm)<br />
Available lengths:<br />
0170, 0250, 0330, 0410,<br />
0490, 0570, 0650, 0730,<br />
0810, 0890, 0970, 1050,<br />
1130, 1210, 1290, 1370,<br />
1450, 1530, 1610, 1690,<br />
1770<br />
➁ 14 Resolution 14 mm with a<br />
range of 0.3 m … 7 m<br />
30 Resolution 30 mm with a<br />
range of 0.3 m … 10 m<br />
282<br />
Ordering details<br />
SLG 420-E/R➀-69-RF<br />
No. Option Description<br />
➀<br />
Distance between<br />
outermost beams:<br />
0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam<br />
0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam<br />
0900-04 900 mm, 4-beam<br />
Mounting brackets (stainless steel) are<br />
included in the delivery.<br />
Notes<br />
Delivered with cable gland and 5 meters cable<br />
pre-wired.<br />
†<br />
Curtains are delivered with the EDM turned<br />
off — NSR 0801 required for programming<br />
these functions
Safety light curtains and safety light grids<br />
SLG 422-P<br />
734,5<br />
606<br />
¤ 49 50 50<br />
• Safety light grid<br />
• Emitter and receiver in one enclosure<br />
(retro reflector)<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntrol category Type 4<br />
to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2<br />
• Protection field heightn 500 mm<br />
• 2-beam light grid<br />
• Integrated start/restart interlock<br />
• Integrated contactor control †<br />
• Range 0.3 m ... 7 m<br />
• Fail-safe transistor outputs<br />
• Status display<br />
• Protection class IP 67<br />
Technical data<br />
Standards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2<br />
Type 4<br />
Enclosure:<br />
Aluminium<br />
Enclosure dimensions:<br />
ø 49 mm<br />
Deflecting mirror:<br />
50 x 50 x 606 mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug<br />
Emitter/Receiver:<br />
M12, 8-pole<br />
Max. cable length:<br />
100 m / 1 Ω<br />
Protection class: IP 67 to EN 60529<br />
Response time:<br />
10 ms<br />
Detection sensitivity<br />
(Resolution):<br />
500 mm<br />
Protection field height:<br />
2-beam<br />
500 mm<br />
Protection field width, Range:<br />
2-beam<br />
0.3 m ... 7 m<br />
Start/restart interlock:<br />
Integrated<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntactor control:<br />
Integrated<br />
Light emission wavelength: 880 nm (infrared)<br />
Ue: 24 VDC ± 10%<br />
Safety outputs:<br />
2 x PNP, 500 mA<br />
Power consumption:<br />
10 W<br />
Data interface: –<br />
Status and diagnostics:<br />
LED display<br />
Ambient temperature: –10 °C … + 50 ºC<br />
Storage and<br />
transport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºC<br />
Classification:<br />
to IEC 62061: SIL 3<br />
to EN ISO 13849-1:<br />
PL e<br />
PFH-value: 7.42 x 10 -9 / h<br />
to EN 954-1: <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Cat. 4<br />
Approvals<br />
F<br />
Ordering details<br />
SLG 422-P-E/R0500-02-RF<br />
ULS-P-0500<br />
Safety light grid<br />
Deflecting mirror<br />
Ordering details<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug M12, 8-pole straight<br />
Cable length 5 m<br />
Cable length 10 m<br />
Cable length 20 m<br />
KA-0904<br />
KA-0905<br />
KA-0908<br />
Mounting brackets are included in the delivery.<br />
Notes<br />
†<br />
Curtains are delivered with the EDM turned<br />
off — NSR 0801 required for programming<br />
these functions<br />
8<br />
283
Miniaturized safety light grids and safety light curtains<br />
SLC 430<br />
NSR-0605<br />
Technical data<br />
• Safety light curtain<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntrol category Type 4<br />
to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2<br />
• Resolution 30 mm<br />
• Protection field heights from<br />
236 mm to 1804 mm<br />
• Slim design, size 12 x 20 mm<br />
• Integrated start/restart interlock<br />
• Integrated contactor control<br />
• Range 0.3 m ... 3.5 m<br />
• Status display<br />
• Protection class IP 65<br />
• Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntroller<br />
• Enclosure dimensions:<br />
240 x 160 mm<br />
Standards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category: Type 4<br />
in combination with<br />
evaluation unit NSR-0605<br />
Enclosure:<br />
Aluminium<br />
Enclosure dimensions: 12 x 20 mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector M8, 4-pole<br />
Max. cable length:<br />
100 m / 1 Ω<br />
Protection class: IP 65 to EN 60529<br />
Response time including<br />
relay output:<br />
50 ms<br />
Detection sensitivity (Resolution): 30 mm<br />
Protection field height: 236 ... 1804 mm<br />
Protection field width, Range: 0.3 m ... 3.5 m<br />
Start/restart interlock:<br />
Integrated<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntactor control:<br />
Integrated<br />
Light emission wavelength: 880 nm (infrared)<br />
Ue:<br />
22 ... 30 VDC<br />
18 ... 25 VAC<br />
Power consumption:<br />
8 W<br />
System<br />
Data interface: RS 485<br />
Status and diagnostics: LED display<br />
Ambient temperature: 0° C … + 50º C<br />
Storage and<br />
transport temperature: – 10° C … + 70º C<br />
Safety outputs:<br />
2 x Relay contact 250 V / 4 A<br />
Signalling output:<br />
1 x Relay contact 42 V / 4 A<br />
Classification:<br />
to IEC 62061: SIL 3<br />
to EN ISO 13849-1:<br />
PL e<br />
PFH-value: 1.26 x 10-8 / h<br />
to EN 954-1: <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Cat. 4<br />
Approvals<br />
Ordering details<br />
SLC 430-E/R➀-30-RF-SYS<br />
No. Option Description<br />
➀ xxxx Protected heights (mm)<br />
Available lengths:<br />
0236, 0460, 0684, 0908,<br />
1132, 1356, 1580, 1804<br />
* Range up to 5 m upon request<br />
Included in delivery<br />
Emitter and receiver including mounting set,<br />
controller NSR-0605, cable set KA-0610<br />
(cable length 5 m)<br />
Ordering details<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug for emitter / receiver<br />
M8, 4-pole straight<br />
Cable length 5 m<br />
Cable length 10 m<br />
KA-0610<br />
KA-0611<br />
284
Safety light curtains with integrated muting-, blanking- and Cyclic-function<br />
System features:<br />
• PL e acc. to EN ISO 13849-1<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 acc. to EN 954-1<br />
or acc. to IEC 61496, Type 4<br />
• Integrated muting function<br />
• 2 plugs for muting sensors<br />
• Integrated override function<br />
• Integrated cyclic operation function<br />
• Diagnostics display<br />
• Optical synchronisation<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mpact design<br />
• Simple, flexible mounting and adjustment<br />
8<br />
285
Safety light curtains with integrated muting-, blanking- and Cyclic-function<br />
SLC/SLG 425I<br />
The SLC/SLG 415I is a system<br />
for universal use with<br />
integrated muting function.<br />
The M8 connectors allow a<br />
direct connection and flexible<br />
positioning of the different<br />
muting sensors (e.g. inductive,<br />
capacitive or optical sensors).<br />
In this way, a safe triggering<br />
of the muting function<br />
can be obtained for objects of<br />
different sizes. The additional<br />
integrated override function<br />
allows for a controlled restart<br />
of the machine to transport<br />
the accumulated material out<br />
of the protection field after a<br />
failure. The safety light curtains/grids<br />
with muting function<br />
enable a smooth and<br />
trouble-free material feeding<br />
(input and output), whilst<br />
offering a permanent protection<br />
of human life.<br />
• Integrated muting function<br />
for material transport in<br />
1 or 2 directions<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nnection of 2 or 4<br />
external muting sensors<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nnection of different<br />
muting sensors<br />
• Direct connection (M8) of<br />
the muting sensors to the<br />
SLC/SLG<br />
• Muting controller for crosswise<br />
or parallel arrangement<br />
of the external sensors<br />
• Adjustable muting time of<br />
30 s, 90 min or 100 h<br />
• Integrated override function<br />
• Range up to 12 m<br />
Cyclic operation<br />
Cyclic operation is a mode<br />
of operation, in which the<br />
machine automatically starts a<br />
work process, as soon as the<br />
operator releases the protection<br />
zone of the light curtain.<br />
A cycle is defined as the onetime<br />
interruption and release<br />
of the protection zone.<br />
In one-cycle operation, a new<br />
machine cycle is initiated,<br />
when the protection zone is<br />
interrupted one time.<br />
Example:<br />
The material is fed automatically<br />
without interruption of<br />
the protection zone. After initialization,<br />
the machine starts<br />
the first cycle. The operator<br />
now interrupts the protection<br />
zone to remove the material.<br />
The next cycle starts automatically.<br />
In two-cycle operation, a new<br />
machine cycle is started when<br />
the protection zone is interrupted<br />
twice.<br />
Example:<br />
The operator loads the<br />
machine and gives the start<br />
command. After the process<br />
is finished, the operator<br />
removes the processed material<br />
(1st cycle) and loads a<br />
new part for processing (2nd<br />
cycle). The next cycle starts<br />
automatically.<br />
The light curtain additionally<br />
monitors a signal (machine<br />
contact) of the machine,<br />
which signals the end of the<br />
hazardous movement. This<br />
signal is used for the cycle<br />
reset and enables an immediate<br />
intervention in the protection<br />
zone.<br />
286
Safety light curtains with integrated muting-, blanking- and Cyclic-function<br />
SLC 425I<br />
A<br />
• Safety light curtain<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntrol category Type 4 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2<br />
• Resolution 14 and 30 mm<br />
• Protection field heights from 170 mm to 1770 mm<br />
• Integrated start/restart interlock<br />
• Integrated contactor control †<br />
• Integrated muting and override function †<br />
• Integrated blanking function (fixed and<br />
mobile blanking) †<br />
• Cyclic operation (1 ... 8 Cycles) †<br />
• Range 0.3 ... 10 m<br />
• Fail-safe transistor outputs<br />
• Optical synchronisation<br />
• Status display<br />
• Different muting sequences can be programmed<br />
• Protection class IP 67<br />
Legend:<br />
A: Total length<br />
Emitter<br />
A = 84.5 mm + Protection field height<br />
Receiver<br />
A = 148.5 mm + Protection field height<br />
Approvals<br />
Ordering details<br />
SLC 425I-E/R➀-➁-RFBC<br />
No. Option Description<br />
➀ xxxx Protected heights (mm)<br />
Available lengths:<br />
0170, 0250, 0330, 0410,<br />
0490, 0570, 0650, 0730,<br />
0810, 0890, 0970, 1050,<br />
1130, 1210, 1290, 1370,<br />
1450, 1530*, 1610*,1690*,<br />
1770*<br />
➁ 14, 30 Resolution 14 mm, 30 mm<br />
SLG 425I<br />
A<br />
• Safety light grid<br />
• 2-, 3- or 4-beam light grid<br />
• Protection field heights 500, 800 or 900 mm<br />
• Range 0.3 ... 18 m<br />
Legend:<br />
A: Total length<br />
Emitter 2-beam A = 804 mm<br />
3 and 4-beam A = 1124 mm<br />
Receiver 2-beam A = 868 mm<br />
3 and 4-beam A = 1188 mm<br />
Approvals<br />
Ordering details<br />
SLG 425I-E/R➀-RF<br />
No. Option Description<br />
➀<br />
Distance between<br />
outermost beams:<br />
0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam<br />
0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam<br />
0900-04 900 mm, 4-beam<br />
* only for resolution 30 mm<br />
Mounting brackets are included in the delivery.<br />
Technical data<br />
Standards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2<br />
Type 4<br />
Enclosure:<br />
Aluminium<br />
Enclosure dimensions:<br />
ø 49 mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug<br />
Emitter:<br />
M12, 4-pole,<br />
Receiver:<br />
M12, 8-pole,<br />
Muting sensors: 2 x connector plugs<br />
M8, 3-pole<br />
Muting lamp:<br />
M8, 3-pole<br />
Max. cable length:<br />
100 m / 1 Ω<br />
Protection class: IP 67 to EN 60529<br />
Response time:<br />
7 … 28.5 ms<br />
(Depends on length<br />
and resolution)<br />
Detection sensitivity<br />
(Resolution):<br />
14 and 30 mm<br />
Protection field height:<br />
Resolution 14 mm 170 ... 1450 mm<br />
Resolution 30 mm 170 ... 1770 mm<br />
2-, 3-, 4-beam 500, 800, 900 mm<br />
Protection field width, Range:<br />
Resolution 14 mm<br />
0.3 m ... 7 m<br />
Resolution 30 mm<br />
0.3 m … 10 m<br />
2-, 3-. 4-beam 0.3 m ... 18 m<br />
Start/restart interlock:<br />
Integrated<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntactor control:<br />
Integrated<br />
Muting- and Override-Function: Integrated<br />
Muting sensors: 2 or 4 external sensors<br />
Light emission wavelength: 880 nm<br />
(infrared)<br />
Ue: 24 VDC ± 10%<br />
Safety outputs:<br />
2 x PNP, 500 mA<br />
Power consumption: Emitter 4 W,<br />
Receiver 8 W<br />
Data interface: RS 485<br />
Status and diagnostics: LED display<br />
Ambient temperature: –10° C … + 50º C<br />
Storage and<br />
transport temperature: – 20° C … + 70º C<br />
Classification:<br />
to IEC 62061: SIL 3<br />
to EN ISO 13849-1:<br />
PL e<br />
PFH-value: 7.42 x 10 -9 / h<br />
to EN 954-1: <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Cat. 4<br />
Ordering details<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug for emitter<br />
M12, 4-pole straight<br />
Cable length 5 m<br />
KA-0804<br />
Cable length 10 m<br />
KA-0805<br />
Cable length 20 m<br />
KA-0808<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug for receiver<br />
M12, 8-pole straight<br />
Cable length 5 m<br />
KA-0904<br />
Cable length 10 m<br />
KA-0905<br />
Cable length 20 m<br />
KA-0908<br />
Notes<br />
†<br />
Curtains are delivered with the EDM<br />
turned off — NSR 0801 required for<br />
programming these functions<br />
8<br />
287
Safety light curtains with integrated muting-, blanking- and Cyclic-function<br />
SLG425-IP<br />
A<br />
606<br />
¤49 50 50<br />
• Safety light grid<br />
• Emitter and receiver in one enclosure<br />
(retro reflector)<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntrol category Type 4<br />
to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2<br />
• Protection field height 500 mm<br />
• 2-beam light grid<br />
• Integrated start/restart interlock<br />
• Integrated contactor control †<br />
• Range 0.3 m ... 7 m<br />
• Fail-safe transistor outputs<br />
• Status display<br />
• Protection class IP 67<br />
Technical data<br />
Standards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2<br />
Type 4<br />
Enclosure:<br />
Aluminium<br />
Enclosure dimensions:<br />
ø 49 mm<br />
Deflecting mirror: 50 x 50 x 606 mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug<br />
Emitter/Receiver:<br />
M12, 8-pole<br />
Max. cable length:<br />
100 m / 1 Ω<br />
Protection class: IP 67 to EN 60529<br />
Response time:<br />
15 ms<br />
Detection sensitivity<br />
(Resolution):<br />
500 mm<br />
Protection field height:<br />
2-beam<br />
500 mm<br />
Protection field width, Range:<br />
2-beam<br />
0.3 m ... 7 m<br />
Start/restart interlock:<br />
Integrated<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntactor control:<br />
Integrated<br />
Light emission wavelength: 880 nm (infrared)<br />
Ue: 24 VDC ± 10%<br />
Safety outputs:<br />
2 x PNP, 500 mA<br />
Power consumption:<br />
10 W<br />
Data interface: RS 485<br />
Status and diagnostics: LED display<br />
Ambient temperature: –10° C … + 50º C<br />
Storage and<br />
transport temperature: – 20° C … + 70º C<br />
Classification:<br />
to IEC 62061: SIL 3<br />
to EN ISO 13849-1:<br />
PL e<br />
PFH-value: 7.42 x 10 -9 / h<br />
to EN 954-1: <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Cat. 4<br />
Approvals<br />
F<br />
Ordering details<br />
SLG 425IP-E/R0500-02-RF<br />
Safety light curtain<br />
ULS-P-0500<br />
Deflecting mirror<br />
Ordering details<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug M12, 8-pole straight<br />
Cable length 5 m<br />
Cable length 10 m<br />
Cable length 20 m<br />
KA-0904<br />
KA-0905<br />
KA-0908<br />
Mounting brackets are included in the delivery.<br />
288<br />
Notes<br />
†<br />
Curtains are delivered with the EDM turned<br />
off — NSR 0801 required for programming<br />
these functions
Reflection light sensor (Muting sensor)<br />
LF 50-11P<br />
Technical data<br />
System components<br />
63,5<br />
13,5<br />
17<br />
46<br />
44<br />
16<br />
4<br />
50<br />
4,3<br />
M12x1<br />
40<br />
44<br />
4,3<br />
4<br />
Standards: EN 60974-5-2<br />
Laser protection class 1: EN 60825-1-10/03<br />
Enclosure:<br />
ABS<br />
Enclosure dimensions: 50 x 50 x 17 mm<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection:<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug<br />
M12 4-pole,<br />
can be rotated<br />
Max. cable length:<br />
100 m<br />
Protection class: IP 67<br />
Switching frequency:<br />
2500 Hz<br />
Range:<br />
0 ... 5.5 m<br />
Infrared laser light:<br />
660 nm<br />
Ue:<br />
10 ... 30 VDC<br />
Switching output:<br />
2 x PNP 200 mA<br />
Beam diameter:<br />
5 ... 24 mm<br />
LED status display:<br />
soiling,<br />
switching condition<br />
and power on<br />
Ambient temperature: – 20° C ... + 45° C<br />
Storage and<br />
transport temperature: – 20° C … + 80º C<br />
Reflector R 51 x 61-L<br />
Reflector R D83<br />
• Range 5.5 m<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nnector can be rotated<br />
• LED status display<br />
• Protection class IP 67<br />
• Antivalent switching outputs<br />
• Infrared light 670 nm<br />
• Laser protection class 1<br />
Mounting angle BF 50<br />
Approvals<br />
Mounting angle BF UNI 1<br />
Ordering details<br />
LF 50-11P<br />
Note:<br />
Mounting angles, reflectors, and cables are not<br />
included in the delivery.<br />
Ordering details<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector plug M12, 4-pole<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnector Only<br />
S-K4P-M12-S-G-X-X-X-X-B-1<br />
2 meter cable<br />
A-K4P-M12-S-G-2M-BK-2-X-A-1<br />
5 meter cable<br />
A-K4P-M12-S-G-5M-BK-2-X-A-1<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnecting plug for muting sensor<br />
to connect SLG 425I<br />
M12, 4-pole to M8, 3-pole,<br />
cable 2 m:<br />
KA-0965<br />
Ordering details<br />
Reflector R 51 x 61-L<br />
Reflector<br />
R D83<br />
Mounting angle BF 50<br />
Mounting angle universal BF UNI 1<br />
8<br />
289
Safety light curtains and safety light grids – accessories<br />
System components<br />
System components<br />
System components<br />
Alignment kit EA5<br />
MS-1010 Mounting kit<br />
Mounting kit MS-1073<br />
Yellow lighting element with wall support<br />
MS-1031 Mounting kit for ULS-A4<br />
Mounting kit MS-690<br />
MS-1000<br />
MS-1036 Mounting kit<br />
Vibration damper MSD-2 / MSD-4<br />
Mounting kit MS-1051<br />
Test rod PLS-01, PLS-02<br />
Ordering details<br />
Laser alignment tool<br />
for SLC / SLG Series<br />
EA5<br />
Muting lamp with LED block<br />
MK2<br />
Operating conditions indication<br />
red, green, yellow LED<br />
MK3<br />
Operating conditions indication<br />
red, green<br />
MK4<br />
Signalling lamp with bulb 24 V<br />
yellow with wall mounting bracket MK5<br />
Mounting kit for SLC /SLG 220<br />
4 x angle incl. screws MS-1000<br />
2 x angle incl. screws MS 1072<br />
290<br />
Ordering details<br />
Mounting kit for central fixation<br />
for SLC /SLG 220<br />
2 x angle MS-1010<br />
Mounting kit for ULS-A4<br />
2 x incl. screws MS-1031<br />
MS-1036 Mounting kit<br />
for SLC/SLG 420-425 in V2A<br />
4 x incl. screws MS-1036<br />
Mounting kit lateral fixation<br />
for SLC/SLG 420-425<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nsisting of 2 steel angles,<br />
4 screws and 4 T-slot nuts MS-1051<br />
Ordering details<br />
Mounting kit for deflecting mirror ULS-M<br />
2 x mounting angle MS-1073<br />
Mounting kit for SLC 430<br />
2 x clamping profile MS-690<br />
Vibration damper<br />
8 x vibration damper<br />
for SLC/SLG 220<br />
MSD-2<br />
8 x vibration damper<br />
for SLC/SLG 420-425<br />
MSD-4<br />
Test rod for resolution 30mm PLS-01<br />
Test rod for resolution 14mm PLS-02
Safety light curtains and safety light grids – accessories<br />
System components<br />
System components<br />
System components<br />
NSR-0801<br />
Deflecting mirror ULS-A4, ø 49 mm<br />
Protective enclosure with deflecting mirror<br />
NSR-0700<br />
Mounting Stands<br />
Protective enclosure for light grids<br />
New!<br />
Deflecting mirror ULS-MLC<br />
Deflection Mirror Application Notes<br />
ULS-MLC: Should be used when range is<br />
greater than 6 m. With 1 mirror the range is<br />
reduced by 10%, with 2 or more mirrors the<br />
range is reduced by 15% per mirror.<br />
Muting Carrier Set<br />
Deflection Mirror Application Notes<br />
ULS-4A: Should be used when range is less<br />
than 6 m. The range is reduced by 20%, with<br />
each mirror; only 1 mirror is recommended per<br />
curtain/grid<br />
Aluminium profile for SLC 430<br />
Ordering details<br />
Bus converter<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nverter for the programming<br />
of SLC/SLG 420-425<br />
USB 2.0 Interface NSR 0801<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nverter for the programming<br />
of SLC / SLG 220<br />
RS232 interface NSR 0700<br />
Deflecting mirror ULS-M incl. mounting angle<br />
Mirror height 200mm ULS-MLC-0200<br />
Mirror height 350mm ULS-MLC-0350<br />
Mirror height 500mm ULS-MLC-0500<br />
Mirror height 650mm ULS-MLC-0650<br />
Mirror height 800mm ULS-MLC-0800<br />
Mirror height 950mm ULS-MLC-0950<br />
Mirror height 1250mm ULS-MLC-1250<br />
Mirror height 1550mm ULS-MLC-1550<br />
Mirror height 1700mm ULS-MLC-1700<br />
Ordering details<br />
Deflecting mirror ULS-A4 incl. mounting angle<br />
Mirror height 200 mm ULS-A4-0200<br />
Mirror height 400 mm ULS-A4-0400<br />
Mirror height 550 mm ULS-A4-0550<br />
Mirror height 700 mm ULS-A4-0700<br />
Mirror height 850 mm ULS-A4-0850<br />
Mirror height 1000 mm ULS-A4-1000<br />
Mounting Stands<br />
Height including plinth 500mm MST-0500<br />
Height including plinth 750mm MST-0750<br />
Height including plinth 1000mm MST-1000<br />
Height including plinth 1250mm MST-1250<br />
Height including plinth 1500mm MST-1500<br />
Height including plinth 1750mm MST-1750<br />
Height including plinth 2000mm MST-2000<br />
Muting Carrier Set<br />
2 x aluminium profile MT-0400<br />
Ordering details<br />
Protective enclosure with deflecting mirror<br />
version for 2-beam light grids ULS-ST2<br />
version for 3-beam light grids ULS-ST3<br />
version for 4-beam light grids ULS-ST4<br />
Protective enclosure for light grids<br />
Height 1114mm hot-dip galvanised SG1<br />
Height 1334 mm hot-dip galvanised SG2<br />
Height 1114 mm RAL 1021<br />
SG3<br />
Height 1334 mm RAL 1021<br />
SG4<br />
Aluminium profile for SLC 430<br />
2 x profile, length 420 mm MS-1501<br />
2 x profile, length 643 mm MS-1502<br />
2 x profile, length 865 mm MS-1503<br />
2 x profile, length 1090 mm MS-1504<br />
2 x profile, length 1312 mm MS-1505<br />
2 x profile, length 1537 mm MS-1506<br />
2 x profile, length 1761 mm MS-1507<br />
2 x profile, length 1985 mm MS-1508<br />
291
292<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design
Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety components<br />
Besides the traditional safety relay controls, Schmersal<br />
offers CE-type tested safety controls or other safetyoriented<br />
bus systems (e.g. AS-i Safety at Work) for<br />
different levels of complexity and combination depths,<br />
which provide the user with many visualization and<br />
diagnostic possibilities.<br />
8<br />
293
Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety components<br />
SRB 301LC/B<br />
• Suitable for signal processing of potentialfree<br />
outputs, e.g. emergency stop<br />
command devices, position switches<br />
and solenoid interlocks<br />
• Suitable for signal processing from the<br />
outputs of magnetic safety switches (to<br />
this end, equipped with built-in current<br />
and voltage limitation)<br />
• Suitable for signal processing of outputs<br />
connected to potentials (AOPD’s), e.g.<br />
safety light grids/curtains<br />
• 1 or 2 channel control<br />
• 3 safety contacts, STOP 0<br />
• 1 signalling output (NC)<br />
• Manual reset without edge detection<br />
• Automatic reset function<br />
• 4 LEDs to show operating conditions<br />
Approvals<br />
H<br />
Ordering details<br />
SRB 301LC/B-24V<br />
Technical data<br />
Standards:<br />
IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, EN 954-1, BG-GS-ET-20<br />
Start conditions:<br />
Automatic or start button<br />
Feedback circuit (Y/N):<br />
yes<br />
ON delay with reset button:<br />
≤ 20 ms<br />
Drop-out delay in case of emergency stop:<br />
≤ 25 ms<br />
Drop-out delay in case of power failure:<br />
≤ 50 ms<br />
Rated operating voltage Ue: 24 VDC –15%/+20%, residual ripple max. 10%;<br />
24 VAC –15%/+10%<br />
Rated operating current Ie:<br />
0.08 A<br />
Frequency range:<br />
50 / 60 Hz<br />
Fuse rating for the operating voltage:<br />
0.5 A gG D fuse<br />
Internal electronic protection (Y/N):<br />
no<br />
Power consumption:<br />
2.1 W; 3.0 VA<br />
Monitored inputs:<br />
Short-circuit recognition:<br />
no<br />
Wire breakage detection:<br />
yes<br />
Earth connection detection:<br />
yes<br />
Number of NC contacts: 2<br />
Number of NO contacts: 0<br />
Max. conduction resistance:<br />
40 Ω<br />
Outputs:<br />
Stop category 0: 3<br />
Stop category 1: 0<br />
Number of safety contacts: 3<br />
Number of signalling outputs: 1<br />
Max. switching capacity of the safety contacts:<br />
250 VAC, 6 A ohmic (inductive in<br />
case of appropriate protective wiring)<br />
Utilisation category to EN 60947-5-1:<br />
AC-15: 230 V / 6 A; DC-13: 24 V / 6 A<br />
Mechanical life:<br />
107 operations<br />
Ambient conditions:<br />
Environmental temperature: – 25°C … + 45°C<br />
Storage and transport temperature: – 25°C … + 70°C<br />
Protection class: Enclosure: IP 40, Terminals: IP 20, Clearance: IP 54<br />
Mounting: Snaps onto standard DIN rail to EN 60715<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection type:<br />
Screw connection, solid strand or<br />
multi-strand (incl. conductor ferrules)<br />
min. cable section: 0.25 mm 2<br />
max. cable section: 2.5 mm 2<br />
Weight:<br />
230 g<br />
Dimensions (Height/Width/Depth):<br />
100 x 22.5 x 121 mm<br />
Classification:<br />
Standards: EN ISO 13849-1; IEC 61508; IEC 60947-5-3<br />
PL:<br />
up to e<br />
Category: up to 4<br />
PFH value: 5.0 x 10 -9 /h for max. 36,500 switching cycles/year and max. 60% contact load<br />
SIL: up to 3<br />
Mission time:<br />
20 years<br />
Note<br />
For some applications, the use of a monitored start button (reset with edge detection) is required.<br />
294
Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety components<br />
Note<br />
Wiring diagram<br />
• Input level: The example shows a<br />
2-channel control circuit with a safety light<br />
grid, an external reset button J and a<br />
feedback circuit S.<br />
• The control system recognizes wirebreakage<br />
and earth faults in the<br />
monitoring circuit.<br />
• Relay outputs: Suitable for 2 channel<br />
control, for increase in capacity or number<br />
of contacts by means of contactors or<br />
relays with positive-guided contacts.<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nnect potential p-type outputs of<br />
safety light grids/curtains to S12/S22.<br />
The devices must have the same reference<br />
potential.<br />
• Automatic start: The automatic start is<br />
programmed by connecting the feedback<br />
circuit to the terminals X1/X2. If the<br />
feedback circuit is not required, establish<br />
a bridge<br />
A1 S12 S11 S21 S22 X1 X2 13<br />
A2<br />
F1<br />
Ui<br />
Ansteuerlogik/<br />
Logic<br />
K1<br />
K2<br />
J<br />
K B<br />
S<br />
K A<br />
K1<br />
K2<br />
23<br />
33 41<br />
14 24 34 42<br />
L1<br />
K A<br />
K B<br />
K A<br />
K B<br />
N<br />
LED<br />
The integrated LED’s indicate the following<br />
operating conditions:<br />
• Position relay K1<br />
• Position relay K2<br />
• Supply voltage UB<br />
• Internal operating voltage Ui<br />
Note<br />
The wiring diagram is shown for the de-energized condition.<br />
Inductive loads (e.g. contactors, relays, etc.) are to be suppressed by means of<br />
a suitable circuit.<br />
Additional safety monitoring modules available. Please consult factory.<br />
8<br />
295
Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety components<br />
SRB 301ST<br />
• Suitable for signal processing of<br />
potentialfree outputs, e.g. emergency<br />
stop command devices, position switches<br />
and solenoid interlocks<br />
• Suitable for signal processing of outputs<br />
connected to potentials (AOPDs), e.g.<br />
safety light grids/curtains<br />
• 1 or 2 channel control<br />
• 3 safety contacts, STOP 0<br />
• 1 signalling output (NC)<br />
• Optionally with short-circuit recognition<br />
(through switch)<br />
• With hybrid fuse<br />
• Reset with edge detection or automatic<br />
reset function<br />
• 4 LEDs to show operating conditions<br />
• Plug-in screw connection<br />
Technical data<br />
Standards: IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC 61508, IEC 60947-5-3, BG-GS-ET-20<br />
Start conditions:<br />
Automatic or start button<br />
Feedback circuit (Y/N):<br />
yes<br />
ON delay with automatic start:<br />
≤ 300 ms<br />
ON delay with reset button:<br />
≤ 30 ms<br />
Drop-out delay in case of power failure:<br />
≤ 50 ms<br />
Rated operating voltage Ue: 24 VDC –15%/+20%, residual ripple max. 10%;<br />
24 VAC –15%/+10%<br />
Rated operating current Ie:<br />
0.08 A<br />
Frequency range:<br />
50 / 60 Hz<br />
Fuse rating for the operating voltage:<br />
0.5 A gG D-fuse<br />
Internal electronic protection (Y/N):<br />
no<br />
Power consumption:<br />
2.1 W; 3.0 VA<br />
Monitored inputs:<br />
Short-circuit recognition:<br />
no<br />
Wire breakage detection:<br />
yes<br />
Earth connection detection:<br />
yes<br />
Number of NC contacts: 2<br />
Number of NO contacts: 0<br />
Max. conduction resistance:<br />
40 Ω<br />
Outputs:<br />
Stop category 0: 3<br />
Stop category 1: 0<br />
Number of safety contacts: 3<br />
Number of signalling outputs: 1<br />
Max. switching capacity of the safety contacts: 250 VAC, 6 A ohmic (inductive incase of<br />
appropriate protective wiring)<br />
Utilisation category to EN 60947-5-1:<br />
AC-15: 230 V / 6 A; DC-13: 24 V / 6 A<br />
Mechanical life:<br />
107 operations<br />
Ambient conditions:<br />
Environmental temperature: – 25°C … + 45°C<br />
Storage and transport temperature: – 25°C … + 70°C<br />
Protection class: Enclosure: IP 40, Terminals: IP 20, Clearance: IP 54<br />
Mounting: Snaps onto standard DIN rail to EN 60715<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection type: Screw connection, solid strand or multi-strand (incl. conductor ferrules)<br />
min. cable section: 0.25 mm 2<br />
max. cable section: 2.5 mm 2<br />
Weight:<br />
230 g<br />
Dimensions (Height/Width/Depth):<br />
100 x 22.5 x 121 mm<br />
Classification:<br />
Standards: EN ISO 13849-1; IEC 61508<br />
PL:<br />
up to e<br />
Category: up to 4<br />
PFH value: 5,0 x 10 -9 /h for max. 36,500 switching cycles/year and max. 60% contact load<br />
SIL: up to 3<br />
Mission time:<br />
20 years<br />
Approvals<br />
H<br />
Ordering details<br />
SRB 301ST<br />
296
Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety components<br />
Note<br />
Wiring diagram<br />
• Input level: The example shows a<br />
2-channel control circuit with a safety light<br />
grid, an external reset button J and a<br />
feedback circuit S.<br />
• The control recognises cross-short,<br />
cable break and earth leakages in the<br />
monitoring circuit.<br />
• F1 = hybrid fuse<br />
• Relay outputs: Suitable for 2 channel control,<br />
for increase in capacity or number of<br />
contacts by means of contactors or relays<br />
with positive-guided contacts.<br />
• Switch setting:<br />
The cross-wire short detection function<br />
(factory default) is programmed by means<br />
of the switch located underneath the front<br />
cover of the module:<br />
Position nQS (top):<br />
no cross-wire short protection, suitable<br />
for 1-channel applications and applications<br />
with outputs with potential in the control<br />
circuits.<br />
Position QS (bottom):<br />
cross-wire short protection, suitable for<br />
2-channel applications without outputs<br />
with potential in the control circuits.<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nnect potential p-type outputs of<br />
safety light grids/curtains to S12/S22.<br />
The devices must have the same reference<br />
potential. (QS-switch = nQS)<br />
• Automatic start:<br />
The automatic start is programmed by<br />
connecting the feedback circuit to the<br />
terminals S12/X3. If the feedback circuit<br />
is not required, establish a bridge<br />
A1<br />
F1<br />
UB<br />
Ui<br />
S12 S11 S21<br />
Ansteuerlogik/<br />
Logic<br />
K1<br />
K2<br />
S22<br />
J<br />
K1<br />
K2<br />
13 23<br />
A2 14 24<br />
nQS<br />
QS<br />
K B<br />
K A<br />
X3 X2<br />
S<br />
K A<br />
33<br />
34<br />
K B<br />
L1<br />
41<br />
42<br />
N<br />
K A<br />
K B<br />
LED<br />
The integrated LED’s indicate the following<br />
operating conditions:<br />
• Position relay K1<br />
• Position relay K2<br />
• Supply voltage UB<br />
• Internal operating voltage Ui<br />
Note<br />
The wiring diagram is shown for the de-energized condition.<br />
Inductive loads (e.g. contactors, relays, etc.) are to be suppressed by means of<br />
a suitable circuit.<br />
Additional safety monitoring modules available. Please consult factory.<br />
8<br />
297
Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety components<br />
SCR 211<br />
• Suitable for signal processing of outputs<br />
connected to potentials (AOPDs),<br />
e.g. safety light grids/curtains<br />
• 1 or 2 channel control<br />
• 2 safety contacts, STOP 0<br />
• 1 safety contacts, STOP 1<br />
• 1 signalling output (NC)<br />
• With hybrid fuse<br />
• Reset with edge detection or automatic<br />
reset function<br />
• 4 LEDs to show operating conditions<br />
• Category 4 to EN 954-1<br />
• Plug-in screw connection<br />
Technical data<br />
Standards: IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 60947-5-3, EN 954-1, BG-GS-ET-14, BG-GS-ET-20<br />
Start conditions:<br />
Automatic or start button<br />
Feedback circuit (Y/N):<br />
yes<br />
ON delay with automatic start:<br />
≤ 40 ms<br />
Drop-out delay in case of emergency stop:<br />
≤ 50 ms<br />
Rated operating voltage Ue:<br />
24 VAC/DC<br />
Frequency range:<br />
50 / 60 Hz<br />
Fuse rating for the operating voltage: Internal electronic trip, tripping current > 1.0 A,<br />
Reset after disconnection of supply voltage<br />
Internal electronic protection (Y/N):<br />
yes<br />
Power consumption:<br />
5.1 W; 5.7 VA, plus signalling output<br />
Monitored inputs:<br />
Short-circuit recognition:<br />
no<br />
Wire breakage detection:<br />
yes<br />
Earth connection detection:<br />
yes<br />
Number of NC contacts: 2<br />
Number of NO contacts: 0<br />
Max. conduction resistance:<br />
40 Ω<br />
Outputs:<br />
Stop category 0: 2<br />
Stop category 1: 1<br />
Number of safety contacts: 3<br />
Number of auxiliary contacts: 0<br />
Number of signalling outputs: 1<br />
Max. switching capacity of the safety contacts:<br />
250 VAC, 4 A ohmic (inductive in<br />
case of appropriate protective wiring)<br />
Utilisation category to EN 60947-5-1: 13-14, 23-24: AC-15: 230 V / 1.5 A, DC-13: 24 V / 1.2 A;<br />
37/38: AC-15: 230 V / 3 A, DC-13: 24 V / 2 A<br />
Mechanical life:<br />
10 7 operations<br />
Ambient conditions:<br />
Ambient temperature:<br />
-25°C…+45°C<br />
Storage and transport temperature:<br />
-25°C…+70°C<br />
Protection class: Enclosure: IP 40, Terminals: IP 20, Clearance: IP 54<br />
Mounting: Snaps onto standard DIN rail to EN 60715<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection type:<br />
Screw connection, plug-in<br />
min. cable section: 0.25 mm 2<br />
max. cable section: 2.5 mm 2<br />
Weight:<br />
255 g<br />
Dimensions (Height/Width/Depth):<br />
100 x 22.5 x 121 mm<br />
Classification:<br />
Standards: EN ISO 13849-1; IEC 61508; IEC 60947-5-3<br />
PL:<br />
up to e<br />
Category: up to 4<br />
PFH value: 5.0 x 10 -9 /h for max. 36,500 switching cycles/year and max. 60% contact load<br />
SIL: up to 3<br />
Mission time:<br />
20 years<br />
Approvals<br />
Ordering details<br />
SCR 211<br />
298
Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety components<br />
Note<br />
Wiring diagram<br />
• Input level: The example shows a<br />
2-channel control circuit with a safety light<br />
grid, an external reset button J and a<br />
feedback circuit S.<br />
• The control system recognises wirebreakage<br />
and earth faults in the<br />
monitoring circuit.<br />
• Relay outputs: Suitable for 2 channel<br />
control, for increase in capacity or number<br />
of contacts by means of contactors or<br />
relays with positive-guided contacts.<br />
• Automatic start:<br />
The automatic start is programmed by<br />
connecting the feedback circuit to the<br />
terminals X1/X3. If the feedback circuit<br />
is not required, establish a bridge<br />
A1<br />
F1<br />
UB<br />
Ui<br />
S11<br />
K1 K2 K3<br />
S<br />
S12 S11 S22 X1 X2 X3<br />
Ansteuerlogik/<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol circuit<br />
A2 Y1 14 24 38<br />
K A<br />
K B<br />
K C<br />
K D<br />
J<br />
K4<br />
K1<br />
K2<br />
13 23 37<br />
K3<br />
K4<br />
L1<br />
K A<br />
K B<br />
K C<br />
K D<br />
K B<br />
K A<br />
K D<br />
K C<br />
N<br />
LED<br />
The integrated LED’s indicate the following<br />
operating conditions:<br />
• Position relay K1<br />
• Position relay K2<br />
• Internal operating voltage Ui<br />
• Position relay K3/4<br />
Note<br />
The wiring diagram is shown for the de-energized condition.<br />
Inductive loads (e.g. contactors, relays, etc.) are to be suppressed by means of<br />
a suitable circuit.<br />
8<br />
299
Glossary<br />
Definitions and terms:<br />
Start interlock:<br />
A device preventing the automatic<br />
release and therefore<br />
the automatic machine start<br />
when the power supply of<br />
the AOPD is switched on or<br />
interrupted and switched on<br />
again.<br />
AOPD:<br />
The abbreviation of Active<br />
Optoelectronic Protective<br />
Device.<br />
Resolution:<br />
The resolution or minimum<br />
object sensitivity represents<br />
the minimum size of an object<br />
that is detected in each<br />
part of the protection field.<br />
Optoelectronic safety<br />
devices:<br />
The here described are<br />
optoelectronic safety guards<br />
(AOPD), e.g. safety light<br />
barriers, safety light curtains<br />
and safety light grids as well<br />
as laser scanners and their<br />
corresponding safety relay<br />
modules<br />
Type 2 acc. to EN 61496-1:<br />
The Type 2 AOPD is a<br />
protective device, whose<br />
safety function is checked<br />
by means of regular tests.<br />
These devices must meet<br />
the requirements of PL c to<br />
EN ISO 13849-1, or <strong>Co</strong>ntrol<br />
Category 2 acc. to EN 954-1.<br />
Type 4 acc. to EN 61496-1:<br />
The Type 4 AOPD is a protective<br />
device, whose safety<br />
function is not affected by a<br />
failure or error in the system.<br />
These devices must meet the<br />
requirements of PL e to EN<br />
ISO 13849-1, or <strong>Co</strong>ntrol<br />
Category 4 acc. to EN 954-1.<br />
Blanking:<br />
In this configurable operation<br />
mode a safety light curtain<br />
blanks out a precisely defined<br />
area in the protection field.<br />
The operation mode. “Blanking“<br />
allows objects to be<br />
present in the sending area<br />
with out deactivating the light<br />
curtain safety outputs. “Fixed<br />
Blanking“ is when a fixed set<br />
of adjacent light beams are<br />
rendered inactive for the purpose<br />
of entering an object<br />
and pans into the protective<br />
area. “Floating Blanking“ is<br />
when a set member (one or<br />
more) of adjacent beams is<br />
allowed to ignore the presence<br />
of an object and not deactivating<br />
the OSSDs of the<br />
light curtain.<br />
Muting:<br />
Muting is a temporary<br />
automatic suspension of a<br />
safeguarding function by<br />
safety-related parts of the<br />
control system during<br />
otherwise safe conditions in<br />
the operation of a machine.<br />
The safeguarding function<br />
is realized through 2 or 4<br />
muting sensors, which can<br />
distinguish between persons<br />
and objects. The suspension<br />
condition is signalled by<br />
means of a muting signal<br />
lamp.<br />
OSSD:<br />
Output Signal Switching<br />
Device of the AOPD<br />
(to EN 61496)<br />
Protection field:<br />
The protection zone is an<br />
invisible, two-dimensional<br />
light curtain consisting of<br />
infrared light beams, installed<br />
between the emitter and<br />
receiver unit.<br />
Depending on the chosen<br />
resolution (detection sensitivity)<br />
objects of a specific size<br />
intruding this light curtain will<br />
be detected.<br />
Operating Range:<br />
The operating range is the<br />
maximum distance that may<br />
exit between the light curtain’s<br />
emitter and its receiver.<br />
Protected height:<br />
The protected height is a<br />
vertical area between the first<br />
and the last infrared light<br />
beam of an optoelectronic<br />
safety guard (not the total<br />
housing length).<br />
The beginning and the end<br />
of this area is marked with<br />
symbols on the SLC/SLG’s<br />
enclosure.<br />
Restart interlock:<br />
A device preventing the automatic<br />
restart of the machine,<br />
when the protection field is<br />
interrupted during a dangerous<br />
machine cycle or when<br />
the operating mode of the<br />
machine is set or changed.<br />
300
SAFETY PRESSURE MATS<br />
9<br />
GENERAL PRODUCT FEATURES<br />
SCHMERSAL’s Series SMS Safety Pressure Mats feature a 100% active area,<br />
low actuating force, rugged cable termination, durable “unibody construction”<br />
cable entry, IP67 submersible rating, highly chemical resistant mat material, CEcompliance,<br />
and a 3-year warranty. When properly installed with a compatible<br />
safety controller (described herein) they meet the stringent requirements of PLd<br />
to EN ISO 13849-1, or control category 3 to EN 954-1.<br />
301
SMS 4 / SMS 5 safety mats<br />
Safety mats are used for the<br />
protection of man on machinery<br />
and plants with hazardous<br />
movements. Typical fields of<br />
application are, for instance,<br />
the protection of hazardous<br />
areas and surfaces on woodprocessing<br />
machines, scissor<br />
lifts or punching presses.<br />
The safety mats build a<br />
uniplanar safety device,<br />
which detects the presence<br />
of persons. If a person steps<br />
onto the safety mat, the<br />
connected safety-monitoring<br />
module will immediately stop<br />
the hazardous movement.<br />
The safety mats are characterized<br />
by their very robust<br />
design and high resistance to<br />
acids, caustic solutions, oil<br />
and gasoline. In combination<br />
with the SRB 301HC/R or<br />
SRB 301HC/T safety-monitoring<br />
modules, the safety mats<br />
meet the requirements of PL d<br />
to EN ISO 13849-1, or control<br />
category 3 to EN 954-1.<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
The safety mats can be connected<br />
in line with each other<br />
in order to provide for a<br />
smooth and fast protection of<br />
hazardous areas. To this end,<br />
different standard sizes are<br />
available. Furthermore, special<br />
sizes or special shapes<br />
can be realized upon request.<br />
The SMS 4 series is<br />
connected to the floor by<br />
means of an aluminium profile<br />
and special corner sections.<br />
As a result of the beveled<br />
form of the profile, tripping<br />
hazards are avoided. The<br />
aluminium profile additionally<br />
serves as edge protection,<br />
when fork-lift trucks or other<br />
floor conveyors drive over the<br />
safety mats. In the SMS 5<br />
series, the polyurethane<br />
actuating profile is directly<br />
molded to the active surface<br />
of the safety mat.<br />
The safety mat consists of<br />
two separate current-carrying<br />
steel plates. The plates are<br />
held apart by insulating strips.<br />
Upon actuation of the pressure-sensitive<br />
safety mat, an<br />
electrical cross-wire short is<br />
produced between the steel<br />
plates. The connected safetymonitoring<br />
module evaluates<br />
this signal and stops the hazardous<br />
movement.<br />
302
Calculation of the safety distance to the danger point<br />
9<br />
Safety distance<br />
The proper arrangement of<br />
the safety mat with regard to<br />
the adjacent hazardous area<br />
mainly depends on the aftertravel<br />
time of the machine and<br />
the approaching speed of the<br />
operator. The standard EN<br />
999 (Safety of Machinery,<br />
Approaching Speed of Body<br />
Members) provides a formula<br />
to calculate the safety distance<br />
for this connection.<br />
Safety distance<br />
S = K x (T1 +T2) + (1200 - 0.4 H)<br />
S Minimum safety distance in<br />
millimeters, measured from<br />
the hazardous area to the<br />
detection point, the detection<br />
line or the protected<br />
field<br />
K <strong>Co</strong>nstant in millimeters per<br />
second, derived from data<br />
through the approaching<br />
speed of the body or the<br />
body member (1600 mm/s)<br />
H Distance through the reference<br />
plane (e.g. the floor)<br />
in millimeters (for safety<br />
mats generally 0 mm)<br />
T1the maximum response<br />
time of the safety device<br />
between the triggering of<br />
the perceptive element (the<br />
safety mat) and the time, at<br />
which the safety guard<br />
(safety-monitoring module)<br />
has switched the output<br />
signal to the “OFF” state.<br />
T2the response time of the<br />
machine, i.e. the time<br />
required to shutdown the<br />
machine or to eliminate the<br />
risk, after the transmission<br />
of the output signal of the<br />
safety guard<br />
The safety distance therefore<br />
generally can be calculated<br />
in the following<br />
way:<br />
S = 1600 mm/s x (T1 +T2) +<br />
1200 mm<br />
Example:<br />
The safety distance must be<br />
calculated with a response<br />
time of 142.5 ms for the<br />
machine and a response time<br />
of 45 ms for the safety guard.<br />
The safety mat is installed at<br />
ground level.<br />
S = 1600 mm/s x (0.045 s +<br />
0.1425 s) + 1200 mm<br />
S = 1600 mm/s x (0.1875 s)<br />
+ 1200 mm<br />
S = 300 mm + 1200 mm<br />
S = 1500 mm<br />
303
Safety mats<br />
SMS 4 SMS 5<br />
Technical data<br />
A<br />
A<br />
Certified to EN 1760-1<br />
Response time max. 25 ms<br />
Robust design<br />
High resistance to chemicals<br />
Slip-free surface<br />
Cascading possible<br />
Special sizes and shapes available<br />
on request<br />
No additional terminating resistor required<br />
Aluminium frame and corner sections<br />
available<br />
35<br />
A<br />
35<br />
35<br />
35<br />
A<br />
Certified to EN 1760-1<br />
Response time max. 25 ms<br />
Robust design<br />
High resistance to chemicals<br />
Slip-free surface<br />
Cascading possible<br />
Special sizes and shapes available<br />
on request<br />
No additional terminating resistor required<br />
With molded ramp profile<br />
Standards: EN 1760-1,<br />
EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 61508,<br />
EN 954-1, IEC 60947-5-3<br />
Surface material: polyurethane, black<br />
Protection class: IP 65 to EN 60529<br />
Ambient temperature: 0° C … +60°C<br />
Fitting height:<br />
14 mm<br />
Weight: 17 Kg / m 2<br />
Actuating force:<br />
150N<br />
with round body ø 80mm<br />
Cable:<br />
4 x 0.34 mm 2 SMS4<br />
2 pc. 2 x 0.34 mm 2 SMS 5<br />
Cable length:<br />
6m<br />
Response time:<br />
≤ 25 ms<br />
Mechanical life: >1.5 million operations<br />
Admissible load:<br />
2000 N / 80 mm ø<br />
Inactive edge<br />
≤ 10mm<br />
Classification: (In combination with safety<br />
monitoring module SRB 301 HC)<br />
PL:<br />
up to d<br />
Category: up to 3<br />
PFH value:<br />
1.0 x 10 -7 /h for max.<br />
52,500 switching cycles/year<br />
and max. 60% contact load<br />
SIL:<br />
up to 2 in combination with<br />
safety monitoring module<br />
Mission time:<br />
20 years<br />
Legend:<br />
A: active surface<br />
Legend:<br />
A: active surface<br />
Total size = A + 2 x 35 mm<br />
Approvals<br />
Approvals<br />
Ordering details<br />
SMS 4-➀<br />
No. Option Description<br />
➀<br />
Active surface<br />
250-500 250 x 500 mm<br />
500-500 500 x 500 mm<br />
500-1000 500 x 1000 mm<br />
750-1000 750 x 1000 mm<br />
1000-1000 1000 x 1000 mm<br />
1000-1500 1000 x 1500 mm<br />
Ordering details<br />
SMS 5-➀<br />
No. Option Description<br />
➀<br />
Active surface<br />
250-500 250 x 500 mm<br />
500-500 500 x 500 mm<br />
500-1000 500 x 1000 mm<br />
750-1000 750 x 1000 mm<br />
1000-1000 1000 x 1000 mm<br />
1000-1500 1000 x 1500 mm<br />
Note<br />
Chemical resistance:<br />
Water:<br />
Resistant<br />
10% acids: Resistant<br />
10% caustic solutions: Resistant<br />
Oils:<br />
Resistant<br />
Gasoline:<br />
Resistant<br />
Other on request<br />
304
67<br />
SMS 4 safety mats accessories<br />
System components<br />
System components<br />
7<br />
System components<br />
33,5<br />
90,0°<br />
90,0°<br />
9<br />
17,8<br />
15<br />
7<br />
3<br />
8,5 13 6<br />
18<br />
67<br />
17,8<br />
15<br />
8,5<br />
3<br />
13<br />
40<br />
18,5<br />
7,5<br />
67 15<br />
15 67<br />
Ramp rail SMS 4-RS-3000<br />
SMS 4-BS-3000 fixing rail<br />
<strong>Co</strong>rner section SMS 4-EV<br />
40<br />
67<br />
SMS 4<br />
Ordering details<br />
Ordering details<br />
Ordering details<br />
Ramp rail<br />
3000 mm long SMS 4-RS 3000<br />
Fixing rail<br />
3000 mm long SMS 4-BS-3000<br />
<strong>Co</strong>rner section (1 pc)<br />
SMS 4-EV<br />
Ramp rail (includes 4 precut ramp rails and 4<br />
corner sections)<br />
250 x 500 mm SMS 4-RS 250-500<br />
500 x 500 mm SMS 4-RS 500-500<br />
500 x 1000 mm SMS 4-RS 500-1000<br />
750 x 1000 mm SMS 4-RS 750-1000<br />
1000 x 1000 mm SMS 4-RS 1000-1000<br />
1000 x 1500 mm SMS 4-RS 1000-1500<br />
305
Safety mats<br />
SRB 301HC<br />
• Safety-monitoring module for safety mats<br />
• 3 enabling contacts<br />
• 1 signalling contact<br />
• Cross-wire detection<br />
• Feedback circuit to monitor<br />
external contactors<br />
• Monitored start or automatic start<br />
• LED status indication<br />
• Plug-in terminals<br />
Approvals<br />
H<br />
Ordering details<br />
SRB 301HC/➀-➁<br />
No. Option Description<br />
➀ R Manual start<br />
T<br />
Automatic start<br />
➁ 230 V 48 … 240 VAC<br />
24 V 24 VAC/DC<br />
Technical data<br />
Standards: IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, EN ISO 13849-1; IEC 61508; BG-GS-ET-20<br />
Start conditions:<br />
automatic or start button (optionally monitored)<br />
With feedback circuit (Y/N):<br />
yes<br />
ON delay with reset button:<br />
≤ 50 ms<br />
Drop-out delay on “emergency stop”:<br />
≤ 20 ms<br />
Drop-out delay on “supply failure”:<br />
≤ 100 ms<br />
Rated operating voltage Ue:<br />
48 ... 240 VAC; 24 VAC/DC<br />
Frequency range:<br />
50 / 60 Hz<br />
Fuse rating for the operating voltage:<br />
230 VAC version: primary side: melting fuse, tripping current >1.0 A;<br />
secondary side: internal electronic fuse, tripping current > 0.12 A;<br />
24 VAC/DC version: internal electronic fuse, tripping current > 0.5 A<br />
Internal electronic fuse (Y/N):<br />
230 VAC version: no<br />
24 VAC/DC version: yes<br />
Current consumption:<br />
230 VAC version: 1.6 W; 4.2 VA<br />
24 VAC/DC version: 1.4 W; 3.3 VA<br />
Inputs monitoring:<br />
Cross-wire detection:<br />
yes<br />
Wire breakage detection:<br />
yes<br />
Earth leakage detection:<br />
yes<br />
Number of NC contacts: 2<br />
Number of NO contacts: 0<br />
Max. total line resistance:<br />
40 Ω<br />
Outputs:<br />
Stop category 0: 3<br />
Stop category 1: 0<br />
Number of safety contacts: 3<br />
Number of signalling outputs: 1<br />
Max. switching capacity of the safety contacts:<br />
250 VAC, 8 A ohmic (inductive<br />
with suitable protective circuit)<br />
Utilisation category to EN 60947-5-1:<br />
AC-15: 230 V / 6 A; DC-13: 24 V / 6 A<br />
Mechanical life:<br />
10 7 operations<br />
Ambient conditions:<br />
Operating ambient temperature: – 25°C … + 60°C<br />
Storage and transport temperature: – 25°C … + 85°C<br />
Protection class: enclosure: IP 40, terminals: IP 20, terminal space: IP 54<br />
Mounting: snaps onto standard DIN rails to DIN EN 60715<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnection type:<br />
plug-in type screw terminals<br />
min. cable section: 0.25 mm 2<br />
max. cable section: 2.5 mm 2<br />
Weight:<br />
230 VAC version: 340 g; 24 VAC/DC version: 320 g<br />
Dimensions (height/width/depth):<br />
100 x 45 x 121 mm<br />
Classification:<br />
PL:<br />
up to e<br />
Category: up to 4<br />
PFH value: 5.0 x 10 -9 /h for max. 36,500 switching cycles/year and max. 60% contact load<br />
SIL: up to 3<br />
Mission time:<br />
20 years<br />
306
Safety mats<br />
Note<br />
• Protection of a safety mat<br />
• Start button with edge detection<br />
• Feedback circuit S to monitor<br />
the external contactors<br />
• Series-wiring of multiple<br />
safety mats possible<br />
• Reset button J<br />
Wiring example<br />
9<br />
Note<br />
The wiring example is shown with the safety mat in non-actuated and de-energised condition.<br />
Inductive loads (e.g. contactors, relays, etc.) are to be supressed by means of a suitable circuit.<br />
307
308<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design
FAIL-TO-SAFE SAFETY EDGES<br />
9<br />
SELECTION GUIDE<br />
SCHMERSAL’s Series SE Safety Edges/Bumpers are available as sub-assembly<br />
components or as custom assemblies produced to user specifications. The following<br />
pages provide details regarding operation, construction and ordering details. Among<br />
the user options are safety edge profile, mounting frame profile and length. Please<br />
contact us if you have any questions, special needs or require assistance with<br />
properly specifying the safety edge which meets your requirements.<br />
309
SERIES SE<br />
Optical Safety Edges/Bumpers<br />
Features & Benefits<br />
• Can be cut & mounted in the field … easy to fit and adjust<br />
length when placing the edge on the door<br />
• Safety controller SE 100 handles up to 2 safety edges …<br />
reduced cost in multiple door applications<br />
• Rugged corrosion & abrasion resistance rubber profiles<br />
… tolerant to most industrial environments<br />
• Watertight design … meets IP 68 environmental<br />
requirements.<br />
• Low operating force … assures reliable operation<br />
• Automatic gain control … tolerates slight bending<br />
• Simple field installation … low cost & easy to repair<br />
• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements<br />
per EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories of<br />
EN 954-1.<br />
Description<br />
The series SE Safety edge consists of a rugged high tear<br />
resistant rubber profile, an aluminum mounting rail, a plug-in<br />
optoelectronic transmitter and receiver pair and a<br />
compatible safety controller. The design features a high<br />
reflective internal rubber surface and a self-adjusting gain<br />
optical pair whose performance is uncompromised by slight<br />
bending … and predictable over the specified operating<br />
range.<br />
Units can be quickly and easily assembled (without special<br />
skills or use of adhesives) for lengths of 400 mm to 10 m.<br />
The self adjusting optical pair assure the same sensitivity<br />
and performance independent of chosen length.<br />
The mechanical design assures encapsulation of the<br />
transmitter and receiver ensuring reliable operation<br />
unaffected by environmental soiling.<br />
Operation<br />
In operation the transmitted IR beam is detected, by the<br />
receiver resulting in enabling of the safety controllers safety<br />
output(s). Deformation of the rubber profile interrupts/<br />
weakens the signal between the transmitter and receiver.<br />
This is sensed by the safety controller disabling the outputs<br />
allowing the hazardous movement to be stopped.<br />
Depending upon the choice of safety controller the system<br />
meets the requirements of EN ISO 13849-1 (PL c , PL d or<br />
PL e ) as well as EN 954-1 (Safety control category 1, 3 or 4).<br />
Typical Applications<br />
Ideal wherever crushing or shearing points are to be<br />
safeguarded, such as on guard doors, elevating platforms,<br />
rising stages, moving stock shelving, operating process<br />
tables, loading ramps, hoists or tipping equipment.<br />
310<br />
®<br />
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
SERIES SE ORDERING & ASSEMBLY INFORMATION<br />
AVAILABLE ASSEMBLY* COMPONENTS<br />
40 mm Safety Edge<br />
SE-P40-1250 Rubber profile, 1.25 meter<br />
SE-P40-2500 Rubber profile, 2.5 meters<br />
SE-AL10-1250 Mounting Rail, 1.25 meter<br />
SE-AL12-1250 Mounting Rail with flange, 1.25 meter<br />
SE-T40<br />
Endcap (2 required)<br />
70 mm Safety Edge<br />
SE-P70-1250 Rubber profile, 1.25 meter<br />
SE-P70-2500 Rubber profile, 2.5 meters<br />
SE-AL20-1250 Mounting Rail, 1.25 meter<br />
SE-AL22-1250 Mounting Rail with flange, 1.25 meter<br />
SE-T70<br />
Endcap (2 required)<br />
IR Sensor Set<br />
SE-SET<br />
Emitter & Receiver set<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntollers<br />
SE-100C PL c Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 1 (2 bumpers)<br />
SE-304C PL d Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 3 (4 Bumpers)<br />
SE-400C PL e Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4<br />
Accessories<br />
SE- SC<br />
Rubber profile shears<br />
SE- WA<br />
Wiring aid<br />
SE- J1<br />
Junction Box<br />
* Note: Each assemby requires:<br />
Rubber profile<br />
Mouting rail(s)<br />
Endcaps (2)<br />
Sensor Set<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntroller<br />
9<br />
1<br />
Cut<br />
Six steps to install the safety edge<br />
aluminum rail<br />
to desired length<br />
and fasten in place<br />
4<br />
Press<br />
the<br />
transmitter and<br />
receiver units<br />
into the ends of<br />
the rubber<br />
profile<br />
2<br />
Cut<br />
the rubber<br />
profile to desired<br />
length<br />
5<br />
Thread<br />
emitter or receiver cable through<br />
profile to desired cable exit end of rubber<br />
profile.<br />
3<br />
Clip<br />
the rubber<br />
profile into the<br />
aluminum rail<br />
6<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnect<br />
to the desired safety controller<br />
It is ready!<br />
311
SERIES SE TECHNICAL DATA<br />
Aluminum Mounting Rail Profiles & Dimensions (mm)<br />
12<br />
12<br />
1,5<br />
2<br />
9<br />
centering groove<br />
9<br />
centering groove<br />
25<br />
30<br />
SE AL 10<br />
SE AL 20<br />
1,5<br />
12<br />
2<br />
12<br />
9<br />
centering groove<br />
9<br />
centering groove<br />
25 20<br />
30 20<br />
SE AL 12<br />
SE AL 22<br />
Rubber Mounting Rail Profiles &<br />
Dimensions (mm)<br />
Table of Properties<br />
Rubber Profile SE - P 40, SE - P 70<br />
EPDM (ethylene propylene diene<br />
Rubber Material<br />
Monomer), shore hardness 60<br />
–40°C to +170°C (short term)<br />
Temperature Range<br />
–30°C to +170°C (long term)<br />
Good against ozone, moderate<br />
Resistance<br />
against oils, acids, solvents, fuels<br />
Note: NBR (Nitrile butadiene rubber) profile also available.<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nsult factory.<br />
Ø13,4<br />
Ø 13,4<br />
Ø10,9<br />
Ø10,9<br />
10<br />
33<br />
25<br />
58,5<br />
31<br />
SE P 40<br />
30<br />
312<br />
SE P 70
SERIES SE TECHNICAL DATA<br />
9<br />
Force/Travel diagram for the rubber<br />
profiles with SE 100 C controller unit<br />
Force/Travel diagram for the rubber<br />
profiles with SE 400 C controller unit<br />
Force/Travel table of rubber profiles with SE-100 C<br />
Force/Travel Fa [N] Sa [mm] Fn [N] Sn [mm]<br />
Testing Speed 100 mm/s 10 mm/s<br />
SE-P40 92 9 250 16<br />
400 18<br />
600 20<br />
SE-P70 22 8 250 46<br />
400 47<br />
600 48<br />
Force/Travel table of rubber profiles with SE-400 C<br />
Force/Travel Fa [N] Sa [mm] Fn [N] Sn [mm]<br />
Testing Speed 100 mm/s10 mm/s<br />
SE-P40 140 11 250 14<br />
400 16<br />
600 18<br />
SE-P70 23 9 250 43<br />
400 44<br />
600 45<br />
Legend Fa Actuating force<br />
Sa Actuating travel<br />
Fn Overtravel force<br />
Sn Overtravel<br />
Sg Total deformation travel<br />
with the above test data.<br />
The measurements are carried out according to EN 1760-2*<br />
Sg = Sa + Sn<br />
The complete system is suitable for finger recognition in accordance<br />
Test conditions<br />
Measurement parameters<br />
Temperature: T = 20 °C<br />
Mounting position B (to EN 1760-2*)<br />
Place of measurement C 3 (to EN 1760-2*)<br />
* preliminary<br />
313
SERIES SE TECHNICAL DATA<br />
Transmitter and Receiver Pair<br />
Technical Data for SE-SET<br />
Technical Data<br />
SE-SET<br />
Material<br />
Polyurethane<br />
Protection class IP 68<br />
Dimensions<br />
11.5 mm dia., 37 mm long<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnecting cable 3 x 0.14 mm2 stranded wire<br />
Cable length<br />
Transmitter 6.6 m<br />
Receiver 3 m<br />
Permissible<br />
Max. 200 m<br />
cable length<br />
Operating -25 °C to +75 °C<br />
temperature<br />
314
SERIES SE TECHNICAL DATA<br />
SE Series<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers<br />
9<br />
Electrical Specification<br />
SE - 100 C<br />
SE - 400 C<br />
Standards EN 1760-2, EN60947-5-1 EN1760-2, EN60947-5-1<br />
Performance Level/Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category “c” to EN ISO 13849-1/cc1 to EN 954-1 “e” to EN ISO 13849-1/cc4 to EN 954-1<br />
Enclosure PE (black), Crastin (grey) PE (black), Crastin (grey)<br />
Fixing DIN rail EN 50 022 DIN rail EN 50 022<br />
Screw terminals max. 2 x 2.5 mm 2 solid wire max. 2 x 2.5 mm 2 solid wire<br />
max. 2 x 1.5 mm 2 stranded wire with end thimble max. 2 x 1.5 mm 2 stranded wire with end thimble<br />
Protection class (terminals) (IP 20) Enclosure IP 40 IEC/EN 60529/ VDE 0470-1 (IP20) Enclosure IP40 IEC/EN 60529/ VDE 0470-1<br />
Operational voltage 24VDC (+ 20 % / – 10 %) 24VDC (+ 20 % / – 10 %)<br />
Fuse rating (supply) 1A (surge-resistant) 1A (surge-resistant)<br />
Inputs 1 or 2 pairs SE-T/R Transmitter/Receiver 1 pair SE-T/R Transmitter/Receiver<br />
Outputs Changeover contacts Normally open contacts<br />
Safety contacts 11/14 13/14, 23/24<br />
Signalling contacts 21/22/24 Semiconductor X1, <strong>Co</strong>nnection to internal<br />
ground Umax. 36 V, Imax. 50 mA<br />
Max. switching capacity max. 1000 VA max. 1000 VA<br />
Utilization category AC-15; DC-13 AC-15; DC-13<br />
Rated operational current/voltage Ie / Ue 2 A/230VAC; 2 A/24VDC 2 A/230VAC; 3 A/24VDC<br />
Switching voltage 250V AC/DC 250V AC/DC<br />
Max. switching current 6A (resistive load) 4A (resistive load)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact fuse rating 6A surge-resistant 4A surge-resistant<br />
Mechanical life 2 x 10 7 switching cycles 3 x 10 7 switching cycles<br />
Readiness time Max. 300ms Approx. 32ms<br />
Switch-on delay Max. 300ms Approx. 32ms<br />
Switch-off delay Typically 15ms Typically 15ms<br />
Ambient temperature +5 °C to +55 °C +5 °C to +55 °C<br />
Shock resistant < 5g / 33Hz (VDE 0160) < 5g / 33Hz (VDE 0160)<br />
Interference According to EMC Directive According to EMC Directive<br />
Weight Approx. 0.18kg Approx. 0.2kg<br />
Clearance and creepage distances Degree of soiling 2 to VDE 0160 Degree of soiling 2 to VDE 0160<br />
Overvoltage category III / 4kV to VDE 0160 Overvoltage category III / 4kV to VDE 0160<br />
Power consumption < 4 W < 4 W<br />
Note: Maximum distance to controller: 200m. Use 20AWG to extend bumper leads to safety controller.<br />
315
SERIES SE TECHNICAL DATA<br />
SE 304C<br />
Electrical Specification<br />
Standards<br />
Performance Level/Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category<br />
Enclosure<br />
Mounting<br />
Screwterminals<br />
Protection class (terminals)<br />
Operating voltage<br />
Fuse rating (supply)<br />
Inputs<br />
Outputs<br />
Safety contacts<br />
Signalling contacts<br />
Max. switching capacity<br />
Utilization category<br />
Rated operational current/voltage<br />
Switching voltage<br />
Max. switching current<br />
Mechanical life<br />
Switch-off delay<br />
Ambient temperature<br />
Shock resistant<br />
Interference<br />
Weight<br />
Power consumption<br />
SE - 304C<br />
EN 1760-2<br />
“d” to EN ISO 13849-1/cc3 to EN954-1<br />
Thermoplastic<br />
DIN rail EN50 022<br />
Max. 2x2.5mm 2 solid wire<br />
Max. 2x1.5mm 2 stranded with end thimble<br />
(IP20) Enclosure IP40 IEC/EN 60529/VDE 0470-1<br />
24VDC (+20%/-10%)<br />
24VAC (+10%/-10%)<br />
1A (Slow-blow)<br />
1 to 4 pairs SE-T/R Transmitter/Receiver<br />
NO contact<br />
13/14<br />
Semi-conductor XI, Imax. 50 mA<br />
Max. 1500VA<br />
AC-15, DC-13<br />
2A/230VAC, 2A/24VDC<br />
250VAC/60VDC<br />
2A<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
Typically 17ms<br />
+5°C to +55°C<br />
SERIES SE TECHNICAL DATA<br />
Typical Wiring Diagram<br />
9<br />
Example with SE - 100 C<br />
Example with SE - 400 C<br />
SE1 S E 2<br />
SE-R SE-T SE-R SE-T<br />
bn<br />
bn<br />
gn<br />
gn<br />
wh<br />
wh<br />
+24V<br />
L1<br />
+24V-<br />
+24V-<br />
SE-R<br />
gn<br />
br<br />
SE-T<br />
L1<br />
S<br />
A1(+)<br />
A4(-)<br />
S12<br />
S22<br />
A3(+)<br />
21<br />
11<br />
A1(+)<br />
A4(-)<br />
S12 A3(+)<br />
X1<br />
X2<br />
X3 13<br />
23<br />
K1<br />
K1<br />
U-<br />
sensors input<br />
relay output<br />
K2<br />
K1<br />
U-<br />
K2 K2<br />
K1<br />
sensors input<br />
relay output<br />
K1 K2<br />
K2<br />
K1<br />
K2<br />
A2(-) 24 22 14 2<br />
SE-100C<br />
A2(-)<br />
SE-400C<br />
14<br />
24<br />
0V<br />
N<br />
M<br />
3<br />
N<br />
M<br />
3<br />
SE-R<br />
gn<br />
bn<br />
wh<br />
Example with SE - 304 C<br />
SE1<br />
SE-T<br />
wh gnbn<br />
SE-R<br />
SE4<br />
SE-T<br />
SE-R<br />
gn<br />
bn<br />
wh<br />
SE2<br />
SE-T<br />
SE-R<br />
gn<br />
bn<br />
wh<br />
SE3<br />
SE-T<br />
gn1<br />
S12<br />
gn2<br />
S22<br />
wh bn gn3 gn4<br />
A4(-)<br />
A3(+)<br />
S32<br />
S42<br />
317
318<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design
GENERAL & SPECIFIC-PURPOSE<br />
SAFETY CONTROLLERS<br />
10<br />
GENERAL PRODUCT FEATURES<br />
SCHMERSAL’s PROTECT Series Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers have been designed to<br />
satisfy a wide range of application requirements. Features include:<br />
• Removable, plug-in screw terminals<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mpact size<br />
• Electronic fuses<br />
• Feedback monitoring<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nvection-cooled housings<br />
• PNP and/or dry contact monitoring capability<br />
• Stop category 0 and Stop category 1 models<br />
• Cross short monitoring<br />
• Multiple-voltage operation<br />
• Models compliant with PLd/control category 3 or PLe/control category 4<br />
• Monitored manual reset<br />
319
Model<br />
SRB 201 ZH<br />
SRB 301 HC/R<br />
Operating<br />
Voltage (UB)<br />
24V DC<br />
24V AC/DC or<br />
48-230V AC<br />
Types of Inputs<br />
Monitored<br />
Two-hand control<br />
(dry contacts)<br />
Two-hand control<br />
(dry contacts)<br />
SERIES<br />
SAFETY CONTROLLERS<br />
SELECTION GUIDE<br />
*Suitable for use in systems designed for up to PL d per EN iSO 13849-1 or Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 3 per EN954-1.<br />
All others are suitable for use in systems up to PL e per EN iSO 13849-1 or Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 per EN954-1.<br />
***Please see selection chart on page 342.<br />
Number of<br />
Input Devices<br />
Monitored**<br />
Number of<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
Number of<br />
Auxiliary<br />
Outputs<br />
Feedback<br />
Monitoring<br />
Type of Reset<br />
Cross-short<br />
Monitoring<br />
Page<br />
Number<br />
2 2 1 N.C. Yes Automatic Yes 322<br />
2 3 1 Yes<br />
Monitoredmanual<br />
Yes 322<br />
SRB 202 MSL 24V DC Muting module 2 2 2 Yes Automatic Yes 324<br />
SRB 206 ST*<br />
SRB 206 SQ*<br />
SRB 211 AN<br />
SRB 211 ST<br />
SRB 301 LC or<br />
SRB 301 LCI<br />
SRB 301 LC/B<br />
SRB 301 MC<br />
SRB 301 ST<br />
SRB 301 ST-<br />
230V<br />
SRB 301 SQ-<br />
230V<br />
SRB 324ST<br />
24V AC/DC or<br />
48-230V AC<br />
24V AC/DC or<br />
48-230V AC<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
Dry contacts 6 2<br />
Dry contacts 6 2<br />
Dry contacts<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded Magnets<br />
Dry contacts or<br />
PNP-type outputs<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded Magnets<br />
Dry contacts or<br />
PNP-type outputs<br />
Dry contacts or<br />
PNP-type outputs<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded Magnets<br />
Dry contacts or<br />
PNP-type outputs<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded Magnets<br />
Dry contacts or<br />
PNP-type outputs<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded Magnets<br />
1<br />
1<br />
2 (stop category 0)<br />
1 (stop category 1)<br />
2 (stop category 0)<br />
1 (stop category 1)<br />
Yes<br />
Yes<br />
Yes<br />
Yes<br />
1 3 1 N.C. Yes<br />
1 3 1 N.C. Yes<br />
1 3 1 Yes<br />
1 3 1 N.C. Yes<br />
48V-230V AC Dry contacts 1 3 1 N.C. Yes<br />
48V-230V AC Dry contacts 1 3 1 N.C. Yes<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
Dry contacts or<br />
PNP-type outputs<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded Magnets<br />
1<br />
3 (stop category 0)<br />
2 (stop category 1)<br />
1 N.C. plus<br />
3 semiconductors<br />
SRB 401 LC 24V AC/DC Dry contacts 1 4 1 Yes<br />
SRB 504 ST<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
Dry contacts or<br />
PNP-type outputs<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded Magnets<br />
Yes<br />
1 5 4 Yes<br />
6<br />
(Semiconductor)<br />
6<br />
(Semiconductor)<br />
1<br />
(Semiconductor)<br />
1<br />
(Semiconductor)<br />
Monitoredmanual<br />
or Automatic<br />
Monitoredmanual<br />
or Automatic<br />
Monitoredmanual<br />
or Automatic<br />
Monitoredmanual<br />
or Automatic<br />
Manual or<br />
Automatic<br />
Manual or<br />
Automatic<br />
Manual or<br />
Automatic<br />
Monitoredmanual<br />
or Automatic<br />
Monitoredmanual<br />
or Automatic<br />
Monitoredmanual<br />
or Automatic<br />
Monitoredmanual<br />
or Automatic<br />
Manual or<br />
Automatic<br />
Monitoredmanual<br />
or Automatic<br />
DIFFERENTIATED-INPUT SAFETY CONTROLLERS<br />
SRB 202 C 24V DC Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts 2 2 2 N.C. Yes<br />
SRB 400 C 24V DC Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts 2 4 None Yes<br />
Depends upon<br />
model***<br />
Depends upon<br />
model***<br />
SAFETY OUTPUT EXPANSION MODULE<br />
No 326<br />
Yes 326<br />
Yes<br />
(selectable)<br />
Yes<br />
(selectable)<br />
Yes<br />
(selectable)<br />
Yes<br />
(selectable)<br />
Yes<br />
(selectable)<br />
Yes<br />
(selectable)<br />
328<br />
330<br />
332<br />
334<br />
336<br />
338<br />
No 338<br />
Yes 338<br />
Yes 340<br />
Yes 344<br />
Yes 348<br />
**Without daisy-chaining<br />
Depends upon<br />
model***<br />
Depends upon<br />
model***<br />
SRB 402 EM 24V AC/DC N/A N/A 4 2 N.C. Yes Automatic N/A 346<br />
SRB 401 EM 115V AC N/A N/A 4 1 Yes Automatic N/A 346<br />
INPUT EXPANSION MODULE<br />
Protect-IE 24V DC Dry contacts 4 N/A 4 N/A N/A Yes 350<br />
Protect-PE 24V DC Dry/PNP contacts 4 N/A 4 N/A N/A Yes 352<br />
342<br />
342<br />
320<br />
NOTE: For FWS and AZS Series, please refer to the Safe Speed section on page 363.<br />
For AES Series, please refer to the BNS section on page 147.<br />
For SRB 301 HC/T and /R Series, please refer to the Safety Mat section on page 306.
SAFETY CONTROLLER SELECTION CRITERIA<br />
It helps the selection process to view a safety controller as<br />
having four basic characteristics, each determined by the<br />
application requirements. This approach can be<br />
applied to any safety controller.<br />
FOUR BASIC SAFETY CONTROLLER CHARACTERISTICS<br />
10<br />
SUPPLY VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS<br />
Select your supply voltage. While many voltages are possible<br />
(24VDC, 24VAC, 24VAC/DC, 115VAC and 230VAC),<br />
24 VDC gives the most flexibility since virtually all controllers<br />
are available in this voltage. Also, since a transformer<br />
and rectifier are not required, this unit generally is<br />
less expensive and smaller than a 115VAC model.<br />
It is important to recognize that the safety controller<br />
supply voltage is always converted by the controller<br />
electronics to 24VDC for internal operation and for<br />
powering monitored input devices. Hence monitored<br />
input devices need only be rated for 24VDC.<br />
INPUT MONITORING REQUIREMENTS<br />
The first step is to determine whether you need single<br />
channel (up to Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 2) or dual-channel<br />
(<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 3 & 4) operation.<br />
Single-channel systems must monitor one N.C. positivebreak<br />
contact. Dual-channel systems can monitor<br />
1 N.O./1 N.C. or 2 N.C. contacts. Generally, these need<br />
to be isolated dry contacts since most controllers will view<br />
C-form contacts as a short circuit. Remember that 24VDC<br />
is supplied by the safety controller for monitoring these<br />
contacts.<br />
Safety controllers are also available for monitoring<br />
non-potential free contacts (such as PNP outputs from<br />
light curtains). Models are also available that allow users<br />
to field select the monitored contact configuration.<br />
Another consideration is crossed wire detection (a short<br />
between channels). This requires special circuitry in the<br />
safety controllers and is required for Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol<br />
Category 4 safety control systems.<br />
FEEDBACK & RESET CIRCUIT REQUIREMENTS<br />
Safety controllers with feedback capability can also<br />
monitor control relays and motor contactors with positiveguided<br />
contacts. Such feedback is required for Safety<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 3 & 4 systems. A NC auxiliary contact is<br />
wired into the feedback loop (with or without a reset (start)<br />
button) to detect welded contacts in these external control<br />
devices. The safety controller detects the existence of a<br />
weld when the relay shuts down due to a power loss or<br />
open machine guard and prevents a restart.<br />
In order to reset the controller, the feedback loop must be<br />
closed (at least temporarily). If the NC auxiliary contact<br />
stays open due to a contact weld, the controller cannot be<br />
reset.<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrol reset can be automatic or be achieved<br />
using the edge of a 24VDC reset signal. With automatic<br />
reset the controller will automatically reset (outputs close)<br />
when the machine guard is closed. Alternately, a reset or<br />
start button (manual reset) can be added to the feedback<br />
loop if desired. The controller only needs to momentarily<br />
see a 24VDC signal at the feedback terminals to reset.<br />
With a monitored-manual reset, some type of pushbutton<br />
is required. For monitored-manual resets, the feedback<br />
loop circuitry is designed so that it needs to see a 24V to<br />
0V transition (trailing edge) in order to reset. This method<br />
of reset is generally required when a person can actually<br />
get inside a machine guard (where they would be at risk if<br />
the equipment should automatically restart when the<br />
guard closes).<br />
OUTPUT REQUIREMENTS<br />
Determine the number and type of safety controller outputs<br />
required for machine control elements and signaling.<br />
Following are the typical types of safety controller outputs:<br />
A. N.O. safety enable circuits — either<br />
instantaneous or timed.<br />
B. N.O. or N.C. auxiliary relay contacts — these<br />
are not to be used for safety functions, but<br />
only for annunciation/signaling.<br />
C. Semiconductor outputs for annunciation.<br />
321
SERIES SRB 201 ZH &<br />
SRB 301 HC/R<br />
Two-Hand <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntroller<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES*<br />
Description<br />
The Model SRB 201 ZH is designed expressly for use<br />
with two-hand control units. It is equipped for connection<br />
to two actuators … each with 1Normally-Open (N.O.) and<br />
1 Normally-Closed (N.C.) dry contacts. Both actuators<br />
(inputs) must be operated simultaneously (that is, within<br />
500ms as required by EN574 type III/C requirements for<br />
machine operation to be enabled. Should the input actuators<br />
not be simultaneously operated within this specific<br />
500ms period, both must be released before a start cycle<br />
can be initiated.<br />
Input Voltage<br />
24 VDC<br />
# Discrete Input 2<br />
Devices Monitored<br />
<strong>Co</strong>mpatible Input Device<br />
1 N.O. & 1 N.C.<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
(Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Number & Type Safety Outputs 2 N.O. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Number & Type Auxiliary<br />
1 N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntact)<br />
(Non-Safety or Signalling Output)<br />
Typical Input Devices Monitored Two-hand control<br />
Type of Reset<br />
Automatic<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
Yes<br />
LED Displays<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
• K1 (safety relay 1)<br />
• K2 (safety relay 2)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards<br />
Stop Category 0<br />
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
Safety Classification PL e , per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
Category 4, per EN 954-1<br />
Selected Features<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
• Plug-in screw terminals<br />
• Electronic fuse<br />
• Cross-short recognition<br />
• Automatic reset<br />
Front View*<br />
Model Number<br />
SRB 201 ZH<br />
SRB 301 HC/R-24V**<br />
SRB 301 HC/R-230V**<br />
Operating Input Voltage<br />
24V DC<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
48-240V AC<br />
* For model SRB 201 ZH only<br />
**Please refer to page 320 in the SMS section for specifications on<br />
the SRB 301 HC/R<br />
322
SERIES SRB 201 ZH & SRB 301 HC/R<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS*<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D)<br />
Ambient Operating<br />
Temperature Range<br />
Mechanical Life Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
Mounting<br />
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM*<br />
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm<br />
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")<br />
-25°C to +45°C<br />
(-13°F to +113°F)<br />
10 7 switching cycles<br />
200 gm<br />
DIN rail<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS*<br />
Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15% / +20%,<br />
residual ripple max. 10%<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
Fuse (Input Power)<br />
Fuse (Safety Outputs)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(Safety Outputs)<br />
1.2 W (max.)<br />
Internal electronic fuse*<br />
F1, F2 : tripping current >.02 A<br />
F3 : tripping current >.06 A<br />
(Hybrid)<br />
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)<br />
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive<br />
(inductive with suitable<br />
suppressor circuit)<br />
Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 2 A<br />
(Auxiliary <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Application Category AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
≤ 50 ms<br />
Drop-out Delay<br />
≤ 30 ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type & Materials AgSnO self cleaning, positively driven<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections • Plug-in self-lifting screw terminals<br />
for 13 to 20 AWG<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
*Resets automatically after a short time-delay.<br />
10<br />
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS*<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
(24VDC)<br />
Monitored Input #1<br />
(N.O. <strong>Co</strong>ntact)<br />
Monitored Input #1<br />
(N.C. <strong>Co</strong>ntact)<br />
Monitored Input #2<br />
(N.O. <strong>Co</strong>ntact)<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
A2.1 S12<br />
A1.1 S11<br />
A1.1 S22<br />
Monitored Input #2<br />
(N.C. <strong>Co</strong>ntact)<br />
Safety Output #1<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Safety Output #2<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
with Automatic Reset<br />
A2.1 S21<br />
13 14<br />
23 24<br />
X1<br />
X2<br />
Auxiliary Output<br />
(N.C.)<br />
31 32<br />
323
SERIES SRB 202 MSL<br />
Muting Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntroller<br />
(for dry contact & PNP-type input monitoring)<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Description<br />
A muting safety controller permits the safety function to be<br />
temporarily disabled for reasons related to equipment or<br />
machine work cycles. Disabling the safety function for a limited<br />
period of time is referred to as “muting.” Muting is used<br />
to permit the access of materials of production and prevent<br />
access by personnel. A typical muting application is for pallet<br />
entrance and/or exit from a hazardous area (palletizing).<br />
Activation and subsequent de-activation of the muting function<br />
must be achieved using two or more hard-wired and<br />
independent signals (i.e., limit switches, optical or proximity<br />
sensors) activated by a proper time or space sequence.<br />
Input Voltage<br />
24V DC<br />
# Discrete Input Devices 2-4 (muting sensors)<br />
Monitored<br />
<strong>Co</strong>mpatible Input Device N.C. (dry contacts) or<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration PNP switching<br />
Number & Type Safety 2 N.O. (dry contacts)<br />
Outputs<br />
Number & Type Auxiliary 2 (24V / 50mA max.)<br />
(non-safety or signalling<br />
outputs)<br />
Typical Input Devices • Limit switches<br />
Monitored<br />
• Devices with PNP outputs<br />
Type of Reset<br />
Automatic<br />
Feedback Monitoring Yes<br />
LED Displays<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
• LA (muting lamps)<br />
• K1-K5 (safety relays 1-5)<br />
•UB-Ui (voltage at input terminals<br />
& beyond fuse)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards<br />
Stop Category<br />
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
Function of master safety controller<br />
Safety Classification PL e , per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
Category 4, per EN 954-1<br />
Selected Features<br />
• Cross-short recognition<br />
• Electronic fuse<br />
• Automatic reset<br />
• Plug-in screw terminals<br />
• Feedback monitoring<br />
Front View<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
Model Number<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
SRB 202 MSL<br />
24V DC<br />
324
SERIES SRB 202 MSL<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D)<br />
Ambient Operating<br />
Temperature Range<br />
Mechanical Life Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
Mounting<br />
Typical Wiring Diagram<br />
45mm x 100mm x 121mm<br />
(1.8" x 3.9" x 4.75")<br />
-25°C to +45°C<br />
(-13°F to +113°F)<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
400 gm (0.88 lbs.)<br />
DIN rail<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
Fuse (input power)<br />
Fuse (safety outputs)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(safety outputs)<br />
• 24V DC -15% / +20%, residual ripple<br />
max. 10%<br />
5.6 W, plus power consumption of muting<br />
sensors and muting indicator lamps<br />
Internal electronic fuse,<br />
tripping current > 1.25 A<br />
4 A slow-blow (recommended)<br />
230V AC, 4 A Resistive<br />
(inductive with suppressor circuit)<br />
Switching Capacity L54, L84: max. 50mA<br />
(auxiliary contacts)<br />
Application Category AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60947-5-1<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
≤ 200 ms<br />
Drop-out Delay ≤ 20 ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type & AgSnO, self-cleaning, positive-guided &<br />
Material<br />
AgNi, self cleaning, positive-guided<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1, 4 kV/2<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections • Self-lifting screw terminals<br />
for 13 to 20 AWG<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
Muting Lamps LA1 / LA2: 24V / 50mA-500mA<br />
NOTE: Use of muting lamps is a requirement in Europe.<br />
Should muting lamps not be used, an equivalent<br />
resistance of approximately 220 ohms (3 watts) is<br />
necessary. A version without this lamp monitoring<br />
circuit will be available in the near future.<br />
10<br />
Terminal <strong>Co</strong>nnections (shown with dry-input contacts)<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
Monitored Input 1-3<br />
Monitored Input 2-4<br />
Safety Output #1*<br />
(N.O.)<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
S11<br />
S12<br />
S22<br />
S23<br />
13 14<br />
Safety Output #2*<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Muting Lamps<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
Manual (leading-edge)<br />
Reset<br />
23 24<br />
LA1<br />
LA2<br />
X1<br />
X2<br />
X1<br />
MR<br />
Auxiliary Output<br />
#1<br />
Auxiliary Output<br />
#2<br />
L54<br />
Simultaneity<br />
L84<br />
Lamp Current<br />
* Safety outputs connected to master controller<br />
325
SERIES SRB 206 ST &<br />
General Purpose Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers<br />
SRB 206 SQ<br />
(for dry contact input monitoring)<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Input Voltage<br />
Description<br />
The Model SRB 206 ST/SQ family are “general purpose”<br />
units designed for use with safety devices having<br />
Normally-Closed (N.C.) dry contacts. Each is equipped for<br />
connection with up to six input devices such as E-stop<br />
push button and safety interlock switches. In addition it<br />
features user-selectable monitored-manual or automatic<br />
reset, six (non-safety) semiconductor outputs for signalling/annunciation,<br />
and two safety outputs. SRB 206 SQ<br />
and SRB 206 SQ-230 also feature cross-short recognition.<br />
Front View<br />
SRB 206 ST (SQ)<br />
24 VAC / DC<br />
SRB 206 ST (SQ) - 230 V 48 - 230 V AC<br />
# Discrete Input Devices 6 (Single or Dual-Channel)<br />
Monitored<br />
<strong>Co</strong>mpatible Input Device N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
Number & Type<br />
2 N.O. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
Number & Type Auxiliary 6 - short circuit proof, PNP-type<br />
(Non-Safety or<br />
semiconductor Y1 - Y6 max 20mA<br />
Signalling Outputs)<br />
Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)<br />
Monitored<br />
• Interlock switches (N.C.)<br />
Type of Reset<br />
• Monitored-manual<br />
(Selectable)<br />
(24 VDC trailing edge)<br />
• Automatic<br />
Feedback Monitoring Yes<br />
LED Displays<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
• K1 (safety relay 1)<br />
• K2 (safety relay 2)<br />
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)<br />
• UB (voltage at input terminals)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards<br />
Stop Category 0<br />
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
Safety Classification PL d , per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
Category 3, per EN 954-1<br />
Selected Features<br />
• Plug-in screw terminals<br />
• Cross-short recognition<br />
(SRB 206 SQ models only)<br />
• Up to 6 monitored devices<br />
• Six auxiliary outputs<br />
• Selectable monitored-manual or<br />
automatic reset<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
Model Number<br />
Operating Input Voltage<br />
SRB 206 ST<br />
SRB 206 ST - 230V<br />
SRB 206 SQ*<br />
SRB 206 SQ-230*<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
48 - 230 VAC<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
48 - 230 VAC<br />
*Feature cross-short recognition.<br />
326
SERIES SRB 206 ST & SRB 206 SQ<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D)<br />
Ambient Operating<br />
Temperature Range<br />
Mechanical Life Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
Mounting<br />
45mm x 100mm x 121mm<br />
(1.77" x 3.9" x 4.75")<br />
-25°C to +45°C<br />
(-13°F to +113°F)<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
300 gm<br />
DIN rail<br />
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM (shown with 1 input)<br />
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS (Model SRB 206 ST shown)<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
Monitored Input #1A<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
Fuse (Input Power)<br />
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple<br />
max. 10%<br />
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz<br />
48 VAC-240VAC, 50/60 Hz<br />
3.6 W (max.), 3.6 VA<br />
24 V Internal electronic (hybrid) Fuse F1,<br />
Tripping current > 1 A (Resets after<br />
interruption of supply voltage)<br />
230 V Primary : Fuse (glass), tripping<br />
current > 1.0 A<br />
Secondary : Internal electronic fuse,<br />
tripping current > 0.12 A<br />
Fuse (Safety Outputs)<br />
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)<br />
Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 20 mA<br />
(Auxiliary <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Switching Capacity 230 VAC, 6 A Resistive<br />
(Safety Outputs) (inductive with suitable supressor circuit)<br />
Application Category AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
≤ 200 ms<br />
Drop-out Delay<br />
≤ 40 ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type & Materials AgCdO, self cleaning, positive-guided<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections • Self-lifting, plug-in screw terminals<br />
for 13 to 20 AWG<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
Monitored Input #1B<br />
Monitored Input #2A<br />
10<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
S11<br />
S12<br />
S71<br />
S72<br />
S11<br />
S22<br />
Monitored Input #2B<br />
Monitored Input #3A<br />
Monitored Input #3B<br />
Monitored Input #4A<br />
S72<br />
S82<br />
S31<br />
S32<br />
S82<br />
S92<br />
S31<br />
S42<br />
Monitored Input #4B<br />
Monitored Input #5A<br />
Monitored Input #5B<br />
Monitored Input #6A<br />
S92<br />
S102<br />
S51<br />
S52<br />
S102<br />
S112<br />
S51<br />
S62<br />
Monitored Input #6B<br />
Safety Output #1 (N.O.)<br />
Safety Output #2 (N.O.)<br />
Feedback Monitoring with<br />
Monitored-manual Reset<br />
S112<br />
S122<br />
13 14<br />
23 24<br />
X1<br />
X2<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
with Automatic Reset<br />
PNP-Semiconductor Outputs #1 through #6<br />
X1<br />
X3<br />
Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6<br />
327
SERIES SRB 211 AN<br />
General Purpose Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntroller<br />
(for dry 1 NO/1 NC contact input monitoring)<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Description<br />
The Model SRB 211 AN is a “general purpose” unit<br />
designed for use with safety devices having Normally-Open<br />
and Normally-Closed dry contact switching outputs. It is<br />
equipped for connection of one monitored input device in<br />
dual-channel configuration. In addition it features userselectable<br />
monitored-manual or automatic reset, stop<br />
category 0 & 1 safety outputs, and feedback monitoring<br />
of positive-guided controlled loads.<br />
Front View<br />
Input Voltage<br />
24 V AC/DC<br />
# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Dual-Channel)<br />
Monitored<br />
<strong>Co</strong>mpatible Input Device N.O./N.C (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
Number & Type<br />
3 N.O. (1 delayed : 1-30 sec.)<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
(dry contacts)<br />
Number & Type Auxiliary PNP<br />
(Non-Safety or<br />
Signalling Outputs)<br />
Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C./N.O.)<br />
Monitored<br />
• Interlock switches (N.C./N.O.)<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ded magnets<br />
Type of Reset<br />
(Selectable)<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
LED Displays<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards<br />
Stop Category<br />
• Monitored-manual<br />
(24 VDC trailing edge)<br />
• Automatic<br />
Yes<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
• K1 (safety relay 1)<br />
• K2 (safety relay 2)<br />
• K3/4 (safety relay 3 & 4)<br />
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)<br />
• UB (voltage at input terminals)<br />
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
0 (2 safety outputs)<br />
1 (1 safety output)<br />
Safety Classification PL e , per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
Category 4, per EN 954-1<br />
Selected Features<br />
• Plug-in screw terminals<br />
• Cross-short recognition<br />
• Stop category 0 & 1<br />
safety outputs<br />
• Selectable trailing edge or<br />
automatic reset<br />
• Resetable electronic fuse<br />
• Feedback monitoring<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
Model Number<br />
SRB 211 AN<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
24 V AC/DC<br />
328
SERIES SRB 211 AN<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D)<br />
Ambient Operating<br />
Temperature Range<br />
Mechanical Life Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
Mounting<br />
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM<br />
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm<br />
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")<br />
-25°C to +45°C<br />
(-13°F to +113°F)<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
255 gm<br />
DIN rail<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple<br />
max. 10%<br />
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz<br />
5.2 W, 7.2 VA (max.), plus signaling<br />
output Y1<br />
Fuse (Input Power) Internal electronic Fuse F1,<br />
Tripping current > 1.5 A<br />
(Resets approx. 1 second)<br />
Fuse (Safety Outputs)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(Safety Outputs)<br />
4 A Slow-blow (Recommended)<br />
230 VAC, 4 A Resistive<br />
(inductive with suitable suppressor circuit)<br />
10<br />
Switching Capacity 24 VDC 100mA<br />
(Auxiliary <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Application Category AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
≤ 40 ms<br />
Drop-out Delay ≤ 50 ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type & AgSnOAgNi, self cleaning, positive-guided<br />
Materials<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections • Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminals<br />
for 13 to 20 AWG<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
Monitored Input #1<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Monitored Input #2<br />
(N.C.)<br />
Safety Output #1<br />
(N.O.)<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
S13<br />
S14<br />
S21<br />
S22<br />
13 14<br />
Safety Output #2<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Safety Output #3<br />
(Stop Category 1, N.O.)<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
with Automatic Reset<br />
Feedback Monitoring with Manually-<br />
Monitored (Trailing Edge) Reset<br />
23 24<br />
37 38<br />
X1<br />
X3<br />
X1<br />
X2<br />
Auxiliary Output<br />
(PNP-Semiconductor)<br />
Y1<br />
329
SERIES SRB 211 ST<br />
General Purpose Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntroller<br />
(for dry contact and PNP-type input monitoring)<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Description<br />
The Model SRB 211 ST is a “general purpose” unit<br />
designed for use with safety devices having Normally-<br />
Closed (N.C.) dry contacts or PNP-type switching outputs. It<br />
is equipped for connection of one monitored input device in<br />
single- or dual-channel configuration. In addition it features<br />
user-selectable monitored-manual or automatic reset, stop<br />
category 0 & 1 safety outputs, and feedback monitoring of<br />
positive-guided controlled loads.<br />
Front View<br />
Input Voltage<br />
24 V AC/DC<br />
# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual-Channel)<br />
Monitored<br />
<strong>Co</strong>mpatible Input Device N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts) or<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration PNP-switching<br />
Number & Type Safety 3 N.O. (1 delayed: 1-30 sec.)<br />
Outputs<br />
(dry contacts)<br />
Number & Type Auxiliary PNP<br />
(Non-Safety or<br />
Signalling Output)<br />
Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)<br />
Monitored<br />
• Interlock switches (N.C.)<br />
• Devices with PNP semiconductor<br />
outputs<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ded magnets<br />
Type of Reset<br />
(Selectable)<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
LED Displays<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards<br />
Stop Category<br />
• Monitored-manual<br />
(24 VDC trailing edge)<br />
• Automatic<br />
Yes<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
• K1 (safety relay 1)<br />
• K2 (safety relay 2)<br />
• K3/4 (safety relay 3 & 4)<br />
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)<br />
•UB (voltage at input terminals)<br />
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
0 (2 safety outputs)<br />
1 (1 safety output)<br />
Safety Classification PL e , per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
Category 4, per EN 954-1<br />
Selected Features<br />
• Plug-in screw terminals<br />
• Cross-short recognition<br />
• Stop category 0 & 1<br />
safety outputs<br />
• Selectable monitored-manual or<br />
automatic reset<br />
• Hybrid fuse<br />
• Feedback monitoring<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
Model Number<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
SRB 211 ST<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
330
SERIES SRB 211 ST<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D)<br />
Ambient Operating<br />
Temperature Range<br />
Mechanical Life Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
Mounting<br />
Typical Wiring Diagram<br />
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm<br />
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")<br />
-25°C to +45°C<br />
(-13°F to +113°F)<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
255 gm<br />
DIN rail<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple<br />
max. 10%<br />
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz<br />
5.1 W, 5.7 VA (max.), plus signaling<br />
output Y1<br />
Fuse (Input Power) Internal electronic (hybrid) Fuse F1,<br />
Tripping current > 1 A (Resets after<br />
interruption of supply voltage)<br />
Fuse (Safety Outputs)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(Safety Outputs)<br />
4 A Slow-blow (Recommended)<br />
230 VAC, 4 A Resistive<br />
(inductive with suitable suppressor circuit)<br />
Switching Capacity 24 VDC 100mA<br />
(Auxiliary <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Application Category AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
≤ 40 ms<br />
Drop-out Delay ≤ 40 ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type & AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided<br />
Materials<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections • Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminals<br />
for 13 to 20 AWG<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
10<br />
Terminal <strong>Co</strong>nnections<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
Monitored Input #1<br />
(N.C. or PNP)<br />
Monitored Input #2<br />
(N.C. or PNP)<br />
Safety Output #1<br />
(N.O.)<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
S11<br />
S12<br />
S21<br />
S22<br />
13 14<br />
Safety Output #2<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Safety Output #3<br />
(Stop Category 1, N.O.)<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
with Automatic Reset<br />
Feedback Monitoring with<br />
Monitored-manual Reset<br />
23 24<br />
37 38<br />
X1<br />
X3<br />
X1<br />
X2<br />
Auxiliary Output<br />
(PNP-Semiconductor)<br />
Y1<br />
331
SERIES SRB 301 LC &<br />
General Purpose Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntroller<br />
SRB 301 LCI<br />
(for dry contact and PNP-type input monitoring)<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Description<br />
The Model SRB 301 LC is a lower cost “general-purpose”<br />
unit designed for use with safety devices having Normally-<br />
Closed (N.C.) or PNP-type switching outputs. It is equipped<br />
for connection of one input device in single- or dual-channel<br />
configuration. In addition it features feedback monitoring of<br />
positive-guided controlled loads, automatic or manual reset<br />
and optional cross-short recognition.<br />
Front View<br />
Input Voltage<br />
24 V AC/DC<br />
# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual-Channel)<br />
Monitored<br />
Monitored <strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts) or<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
PNP-switching<br />
Number & Type Safety 3 N.O. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Outputs<br />
Number & Type Auxiliary 1 N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
(Non-Safety or<br />
Signalling Output)<br />
Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)<br />
Monitored<br />
• Interlock switches (N.C.)<br />
• Devices with PNP semiconductor<br />
outputs<br />
Type of Reset<br />
(Selectable)<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
LED Displays<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards<br />
Stop Category 0<br />
• Manual (24 V Leading Edge)<br />
• Automatic<br />
Yes<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
• K1 (safety relay 1)<br />
• K2 (safety relay 2)<br />
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)<br />
•UB (voltage at input terminals)<br />
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
Safety Classification PL e , per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
Category 4, per EN 954-1<br />
Selected Features<br />
• Cross-short recognition<br />
(Field-wired option)<br />
• Screw terminals (LC)<br />
• Detachable terminals (LCI)<br />
• Feedback monitoring<br />
• Electronic fuse (LCI)<br />
• Glass fuse (LC)<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
Model Number<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
SRB 301 LC<br />
SRB 301 LCI<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
332
SERIES SRB 301 LC & SRB 301 LCI<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D)<br />
Ambient Operating<br />
Temperature Range<br />
Mechanical Life Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
Mounting<br />
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM<br />
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm<br />
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")<br />
-25°C to +45°C<br />
(-13°F to +113°F)<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
230 gm (0.5 lbs.)<br />
DIN rail (35mm)<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
Fuse (Input Power)<br />
Fuse (Safety Outputs)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(Safety Outputs)<br />
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple<br />
max. 10%<br />
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz<br />
1.7 W (max.), 1.9 VA<br />
• Internal glass fuse F1: T 0.50 A<br />
(SRB 301 LC)<br />
• Internal electronic fuse*<br />
(SRB 301 LCI)<br />
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)<br />
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive<br />
(inductive with suitable<br />
supressor circuit)<br />
Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 2 A<br />
(Auxiliary <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
≤ 30 ms<br />
Drop-out Delay<br />
≤ 50 ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type &<br />
AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided<br />
Materials<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections • Self-lifting, screw terminals for<br />
13 to 20 AWG<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
*Resets automatically after a short time-delay.<br />
10<br />
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
Monitored Input #1<br />
(N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input #2<br />
(N.C.)<br />
Safety Output #1<br />
(N.O.)<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
S11<br />
S12<br />
S21<br />
S22<br />
13 14<br />
Safety Output #2<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Safety Output #3<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
with Automatic or<br />
Manual (Leading Edge) Reset<br />
Auxiliary Output<br />
(N.C.)<br />
23 24<br />
33 34<br />
X1<br />
X2<br />
41 42<br />
333
SERIES SRB 301 LC/B<br />
Description<br />
The Model SRB 301 LC/B is a lower cost “general-purpose”<br />
unit designed for use with safety devices having Normally-<br />
Closed (N.C.) or PNP-type switching outputs. It is equipped<br />
for connection of one input device in single- or dual-channel<br />
configuration. In addition it features feedback monitoring of<br />
positive-guided controlled loads, automatic or manual reset<br />
and optional cross-short recognition.<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Input Voltage<br />
24 V AC/DC<br />
# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual channel)<br />
Monitored<br />
Monitored <strong>Co</strong>ntact N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts) or<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
PNP-switching<br />
Number & Type Safety 3 N.O. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Outputs<br />
Number & Type Auxilliary 1 N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
(Non-Safety or Signalling<br />
Output)<br />
Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)<br />
Monitored<br />
• Interlock switches (N.C.)<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ded Magnets<br />
• Devices with PNP semiconductor<br />
outputs<br />
Type of Reset<br />
• Manual (24 V Leading Edge)<br />
(Selectable)<br />
• Automatic<br />
Feedback Monitoring Yes<br />
LED Displays<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
• K1 (safety relay 1)<br />
• K2 (safety relay 2)<br />
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)<br />
• UB (voltage at input terminals)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
Stop Category 0<br />
Safety Classification Up to PL e , per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
Up to Category 4, per EN 954-1<br />
Model Number<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
SRB 301 LC/B<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
334
SERIES SRB 301 LC/B<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D) 22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm<br />
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")<br />
Ambient Operating -25°C to +45°C<br />
Temperature Range (-13°F to +113°F)<br />
Mechanical Life<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
230 gm (0.5 lbs.)<br />
Mounting<br />
DIN rail (35mm)<br />
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
Fuse (Input Power)<br />
Fuse (Safety Outputs)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(Safety Outputs)<br />
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple<br />
max. 10%<br />
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz<br />
1.7 W (max.), 1.9 VA<br />
Internal glass fuse F1: T 0.25 A<br />
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)<br />
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive<br />
(inductive with suitable<br />
supressor circuit)<br />
24 VDC, 2 A<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(Auxilliary <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
≤ 30 ms<br />
Drop-out Delay<br />
≤ 50 ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type & Materials AgSnO, self cleaning,<br />
positive-guided<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
Air Cleaner &<br />
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections<br />
• Screw terminals for<br />
13 to 20 AWG<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
10<br />
Terminal <strong>Co</strong>nnections<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
Monitored Input #1<br />
(N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input #2<br />
(N.C.)<br />
Safety Output #1<br />
(N.O.)<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
S12<br />
S22<br />
13 14<br />
Safety Output #2<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Safety Output #3<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
with Automatic or<br />
Manual (Leading Edge) Reset<br />
Auxiliary Output<br />
(N.C.)<br />
23 24<br />
33 34<br />
X1<br />
X2<br />
41 42<br />
335
SERIES SRB 301 MC<br />
General Purpose Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntroller<br />
(for dry contact and PNP-type input monitoring)<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Description<br />
The Model SRB 301 MC is a “general-purpose” unit<br />
designed for use with safety devices having Normally-<br />
Closed (N.C.) or PNP-type switching outputs. It is equipped<br />
for connection of one input device in single- or dual-channel<br />
configuration. In addition it features feedback monitoring of<br />
positive-guided controlled loads, automatic or manual reset<br />
and optional cross-short recognition.<br />
Front View<br />
Input Voltage<br />
24 V AC/DC<br />
# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual-Channel)<br />
Monitored<br />
Monitored <strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts) or<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
PNP-switching<br />
Number & Type Safety 3 N.O. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Outputs<br />
Number & Type Auxiliary 1 N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
(Non-Safety or<br />
Signalling Output)<br />
Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)<br />
Monitored<br />
• Interlock switches (N.C.)<br />
• Devices with PNP semiconductor<br />
outputs<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ded Magnets<br />
Type of Reset<br />
(Selectable)<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
LED Displays<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards<br />
Stop Category 0<br />
• Manual (24 V Leading Edge)<br />
• Automatic<br />
Yes<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
• K1 (safety relay 1)<br />
• K2 (safety relay 2)<br />
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)<br />
•UB (voltage at input terminals)<br />
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
Safety Classification PL e , per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
Category 4, per EN 954-1<br />
Selected Features<br />
• Cross-short recognition<br />
(Selectable w/dip-switch)<br />
• Screw terminals<br />
• Feedback monitoring<br />
• Electronic fuse<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
Model Number<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
SRB 301 MC<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
336
SERIES SRB 301 MC<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D)<br />
Ambient Operating<br />
Temperature Range<br />
Mechanical Life Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
Mounting<br />
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM<br />
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm<br />
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")<br />
-25°C to +45°C<br />
(-13°F to +113°F)<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
230 gm (0.5 lbs.)<br />
DIN rail (35mm)<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
Fuse (Input Power)<br />
Fuse (Safety Outputs)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(Safety Outputs)<br />
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple<br />
max. 10%<br />
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz<br />
2.0 W (max.), 4.9 VA<br />
Internal electronic fuse*<br />
Tripping current > 0.5 A<br />
8 A Slow-blow (Recommended)<br />
230 VAC, 8 A Resistive<br />
(inductive with suitable<br />
supressor circuit)<br />
Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 2 A<br />
(Auxiliary <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
≤ 400 ms<br />
Drop-out Delay<br />
≤ 25 ms (emergency stop);<br />
≤ 80 ms (power failure)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type &<br />
AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided<br />
Materials<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections • Self-lifting, screw terminals for<br />
13 to 20 AWG<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
*Resets after a 1 second time-delay.<br />
10<br />
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
Monitored Input #1<br />
(N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input #2<br />
(N.C.)<br />
Safety Output #1<br />
(N.O.)<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
S11<br />
S12<br />
S21<br />
S22<br />
13 14<br />
Safety Output #2<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Safety Output #3<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
with Automatic or<br />
Manual (Leading Edge) Reset<br />
Auxiliary Output<br />
(N.C.)<br />
23 24<br />
33 34<br />
X1<br />
X2<br />
41 42<br />
337
SERIES SRB 301 ST<br />
SERIES SRB 301 ST - 230V<br />
SERIES SRB 301 SQ - 230V<br />
General Purpose<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers<br />
(for dry contact and<br />
PNP-type input monitoring)<br />
Model SRB 301 ST shown.<br />
Description<br />
The above “general-purpose” safety controllers are<br />
designed for use with safety devices having Normally-<br />
Closed (N.C.) or PNP-type switching outputs. Each is<br />
equipped for connection of one input device in singleor<br />
dual-channel configuration. In addition they feature<br />
plug-in screw terminals, user-selectable monitoredmanual<br />
or automatic reset, feedback monitoring of<br />
positive-guided controlled loads and cross-short<br />
recognition (on selected models).<br />
Front View<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Input Voltage<br />
SRB 301 ST<br />
SRB 301 ST - 230 V<br />
SRB 301 SQ - 230 V<br />
24 VAC / DC<br />
48 - 230 V AC<br />
48 - 230 V AC<br />
# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual-Channel)<br />
Monitored<br />
(SRB 301 SQ Dual-Channel Only)<br />
Monitored <strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
Number & Type<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
Number & Type Auxiliary<br />
(Non-Safety or<br />
Signalling Output)<br />
Typical Input Devices<br />
Monitored<br />
Type of Reset<br />
(Selectable)<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
LED Displays<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards<br />
Stop Category 0<br />
N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts) PNP-switching<br />
3 N.O. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
1 N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
• E-stops (N.C.)<br />
• Interlock switches (N.C.)<br />
• Devices with PNP semiconductor<br />
outputs (SRB 301 ST-24V only)<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ded Magnets<br />
(SRB 301 ST-24V only)<br />
• Monitored-manual<br />
(24 VDC trailing edge)<br />
• Automatic<br />
Yes<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
• K1 (safety relay 1)<br />
• K2 (safety relay 2)<br />
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)<br />
•UB (voltage at input terminals,<br />
SRB 301 ST only)<br />
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
Safety Classification PL e , per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
Category 4, per EN 954-1<br />
Type Fuse<br />
Selected Features<br />
Hybrid<br />
• Cross-short recognition (SRB<br />
301ST 24 VAC / DC &<br />
SRB 301 SQ only)<br />
• Plug-in screw terminals<br />
• Selectable monitored-manual or<br />
automatic reset<br />
• Feedback monitoring<br />
338<br />
Model SRB 301 ST shown.<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
Model Number<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
SRB 301 ST*<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
SRB 301 ST - 230 V 48-230VAC<br />
SRB 301 SQ - 230 V* 48-230VAC<br />
*Feature cross-short recognition.
SERIES SRB 301 ST<br />
SERIES SRB 301 ST - 230V<br />
SERIES SRB 301 SQ - 230V<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D)<br />
Ambient Operating<br />
Temperature Range<br />
Mechanical Life Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
SRB 301 ST<br />
SRB 301 ST - 230V<br />
Mounting<br />
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM<br />
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS (Model SRB 301 ST shown)<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm<br />
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")<br />
-25°C to +45°C<br />
(-13°F to +113°F)<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
240 gm (0.5 lbs.)<br />
250 gm<br />
DIN rail (35mm)<br />
Monitored Input #1 (N.C.)<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
SRB 301 ST<br />
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual<br />
ripple max. 10%<br />
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz<br />
SRB 301 ST (SQ) - 230V 48 VAC - 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
SRB 301 ST<br />
2.4 W (max.), 3.8 VA<br />
SRB 301 ST (SQ) - 230V 2.8 VA<br />
Fuse (Input Power)<br />
24 V Internal electronic (hybrid) Fuse F1,<br />
Tripping current > 0.6 A (Resets after<br />
interruption of supply voltage)<br />
230 V F1 : glass bulb, tripping current 0.5 A<br />
Secondary : electronic fuse, tripping<br />
current 0.12 A<br />
Fuse (Safety Outputs)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(Safety Outputs)<br />
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)<br />
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive<br />
(inductive with suitable surge supressor)<br />
Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 2 A<br />
(Auxiliary <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
SRB 301 ST<br />
≤ 200 ms<br />
SRB 301 ST (SQ) - 230V ≤ 30 ms<br />
Drop-out Delay<br />
SRB 301 ST<br />
≤ 20 ms<br />
SRB 301 ST (SQ) - 230V ≤ 30 ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type & Materials AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections • Self-lifting, plug-in screw terminals<br />
for 13 to 20 AWG<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
Monitored Input #2 (N.C.)<br />
Safety Output #1 (N.O.)<br />
10<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
S11<br />
S12<br />
S21<br />
S22<br />
13 14<br />
Safety Output #2 (N.O.)<br />
Safety Output #3 (N.O.)<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
with Automatic Reset<br />
Feedback Monitoring with<br />
Monitored-manual Reset<br />
23 24<br />
33 34<br />
X3<br />
S12<br />
X2<br />
S12<br />
Auxiliary Output (N.C.)<br />
41 42<br />
339
SERIES SRB 324 ST<br />
General Purpose Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntroller<br />
(for dry contact & PNP-type input monitoring<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Description<br />
The Model SRB 324 ST is a “general purpose” unit<br />
designed for use with safety devices having Normally-<br />
Closed (N.C.) dry contacts or PNP-type switching outputs.<br />
It is equipped for connection of one monitored input device<br />
in single- or dual-channel configuration. In addition it features<br />
user-selectable monitored-manual or automatic<br />
reset, stop category 0 & 1 safety outputs, and feedback<br />
monitoring of positive-guided controlled loads.<br />
Front View<br />
Input Voltage<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual-Channel)<br />
Monitored<br />
<strong>Co</strong>mpatible Input Device N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts) or<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration PNP-switching<br />
Number & Type<br />
5 N.O. (2 delayed: 1-30 sec.)<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
(dry contacts)<br />
Number & Type Auxiliary 1 N.C. (dry contact)<br />
(Non-Safety or<br />
3 - PNP<br />
Signalling Outputs)<br />
Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)<br />
Monitored<br />
• Interlock switches (N.C.)<br />
• Devices with PNP outputs<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ded magnets<br />
Type of Reset (Selectable)<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
LED Displays<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards<br />
Stop Category<br />
• Monitored-manual (trailing edge)<br />
• Automatic<br />
Yes<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
• K1-K4 (safety relays 1-4)<br />
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)<br />
• UB (voltage at input terminals)<br />
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
0 (3 safety outputs)<br />
1 (2 safety outputs)<br />
Safety Classification PL e , per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
Category 4, per EN 954-1<br />
Selected Features<br />
• Plug-in screw terminals<br />
• Cross-short recognition<br />
• Stop category 0 & 1<br />
• Selectable monitored-manual or<br />
automatic reset<br />
• Hybrid fuse<br />
• Feed back monitoring<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
Model Number<br />
SRB 324 ST<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
24 V AC/DC<br />
340
SERIES SRB 324 ST<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D)<br />
Ambient Operating<br />
Temperature Range<br />
Mechanical Life Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
Mounting<br />
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM<br />
45mm x 100mm x 121mm<br />
(1.8" x 3.9" x 4.75")<br />
-25°C to +45°C<br />
(-13°F to +113°F)<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
480 gm<br />
DIN rail (35mm)<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple<br />
max. 10%<br />
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz<br />
4.8 W, 7.8 VA max.<br />
(Plus signalling contacts Y1-Y3)<br />
Fuse (Input Power) • Internal electronic Fuse F1,<br />
tripping current > 2.5 A<br />
(reset approx. 1 second)<br />
• Internal hybrid fuse F2,<br />
tripping current > 1.0 A<br />
(reset after interruption of<br />
supply voltage)<br />
Fuse (Safety Outputs)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(Safety Outputs Stop 0)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(Auxiliary <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)<br />
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive<br />
(inductive with suitable supressor circuit)<br />
Y1-Y3: 24 VDC, 100mA (PNP)<br />
61/62: 24 VDC, 2 A max. (Dry)<br />
Application Category AC-15 / DC-13 : EN 60 947-5-1<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
≤ 30 ms<br />
Drop-out Delay ≤ 30 ms (13/14, 23/24, 33/34)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type & Material<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance<br />
Air Clearance &<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections<br />
AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided<br />
100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2<br />
• Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminals<br />
for 13 to 20 AWG<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
10<br />
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
Monitored Input #1<br />
Monitored Input #2<br />
Safety Output #1 (NO)<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
S11<br />
S12<br />
S21<br />
S22<br />
13 14<br />
Safety Output #2 (NO)<br />
Safety Output #3 (NO)<br />
Safety Output #4<br />
Stop Category 1 (NO)<br />
Safety Output #5<br />
Stop Category 1 (NO)<br />
23 24<br />
33 34<br />
47 48<br />
57 58<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
Monitored-Manual Reset<br />
Automatic Reset<br />
Jumper<br />
Auxiliary PNP Output<br />
X1<br />
X2<br />
X3<br />
X4<br />
X4<br />
X5<br />
S31<br />
S32<br />
Y1 Y2 Y3<br />
341
SERIES SRB 202 C &<br />
SRB 400 C<br />
Differentiated-Input <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers<br />
Description<br />
The Series SRB202C and SRB400C are (general purpose)<br />
units designed for use with safety devices having two<br />
Normally-Closed (N.C.) and/or one Normally-Open (N.O.)<br />
and one Normally-Closed (N.C.) dry contacts. Uniquely,<br />
they provide for differentiated switching of the safety outputs<br />
depending on the input that is actuated.<br />
For example, actuating an E-Stop as Input #1 would disable<br />
all of the unit’s safety outputs. <strong>Co</strong>nversely, actuation<br />
of Input #2 (e.g., a safety guard interlock switch) would<br />
only disable half of the available safety outputs (safety<br />
output #2 on SRB202C units and safety outputs #3 & #4<br />
on SRB400C units).<br />
Thus this functionality, which would normally require<br />
two discrete safety controllers, can be achieved<br />
with a single unit (controller).<br />
Front View<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Input Voltage<br />
24 VDC<br />
# Discrete Input Devices 2<br />
Monitored<br />
<strong>Co</strong>mpatible Input Device Input #1: 2 N.C. (Dry contacts)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration Input #2: 2 N.C. or 1 N.O./1 N.C.<br />
Number & Type Safety 2 N.O. (SRB202 models)<br />
Outputs<br />
4 N.O. (SRB400 models)<br />
Number & Type Auxiliary SRB202: 2 N.C.<br />
(Non-Safety or<br />
SRB400: None<br />
Signalling Outputs)<br />
Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)<br />
Monitored<br />
• Interlock switches (N.C.)<br />
Type of Reset<br />
• Monitored-manual<br />
(Depends on model) (24 VDC trailing edge)<br />
• Automatic or Manual<br />
Feedback Monitoring Yes<br />
LED Displays<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
• K1 (safety relay 1)<br />
• K2 (safety relay 2)<br />
• K3 (safety relay 3)<br />
• K4 (safety relay 4)<br />
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)<br />
• UB (voltage at input terminals)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards<br />
Stop Category 0<br />
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
Safety Classification PL e , per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
Category 4, per EN 954-1<br />
Selected Features<br />
Selection Chart<br />
• Plug-in screw terminals<br />
• Cross-short recognition<br />
(“Q” models only)<br />
• Electronic fuse<br />
• Feedback monitoring<br />
Outputs Input #1 Input #2<br />
Cross-<br />
Model # Safety Aux <strong>Co</strong>ntacts Reset short <strong>Co</strong>ntacts Reset<br />
SRB202CA 2 2 2 N.C.<br />
Auto<br />
No 1 N.O./1 N.C.*<br />
Auto<br />
SRB202CS 2 2 2 N.C. or No 2 N.C. or<br />
Manual<br />
Manual<br />
SRB202CA/Q 2 2 2 N.C. Yes 1 N.O./1 N.C.*<br />
SRB202CA/T 2 2 2 N.C. No 1 N.O./1 N.C.*<br />
Auto<br />
SRB202CS/T 2 2 2 N.C.<br />
Monitoredmanual<br />
Manual<br />
No 2 N.C. or<br />
SRB202CA/QT 2 2 2 N.C. Yes 1 N.O./1 N.C.*<br />
342<br />
SRB400CA 4 0 2 N.C.<br />
Auto<br />
No 1 N.O./1 N.C.*<br />
SRB400CS 4 0 2 N.C. or No 2 N.C.<br />
SRB400CA/Q 4 0 2 N.C.<br />
Manual<br />
Yes 1 N.O./1 N.C.*<br />
SRB400CA/T 4 0 2 N.C. No 1 N.O./1 N.C.*<br />
SRB400CS/T 4 0 2 N.C.<br />
Monitoredmanual<br />
No 2 N.C.<br />
SRB400CA/QT 4 0 2 N.C. Yes 1 N.O./1 N.C.*<br />
*Suitable for use with BNS coded-magnet switches.<br />
Auto<br />
or<br />
Manual<br />
Auto<br />
or<br />
Manual
SERIES SRB 202 C & SRB 400 C<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D)<br />
Ambient Operating<br />
Temperature Range<br />
Mechanical Life Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
Mounting<br />
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM<br />
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm<br />
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")<br />
-25°C to +45°C<br />
(-13°F to +113°F)<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
235 gm<br />
DIN rail (35mm)<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple<br />
max. 10%<br />
4.4 W<br />
Fuse (Input Power) Internal electronic fuse* F1,<br />
Tripping current > 1 A<br />
Fuse (Safety Outputs)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(Safety Outputs)<br />
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)<br />
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive<br />
(inductive with suitable suppressor<br />
circuit)<br />
Switching Capacity 24 VDC 100mA<br />
(Auxiliary <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Application Category AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
≤ 40 ms<br />
Drop-out Delay ≤ 50 ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type & AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided<br />
Materials<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections • Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminals<br />
for 13 to 20 AWG<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
*Resets automatically after a short time-delay.<br />
10<br />
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS<br />
Input Power<br />
Monitored Input #1A (N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input #1B (N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input #2A (N.C.)<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
A1<br />
S12<br />
A1<br />
S22<br />
S31<br />
S32<br />
Monitored Input #2B (N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input #2B (N.O.)*<br />
Feedback and Reset<br />
Input #1<br />
Feedback and Reset<br />
Input #2<br />
S41<br />
S42<br />
S43<br />
S44<br />
A1<br />
X1<br />
A1<br />
X2<br />
Output #1<br />
Output #2<br />
Output #3 (SRB400 only)<br />
Output #4 (SRB400 only)<br />
13 14<br />
13 24<br />
33 34<br />
33 44<br />
Auxiliary Output #1<br />
(SRB202 only)<br />
Auxiliary Output #2<br />
(SRB202 only)<br />
31 32<br />
31 42<br />
*For models having 1 N.O./1 N.C. contacts on Input #2.<br />
343
SERIES SRB 401 LC<br />
General Purpose Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntroller<br />
(for dry contact input monitoring)<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Description<br />
The Model SRB 401 LC is a lower cost “general-purpose”<br />
unit designed for use with safety devices having Normally-<br />
Closed (N.C.) switching outputs. It is equipped for connection<br />
of one input device in single- or dual-channel configuration.<br />
In addition it features feedback monitoring of positive-guided<br />
controlled loads, automatic or manual reset and cross-short<br />
recognition when monitoring in dual-channel.<br />
Front View<br />
Input Voltage<br />
24 V AC/DC<br />
# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual-Channel)<br />
Monitored<br />
Monitored <strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
Number & Type Safety 4 N.O. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Outputs<br />
Number & Type Auxiliary 1 N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
(Non-Safety or<br />
Signalling Output)<br />
Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)<br />
Monitored<br />
• Interlock switches (N.C.)<br />
Type of Reset<br />
• Manual (24 V Leading Edge)<br />
(Selectable)<br />
• Automatic<br />
Feedback Monitoring Yes<br />
LED Displays<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
• K1 (safety relay 1)<br />
• K2 (safety relay 2)<br />
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)<br />
•UB (voltage at input terminals)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards<br />
Stop Category 0<br />
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
Safety Classification PL d , per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
Category 3, per EN 954-1<br />
Selected Features<br />
• Cross-short recognition<br />
• Screw terminals<br />
• Feedback monitoring<br />
• Glass fuse<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
Model Number<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
SRB 401 LC<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
344
SERIES SRB 401 LC<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D)<br />
Ambient Operating<br />
Temperature Range<br />
Mechanical Life Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
Mounting<br />
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM<br />
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm<br />
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")<br />
-25°C to +45°C<br />
(-13°F to +113°F)<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
210 gm (0.47 lbs.)<br />
DIN rail (35mm)<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
Fuse (Input Power)<br />
Fuse (Safety Outputs)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(Safety Outputs)<br />
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple<br />
max. 10%<br />
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz<br />
2.5 W (max.), 4.2 VA<br />
Internal glass fuse F1: T 0.25 A<br />
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)<br />
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive<br />
(inductive with suitable<br />
supressor circuit)<br />
Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 2 A<br />
(Auxiliary <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
≤ 15 ms<br />
Drop-out Delay<br />
≤ 30 ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type &<br />
AgCdO, self cleaning, positive-guided<br />
Materials<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections • Self-lifting, screw terminals for<br />
13 to 20 AWG<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
10<br />
Single-channel configuration shown<br />
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS (Single-channel configuration)<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
Monitored Input #1<br />
(N.C.)<br />
Safety Output #1<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Safety Output #2<br />
(N.O.)<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
S11<br />
S12<br />
13 14<br />
23 24<br />
Safety Output #3<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Safety Output #4<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
with Automatic or<br />
Manual (Leading Edge) Reset<br />
Auxiliary Output<br />
(N.C.)<br />
33 34<br />
43 44<br />
S33<br />
S34<br />
51 52<br />
345
SERIES SRB 402 EM &<br />
SRB 401 EM-115V<br />
Safety Output Expansion Module<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Input Voltage<br />
Number & Type Safety Outputs<br />
SRB 402 EM: 24V AC/DC<br />
SRB 401 EM-115V: 115V AC<br />
4 N.O. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Number & Type Auxiliary<br />
SRB 402 EM: 2 N.C.<br />
(Non-Safety or Signalling Outputs) SRB 401 EM-115V: 1 N.C.<br />
LED Displays<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards<br />
Stop Category 0<br />
Safety Classification<br />
Selected Features<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
• K1/K2 (safety relay 1 & 2)<br />
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
Function of Master Safety<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntroller (mounted in same<br />
control cabinet)<br />
• Plug-in screw terminals<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mpatible with all SRB<br />
PROTECT SM Series models<br />
Description<br />
The Models SRB 402 EM and 401 EM are designed for<br />
use as an accessory for SCHMERSAL’s PROTECT SM<br />
Series safety controllers. It provides additional safety<br />
(enabling) outputs where required to satisfy the system<br />
control requirements.<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
Model Number<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
SRB 402 EM<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
SRB 401 EM-115V 115V AC<br />
Front View<br />
Model SRB 402 EM shown<br />
346
SERIES SRB 402 EM & SRB 401 EM-115V<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D)<br />
Ambient Operating<br />
Temperature Range<br />
Mechanical Life Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
Mounting<br />
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM<br />
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm<br />
(0.9" x 3.94" x 4.75")<br />
-25°C to +45°C<br />
(-13°F to +113°F)<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
SRB 402 EM: 215 gm (0.47 lbs.)<br />
SRB 401 EM: 260 gm (0.57 lbs.)<br />
DIN rail (35mm)<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Operating Voltage:<br />
SRB 402 EM<br />
SRB 401 EM-115V<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
Fuse (Input Power)<br />
(for SRB 402 EM only)<br />
Fuse (Safety Outputs)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(Safety Outputs)<br />
24V DC -15% / +20%, residual ripple<br />
max. 10%<br />
24V AC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz<br />
115V AC -15% / +6%, 50/60 Hz<br />
1.0 VA (max.) / 1.0 W (max.)<br />
Glass fuse F1: 1.0 A / 250 V<br />
(Slow-blow)<br />
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)<br />
230V AC, 6 A Resistive<br />
(inductive with suitable supressor)<br />
Switching Capacity 24V DC, 2 A<br />
(Auxiliary <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN IEC 60947-5-1<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
≤ 30 ms<br />
Drop-out Delay<br />
≤ 35 ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type & Materials AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections • Self-lifting, screw terminals for<br />
13 to 24 AWG<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
10<br />
Model SRB 402 EM shown<br />
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
Safety Output #1<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Safety Output #2<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Safety Output #3<br />
(N.O.)<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
13 14<br />
23 24<br />
33 34<br />
Safety Output #4<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Feedback Monitoring to<br />
Main Module<br />
Auxiliary Output #1<br />
(N.C.)<br />
Auxiliary Output #2*<br />
(N.C.)<br />
43 44<br />
X1<br />
X2<br />
51 52<br />
61 62<br />
*Featured on SRB 402 EM model only<br />
347
SERIES SRB 504 ST<br />
General Purpose Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntroller<br />
(for dry contact and PNP-type input monitoring)<br />
Description<br />
The above “general-purpose” safety controllers are<br />
designed for use with safety devices having Normally-<br />
Closed (N.C.) or PNP-type switching outputs. Each is<br />
equipped for connection of one input device in singleor<br />
dual-channel configuration. In addition they feature<br />
plug-in screw terminals, user-selectable monitoredmanual<br />
or automatic reset, feedback monitoring of<br />
positive-guided controlled loads and optional crossshort<br />
recognition.<br />
Front View<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Input Voltage<br />
24 VAC / DC<br />
# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual-Channel)<br />
Monitored<br />
Monitored <strong>Co</strong>ntact<br />
N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts) or<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
PNP-switching<br />
Number & Type<br />
5 N.O. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Safety Outputs<br />
Number & Type Auxiliary 1 N.C. (Dry <strong>Co</strong>ntacts) & 3-PNP<br />
(Non-Safety or<br />
Signalling Output)<br />
Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)<br />
Monitored<br />
• Interlock switches (N.C.)<br />
• Devices with PNP semiconductor<br />
outputs<br />
Type of Reset<br />
(Selectable)<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
LED Displays<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards<br />
Stop Category 0<br />
• Monitored-manual<br />
(24V DC trailing edge)<br />
• Automatic<br />
Yes<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
• K1 (safety relay 1)<br />
• K2 (safety relay 2)<br />
• K3 (safety relay 3)<br />
• K4 (safety relay 4)<br />
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)<br />
•UB (voltage at input terminals)<br />
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
Safety Classification PL e , per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
Category 4, per EN 954-1<br />
Type Fuse<br />
Selected Features<br />
Hybrid<br />
• Cross-short recognition<br />
• Plug-in screw terminals<br />
• Selectable trailing edge or<br />
automatic reset<br />
• Feedback monitoring<br />
• Resetable (hybrid) fuse<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
Model Number<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
SRB 504 ST<br />
24V AC/DC<br />
348
SERIES SRB 504 ST<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D)<br />
Ambient Operating<br />
Temperature Range<br />
Mechanical Life Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
Mounting<br />
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM<br />
45mm x 100mm x 121mm<br />
(1.8" x 3.9" x 4.75")<br />
-25°C to +60°C<br />
(-13°F to +140°F)<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
420 gm (0.93 lbs.)<br />
DIN rail (35mm)<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
24V DC -15% / +20%, residual ripple<br />
max. 10%<br />
24V AC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz<br />
3.2 W (max.), 7.1 VA, plus signalling<br />
outputs<br />
Fuse (Input Power) Internal electronic Fuse F1,<br />
Tripping current > 2.5 A (Resets<br />
after interruption of supply voltage)<br />
Fuse (Safety Outputs)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(Safety Outputs)<br />
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)<br />
250V AC, 6 A Resistive<br />
(inductive with suitable surge supressor)<br />
Switching Capacity 24V DC, 2 A<br />
(Auxiliary <strong>Co</strong>ntacts)<br />
Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
≤ 400 ms auto start<br />
Drop-out Delay<br />
≤ 30 ms (at emergency stop)<br />
≤ 80 ms (at power failure)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Type & Materials AgSnO, AgNi self cleaning,<br />
positive-guided<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance<br />
Air Clearance &<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections<br />
100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2<br />
• Self-lifting, plug-in screw terminals<br />
for 13 to 20 AWG<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
10<br />
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
Monitored Input #1 (N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input #2 (N.C.)<br />
Safety Output #1 (N.O.)<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
S11<br />
S12<br />
S21<br />
S22<br />
13 14<br />
Safety Output #2 (N.O.)<br />
Safety Output #3 (N.O.)<br />
Safety Output #4 (N.O.)<br />
Feedback Monitoring<br />
23 24<br />
33 34<br />
43 44<br />
X1<br />
X2<br />
Safety Output #5 (N.O.)<br />
Manually-monitored<br />
(Trailing Edge) Reset<br />
Automatic Reset<br />
Auxiliary Output (N.C.)<br />
53 54<br />
X3<br />
X4<br />
X4<br />
X5<br />
61 62<br />
Auxiliary Output<br />
(PNP-Semiconductor)<br />
Jumpers<br />
Y1 Y2 Y3<br />
S31<br />
S32<br />
349
SERIES PROTECT-IE<br />
Input Expansion Module<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Description<br />
The Protect-IE is designed for use as an accessory for<br />
Schmersal’s Protect Series Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers. It provides 4<br />
additional sensor inputs where required to satisfy the system<br />
control requirements. Depending on the version, the Protect-<br />
IE monitors 1 NO/1NC or 2 NC contacts. It is possible to<br />
cascade multiple units to monitor up to 80 sensors.<br />
Input Voltage<br />
Number & Type of<br />
Outputs<br />
Number & Type Auxiliary<br />
(non-safety or signalling<br />
outputs)<br />
Reset & Feedback<br />
Monitoring<br />
Typical Input Devices<br />
Monitored<br />
LED Displays<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards<br />
Stop Category 0<br />
Safety Classification<br />
Selected Features<br />
24 VDC<br />
2 N.O. (dry contacts) to master<br />
safety controller<br />
4 – 24 VDC (Y1-Y4)<br />
Performed by master controller<br />
• E-stops<br />
• Interlocks<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ded-magnets<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
•UB (voltage at input terminals)<br />
• Y1-Y4 (signalling output)<br />
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
(In preparation)<br />
A function of the master safety<br />
controller (mounted in same<br />
control cabinet), with a maximum<br />
of PL d , per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
Category 3, per EN 954-1<br />
• Cage-clamp terminals<br />
• Cross-short recognition<br />
• Electronic fuse<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mpatible with all SRB<br />
Protect Series models with<br />
2 N.C. inputs<br />
Front View<br />
Model Number<br />
Protect-IE-02<br />
Protect-IE-11<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
Monitoring <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
of Sensors<br />
2 NC<br />
1 NO/1 NC<br />
Operating<br />
Voltage<br />
24 VDC<br />
24 VDC<br />
Note: Screw terminals are also available. Add -SK to the Model<br />
Number.<br />
350
SERIES PROTECT-IE<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D)<br />
Ambient Operating<br />
Temperature Range<br />
Mechanical Life Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
Mounting<br />
48mm x 126mm x 61mm<br />
(1.89" x 4.96" x 2.4")<br />
-25°C to +55°C<br />
(-13°F to +131°F)<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
140 gm<br />
DIN rail<br />
Typical Wiring Diagram (Model Protect-IE-02 shown)<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
Fuse (input power)<br />
Fuse (outputs)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(outputs)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(auxiliary contacts)<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
Drop-out Delay<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance<br />
Air Clearance &<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections<br />
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple<br />
max. 10%<br />
1.7 W max.; plus Y1-Y4<br />
Internal electronic fuse,<br />
tripping current > 100 mA<br />
2 A slow-blow<br />
24V, 2 A Resistive<br />
(inductive with suitable suppressor)<br />
24 VDC, 100 mA (Y1-Y4)<br />
≤ 20 ms<br />
≤ 20 ms<br />
100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2<br />
• Cage-clamp terminals for<br />
min. 0.08mm 2 & max. 2.5mm 2<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
10<br />
Terminal <strong>Co</strong>nnections (Model Protect-IE-02 shown)<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
Output #1<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Output #2<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Signalling Outputs<br />
(24 VDC)<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
13 14<br />
23 24<br />
Y1<br />
Y2<br />
Y3<br />
Y4<br />
Monitored Input<br />
#1A (N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input<br />
#1B (N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input<br />
#2A (N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input<br />
#2B (N.C.)<br />
+ S1<br />
– S2<br />
+ S3<br />
– S4<br />
Monitored Input<br />
#3A (N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input<br />
#3B (N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input<br />
#4A (N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input<br />
#4B (N.C.)<br />
+ S5<br />
– S6<br />
+ S7<br />
– S8<br />
351
SERIES PROTECT-PE<br />
Input Expansion Module<br />
TECHNICAL FEATURES<br />
Description<br />
The Protect-IE is designed for use as an accessory for<br />
Schmersal’s Protect Series Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntrollers. It provides 4<br />
additional sensor inputs where required to satisfy the system<br />
control requirements. Depending on the version, the Protect-<br />
IE monitors 1 NO/1NC or 2 NC contacts, as well as PNPtype<br />
devices (AOPDs or CSS). It is possible to cascade<br />
multiple units to monitor up to 80 sensors.<br />
Input Voltage<br />
Number & Type of<br />
Outputs<br />
Number & Type Auxiliary<br />
(non-safety or signalling<br />
outputs)<br />
Reset & Feedback<br />
Monitoring<br />
Typical Input Devices<br />
Monitored<br />
LED Displays<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nformity to Standards<br />
Stop Category 0<br />
Safety Classification<br />
Selected Features<br />
24 VDC<br />
• 2 N.O. (dry contacts) to master<br />
safety controller<br />
• -AN: 1 NO/1NC (dry contacts) to<br />
master safety controller<br />
4 – 24 VDC (Y1-Y4)<br />
Performed by master controller<br />
• E-stops<br />
• Interlocks<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ded-magnets<br />
• PNP-type devices<br />
Green LEDs for:<br />
•UB (voltage at input terminals)<br />
• Y1-Y4 (status of inputs)<br />
• Y5 (overall system status)<br />
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)<br />
A function of the master safety<br />
controller (mounted in same<br />
control cabinet), with a maximum<br />
of PL d , per EN ISO 13849-1<br />
Category 3, per EN 954-1<br />
• Cage-clamp terminals<br />
• Cross-short recognition (selectable)<br />
• Electronic fuse<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mpatible with all SRB<br />
Protect Series models with<br />
2 N.C. inputs<br />
• -11-AN model is compatible with<br />
AES Series<br />
Model Number<br />
Protect-PE-02<br />
Protect-PE-11<br />
Protect-PE-11-AN*<br />
AVAILABLE MODELS<br />
Monitoring <strong>Co</strong>nfiguration<br />
of Sensors<br />
2 NC<br />
1 NC & 1 NO<br />
1 NC & 1 NO<br />
Operating<br />
Voltage<br />
24 VDC<br />
24 VDC<br />
24 VDC<br />
Note: Screw terminals are also available. Add -SK to the end of the<br />
Model Number.<br />
*-AN version has 1 NO/1NC Safety Outputs.<br />
352
SERIES PROTECT-PE<br />
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Dimensions (W x H x D)<br />
Ambient Operating<br />
Temperature Range<br />
Mechanical Life Expectancy<br />
Weight<br />
Mounting<br />
65.5mm x 126mm x 61mm<br />
(2.58" x 4.96" x 2.4")<br />
-25°C to +55°C<br />
(-13°F to +131°F)<br />
>10 7 switching cycles<br />
140 gm<br />
DIN rail<br />
Typical Wiring Diagram (Model Protect-IE-02 shown)<br />
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Operating Voltage<br />
Power <strong>Co</strong>nsumption<br />
Fuse (input power)<br />
Fuse (outputs)<br />
Switching Capacity<br />
(outputs)<br />
24 VDC -12% / +20%, residual ripple<br />
max. 10%<br />
1.7 W max.; plus Y1-Y5<br />
Internal electronic fuse,<br />
tripping current > 300 mA<br />
2 A slow-blow<br />
24V, 2 A Resistive<br />
(inductive with suitable suppressor)<br />
Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 100 mA (Y1-Y5)<br />
(auxiliary contacts)<br />
Pick-up Delay<br />
≤ 20 ms<br />
Drop-out Delay ≤ 20 ms<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)<br />
Air Clearance & 4 kV/2 to IEC/EN 60664-1<br />
Creepage Distance<br />
Cable <strong>Co</strong>nnections • Cage-clamp terminals for<br />
min. 0.08mm 2 & max. 2.5mm 2<br />
• Stranded or multi-core with<br />
wire end ferrule<br />
Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013<br />
10<br />
Terminal <strong>Co</strong>nnections (Model Protect-PE-02 shown)<br />
Supply Voltage<br />
Output #1<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Output #2<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Signalling Outputs<br />
(24 VDC)<br />
A1<br />
A2<br />
13 14<br />
23 24<br />
Y1<br />
Y2<br />
Y3 Y4 Y5<br />
Monitored Input<br />
#1A (N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input<br />
#1B (N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input<br />
#2A (N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input<br />
#2B (N.C.)<br />
+ S1<br />
– S2<br />
+ S3<br />
– S4<br />
Monitored Input<br />
#3A (N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input<br />
#3B (N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input<br />
#4A (N.C.)<br />
Monitored Input<br />
#4B (N.C.)<br />
+ S5<br />
– S6<br />
+ S7<br />
– S8<br />
353
354<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design
Protect PSC<br />
10<br />
SELECTION GUIDE<br />
The Protect PSC is a modular, programmable safety control system designed to accept<br />
emergency stop command devices, safety switches, and optoelectronic protective devices.<br />
The modular design gives the user the ability to select individual input and output modules<br />
to configure a system to meet their individual requirements, with future expansion possible.<br />
Unique to the PSC is the ability to build a complex safety system without programming. This<br />
is accomplished using the Mode 1 operating mode, a “hard-wired” version where the system<br />
functions result from the arrangement or order of the individual modules at the master/submaster<br />
module. The different system modules provide the user with a fixed number of inputs<br />
and outputs. Mode 3 is the free programmable operating mode, where different inputs<br />
and outputs of the entire system can be assigned by means of an IEC 61 131-compliant<br />
programming language. The smallest system includes 8 inputs and 6 outputs, with over 250<br />
inputs/outputs available when the system is fully extended. The Protect PSC is suitable for<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 4 to EN 954-1, PL e to EN13 849-1 or SIL 3 to IEC 61 508.<br />
355
Brief Description<br />
PROTECT PSC – Programmable<br />
The PROTECT PSC<br />
programmable modular safety<br />
control system is primarily<br />
designed for use in modern<br />
production systems or in<br />
complex individual machines.<br />
PROTECT PSC is suitable<br />
both for the safe evaluation<br />
and linking of several safetyoriented<br />
signals such as<br />
emergency stop control<br />
equipment, guard monitoring,<br />
safety light curtains (AOPDs)<br />
or safety sensors from the<br />
Schmersal CSS, MZM or<br />
AZM200 ranges.<br />
A significant advantage of<br />
the PROTECT PSC lies in<br />
its modular and therefore<br />
extremely flexible construction.<br />
This enables the user to<br />
achieve an optimal solution<br />
for the respective task from<br />
the point of view of costs<br />
without leaving unnecessary<br />
numbers of inputs or outputs<br />
unused. In addition the very<br />
high packaging density of<br />
connecting terminals helps<br />
to save space in the switch<br />
cabinet.<br />
PROTECT PSC enables<br />
applications to be realised<br />
in control category 4 to<br />
EN 954-1, Performance<br />
Level “e” to EN 13 849-1 or<br />
SIL 3 to IEC 61 508.<br />
As a special feature the<br />
PROTECT PSC also offers<br />
the possibility of carrying out<br />
(non safe) signal processing<br />
under operating conditions in<br />
addition to safety-oriented<br />
signal processing.<br />
If programming is to be<br />
completely eliminated, a<br />
safe zone section shut-down<br />
can be achieved with the<br />
PROTECT PSC, similar to<br />
a system of safety relay<br />
modules, determined only by<br />
the sequence of modules on<br />
the DIN rail.<br />
A summary of the most<br />
important features:<br />
• Modular design<br />
• Integration of safe signals<br />
under operating conditions<br />
• Free programming to<br />
IEC 61 131 via standard<br />
USB interface or<br />
• Signal interlinking via<br />
external wiring without<br />
programming<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nnection facility for<br />
external gateway (Profibus,<br />
DeviceNet or CC link)<br />
• Reaction time 22 ms<br />
(semi-conductor outputs)<br />
or 37 ms (relay outputs)<br />
• Visualisation and status<br />
display on module or PC<br />
• Simple DIN rail assembly<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nnectable devices<br />
(sensor level)<br />
• EMERGENCY-STOPcontrol<br />
units with dry<br />
contacts<br />
• Safety switch with<br />
dry contacts, ditto<br />
interlocking devices<br />
(with and without<br />
latching), enabling<br />
switch or similar.<br />
• Electromagnetic safety<br />
switch, e.g. Schmersal-<br />
BNS<br />
• Protective devices with<br />
non-floating contacts,<br />
for example optoelectronic<br />
protective devices<br />
(AOPDs) or similar.<br />
• Safety sensors from<br />
Schmersal CSS range<br />
and contact-free interlocking<br />
devices from<br />
the Schmersal-AZM 2xx<br />
range.<br />
356
Modular Safety System<br />
Representation of<br />
modular design<br />
with dimensioning<br />
10<br />
Module<br />
Number of single channel inputs<br />
Standard<br />
signals with<br />
dry contacts<br />
Safe<br />
Dry 1<br />
Nonfloating*<br />
Number of single channel outputs<br />
Standard Safe<br />
Selectable*<br />
signals with<br />
dry contacts<br />
Transistor Relay<br />
0.3 A**<br />
0.5 A** 0.3 A** 4 A**<br />
PSC-CPU-MON — 4 — 4 — 6 — —<br />
PSC-SUB-MON — 4 — 4 — 6 — —<br />
PSC-S-STP-E 4 — 2 4 — —<br />
PSC-S-STP-LC — 4 2 — 4 — —<br />
PSC-S-STP-ELC 2 2 2 — 4 — —<br />
PSC-S-Relay — — — — — — — 2 x 2<br />
PSC-S-IN-E — 16 — — — — — —<br />
PSC-S-IN-LC — — 16 — — — — —<br />
PSC-S-OUT — — — — — — 16 —<br />
PSC-NS-IN 16 — — — — — — —<br />
PSC-NS-OUT — — — — 16 — — —<br />
* The dry or non-floating information refers to the technical properties of the input signals:<br />
• Dry-contacts input signals, e.g. from emergency stop control devices, safety switches, interlocking devices, safety solenoid switches and similar.<br />
• Non-floating input signals, e.g. PNP outputs from optoelectronic protective devices such as safety light curtains, laser scanners etc. but also from safety sensors<br />
from Schmersal CSS or AZM200 ranges.<br />
• Selectable, input signals are monitored without cross short recognition. Outputs from optoelectronic protective devices can be directly connected, or dry contacts<br />
can be monitored up to a PL d.<br />
** Maximum current per output with resistive load.<br />
357
General<br />
PROTECT PSC – Programmable<br />
In addition to the central<br />
unit (Fig. 1), a power supply<br />
module (Fig. 2) and various<br />
input and output modules<br />
(see Table Page 3) form part<br />
of the PROTECT PSC system.<br />
A minimum configuration<br />
consists of a CPU module<br />
and a power supply module.<br />
The CPU can trigger up to 15<br />
modules so that additional<br />
input and output modules can<br />
be added at a later date as<br />
required and integrated into<br />
the complete system with little<br />
effort. All modules can be<br />
easily assembled on DIN top<br />
hat rails and are connected<br />
via backplane bus (Fig. 3).<br />
This means the user can<br />
freely determine the extension<br />
stage of the system and<br />
therefore also the number of<br />
available inputs and outputs –<br />
from 8 inputs and 6 outputs in<br />
Fig. 1: Central Unit PROTECT<br />
PSC-CPU-MON<br />
the most simple version to<br />
over 250 inputs/outputs when<br />
the system is fully extended.<br />
In addition the safety controller<br />
also offers interfaces to<br />
Fig. 2: Power supply module<br />
PROTECT PSC-POWER<br />
various gateways (Fig. 4) in<br />
order to be able to perform a<br />
data exchange via Profibus<br />
DP, DeviceNet or CC link.<br />
Fig. 3: Backplane bus<br />
Fig. 4: Gateway<br />
Possible operating mode<br />
a) “Hardwired” version<br />
The operation of the<br />
PROTECT PSC in Operating<br />
Mode 1 is intended for<br />
applications in which a zone<br />
section shut-down is to be<br />
performed without software<br />
programming. This is, of<br />
course, possible in a much<br />
simpler and more elegant<br />
manner in Mode 3 with free<br />
programming.<br />
Submaster<br />
system 1<br />
Submaster<br />
system 2<br />
358<br />
The application represented<br />
in Fig. 5 serves as an explanatory<br />
example. A safety request<br />
(here emergency-stop contact)<br />
to the CPU (master system)<br />
switches all outputs of the<br />
entire system to the safe state.<br />
A safety request (here guard<br />
contact) to the SUB-CPU only<br />
switches the outputs of the<br />
submaster system (Sub-CPU<br />
and subsequent input/output<br />
modules) to the safe state.<br />
Fig. 5: Example of application
Modular Safety System<br />
Possible operating mode<br />
b) Freely programmable<br />
version<br />
This operating mode allows<br />
the real capacity and<br />
flexibility of PROTECT PSC<br />
to be demonstrated. All<br />
inputs and outputs of the<br />
entire system are assigned<br />
via a programming language<br />
(ladder) corresponding to<br />
IEC 61 131. Logic functions,<br />
e.g. AND and OR, as well as<br />
other dependencies can be<br />
freely programmed.<br />
Fig. 6: Programming environment<br />
10<br />
Fig. 7: <strong>Co</strong>n-figuration<br />
of the I/O modules:<br />
clear differentiation between<br />
safe and operational area<br />
USB<br />
Fig. 8: Free programming to IEC<br />
61 131 with the opportunity to<br />
incorporate functional blocks into<br />
the program. The user is provided<br />
with various functional modules in<br />
a library. The user also has the<br />
possibility of designing own<br />
functional modules.<br />
359
Visualization<br />
PROTECT PSC – Programmable<br />
Diagnosis<br />
and visualization<br />
A fast diagnosis can be<br />
achieved via the LED display<br />
on the modules or the PC<br />
in monitoring mode or by<br />
reading out the error reports<br />
from the central control unit.<br />
Fig. 9: Clear display on the CPU<br />
module of which input and output<br />
signals connected<br />
Fig. 10: Online visualization: active<br />
contacts are displayed in color<br />
Fig. 11: Diagnosis: clear problem<br />
solutions are provided in the event<br />
of an internal or external error<br />
360
Terminal Assignment<br />
Modular Safety System<br />
10<br />
Fig. 12: External circuitry Mode 3 (freely programmable mode)<br />
Fig. 13: Example of external wiring<br />
Terminal assignment<br />
In general two different<br />
options for terminal<br />
assignment are available<br />
depending on operating<br />
mode. The freely programmable<br />
operating mode offers<br />
the user the greatest possible<br />
flexibility. All input signals can<br />
be freely connected to each<br />
other and outputs can be<br />
activated with the desired<br />
mutual dependence (Fig. 12).<br />
By contrast the terminal<br />
connection in operating mode<br />
1 has a completely different<br />
design in which it is possible<br />
to achieve a zone section<br />
shut-down entirely without<br />
software programming. In a<br />
similar way to safety relay<br />
module circuitry, here the user<br />
is given exact specifications<br />
for how the terminal assignment<br />
of the input and output<br />
signals should look (Fig. 13).<br />
361
362<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design
SAFE SPEED CONTROL<br />
10<br />
SELECTION GUIDE<br />
Model Description Page<br />
PDMS Modular Drive Monitor System 364<br />
AZS 2305 Fail to Safe timer 368<br />
FWS 1205 Fail to Safe Stand Still Monitor 370<br />
FWS 1206 Fail to Safe Stand Still Monitor 372<br />
FWS 2505 Fail to Safe Stand Still Monitor 374<br />
FWS 2506 Fail to Safe Stand Still Monitor 376<br />
FWS 2105 Fail to Safe Stand Still Monitor 378<br />
FWS 2106 Fail to Safe Stand Still Monitor 380<br />
SSW301HV Sensorless Stand Still Monitor 382<br />
AZR31S1 Sensorless Stand Still Monitor 384<br />
363
Brief description<br />
PDMS – Protect Drive<br />
Safe speed monitoring<br />
of drives<br />
With the modular system<br />
PDMS, which is short for<br />
Protect Drive Monitoring<br />
system, there are new<br />
possibilities for a user to<br />
monitor any drive systems.<br />
This system enables the<br />
machine builder monitoring<br />
the speed of, for instance,<br />
spindle or axle drives in a<br />
safe manner. To detect the<br />
movement, encoders,<br />
resolvers or two proximity<br />
switches can be used. The<br />
system monitors the signals<br />
from rotary and linear movements.<br />
The drive speed to be<br />
monitored can be individually<br />
programmed.<br />
Similar to PROTECT PSC,<br />
the functional components<br />
of PDMS are based on a<br />
modular system. The monitoring<br />
electronics, which is<br />
connected to the signal<br />
generator signal through a<br />
drive-specific cable adapter,<br />
is located on an input card.<br />
Every axle is monitored by<br />
means of its proper plugable<br />
input card. Inside the system<br />
rack, multiple and even<br />
different cards can be combined.<br />
Safe output cards<br />
transmit the signal to<br />
PROTECT PSC, where<br />
they are further processed.<br />
Appropriate cable adapters<br />
are available for a multitude<br />
of drive systems.<br />
364<br />
In this way, the maximum<br />
speeds for the special operating<br />
modes of, for instance<br />
NC machining centers, e.g.<br />
operating mode 1 (“automatic<br />
mode”), operating mode 2<br />
(“set-up mode”), operating<br />
mode 3 (“process monitoring<br />
with enabling device”)<br />
and operating mode 4<br />
(“process monitoring without<br />
enabling device”)*, can<br />
be individually set and safely<br />
monitored in accordance<br />
with DIN EN 13 128.<br />
The PDMS system extends<br />
and completes the features<br />
of the modular PROTECT<br />
PSC safety system with<br />
monitoring functions for<br />
machinery and plants.<br />
The system meets all the<br />
requirements set forth for<br />
safety-related electronic<br />
components. The selfmonitoring<br />
circuitry has a<br />
redundant structure, which<br />
means that the safety device<br />
remains safe, even in case<br />
of failure of a component.<br />
The machine builder<br />
therefore has a flexible and<br />
individually programmable<br />
system for the safe<br />
monitoring of drives at his<br />
disposal. This system not<br />
only increases the safety,<br />
but also enhances the<br />
productivity of the machine<br />
concerned: the PDMS only<br />
transmits the enabling signal<br />
for the safety guard when the<br />
dangerous movement has<br />
come to standstill or at least<br />
has slowed down to such<br />
extent that the movement<br />
no longer involves any risk.<br />
In case of time-controlled<br />
monitoring, a specific time<br />
buffer must be provided,<br />
so that the safety guard is<br />
enabled at a later time.<br />
PL “e”<br />
* Although the European Standard does not handle<br />
an operating mode 4, it is not excluded in situation<br />
of particular safety reasons (item 2 of the preliminary<br />
notes to the machinery directive)
Examples of assembly<br />
Monitoring System<br />
Example 1: Drive monitoring of a 2-axis<br />
portal machine with resolver signals<br />
• 1 × input card PDMS-I 1RG V1<br />
• 1 × input card PDMS-I 1RG V2<br />
• 1 × output card PDMS-O PMG<br />
10<br />
Example 2: Drive monitoring of a 4-axis<br />
packaging machine with resolver and<br />
sinus/cosinus signals<br />
• 1 × input card PDMS-I 1RG V1<br />
• 1 × input card PDMS-I 1RG V2<br />
• 1 × input card PDMS-I 1EG V7A<br />
• 1 × input card PDMS-I 1EG V9<br />
• 1 × output card PDMS-O PMG<br />
Drive system data acquisition sheet<br />
With determining of different monitoring<br />
speeds in the order form, PDMS will be delivered<br />
in a configured way. After connecting<br />
encoder and output signals, the user is able<br />
to start up the system immediately.<br />
(A careful starting up procedure is assumed.)<br />
365
Application<br />
• Standstill monitoring<br />
• Detection of maximum permitted speed of the drive, depending on the<br />
selected operating mode<br />
• Possible to connect sensors directly like i.e. emergency stop control<br />
devices, operating mode switches or guard door safety switches<br />
Racks Input cards Output cards<br />
here:<br />
Protect PDMS-R 4M R1G<br />
for 4 input cards<br />
and 1 output card<br />
here:<br />
• 2 × Protect PDMS-I 1EG V7A<br />
• 1 × Protect PDMS-I 1RG V2<br />
• 1 × Protect PDMS-I 1EG V9<br />
here:<br />
• Protect<br />
PDMS-O PMG<br />
Evaluable encoder signals<br />
• Resolver<br />
• Sinus/<strong>Co</strong>sinus<br />
• TTL<br />
• HTL<br />
• PNP-proximity switch<br />
366
10<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design<br />
367
AZS 2305<br />
Fail-To-Safe Timer<br />
Features<br />
• Time can be set between 0.1s and 99min.<br />
• To EN 1088<br />
• PL d per EN ISO 13849-1, <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category<br />
3 to EN 954-1<br />
• 3 enabling circuits<br />
• Recognition of short-circuit between<br />
connections<br />
• 2 short-circuit proof additional<br />
transistor outputs<br />
• Integral System Diagnostics (ISD)<br />
• 2 channel microprocessor control<br />
Dimensions<br />
55 x 75 x 110 mm<br />
ISD<br />
The following faults are recognized by the safety<br />
controller and indicated by means of ISD<br />
• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or<br />
drop-out<br />
• Short-circuits between the input connections<br />
• Interruption of the input connections<br />
• Difference in time setting between channel I and<br />
channel II<br />
• Faults on input or relay control circuits of the timer<br />
Model<br />
Designation<br />
AZS 2305-24VDC<br />
AZS 2305-110VAC<br />
AZS 2305-230VAC<br />
Function<br />
Table<br />
Additional semiconductor<br />
output Y<br />
Function of output Y<br />
AZS 2305 Y1 Enable, enabling circuits closed<br />
Y2<br />
No Enable, enabling circuits open<br />
Approvals BG UL CSA<br />
368
AZS 2305<br />
Typical<br />
Applications<br />
10<br />
Typical<br />
Wiring<br />
Diagram<br />
Application<br />
Notes<br />
• Achieves up to PL d/category 3 per<br />
EN ISO 13849-1, control category<br />
3 per EN954-1.<br />
• PL d or control Category 3 can be<br />
achieved. Exclusion of faults due<br />
to “Breakage or release of the<br />
actuator, fault in the solenoid<br />
interlock” is to be substan tiated<br />
and documented.<br />
• Monitoring of a sliding, hinged or<br />
removable guard device using an<br />
AZM range solenoid interlock.<br />
• The solenoid interlock releases the<br />
guard device only when the set<br />
time has elapsed. The time begins<br />
to run when the power contactors<br />
have dropped out.<br />
• The AES range guard door controller<br />
checks the position of the<br />
guard device.<br />
• The coil of the solenoid interlock<br />
is energized by operation of the<br />
pushbutton E<br />
• After release has taken place, the<br />
guard device must be opened if<br />
is not connected.<br />
• The wiring diagram is with the<br />
guard device closed and shows<br />
the de-energized condition.<br />
369
FWS 1205<br />
Fail-To-Safe Standstill Monitors<br />
Features<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nfirmation of standstill using 2 impulse<br />
sensors<br />
• PL d per EN ISO 13849-1, <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category<br />
3 to EN 954-1<br />
• Operational voltage 24 VDC<br />
• Reset input<br />
• 2 short-circuit proof semiconductor outputs<br />
• Integral System Diagnostics (ISD)<br />
• 2 channel microprocessor control<br />
• Customer-specific standstill frequencies<br />
possible<br />
• 2 enabling paths<br />
Dimensions<br />
22.5 x 75 x 110 mm<br />
ISD<br />
The following faults are recognized by the safety<br />
controller and indicated by means of ISD<br />
• Interruption of the connections to one of the<br />
inductive proximity switches<br />
• Failure of the proximity switches<br />
• Failure of one channel being evaluated<br />
• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or<br />
drop-out<br />
• Faults on input or relay control circuits of the safety<br />
controller<br />
Model<br />
Designation<br />
FWS 1205A-24VDC (Execution A)<br />
FWS 1205B-24VDC (Execution B)<br />
FWS 1205C-24VDC (Execution C)<br />
Standstill<br />
Frequencies<br />
Execution A Execution B Execution C<br />
Function<br />
Table<br />
Additional<br />
transistor output Y<br />
Function of<br />
output Y<br />
Input X1 1Hz 2Hz 1Hz<br />
Input X2 2Hz 2Hz 1Hz<br />
Y1<br />
Enable, Enabling<br />
circuits closed<br />
Y2<br />
Fault, high signal<br />
Approvals BG UL CSA<br />
370
FWS 1205<br />
Typical<br />
Applications<br />
10<br />
Typical<br />
Wiring<br />
Diagram<br />
Application<br />
Notes<br />
• The solenoid interlock can be<br />
opened when the FWS 1205 has<br />
registered standstill of the motor by<br />
means of the two PNP inductive<br />
proximity switches. The coil of the<br />
solenoid interlock is then energized<br />
by operation of the pushbutton E<br />
• The AES controller checks the<br />
position of the guard device.<br />
• Monitoring of the guard device<br />
using a solenoid interlock and a<br />
safety switch with separate<br />
actuator.<br />
• PL d or control category 3 can also<br />
be achieved without using the safety<br />
switch by connecting the NO and<br />
NC contacts of solenoid interlock to<br />
the guard door monitor. Exclusion<br />
of faults due to “Breakage or<br />
release of the actuator, fault in the<br />
solenoid interlock” is to be<br />
substantiated and documented.<br />
• Release is only possible when the<br />
run-down movement has come to<br />
an end.<br />
• The wiring diagram is with the<br />
guard device closed and shows<br />
the de-energized condition.<br />
371
FWS 1206<br />
Fail-To-Safe Standstill Monitors<br />
Features<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nfirmation of standstill using 1 or 2<br />
impulse sensors<br />
• Uses additional standstill signal, e.g. PLC<br />
as second input channel<br />
• PL d per EN ISO 13849-1, <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category<br />
3 to EN 954-1<br />
• Operational voltage 24 VDC<br />
• Reset input<br />
• 2 short-circuit proof semiconductor outputs<br />
• Integral System Diagnostics (ISD)<br />
• 2 channel microprocessor control<br />
• Customer-specific standstill frequencies<br />
possible<br />
• 2 enabling paths<br />
Dimensions<br />
22.5 x 75 x 110 mm<br />
ISD<br />
The following faults are recognized by the safety<br />
controller and indicated by means of ISD<br />
• Interruption of the connections to one of the<br />
inductive proximity switches<br />
• Failure of the proximity switches<br />
• Failure of one channel being evaluated<br />
• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or<br />
drop-out<br />
• Faults on input or relay control circuits of the safety<br />
controller<br />
Model<br />
Designation<br />
FWS 1206A-24VDC (Execution A)<br />
FWS 1206C-24VDC (Execution C)<br />
Standstill<br />
Frequencies<br />
Execution A<br />
Execution C<br />
Function<br />
Table<br />
Additional<br />
transistor output Y<br />
Function of<br />
output Y<br />
Input X1 1Hz 1Hz<br />
Input X2 2Hz 1Hz<br />
Y1<br />
Y2<br />
Enable, Enabling<br />
circuits closed<br />
Fault, high signal<br />
Approvals BG UL CSA<br />
372
FWS 1206<br />
Typical<br />
Applications<br />
10<br />
Typical<br />
Wiring<br />
Diagram<br />
Application<br />
Notes<br />
• The solenoid interlock can be<br />
opened when the FWS 1206 has<br />
registered standstill of the motor by<br />
means of the two PNP inductive<br />
proximity switches and the additional<br />
standstill signal H7. The coil of the<br />
solenoid interlock is then energized<br />
by operation of the pushbutton E<br />
• The AES controller checks the<br />
position of the guard device.<br />
• Monitoring of the guard device<br />
using a solenoid interlock and a<br />
safety switch with separate<br />
actuator.<br />
• PL d or control category 3 can also<br />
be achieved without using the safety<br />
switch by connecting the NO and<br />
NC contacts of solenoid interlock to<br />
the guard door monitor. Exclusion<br />
of faults due to “Breakage or<br />
release of the actuator, fault in<br />
the solenoid interlock” is to be<br />
substantiated and documented.<br />
• Release is only possible when the<br />
run-down movement has come to<br />
an end.<br />
• When 1 sensor is used, the standstill<br />
frequencies must be identical<br />
and inputs X1 and X2 must be<br />
bridged (Version C).<br />
• The wiring diagram is with the<br />
guard device closed and shows<br />
the de-energized condition.<br />
373
FWS 2505<br />
Fail-To-Safe Standstill Monitors<br />
Features<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nfirmation of standstill using 2 impulse<br />
sensors<br />
• PL d per EN ISO 13849-1, <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category<br />
3 to EN 954-1<br />
• 4 enabling circuits<br />
• Reset input<br />
• 2 short-circuit proof semiconductor outputs<br />
• 1 N/C auxiliary contact<br />
• Integral System Diagnostics (ISD)<br />
• 2 channel microprocessor control<br />
• Customer-specific standstill frequencies<br />
possible<br />
• 24-230VAC/DC<br />
Dimensions<br />
45 x 100 x 121 mm<br />
ISD<br />
The following faults are recognized by the safety<br />
controller and indicated by means of ISD<br />
• Interruption of the connections to the inductive<br />
proximity switches<br />
• Failure of the proximity switches<br />
• Failure of one channel being evaluated<br />
• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or<br />
drop-out<br />
• Faults on input or relay control circuits of the safety<br />
control unit<br />
Model<br />
Designation<br />
FWS 2505A 24-230V AC/DC (Execution A) FWS 2505C 24-230V AC/DC (Execution C)<br />
Standstill<br />
Frequencies<br />
Execution A<br />
Execution C<br />
Function<br />
Table<br />
Additional<br />
transistor output Y<br />
Function of<br />
output Y High (24V)<br />
Input X2 1Hz 1Hz<br />
Input X4 2Hz 1Hz<br />
Y1<br />
Y2<br />
Enable, Enabling<br />
circuits closed<br />
Fault, high signal<br />
Other frequencies on request.<br />
Approvals BG UL CSA<br />
374
FWS 2505<br />
Typical<br />
Applications<br />
10<br />
Typical<br />
Wiring<br />
Diagram<br />
Application<br />
Notes<br />
• The solenoid interlock can be<br />
opened when the FWS 2505 has<br />
registered standstill of the motor by<br />
means of the two PNP inductive<br />
prox imity switches. The coil of the<br />
solenoid interlock is then energized<br />
by operation of the pushbutton E<br />
• The AES guard door controller<br />
checks the position of the guard<br />
device.<br />
• Monitoring of the guard device<br />
using a solenoid interlock.<br />
• To achieve PL d or control category<br />
3 the exclusion of faults due to<br />
“Breakage or release of the actuator,<br />
fault in the solenoid interlock”<br />
is to be substan tiated and documented.<br />
• Release is only possible when the<br />
run-down movement has come to<br />
an end.<br />
• The wiring diagram is with the<br />
guard device closed and shows<br />
the de-energized condition.<br />
375
FWS 2506<br />
Fail-To-Safe Standstill Monitors<br />
Features<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nfirmation of standstill using 1 or 2<br />
impulse sensors<br />
• Uses additional standstill signal, e.g. PLC<br />
as second input channel<br />
• PL d per EN ISO 13849-1, <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category<br />
3 to EN 954-1<br />
• 4 enabling circuits<br />
• Reset input<br />
• 2 short-circuit proof semiconductor outputs<br />
• 1 N/C auxiliary contact<br />
• Integral System Diagnostics (ISD)<br />
• 2 channel microprocessor control<br />
• Customer-specific standstill frequencies<br />
possible<br />
• 24-230VAC/DC<br />
Dimensions<br />
45 x 100 x 121 mm<br />
ISD<br />
The following faults are recognized by the safety<br />
controller and indicated by means of ISD<br />
• Interruption of the connections to the inductive<br />
proximity switches<br />
• Failure of the proximity switches<br />
• Failure of one channel being evaluated<br />
• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or<br />
drop-out<br />
• Faults on input or relay control circuits of the safety<br />
control unit<br />
Model<br />
Designation<br />
FWS 2506A 24-230V AC/DC (Execution A) FWS 2506C 24-230V AC/DC (Execution C)<br />
Standstill<br />
Frequencies<br />
Execution A<br />
Execution C<br />
Function<br />
Table<br />
Additional<br />
transistor output Y<br />
Function of<br />
output Y High (24V)<br />
Input X2 1Hz 1Hz<br />
Input X4 2Hz 1Hz<br />
Y1<br />
Y2<br />
Enable, Enabling<br />
circuits closed<br />
Fault, high signal<br />
Other frequencies on request.<br />
Approvals BG UL CSA<br />
376
FWS 2506<br />
Typical<br />
Applications<br />
10<br />
Typical<br />
Wiring<br />
Diagram<br />
Application<br />
Notes<br />
• The solenoid interlock can be<br />
opened when the FWS 2506 has<br />
registered standstill of the motor by<br />
means of the two PNP inductive<br />
prox imity switches and the additional<br />
standstill signal H7 . The coil of the<br />
solenoid interlock is then energized<br />
by operation of the pushbutton E<br />
• The AES guard door controller<br />
checks the position of the guard<br />
device.<br />
• Monitoring of the guard device<br />
using a solenoid interlock.<br />
• To achieve PL d or control category<br />
3 the exclusion of faults due to<br />
“Breakage or release of the actuator,<br />
fault in the solenoid interlock”<br />
is to be substan tiated and documented.<br />
• Release is only possible when the<br />
run-down movement has come to<br />
an end.<br />
• When 1 sensor is used, the<br />
standstill frequencies must be<br />
identical and inputs X2 and X4<br />
must be bridged.<br />
• The wiring diagram is with the<br />
guard device closed and<br />
shows the de-energized<br />
condition.<br />
377
FWS 2105<br />
Fail-To-Safe Standstill Monitors<br />
Features<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nfirmation of standstill using 2 impulse<br />
sensors<br />
• PL d per EN ISO 13849-1, <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category<br />
3 to EN 954-1<br />
• Operational voltage 24-230 VAC/DC<br />
• Reset input<br />
• 2 short-circuit proof semiconductor outputs<br />
• Integral System Diagnostics (ISD)<br />
• 2 channel microprocessor control<br />
• Customer-specific standstill frequencies<br />
possible<br />
• enabling path<br />
Dimensions<br />
45 x 75 x 110 mm<br />
ISD<br />
The following faults are recognized by the safety<br />
controller and indicated by means of ISD<br />
• Interruption of the connections to one of the<br />
inductive proximity switches<br />
• Failure of the proximity switches<br />
• Failure of one channel being evaluated<br />
• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or<br />
drop-out<br />
• Faults on input or relay control circuits of the safety<br />
controller<br />
Model<br />
Designation<br />
FWS 2105A-24VDC (Execution A)<br />
FWS 2105C-24VDC (Execution C)<br />
Standstill<br />
Frequencies<br />
Execution A<br />
Execution C<br />
Function<br />
Table<br />
Additional<br />
transistor output Y<br />
Function of<br />
output Y<br />
Input X1 1Hz 1Hz<br />
Input X2 2Hz 1Hz<br />
Y1<br />
Y2<br />
Enable, Enabling<br />
circuits closed<br />
Fault, high signal<br />
Approvals BG UL CSA<br />
378
FWS 2105<br />
Typical<br />
Applications<br />
10<br />
Typical<br />
Wiring<br />
Diagram<br />
Application<br />
Notes<br />
• The solenoid interlock can be<br />
opened when the FWS 2105 has<br />
registered standstill of the motor by<br />
means of the two PNP inductive<br />
proximity switches. The coil of the<br />
solenoid interlock is then energized<br />
by operation of the pushbutton E<br />
• The AES controller checks the<br />
position of the guard device.<br />
• Monitoring of the guard device<br />
using a solenoid interlock and a<br />
safety switch with separate<br />
actuator.<br />
• PL d or control category 3 can also<br />
be achieved without using the safety<br />
switch by connecting the NO and<br />
NC contacts of solenoid interlock to<br />
the guard door monitor. Exclusion<br />
of faults due to “Breakage or<br />
release of the actuator, fault in the<br />
solenoid interlock” is to be<br />
substantiated and documented.<br />
• Release is only possible when the<br />
run-down movement has come to<br />
an end.<br />
• The wiring diagram is with the<br />
guard device closed and shows<br />
the de-energized condition.<br />
379
FWS 2106<br />
Fail-To-Safe Standstill Monitors<br />
Features<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nfirmation of standstill using 1 or 2<br />
impulse sensors<br />
• Uses additional standstill signal, e.g. PLC<br />
as second input channel<br />
• PL d per EN ISO 13849-1, <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category<br />
3 to EN 954-1<br />
• 1 enabling circuit<br />
• Reset input<br />
• 2 short-circuit proof semiconductor outputs<br />
• Integral System Diagnostics (ISD)<br />
• 2 channel microprocessor control<br />
• Customer-specific standstill frequencies<br />
possible<br />
• 24-230VAC/DC<br />
Dimensions<br />
45 x 100 x 121 mm<br />
ISD<br />
The following faults are recognized by the safety controller<br />
and indicated by means of ISD<br />
• Interruption of the connections to the inductive<br />
proximity switches<br />
• Failure of the proximity switches<br />
• Failure of one channel being evaluated<br />
• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or<br />
drop-out<br />
• Faults on input or relay control circuits of the safety<br />
control unit<br />
Model<br />
Designation<br />
FWS 2106A 24-230V AC/DC (Execution A) FWS 2106C 24-230V AC/DC (Execution C)<br />
Standstill<br />
Frequencies<br />
Execution A<br />
Execution C<br />
Function<br />
Table<br />
Additional<br />
transistor output Y<br />
Function of<br />
output Y High (24V)<br />
Input X2 1Hz 1Hz<br />
Input X4 2Hz 1Hz<br />
Y1<br />
Y2<br />
Enable, Enabling<br />
circuits closed<br />
Fault, high signal<br />
Other frequencies on request.<br />
Approvals BG UL CSA<br />
380
FWS 2106<br />
Typical<br />
Applications<br />
10<br />
Typical<br />
Wiring<br />
Diagram<br />
Application<br />
Notes<br />
• The solenoid interlock can be<br />
opened when the FWS 2106 has<br />
registered standstill of the motor by<br />
means of the two PNP inductive<br />
prox imity switches and the additional<br />
standstill signal H7. The coil of the<br />
solenoid interlock is then energized<br />
by operation of the pushbutton E<br />
• The AES guard door controller<br />
checks the position of the guard<br />
device.<br />
• Monitoring of the guard device<br />
using a solenoid interlock.<br />
• To achieve PL d or control category 3<br />
the exclusion of faults due to<br />
“Breakage or release of the actuator,<br />
fault in the solenoid interlock” is to be<br />
substan tiated and documented.<br />
• Release is only possible when the<br />
run-down movement has come to<br />
an end.<br />
• When 1 sensor is used, the<br />
standstill frequencies must be<br />
identical and inputs X2 and X4<br />
must be bridged.<br />
• The wiring diagram is with the<br />
guard device closed and<br />
shows the de-energized<br />
condition.<br />
381
SSW 301HV<br />
Fail-To-Safe Standstill Monitors<br />
Features<br />
• Sensor-free detection of standstill by<br />
measuring the EMF of the motor<br />
• Motor voltage range: 0 – 690 V<br />
• No adjustment work necessary<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nnection to frequency inverters possible<br />
• Speed frequency: 0 – 1000 Hz<br />
• 3 enabling outputs; Stop Category 0<br />
• 1 signalling output (NC)<br />
• No set point necessary<br />
• Wire break monitoring of the measuring<br />
inputs<br />
• Self testing with fault memory<br />
• Cyclic self monitoring<br />
• 5 LEDs to display operating conditions<br />
• PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category<br />
4 to EN954-1<br />
Dimensions<br />
90 x 83 x 127 mm<br />
LED<br />
Functions<br />
• UB: Status operating voltage (LED on when<br />
power is on)<br />
• A: Channel A (on when frequency at channel A)<br />
• B: Channel B (on when frequency at channel B)<br />
• OUT: Enabling signal (on when 13-14, 23-24,<br />
33-34 closed)<br />
• ERR: Error (on in case of fault)<br />
Model<br />
Designation<br />
SSW301HV-115V<br />
SSW301HV-230V<br />
Description<br />
of the<br />
terminals<br />
Voltages: A1 115 VAC/230 VAC<br />
A2 N<br />
Outputs: 13-14 First safety enabling circuit<br />
23-24 Second safety enabling circuit<br />
33-34 Third safety enabling circuit<br />
Start: X1-X2 Feedback circuit<br />
41-42 Auxillary contact<br />
Approvals BG UL CSA<br />
382
SSW 301HV<br />
Typical<br />
Applications<br />
10<br />
Typical<br />
Wiring<br />
Diagram<br />
Operating<br />
Principle<br />
The safety monitoring module checks<br />
the correct position of all internal<br />
relay contacts. During startup, every<br />
motor generates an induced voltage<br />
caused by residual magnetism,<br />
which is evaluated by the safety<br />
monitoring module. Any interruption<br />
of the motor cable is detected and<br />
recognized as well. To activate the<br />
SSW301HV, the connected motor<br />
must be standing still and the<br />
feedback input X1-X2 must be<br />
closed.<br />
• When the SSW301HV is connected<br />
to cable lengths >10 m, failures can<br />
occur. The following is recommended:<br />
Short and shielded connecting<br />
cables between the safety monitor -<br />
ing module and the motor; lay<br />
cables to other high capacity<br />
consumers (motor, etc) or strong<br />
interference sources (frequency<br />
converters) at sufficient distance<br />
and if possible not parallel to the<br />
signal input lines (L1, L2, L3) of<br />
the safety monitoring module.<br />
• When using frequency converters,<br />
please observe that:<br />
the terminal stage of the frequency<br />
converter is switched off when the<br />
motor is at standstill; there is no<br />
position control when the motor is<br />
at standstill<br />
• In order to avoid any inadvertent<br />
switch off or malfunction (ERR-<br />
LED) of the safety monitoring<br />
module please ensure that:<br />
external influences do not trigger<br />
any movement of the motor; no<br />
rotary movement of the motor can<br />
occur as soon as the self test is<br />
started (i.e. motor at standstill,<br />
LEDs A and B simultaneously<br />
flashing).<br />
383
AZR31S1<br />
Fail-To-Safe Standstill Monitors<br />
Features<br />
• Sensor-free detection of standstill by<br />
measuring the EMF of the motor<br />
• Motor voltage range: 0 – 690 V<br />
• No adjustment work necessary<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>nnection to frequency inverters possible<br />
• Speed frequency: 0 – 1000 Hz<br />
• 3 enabling outputs; Stop Category 0<br />
• 1 signalling output (NC)<br />
• No set point necessary<br />
• Wire break monitoring of the measuring<br />
inputs<br />
• Self testing with fault memory<br />
• Cyclic self monitoring<br />
• 5 LEDs to display operating conditions<br />
• PL d per EN ISO 13849-1, <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category<br />
4 to EN954-1<br />
Dimensions<br />
45 x 100 x 121 mm<br />
LED<br />
Functions<br />
• UB: Status operating voltage (LED on when<br />
power is on)<br />
• A: Channel A (on when frequency at channel A)<br />
• B: Channel B (on when frequency at channel B)<br />
• OUT: Enabling signal (on when 13-14, 23-24,<br />
33-34 closed)<br />
• ERR: Error (on in case of fault)<br />
Model<br />
Designation<br />
AZR31S1 - 24VDC<br />
AZR31S1 - 24VAC<br />
AZR31S1 - 115VAC<br />
AZR31S1 - 230VAC<br />
Description<br />
of the<br />
terminals<br />
Voltages: A1 115 VAC/230 VAC +24V DC 24V AC<br />
A2 N 0V DC 24V AC<br />
Outputs: 13-14 First safety enabling circuit<br />
23-24 Second safety enabling circuit<br />
33-34 Third safety enabling circuit<br />
Start: X1-X2 Feedback circuit<br />
41-42 Auxillary contact<br />
Approvals BG UL CSA<br />
384
AZR31S1<br />
Typical<br />
Applications<br />
10<br />
Typical<br />
Wiring<br />
Diagram<br />
Wiring diagram above show with guard doors closed and in de-energized condition<br />
Operating<br />
Principle<br />
The safety monitoring module checks<br />
the correct position of all internal<br />
relay contacts. During startup, every<br />
motor generates an induced voltage<br />
caused by residual magnetism,<br />
which is evaluated by the safety<br />
monitoring module. Any interruption<br />
of the motor cable is detected and<br />
recognized as well. To activate the<br />
AZR31S1, the connected motor must<br />
be standing still and the feedback<br />
input X1-X2 must be closed.<br />
• When the SSW301HV is connected<br />
to cable lengths >10 m, failures can<br />
occur. The following is recommended:<br />
Short and shielded connecting<br />
cables between the safety monitor -<br />
ing module and the motor; lay<br />
cables to other high capacity<br />
consumers (motor, etc) or strong<br />
interference sources (frequency<br />
converters) at sufficient distance<br />
and if possible not parallel to the<br />
signal input lines (L1, L2, L3) of<br />
the safety monitoring module.<br />
• When using frequency converters,<br />
please observe that:<br />
the terminal stage of the frequency<br />
converter is switched off when the<br />
motor is at standstill; there is no<br />
position control when the motor is<br />
at standstill<br />
• In order to avoid any inadvertent<br />
switch off or malfunction (ERR-<br />
LED) of the safety monitoring<br />
module please ensure that:<br />
external influences do not trigger<br />
any movement of the motor; no<br />
rotary movement of the motor can<br />
occur as soon as the self test is<br />
started (i.e. motor at standstill,<br />
LEDs A and B simultaneously<br />
flashing).<br />
385
386<br />
Safer<br />
by<br />
Design
APPENDICES<br />
Topic<br />
Page<br />
• Selected Machine Safeguarding Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388<br />
• Machine Safety Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393<br />
• Selected <strong>Co</strong>nversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397<br />
• NEMA, UL, CSA & IEC Ingress Protection Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398<br />
A NEW APPROACH TO MACHINE SAFETY<br />
The European manufacturing community is currently in transition to a new standard, EN ISO<br />
13849-1:2006 which will take full effect December 31, 2011.<br />
EN ISO 13 849-1:2006 represents a major change in the philosophy of safety-related parts of<br />
machine control systems. It is a movement from the sole reliance on the proven-in-use<br />
deterministic approach of standards such as EN 954-1, to include probabilistic considerations.<br />
The new standard uses risk assessment to determine a required Performance Level (PLr).<br />
Achievement of the Performance Level is based on four aspects:<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Reliability of circuit architecture — Almost identical to the structures established by<br />
EN 954-1, this deals with circuit redundancy, fault detection, and use of tried and tested<br />
components. It uses the same <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Categories.<br />
• Mean Time to Dangerous Failure (MTTFd) — Fundamentally this is a statement about the<br />
quality and reliability of the safety-related components utilized in the system. It is a statistical<br />
mean representing the expected working time without a safety-critical down time, per year.<br />
• Diagnostic <strong>Co</strong>verage — the quantification of the effectiveness of measures to discover<br />
failures. It is primarily concerned with the ratio of detected dangerous failures to the failure<br />
mode of all dangerous failures.<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>mmon Cause Failure Abatement — The standard also requires measures to combat<br />
failures that can simultaneously affect both channels of <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Category 2 structures and<br />
higher. The eight measures identified include electromagnetic compatibility, surge protection,<br />
and diversity of components.<br />
The drafters of EN ISO 13 849-1:2006 strived to achieve a delicate balance between deterministic<br />
and probabilistic thinking — breaking down the new aspects into a requisite and practicable size for<br />
the “average user.”<br />
If you are interested in more information regarding EN ISO 13849-1:2006, please request a copy of<br />
our 140 page guide: Specific Background Information on EN ISO 13849-1: 2006.<br />
387
SELECTED MACHINE SAFEGUARDING<br />
TERMINOLOGY<br />
Authorized Output: an output from a safety controller’s<br />
positive-guided relays (used to “authorize” or “enable” a<br />
machine’s start circuit when safety system conditions<br />
exist). Also known as “safety output.”<br />
Automatic Reset: a safety controller reset circuit that<br />
automatically resets the safety controller when safe<br />
system conditions (no system faults) exist. A manual<br />
reset button is optional.<br />
Auxiliary output: a non-safety related contact closure<br />
or semiconductor output primarily used for signaling<br />
component or system status to a PLC, audible alarm<br />
or visual indicator (such as a stack light). Also called a<br />
“signaling contact” or “auxiliary monitoring contact”.<br />
ANSI (American National Standards Institute): an<br />
association of industry representatives who, working<br />
together, develop safety and other technical standards.<br />
Auxiliary monitoring contact: See “auxiliary output”.<br />
BG (Berufgenossenschaft): an independent German<br />
insurance agency whose legislative arm<br />
recommends industry safety practices.<br />
One of many “notified bodies” authorized<br />
to certify that safety products comply with<br />
all relevant standards.<br />
CE (<strong>Co</strong>nformité Europeéne) mark: a symbol (CE)<br />
applied to finished products and machinery indicating<br />
it meets all applicable European Directives. For electrical<br />
and electronic “finished products”, such as a safety relay<br />
module, these include the Low Voltage<br />
Directive and, where relevant, the<br />
Electromagnetic <strong>Co</strong>mpatibility (EMC)<br />
Directive.<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ded-Magnet Sensor: a two-piece position sensor<br />
consisting of an array of reed switches and a multiple<br />
magnet array-actuating element. Such devices will only<br />
deliver an output signal when the reed switch element<br />
is in the presence of a matched, multiple-magnetic<br />
field array. <strong>Co</strong>ded-magnet sensors cannot be actuated<br />
using a simple magnet. Hence they are far more difficult<br />
to defeat/bypass than a simple magnetic switch or<br />
proximity sensor.<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Reliability: A term applied to safety devices or<br />
systems which are designed constructed and installed<br />
such that the failure of a single component within the<br />
device or system does not prevent normal machine<br />
stopping action from taking place…but does<br />
388 prevent a successive machine cycle from<br />
being initiated.<br />
CSA (Canadian Standards Association): an independent<br />
Canadian testing and standards-making<br />
organization similar to Underwriters<br />
Laboratories (UL) in the U.S. “CSA-certified”<br />
products meet relevant CSA electrical and<br />
safety standards.<br />
Declaration of <strong>Co</strong>nformity: a manufacturer’s self-certified<br />
document, signed by a highly-positioned technical<br />
manager, which lists all the Standards and Directives to<br />
which a product conforms. A Declaration of <strong>Co</strong>nformity<br />
is mandatory for all CE-marked products, and for<br />
machine components which, if they fail, could lead to a<br />
dangerous or hazardous situation on a machine.<br />
Defined Area: a predetermined area scanned by a light<br />
beam within which the presence of an opaque object of<br />
specified minimum size will result in the generation of a<br />
control signal.<br />
Direct-Action <strong>Co</strong>ntacts: See “positive-break” contacts.<br />
Diverse Redundancy: the use of different components<br />
and/or different microprocessor instruction sets written<br />
by different programmers in the design and construction<br />
of redundant components/circuits. Its purpose is to<br />
increase system reliability by minimizing the possibility<br />
of common-mode failure (the failure of like components<br />
used in redundant circuits).<br />
Dual-Channel Safety System: a safety control system<br />
characterized by two inputs; each connected to one of<br />
two independent safety circuits. Dual-channel systems<br />
are typically capable of detecting interconnection wiring<br />
faults such as open circuits, short-circuits and ground<br />
faults. As such they provide a higher level of safety than<br />
single-channel systems.<br />
E-Stop (Emergency Stop): the stopping of a machine<br />
by actuation of an “emergency stop” switch (such as a<br />
safety interlock switch, emergency push button switch,<br />
rope-pull switch, foot switch, or other actuating device.<br />
European Machinery Directive (EMD) 2006/42/EC:<br />
a set of machine safety design requirements which must<br />
be satisfied to meet the Essential Health and Safety<br />
standards established by the European Economic<br />
<strong>Co</strong>mmunity. This Directive, and other relevant European<br />
Directives (such as the Low Voltage Directive, EMC<br />
Directive, et al) must be satisfied for the machine to<br />
bear the CE mark.
Fail-to-Danger: a component or system failure which<br />
allows a machine to continue operating, exposing<br />
personnel to a hazardous or unsafe condition.<br />
Fail-to-Safe: “Fail-to-Safe” safety devices are designed<br />
such that a component failure causes the device/system<br />
to attain rest in a safe condition.<br />
Fault Detection: the monitoring of selected safety system<br />
components whose failure would compromise the<br />
functioning of the safety system. The detection of such<br />
failures is known as “fault detection.” Examples are:<br />
• a short-circuit in the safety circuit’s interconnection<br />
wiring<br />
• an open-circuit in the safety circuit’s interconnection<br />
wiring<br />
• a welded contact in the safety controller’s positiveguided<br />
relays<br />
• an open machine guard<br />
Fault Exclusion: the ability to minimize known possible<br />
component failures (“faults”) in a safety system by<br />
design criteria and/or component selection. Simple<br />
examples of “excluded faults” are:<br />
• The use of an overrated contactor to preclude the<br />
possibility of contact welding.<br />
• Design of a machine guard such that the safety<br />
interlock switch actuator cannot be damaged.<br />
• Selection of a suitable safety interlock switch.<br />
• Use of positive-break safety interlock switches<br />
together with a self-monitoring safety relay module,<br />
such that the possibility of a contact weld resulting<br />
in the loss of the safety function is eliminated.<br />
The elimination of such faults are generally a compromise<br />
between the technical safety requirements and<br />
the theoretical probability of their occurrence. Design<br />
engineers are permitted to exclude such faults when<br />
constructing the machine’s safety system. However,<br />
each “fault exclusion” must be identified, justified, and<br />
documented in the Technical File submitted to satisfy<br />
the European Machinery Directive.<br />
Feedback Loop: an auxiliary input on a safety controller<br />
designed to monitor and detect a contact weld in the<br />
primary machine-controlled device (e.g. motor contactor,<br />
relay, et al) having positive-guided contacts.<br />
Force-Guided <strong>Co</strong>ntacts: See “Positive-Guided<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts”.<br />
Fixed Barrier Guard: See “Hard Guarding”.<br />
Guard: a barrier that prevents entry of an individual’s<br />
hands or other body parts into a hazardous area.<br />
Hard Guarding: the use of screens, fences, or other<br />
mechanical barriers to prevent access of personnel to<br />
hazardous areas of a machine. “Hard guards” generally<br />
allow the operator to view the point-of-operation.<br />
Hazardous Area: an area of a machine or process<br />
which presents a potential hazard to personnel.<br />
Interlock: an arrangement in which the operation of<br />
one device automatically brings about or prevents the<br />
operation of another device.<br />
Interlocked Barrier Guard: a fixed or movable guard<br />
which, when opened, stops machine operation.<br />
Machine Primary <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Element (MPCE): an<br />
electrically powered component which directly controls<br />
a machine’s operation. MPCE’s are the last control<br />
component to operate when a machine’s motion is<br />
initiated or stopped.<br />
Machine Secondary <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Element (MSCE): a<br />
machine control element (other than an MPCE) capable<br />
of removing power from the hazardous area (s) of a<br />
machine.<br />
Manual Start-Up Test: a term applied to safety controllers<br />
designed such that at least one of the system’s<br />
interlocked machine guards must be manually-opened<br />
and closed (after applying power) before machine operation<br />
is authorized. All SCHMERSAL’S even numbered<br />
Series AES microprocessor--based safety controllers<br />
(e.g. AES 1136, AES 1146, AES 1156, AES 3366, et al)<br />
are designed to require a manual start-up test.<br />
Manually-monitored Reset: a safety controller reset<br />
circuit requiring the presence of a discrete “trailing-edge”<br />
signal (24V to 0V) to activate the controller’s authorized<br />
outputs. A reset button is mandatory.<br />
Muting: the ability to program a monitoring and/or<br />
control device to ignore selected system conditions.<br />
Negative Mode Mounting: the mounting of a singlepiece<br />
safety interlock switch (e.g. a limit switch) such<br />
that the force applied to open the normally closed (NC)<br />
safety contact is provided by an internal spring. (See<br />
Figure 1.)<br />
In this mounting mode the NC contacts may not open<br />
when the safety guard is “open”. Here welded/stuck<br />
contacts, or failure of a contact-opening spring,<br />
may result in exposing the machine operator to a<br />
hazardous/unsafe area.<br />
When mounted in the “negative-mode”, single-piece<br />
safety interlock switches can be easily circumvented/<br />
defeated by the operator…simply by taping down the<br />
switch actuator when the safety guard is open.<br />
389
Performance Level: outlined in EN ISO 13849-1, a<br />
required level of safety for SRPCS. Designated PL a<br />
through PLe.<br />
Point-of-Operation: the area(s) of a machine where<br />
material or the workpiece is positioned and a process is<br />
performed.<br />
Figure 1<br />
NEGATIVE-MODE INSTALLATION<br />
OSHA (Occupational Safety Health Administration):<br />
a U.S. Department of Labor Federal agency responsible<br />
for monitoring and regulating workplace safety. OSHA<br />
enforcement may reference their own regulations, as<br />
well as those of other industry standards-making groups<br />
(e.g. ANSI, NFPA, UL, et al).<br />
CONVENTIONAL SPRING-DRIVEN<br />
CONTACTS<br />
Point-of-Operation Guarding: a device or guard<br />
installed at the interface between the operator and the<br />
point-of-operation which is intended to protect personnel<br />
from hazardous areas.<br />
Positive-Break <strong>Co</strong>ntacts: normally-closed (NC) contacts<br />
which, upon actuation, are forced to open by a<br />
non-resilient mechanical drive mechanism. Also called<br />
“positive-opening” or “direct-action” contacts. (See<br />
Figure 2.)<br />
Positive-Guided <strong>Co</strong>ntacts: Normally-open (NO) and<br />
normally-closed (NC) contacts which operate interdependently<br />
such that the NO and NC contacts can never<br />
be closed at the same time. They are designed such<br />
that if one of the contacts welds/sticks closed,<br />
CONTACTS<br />
Figure 2<br />
CONVENTIONAL VERSUS POSITIVE-OPENING<br />
CONTACTS<br />
390<br />
Figure 3<br />
the other contacts cannot change state. (See Figure 3.)<br />
The interdependent operation between NO and NC<br />
contacts permits self-checking/monitoring of the functioning<br />
of relays and contactors featuring positive-guided<br />
contacts. Hence they are desirable in machine safety<br />
circuits where “fail-to-safe” or “control reliability” is<br />
desired. Also called “force-guided contacts”.<br />
Positive Linkage: a term applied to roller lever, rocking<br />
lever and other switch actuating members designed<br />
such that the integrity of the linkage between the actuator<br />
and the shaft is heightened (beyond a set screw on a<br />
smooth shaft) by its mechanical design. Examples of<br />
positive-linkages are pinned, square and serrated<br />
shafts. (See Figure 4.)
hazards present to the machine operator and/or maintenance<br />
personnel. This assessment is usually done in<br />
the early stages of the machine’s design to permit such<br />
hazards to be designed-out or alternatively determine<br />
the scope of the safety system needed to protect personnel<br />
from possible injury. One approach suggested in<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 is summarized in Figure 6.<br />
Figure 6<br />
Pinned<br />
Actuator<br />
Square<br />
Serrated<br />
Positive Linkage<br />
Figure 4<br />
Positive-Mode Mounting: the mounting of a singepiece<br />
safety interlock switch (e.g. a limit switch) such<br />
that the non-resilient mechanical mechanism which<br />
forces the normally-closed (NC) contacts to open is<br />
directly driven by the interlocked machine safety guard.<br />
In this mode (as opposed to “negative-mode mounting”)<br />
the safety guard physically forces the NC contacts to<br />
open when the guard is opened. (See Figure 5.)<br />
Selection of the Required Performance Level (PL r )<br />
Here the safety<br />
category is<br />
determined by the<br />
following parameters:<br />
• S Severity of injury<br />
• ■ S1 Slight injury<br />
• ■ S2 Serious injury<br />
• F Frequency<br />
and/or exposure<br />
time to the hazard<br />
• ■ F1 Seldom to<br />
quite often<br />
• ■ F2 Frequent to<br />
continuous<br />
• P Possibility of<br />
avoiding the<br />
hazard<br />
• ■ P1 Possible<br />
under specific<br />
conditions<br />
• ■ P2 Scarcely<br />
possible<br />
Safeguarding: protecting personnel from hazards using<br />
guards, barriers, safety devices and/or safe working<br />
procedures.<br />
Figure 5<br />
Positive-Opening <strong>Co</strong>ntacts: See “Positive-Break<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntacts”.<br />
Push/Pull Operation: a term applied to emergency<br />
rope-pull switches designed to actuate when the<br />
rope/trip-wire is pulled and when it is pushed (goes<br />
slack). Such rope-pull switches provide a higher level<br />
of safety than units which only actuate when the tripwire/rope<br />
is pulled.<br />
Redundancy: the duplication of control circuits and/or<br />
components such that if one component/circuit should<br />
fail the other (redundant) component/circuit will ensure<br />
safe operation.<br />
Risk Assessment: a systematic means of quantifying<br />
the relative level of danger different types of machine<br />
Safety <strong>Co</strong>ntroller: an electronic and/or electromechanical<br />
device designed expressly for monitoring the integrity<br />
of a machine’s safety system. Such controllers are<br />
designed using positive-guided (force-guided) relays.<br />
Depending upon the model, SCHMERSAL’s safety<br />
controllers are capable of detecting the following types<br />
of potential safety system faults:<br />
• Machine guard(s) open<br />
• Guard monitoring switch/sensor failure<br />
• Interconnection wiring “open circuit”<br />
• Interconnection wiring “short circuit”<br />
• Interconnection wiring “short-to-ground”<br />
• Welded contact in controlled output device<br />
• Failure of one of the safety controller’s positiveguided<br />
relays<br />
• Fault in the safety controller’s monitoring circuit<br />
• Insufficient safety controller operating voltage<br />
Upon detection of a system fault, the safety controller will<br />
initiate a “machine stop” command and/or prevent the<br />
restarting of the machine until the fault has been corrected.<br />
The “stop” command may be immediate or time-delayed<br />
depending upon the model safety controller selected.<br />
391
Safety Enable: (See “Authorized Output.”)<br />
Safety Interlock Switch: a switch designed expressly to<br />
safely monitor the position of a machine barrier guard.<br />
Such switches typically feature positive-break contacts<br />
and are designed to be more tamper-resistant than conventional<br />
position/presence-sensing switches.<br />
Safety Output: (See “Authorized Output.”)<br />
Safety Relay: an electromechanical relay designed with<br />
positive-guided contacts.<br />
Self-Checking: the performing of periodic self-diagnostics<br />
on the safety control circuit to ensure that critical<br />
individual components are functioning properly.<br />
Self-Monitoring: see “Self-Checking”.<br />
Single-Channel Safety System: a safety control system<br />
characterized by one safety interlock switch whose<br />
normally-closed contact is the sole input to a safety controller<br />
or a motor contactor. Such systems are unable to<br />
detect a short circuit failure in the interconnection wiring<br />
and are only recommended for addressing Safety<br />
Categories B, 1 and 2 (see “Risk Assessment”).<br />
Solenoid-Latching Safety Interlock Switch:<br />
a two-piece safety interlock (actuating key and switch<br />
mechanism) whose design prevents the removal of<br />
the actuating key until released by an integral latching<br />
solenoid. Solenoid latching is typically controlled by a<br />
time-delay, motion detector, position sensor or other<br />
control components.<br />
Stop Categories:<br />
“0” Requires immediate removal of power from the<br />
controlled devices.<br />
“1” Allows for a time delay up to 30 seconds for removal<br />
of power. This is commonly used with drive systems<br />
where immediate removal of power may result in a<br />
longer stop time.<br />
SRPCS: Safety Related Parts of <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Systems —<br />
(sub)systems which perform a safety function.<br />
Tamper-Resistant: a term applied to safety interlock<br />
switches referring to their relative ability to be defeated<br />
or bypassed using simple, readily available means such<br />
as a screwdriver, paper clip, piece of tape or wire, etc.<br />
Switches and sensors designed expressly for use as<br />
machine guard safety interlocks are designed to be<br />
more “tamper-resistant” than conventional switches/<br />
sensors (e.g. proximity switches, reed switches, conventional<br />
limit switches).<br />
Time-delayed Authorized Outputs: a safety controller’s<br />
authorized outputs whose activation is delayed (up to 30<br />
seconds) to satisfy Stop Category 1 requirements.<br />
Trailing-edge Reset: (See “Manually-monitored Reset.”)<br />
Two-Hand <strong>Co</strong>ntrol: a machine control system which<br />
requires “simultaneous” use of both of the operator’s<br />
hands to initiate a machine cycle.<br />
UL (Underwriters Laboratories): an independent<br />
testing and standards-making organization.<br />
UL tests products for compliance to<br />
relevant electrical and safety standards/<br />
requirements.<br />
392
MACHINE SAFETY STANDARDS<br />
European Machinery Directive & CE Marking<br />
The European safety requirements for man and machine<br />
are established in the European Machinery Directive<br />
(EMD). According to the EMD, machinery must be<br />
designed and built to meet the Directive’s requirements<br />
as defined by existing and emerging European standards.<br />
These “European Norms”, prepared by representatives<br />
of the European Economic <strong>Co</strong>mmunity (EEC)<br />
member states and produced by the European standards<br />
committees CEN and CENELEC, provide a harmonized<br />
baseline for the design and construction of safe<br />
machinery.<br />
As of January 1, 1997, machinery sold into or within the<br />
EEC must comply with the requirements of the<br />
European Machinery Directive. <strong>Equipment</strong> which complies<br />
may be affixed with the CE mark (for “<strong>Co</strong>nformité<br />
Europeene”). The CE mark on a machine signifies that it<br />
conforms to the essential health and safety requirements<br />
defined by the relevant European Norms.<br />
EUROPEAN STANDARDS<br />
These “Norms” form a hierarchical structure which<br />
include:<br />
Type A Standards: Fundamental Safety Standards<br />
which contain basic concepts, principles of design, and<br />
general aspects applicable to all machinery.<br />
Type B Standards: Group Safety Standards, each of<br />
which focuses on a specific subject applicable to a<br />
range of machinery types. “B1 Standards” cover a specific<br />
safety aspect defined in the Fundamental<br />
Standards. “B2 Standards” cover the requirements of<br />
specific safety related devices such as two-hand controls,<br />
interlocking devices, movable guards, etc.<br />
Type C Standards: Specific Machine Safety Standards,<br />
each of which define protective measures required for<br />
hazardous areas of a specific machine or group of<br />
machines.<br />
Type A and Type B Standards are intended to assist in<br />
the machinery design process, and eliminate the need<br />
to repeat these general requirements in the machinespecific<br />
(Type C) Standards.<br />
Many product standards are still in the planning stage<br />
and the number of Type C Standards is continuously<br />
increasing. Some are still in draft form (designated as<br />
“prEN” standards). Others exist as finished (“EN”) standards.<br />
Where no machine-specific standard exists, the requirements<br />
of the Machinery Directive can be satisfied by<br />
observing existing European Standards and relevant<br />
national standards/specifications. Draft standards (prEN)<br />
published by the European Union are also accepted and<br />
used as a basis for evaluating products for compliance<br />
to the Directives. It is important to note that such draft<br />
standards may change before being finalized and adopted<br />
as EN standards.<br />
Selected European Standards<br />
Type “A” Standards:<br />
EN ISO 12100-1, Safety Machinery – Basic <strong>Co</strong>ncepts,<br />
General Principles of Design, Parts 1 & 2.<br />
Type “B1” Standards:<br />
EN ISO 13849-1 Safety of Machinery – Safety-Related<br />
Parts of <strong>Co</strong>ntrol Systems – Part 1: General Principles for<br />
Design<br />
EN ISO 13857 Safety of Machinery – Safety Distances to<br />
Prevent Danger Zones from Being Reached by Upper<br />
and Lower Limbs.<br />
EN349 Safety of Machinery – Minimum Gaps to Avoid<br />
Crushing of Parts of the Human Body.<br />
EN954-1 Safety of Machinery – Safety-Related Parts of<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol Systems – Part 1. General Principles of Design.<br />
EN ISO 13855 Safety of Machinery – The Positioning of<br />
Protective <strong>Equipment</strong> in Respect of Approach Speeds of<br />
the Human Body.<br />
EN ISO 12100 Safety of Machinery – Principles of Risk<br />
Assessment.<br />
Selected Type “B2” Standards:<br />
EN ISO 13850 Safety of Machinery – Emergency Stop<br />
Devices, Functional Aspects – Principles for Design.<br />
EN 574 Safety of Machinery – Two-Hand <strong>Co</strong>ntrol<br />
Devices, Functional Aspects – Principles for Design.<br />
EN1088 Safety of Machinery – Interlocking Devices<br />
Associated with Guards – Principles for Design &<br />
Selection.<br />
EN 953 Safety of Machinery – General Requirements<br />
for the Design and <strong>Co</strong>nstruction of Guards.<br />
393
EN1760-1 Safety of Machinery – Pressure Sensitive<br />
Safety Devices – Mats & Floors.<br />
EN1760-2 Safety of Machinery – Pressure Sensitive<br />
Safety Devices – Edges & Bars.<br />
prEN61496 Safety of Machinery – Electrosensitive<br />
Protective <strong>Equipment</strong>.<br />
Type “C” Standards:<br />
EN415 Packaging Machines<br />
EN692 Mechanical Presses<br />
EN693 Hydraulic Presses<br />
EN746 Thermoprocessing Machines<br />
EN931 Footwear Manufacturing Machines<br />
EN1114-1 Rubber & Plastics Machines<br />
EN1762 Food Processing Machines<br />
US STANDARDS:<br />
In the United States, the protection of workers is the<br />
primary concern of OSHA, the Occupational Health and<br />
Safety Administration, a division of the Department of<br />
Labor. OSHA’s role is to assure safe and healthful<br />
working conditions for working men and women; by<br />
authorizing enforcement of the standards developed<br />
under the Occupational Safety & Health Act; by assisting<br />
and encouraging the States in their efforts to assure<br />
safe and healthful working conditions; by providing for<br />
research, information, education, and training in the field<br />
of occupational safety and health. OSHA is the primary<br />
regulatory agency for safety and health, setting national<br />
standards and providing for the enforcement thereof.<br />
OSHA also relies on consensus standards. These are<br />
guidelines and standards created by standards-making<br />
organizations, trade associations, and third party testing<br />
facilities. In the machinery industry, these include:<br />
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Robotics<br />
Industry of America (RIA) Instrument Society of America<br />
(ISA) National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA)<br />
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Selected US<br />
Standards and Guidelines<br />
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.212<br />
General Requirements for (Guarding of) All Machines<br />
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.217<br />
(Guarding of) Mechanical Power Presses<br />
394<br />
ISA S84.01<br />
Safety Instrumented Systems<br />
ANSI B11.1<br />
Machine Tools – Mechanical Power Presses – Safety<br />
Requirements for <strong>Co</strong>nstruction, Care, and Use of<br />
ANSI B11.2<br />
Hydraulic Power Presses – Safety Requirements for<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nstruction, Care, and Use of<br />
ANSI B11.3<br />
Power Press Brakes – Safety Requirements for<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nstruction, Care, and Use of<br />
ANSI B11.4<br />
Shears – Safety Requirements for <strong>Co</strong>nstruction, Care,<br />
and Use of<br />
ANSI B11.5<br />
Machine Tools – Iron Workers – Safety Requirements for<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nstruction, Care, and Use of<br />
ANSI B11.6<br />
Lathes – Safety Requirements for <strong>Co</strong>nstruction, Care,<br />
and Use of<br />
ANSI B11.7<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ld Headers & <strong>Co</strong>ld Formers – Safety Requirements<br />
for <strong>Co</strong>nstruction, Care, and Use of<br />
ANSI B11.8<br />
Drilling, Milling , and Boring Machines – Safety<br />
Requirements for <strong>Co</strong>nstruction, Care, and Use of<br />
ANSI B11.9<br />
Grinding Machines – Safety Requirements for<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nstruction, Care, and Use of<br />
ANSI B11.10<br />
Metal Sawing Machines – Safety Requirements for<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nstruction, Care, and Use of<br />
ANSI B11.11<br />
Gear Cutting Machines – Safety Requirements for<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nstruction, Care, and Use of<br />
ANSI B11.13<br />
Machine Tools – Single- and Multiple-Spindle Automatic<br />
Bar and Chucking Machines – Safety Requirements for<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nstruction, Care, and Use of<br />
ANSI B11.14<br />
<strong>Co</strong>il Slitting Machines/Systems – Safety Requirements<br />
for <strong>Co</strong>nstruction, Care, and Use of<br />
ANSI B11.15<br />
Pipe, Tube, and Shape Bending Machines – Safety<br />
Requirements for <strong>Co</strong>nstruction, Care, and Use of
ANSI B11.16<br />
Metal Powder <strong>Co</strong>mpacting Presses – Safety<br />
Requirements for <strong>Co</strong>nstruction, Care, and Use of<br />
ANSI B11.17<br />
Horizontal Extrusion Presses – Safety Requirements for<br />
<strong>Co</strong>nstruction, Care, and Use of<br />
ANSI B11.18<br />
Machinery and Machine Systems for the Processing of<br />
<strong>Co</strong>iled Strip, Sheet, and Plate – Safety Requirements for<br />
ANSI B11.19<br />
Performance Criteria for the Design, <strong>Co</strong>nstruction, Care,<br />
and Operation of Safeguarding when Referenced by<br />
Other B11 Machine Tool Safety Standards<br />
ANSI B11.20<br />
Machine Tools – Manufacturing Systems/Cells – Safety<br />
Requirements for <strong>Co</strong>nstruction, Care, and Use of<br />
ANSI B183<br />
Roll Forming and Roll Bending Machines – Safety<br />
Requirements for <strong>Co</strong>nstruction, Care, and Use of<br />
ANSI/RIA 15.06<br />
Safety Requirements for Industrial Robots and Robot<br />
Systems<br />
NFPA 79<br />
Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery 1994 Edition<br />
CANADIAN STANDARDS:<br />
In Canada, each province has its own regulatory body<br />
for occupational health and safety, such as the Ministry<br />
of Labour in Ontario. There are fourteen jurisdictions –<br />
one federal, ten provincial, and three territorial – each<br />
governing the way industrial safety is implemented and<br />
enforced in their specific province or territory. Federal<br />
legislation covers employees of the federal government<br />
and Crown agencies and corporations across Canada.<br />
In each province or territory, there is an act (typically<br />
called the Occupational Health and Safety Act, or<br />
something similar) which applies to most workplaces in<br />
that region.<br />
Duties of Employers and Other Persons<br />
The various Occupation Health and Safety Acts impose<br />
duties on those who have any degree of control over<br />
the workplace, the materials and equipment in the<br />
workplace, and the direction of the work force. There is<br />
a general duty on employers to take all reasonable<br />
precautions to protect the health and safety of workers.<br />
In addition, the Act and regulations set out many<br />
specific responsibilities of the employer. For example,<br />
there are duties that specifically relate to toxic<br />
substances, hazardous machinery, worker education,<br />
and personal protective equipment. There is a duty on<br />
all officers and directors of corporations to ensure that<br />
their corporations comply with the Act and regulations.<br />
The duties of workers are generally to work safely, in<br />
accordance with the Act and regulations.<br />
Canadian Regulatory Agencies<br />
Please find the regulatory agency in each province and<br />
territory as below:<br />
Alberta<br />
Workplace Health and Safety, Alberta Employment and<br />
Immigration<br />
British <strong>Co</strong>lumbia<br />
WorkSafeBC<br />
Manitoba<br />
SAFE Manitoba<br />
New Brunswick<br />
WorkSafeNB<br />
Newfoundland and Labrador<br />
Occupational Health and Safety Branch, Department of<br />
Government Services<br />
Northwest Territories and Nunavut<br />
Workers’ <strong>Co</strong>mpensation Board of the Northwest<br />
Territories and Nunavut<br />
Nova Scotia<br />
Occupational Health & Safety Division, Nova Scotia<br />
Labour and Workforce Development<br />
Ontario<br />
Occupational Health and Safety Branch, Ministry of<br />
Labour<br />
Prince Edward Island<br />
Occupational Health and Safety Division, Workers’<br />
<strong>Co</strong>mpensation Board<br />
Quebec<br />
<strong>Co</strong>mmission de la santé et de la sécurité du travail du<br />
Québec (Occupational Health and Safety <strong>Co</strong>mmission of<br />
Quebec)<br />
Saskatchewan<br />
Occupational Health and Safety Division, Saskatchewan<br />
Ministry of Advanced Education, Employment and<br />
Labour<br />
Yukon<br />
Yukon Workers’ <strong>Co</strong>mpensation Health and Safety Board<br />
395
Resources:<br />
There is also a national Canadian Standards<br />
Association that sets safety standards which are<br />
voluntary and represent best practices. CSA standards<br />
may be enforced by law when referenced in provincial,<br />
territorial or federal legislation or regulations. These<br />
standards are designed to be complementary to the<br />
actions of government in tackling the issue of worker<br />
safety and can provide tools to help organizations<br />
comply with regulations and demonstrate due diligence.<br />
Relevant Canadian Standards<br />
CAN/CSA-Z142-10<br />
<strong>Co</strong>de for Power Press Operation: Health, Safety, and<br />
Guarding Requirements<br />
CAN/CSA-Z432-04<br />
Safeguarding of Machinery<br />
CAN/CSA-Z434-03<br />
Industrial Robots and Robot Systems – General Safety<br />
Requirements<br />
CAN/CSA-Z460-05<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntrol of Hazardous Energy – Lockout and Other<br />
Methods<br />
CAN/CSA-Z615-87 (R2006)<br />
<strong>Co</strong>de for Hot Forging Producers, Health and Safety<br />
Requirements<br />
CAN/CSA-Z462<br />
Workplace Electrical Safety<br />
CAN/CSA-Z1002<br />
Injury Risk Assessment and Management<br />
SOURCES FOR STANDARDS:<br />
EN & IEC Standards are available from:<br />
Global Engineering Documents<br />
15 Inverness Way East<br />
Englewood, CO 80112<br />
Telephone: (800) 854-7179<br />
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)<br />
11 West 42nd Street<br />
New York, NY 10036<br />
Telephone: (212) 642-4900<br />
ANSI & NFPA Standards are available from:<br />
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)<br />
11 West 42nd Street<br />
New York, NY 10036<br />
Telephone: (212) 642-4900<br />
OSHA Regulations are available from:<br />
Superintendent of Documents<br />
Government Printing Office<br />
Washington, DC 20402-9371<br />
Telephone: (202) 783-3238<br />
CSA Standards are available from:<br />
CSA Head Office – Mississauga<br />
5060 Spectrum Way, Suite 100<br />
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5N6 CANADA<br />
CAN/CSA-Z1006<br />
Work in <strong>Co</strong>nfined Spaces<br />
CAN/CSA-Z1004<br />
General Workplace Ergonomics<br />
CAN/CSA Z1000-06<br />
Occupational Health and Safety Management<br />
CAN/CSA-Z1600<br />
Emergency Management and Business<br />
<strong>Co</strong>ntinuity Programs<br />
DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY<br />
Each SCHMERSAL safety product has been<br />
certified to conform to all relevant Standards and<br />
Directives. <strong>Co</strong>pies of the Declaration of <strong>Co</strong>nformity<br />
for any product in this catalog are available upon<br />
request.<br />
396
SELECTED CONVERSION FACTORS<br />
TO CONVERT<br />
TO CONVERT<br />
foot pounds hp-hours 5.05 × 10 -7 pounds oz (troy) 1.458 × 10 1<br />
Parameter From To Multiply by Parameter From To Multiply by<br />
Temperature °C °F (°C × 9/5) + 32 Force centigrams grams 0.01<br />
°F °C (°F–32) × 5/9<br />
dynes grams 0.00102<br />
°C °K °C + 273.18<br />
dynes newtons 1.0 × 10 -5<br />
dynes kg 1.02 × 10 -6<br />
Distance cm inches 0.3937<br />
dynes pounds 2.248 × 10 -6<br />
mm inches 0.03937<br />
grams kilograms 1.0 × 10 -3<br />
cm feet 0.03281<br />
grams milligrams 1.0 × 10 3<br />
inches mm 25.4<br />
grams oz (avdp) 3.527 × 10 -2<br />
feet cm 30.48<br />
grams oz (troy) 3.215 × 10 -2<br />
meters feet 3.281<br />
grams pounds 2.205 × 10 -3<br />
meters inches 39.37<br />
kilograms dynes 9.80665 × 10 5<br />
kilograms grams 1.0 × 10 3<br />
Energy btu gram calories 2.52 × 10 2<br />
kilograms newtons 9.807<br />
btu hp-hours 3.927 × 10 -4<br />
kilograms pounds 2.2046<br />
btu joules 1.055 × 10 3<br />
kilograms oz (avdp) 3.5274 × 10 1<br />
btu kW-hours 2.928 × 10 -4<br />
newtons dynes 4.448 × 10 5<br />
btu ergs 1.055 × 10 10<br />
newtons pounds 0.2248<br />
ergs btu 9.486 × 10 -11<br />
pounds dynes 1.0 × 10 5<br />
ergs joules 1.0 × 10 -7<br />
pounds grams 4.5359 × 10 2<br />
ergs watt-hours 2.773 × 10 -11<br />
pounds newtons 4.448<br />
foot pounds btu 1.286 × 10 -3<br />
pounds kilograms 4.536 × 10 -1<br />
foot pounds gm-calories 3.241 × 10 -1<br />
pounds oz (avdp) 1.6 × 10 1<br />
397
NEMA, UL, CSA & IEC<br />
INGRESS PROTECTION RATINGS<br />
NEMA, UL, CSA and IEC have each established<br />
ratings systems intended to identify an enclosure’s<br />
ability to repel elements from the outside environment.<br />
These rating systems address the enclosure’s ability to<br />
protect against a variety of environmental conditions.<br />
These include:<br />
• Incidental contact<br />
• Rain, sleet and snow<br />
• Windblown dust<br />
• Hosedown and splashing liquids<br />
• Falling dirt<br />
• Oil or coolant spraying/splashing<br />
• <strong>Co</strong>rrosive agents<br />
• Occasional temporary submersion<br />
• Occasional prolonged submersion<br />
While these ratings are intended to help you make a<br />
more informed product selection, there are some<br />
differences between each organization’s system.<br />
As shown in Table 1, the NEMA, UL and CSA ratings<br />
most commonly used in North America are based on<br />
similar application descriptions and expected performance.<br />
However, while UL and CSA require testing in the<br />
laboratories (and periodic manufacturer site inspections<br />
to ensure continued adherence to prescribed standards),<br />
NEMA leaves compliance and certification up to the<br />
manufacturer.<br />
While the European IEC (IP) ratings summarized in<br />
Table 2 are based on similar test methods, their<br />
performance has some slight and subtle differences in<br />
interpretation. For example, selected IP ratings permit<br />
limited ingress of water, while UL/CSA ratings do not.<br />
For your reference and convenience we have<br />
attempted to provide an approximate cross-reference<br />
between North American enclosure ratings (NEMA, UL<br />
and CSA) and selected IEC (IP) enclosure ratings (Table<br />
3). Please recognize that these are nearest-equivalents<br />
only and should not be considered as direct comparisons.<br />
TABLE 1:<br />
IEC (IP) Enclosure Ratings<br />
IP Tests IP Tests<br />
0 No protection 0 No protection<br />
1 Protected against solid<br />
objects up to 50mm,<br />
e.g. accidental touch by<br />
hands<br />
2 Protected against solid<br />
objects up to 12mm,<br />
e.g. fingers<br />
3 Protected against solid<br />
objects over 2.5mm, e.g.<br />
tools and wires<br />
4 Protected against solid<br />
objects over 1mm<br />
5 Protected against dust<br />
(limited ingress, no<br />
harmful deposit)<br />
6 Totally protected against<br />
dust<br />
Example:<br />
Characteristic letters<br />
1st characteristic numeral<br />
(Protection against solid objects)<br />
2nd characteristic numeral<br />
(Protection against liquids)<br />
1 Protected against vertically<br />
falling drops of water, e.g.<br />
condensation<br />
2 Protected against direct<br />
sprays of water up to 15°<br />
from vertical<br />
3 Protected against sprays to<br />
60° from vertical<br />
4 Protected against water<br />
sprayed from all directions<br />
(limited ingress permitted)<br />
5 Protected against low<br />
pressure jets of water from<br />
all directions (limited ingress<br />
permitted)<br />
6 Protected against strong jets<br />
of water<br />
7 Protected against the effects<br />
of immersion between 1 cm<br />
and 1 m<br />
8 Protected against the effects<br />
of immersion beyond 1 m<br />
9K** Protection against high<br />
pressure high temperature<br />
washdown applications<br />
IP 2 3<br />
TABLE 2:<br />
NEMA, UL & CSA vs. IEC (IP) Ingress Protection Ratings*<br />
NEMA,<br />
UL,<br />
CSA<br />
Rating<br />
1 •<br />
IEC Rating<br />
IP23 IP30 IP32 IP64 IP65 IP66 IP67 IP68<br />
2 •<br />
3 •<br />
3R<br />
•<br />
3S<br />
•<br />
4 •<br />
4X<br />
•<br />
6 • •<br />
6P<br />
•<br />
12 •<br />
13 •<br />
IP69K**<br />
* These are nearest equivalents only, and should not be used to<br />
make direct conversions from IEC to NEMA classifications.<br />
** Designed to meet DIN 40050, Part 9 (1983) Protection Type Test.<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
•<br />
An enclosure with this designation is protected against the penetration<br />
of solid objects greater than 12mm and against spraying water.<br />
398
GENERAL TERMS & CONDITIONS OF SALE<br />
ORDERS & BLANKET ORDERS<br />
All orders must include proper description, pricing, quantity and<br />
shipping requirements. Buyer must contact the Seller’s headquarters<br />
for terms and conditions associated with blanket<br />
orders.<br />
PRICES<br />
Unless otherwise stated, prices are firm for thirty days. Seller<br />
reserves the right to revise price if there is a change in quantity,<br />
size, finish, or method and time shipment differing from those<br />
indicated herein. Prices and terms on this quotation and/or<br />
acknowledgement of order are not subject to verbal changes or<br />
other agreements unless approved in writing by the Seller’s<br />
headquarters’ staff. Unless otherwise negotiated, prices for<br />
orders for future delivery will be invoiced at the prevailing price<br />
at the time of shipment.<br />
DELIVERY<br />
All material is sold and priced F.O.B. Tarrytown, NY, USA.<br />
Unless otherwise specified by the Buyer, all shipments will be<br />
made via UPS Ground.<br />
MINIMUM ORDER & PACKAGING CHARGES<br />
Unless otherwise agreed upon, the minimum order billing is<br />
$100 per shipment exclusive of shipping, insurance or other<br />
miscellaneous charges.<br />
PAYMENT TERMS<br />
Payment terms are net 30 days. Seller reserves the right to hold<br />
shipments to firms with unpaid past due balances. Seller also<br />
reserves the right to charge interest at the rate of 1 1 ⁄2% interest<br />
per month for accounts in arrears more than 30 days. This interest<br />
will never be greater than that allowed by local law.<br />
TITLE<br />
Title to material, priced at Seller’s shipping point, shall pass to<br />
Buyer upon shipment. Any charges by carrier for switching,<br />
demurrage or other services shall be paid by the Buyer.<br />
CHANGES & CANCELLATIONS<br />
Should Buyer desire to cancel, revise or suspend this order for<br />
reasons beyond the Buyer’s control, Seller shall discuss the<br />
matter promptly with the Buyer and do all possible to make a<br />
mutually satisfactory agreement. In cases where the material<br />
has been manufactured partially or completely for Buyer’s<br />
requirements, Seller will advise Buyer of charges incurred to<br />
Buyer’s account.<br />
CLAIMS FOR DEFECTIVE MATERIALS<br />
All material is warranted to be free from defects in quality and<br />
workmanship, and to meet the specifications to which ordered.<br />
The Seller’s obligation under this warranty is limited to repairing<br />
or replacing defective material, or crediting the Buyer with the<br />
price of the defective material. If Buyer believes the material to<br />
be defective, Buyer must notify Seller within 30 days after delivery.<br />
Seller has the right to reinspect any goods before determination<br />
of a reasonable settlement. Toward this end, Buyer must<br />
contact Seller’s headquarters requesting a formal Return<br />
Material Authorization (RMA). Seller will not accept any material<br />
returns without reference to the RMA number of the Buyer’s<br />
returned goods packing list.<br />
ORDERS FOR NON-STANDARD/SPECIAL ITEMS<br />
Unless otherwise negotiated and confirmed in writing by the<br />
Seller, orders for non-standard and special items made to the<br />
Buyer’s specifications are non-cancelable. Seller reserves the<br />
right to bill Buyer for materials purchased for the production of<br />
such items, and for all goods fully or partially manufactured at<br />
the time of notice of the Buyer’s desire to cancel the order.<br />
SPECIAL TOOLING<br />
Special tooling required and paid for by the Buyer shall become<br />
the property of the Buyer. Where such tooling incorporates trade<br />
secrets, it shall be held in perpetuity at the manufacturer’s premises<br />
for the exclusive use of the Buyer.<br />
GENERAL<br />
All agreements are contingent upon strikes, accidents, fires,<br />
availability of materials and all other causes beyond the Seller’s<br />
control. Typographical, accounting and other administrative<br />
errors are subject to correction. Buyer assumes the liability for<br />
patent and copyright infringement for goods made to Buyer’s<br />
specifications. When Buyer furnishes material for use in production,<br />
ample allowance must be made for reasonable<br />
spoilage. Such materials must be of suitable quality to facilitate<br />
efficient production. <strong>Co</strong>nditions not specifically stated herein<br />
shall be governed by established trade customs. Terms inconsistent<br />
with those stated herein that may appear on the Buyer’s<br />
formal order will not be binding on the Seller.<br />
SUSPENSIONS & CANCELLATIONS<br />
Unless otherwise negotiated and agreed to by the Seller, the<br />
Buyer must accept final and/or complete delivery on all orders<br />
within 90 days from date of first shipment. Should the Buyer fail<br />
to accept the complete order within this or the negotiated period<br />
for order, the Seller reserves the right to cancel the order and<br />
re-bill the Buyer at the price schedule covering the total quantity<br />
of parts shipped through the date of cancellation.<br />
WARRANTY AND LIMITATIONS OF WARRANTY:<br />
SCHMERSAL INC agrees to replace or repair products which<br />
have been found defective due to workmanship or material.<br />
This warranty is made only for a period within one year of the<br />
date of the invoice to the Buyer. This warranty applies to<br />
products which have been subjected to normal and proper<br />
usage, and to which inspection of the product by the<br />
SCHMERSAL INC shows it to be thus defective. THE AGREE-<br />
MENT TO REPAIR OR REPLACE SUCH PRODUCT IS LIMIT-<br />
ED TO F.O.B. SHIPPING POINT AND IS IN NO WAY A<br />
LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL,<br />
OR FOR DELAYS, INSTALLATION, TRANSPORTATION,<br />
ADJUSTMENT OR OTHER EXPENSES ARISING IN<br />
CONNECTION WITH SUCH PRODUCT. SCHMERSAL INC is<br />
not responsible in this warranty for product which is repaired or<br />
altered. Nor is SCHMERSAL INC responsible in this warranty<br />
for products subject to misuse, negligence, or accident.<br />
SCHMERSAL INC IS IN NO WAY LIABLE OR RESPONSIBLE<br />
FOR INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPER-<br />
TY ARISING FROM OR OUT OF USE OF THE PRODUCT<br />
WITHIN DESCRIBED SPECIFICATIONS. Except for the<br />
warranty hereinbefore stated, THERE ARE NO EXPRESS<br />
WARRANTIES AND NO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-<br />
CHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR<br />
PURPOSE, OTHER THAN THOSE EXPRESSLY SET FORTH<br />
ABOVE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF AND<br />
EXCLUDES ALL OTHER REPRESENTATIONS MADE, BOTH<br />
EXPRESS AND IMPLIED, UNLESS SET FORTH IN WRITING<br />
AND SIGNED BY AN AUTHORIZED EXECUTIVE OF THE<br />
SCHMERSAL INC.<br />
399
400<br />
NOTES
NOTES<br />
401
402<br />
NOTES